TB175 #Cl3e003

0-1 TB175
TB175 0-2
0-3 TB175
FOREWORD
This manual is intended for persons who engage in maintenance operations, and explains
procedures for disassembly and reassembly of the machine, check and maintenance procedures,
maintenance reference values, troubleshooting and outline specifications, etc. Please use this
manual as a reference in service activities to improve maintenance techniques.
Further, please be advised that items contained in this manual are subject to change without notice
due to design modifications, etc.
MACHINE FRONT AND REAR, LEFT AND RIGHT

The end where the dozer blade is mounted is the front and the end with the travel motors is the
rear. Also the right and left sides of the operator when he is seated in the operator’s seat are the
right and left sides of the machine.
MACHINE SERIAL NUMBER

The machine serial number is stamped on the identification plate. When sending reports and
inquiries, and when ordering parts, etc., be sure to include this number.
MANUAL CONTROL
Information on those to whom this manual is distributed is recorded in the ledger in the section
in charge at this company, so please decide on a person to be in charge of it and control it. When
there are updates or additions, etc., we will notify the person in charge.
TB175 0-4
FOOT OF THE PAGE
6. Bleed the air from the cylinders.

a. With the engine running at slow, extend and contract the
cylinders 4 or 5 times.
• Move the piston rods to 100 mm before the stroke end.
DO NOT extend them completely.
b. Repeat step “a” above with the engine running at full,
then run it at slow and extend the piston rods completely
to the stroke end.
L4A100E
1. Page number
The following page numbers are assigned to each respective page. And if there are additional pages, the addition
codes are supplied. Please file the sheets in the order of the page numbers.
Page No.
X–XX
Page number within chapter
Chapter Number
Page Addition
X–XX–X
Addition Code
Example: II-8
II-9
II-9-1 ............... A page is added between page 9 and page 10.
II-10
2. Revision number
Indicates the number of revisions made to this manual. This number is printed on the page that reflects this
revision.
If a page has been revised, it is to be used in place of the page used before revision and it is not necessary to keep
the old page.
3. Model(s)
SYMBOLS
means “Please refer to the section quoted.”
Indicates the tightening torque at the specific section that requires special attention in designing.
Indicates the mass of a part or device.
0-5 TB175
TB175 0-6
I . GENERAL
II . SPECIFICATIONS
III . MACHINE CONFIGURATION
IV . HYDRAULIC UNITS
V. TROUBLESHOOTING
VI . ENGINE
0-7 TB175
TB175 0-8
I . GENERAL
I-1 TB175
GENERAL
CONTENTS
Safety Precautions ................................................................................................................................................. 3

Cautions during Disassembly and Assembly ........................................................................................................ 9
Cautions during Removal and Installation of the Hydraulic Units ....................................................................... 9
Cautions during Removal and Installation of Piping .......................................................................................... 10
Handling of Seals ................................................................................................................................................ 10
Tightening Torques ............................................................................................................................................. 11
TB175 I-2
GENERAL
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL

This symbol means Attention! Be Alert! Your Safety Is Involved.
The message that follows the symbol contains important information about safety.
Read and understand the message to avoid personal injury or death.
■ SIGNAL WORDS
Safety messages appearing in this manual and on machine decals are identified by the words “DANGER”,
“WARNING” and “CAUTION”. These signal words mean the following:
DANGER WARNING CAUTION

The word “DANGER” indicates The word “WARNING” indi- The word “CAUTION” indi-
an imminently hazardous situ- cates a potentially hazardous cates a potentially hazardous
ation which, if not avoided, can situation which, if not avoided, situation which, if not avoided,
result in serious injury or death. could result in serious injury or may result in minor or moder-
death. ate injury.
IMPORTANT: The word “IMPORTANT” is used to alert against operators and maintenance personnel
about situations which can result in possible damage to the machine and its components.
This manual is intended for trained and qualified personnel only. Warnings or cautions described in this manual do
not necessarily cover all safety measures. For maintenance work, each person must take adequate safety precautions
against possible hazards present in the respective working environment.
Observe all safety rules
• Operation, inspection and maintenance of this ma-

chine must be performed only by a trained and
qualified person.
• All rules, regulations, precautions and safety pro-
cedures must be understood and followed when
performing operation, inspection and maintenance
of this machine.
• Do not perform any operation, inspection and
maintenance of this machine when under the ad-
verse influence of alcohol, drugs, medication, fa-
tigue, or insufficient sleep.
• Wear a hard hat, safety shoes, safety glasses, filter

Wear appropriate clothing and personal mask, heavy gloves, ear protection and other pro-
protective equipment tective equipment as required by job conditions.
Wear required appropriate equipment such as safety
• Do not wear loose clothing or any accessory that glasses and filter mask when using grinders, ham-
can catch on controls or in moving parts. mers or compressed air, as metal fragments or
• Do not wear oily or fuel stained clothing that can other objects can fly and cause serious injury.
catch fire. • Use hearing protection when operating the ma-
chine. Loud prolonged noise can cause hearing
impairments, even the total loss of hearing.
I-3 TB175
GENERAL
Provide a fire extinguisher and first aid Anti-explosive lighting
kit
Use anti-explosive electrical fixtures and lights when

• Know where a fire extinguisher and first aid kit are inspecting fuel, oil, coolant, battery fluid, etc. If
located and understand how to use them. lighting that is not anti-explosive should break, the
• Know how to contact emergency assistance and substance could ignite, resulting in serious injury or
first aid help. death.
Attach a “DO NOT OPERATE” tag Do not allow unauthorized personnel in

the work area
Severe injury could result if an unauthorized person
should start the engine or touch controls during in-
spection or maintenance.
• Stop the engine and remove the key before per-
forming maintenance.
• Attach a “DO NOT OPERATE” tag to the starter
switch or control lever.
Use the correct tools

Do not allow unauthorized personnel in the work
area. Chips or other debris can fly off machine parts
when grinding, welding or using a hammer.
Prepare the work area
• Select a firm, level work area. Make sure there is

adequate light and, if indoors, ventilation.
• Clear obstacles and dangerous objects. Eliminate
Do not use damaged or weakened tools or tools slippery areas.
designed for other purposes. Use tools suited for the
operation at hand.
Replace important safety parts

periodically
• Replace fuel hoses periodically. Fuel hoses be-

come weaker over time, even if they appear to be
in good shape.
• Replace important safety parts whenever an ir-
regularity is found, even if it is before the normal
time for replacement.
TB175 I-4
GENERAL
Always clean the machine Securely block the machine or any
component that may fall
• Clean the machine before performing maintenance.

• Cover electrical parts when washing the machine. • Before performing maintenance or repairs under
Water on electrical parts could cause short-circuits the machine, set all working equipment against the
or malfunctions. ground or in the lowermost position.
Do not use water or steam to wash the battery, • Securely block the tracks.
sensors, connectors or the operator’s seat area. • If you must work beneath the raised machine or
equipment, always use wood blocks, jack-stands
or other rigid and stable supports. Never get under
Stop the engine before performing the machine or working equipment if they are not
maintenance sufficiently supported. This procedure is espe-
cially important when working on hydraulic cylin-
• Avoid lubrication or mechanical adjustments with ders.
the machine in motion or with the engine running
while stationary.
• If maintenance must be performed with the engine
running, always work as a 2-person team with one
person sitting in the operator’s seat while the other Securely block the working equipment
works on the machine.
• When performing maintenance, be sure to keep To prevent unexpected movement, securely block the
your body and clothing away from moving working equipment when repairing or replacing the
parts. cutting edges or bucket teeth.
Stay clear of moving parts
Secure the engine hood or cover when

opened
Be sure to secure the engine hood or cover when

opening it. Do not open the engine hood or cover on
slopes or in strong wind.
• Stay clear of all rotating and moving parts. Wrap-

ping or entanglement may result in serious injury
or death.
• Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the
rotating fan and running fan belts.
I-5 TB175
GENERAL
Place heavy objects in a stable position Handling of hoses
Fuel, oil or hydraulic fluid leaks can cause a fire.

• Do not twist, bend or hit the hoses.
• Never use twisted, bent or cracked hoses, tubes and
pipes. They may burst.
• Retighten loose connections.
Be careful with hot and pressurized

components
When removing or installing the hoe attachment,
place it in a stable position so that it does not tip over.
Use caution when fueling
Stop the engine and allow the machine to cool down

before performing inspection and maintenance.
• The engine, muffler, radiator, hydraulic lines, slid-
ing parts and many other parts of the machine are
hot directly after the engine is stopped. Touching
these parts will cause burns.
• The engine coolant, oil and hydraulic fluid are also
hot and under high pressure.
Be careful when loosening caps and plugs. Work-
• Do not smoke or permit open flames while fueling ing on the machine under these conditions could
or near fueling operations. result in burns or injuries due to the hot oil spurting
• Never remove the fuel cap or refuel with the engine out.
running or hot. Never allow fuel to spill on hot
machine components.
• Maintain control of the fuel filler nozzle when Be careful with hot cooling systems
filling the tank.
• Do not fill the fuel tank to capacity. Allow room for
expansion.
• Clean up spilled fuel immediately.
• Tighten the fuel tank cap securely. Should the fuel
cap be lost, replace it only with the original
manufacturer’s approved cap. Use of a non-ap-
proved cap without proper venting may result in
pressurization of the tank.
• Never use fuel for cleaning purposes.
• Use the correct fuel grade for the operating season. Do not remove the radiator cap or drain plugs when
the coolant is hot. Stop the engine, let the engine and
radiator cool and loosen the radiator cap or drain plugs
slowly.
TB175 I-6
GENERAL
Be careful with fluids under pressure High pressure nitrogen gas is enclosed in the accumu-
lator and incorrect handling could possibly bring
about serious injury due to explosion. The following
matters should be strictly observed:
• Do not disassemble.
• Do not bring close to fire or throw into a fire.
• Do not make hole, weld, or fuse.
• Do not subject to shock such as hitting or rolling.
• At time of disposal, it will be necessary to release
the enclosed gas. Please contact a Takeuchi sales or
service agent.
Pressure can be maintained in the hydraulic circuit Be careful with grease under pressure
long after the engine has been shut down.
• Release all pressure before working on the hydrau-
lic system.
• Hydraulic fluid under pressure can penetrate the
skin or eyes and cause injury, blindness or death.
Fluid escaping from a small hole can be almost
invisible. Wear a safety goggles and heavy gloves
and use a piece of cardboard or wood to search for
suspected leaks.
If fluid is injected into the skin, it must be removed
within a few hours by a doctor familiar with this The track adjuster contains highly pressurized grease.
type of injury. If the tension is adjusted without following the pre-
scribed procedure, the grease discharge valve may fly
off, resulting in injury.
Release all pressure before working on • Loosen the grease discharge valve slowly. Do not
the hydraulic system unfasten it more than one full turn.
• Do not put your face, arms, legs or body in front of
Oil may spurt out if caps or filters are removed or the grease discharge valve.
pipes disconnected before releasing the pressure in
the hydraulic system.
• Gradually loosen the vent plug to relieve tank Disconnect the battery
pressure.
• Move all the control levers and pedals several
times in all directions to release the pressure from
the working equipment circuitry. (For link type
controls)
• When removing plugs or screws or disconnecting
hoses, stand to the side and loosen slowly to gradu-
ally release the internal pressure before removing.
Handling of the Accumulator Disconnect the battery before working on the electri-
cal system or doing any welding. Remove the nega-
tive (–) battery cable first. When reconnecting the
battery, connect the negative (–) battery cable last.
N0A005
I-7 TB175
GENERAL
Avoid battery hazards Checks after maintenance
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid which will damage • Gradually raise the engine speed from a low idle to
eyes or skin on contact. maximum speed and check that no oil or air is
• If acid contacts eyes, flush immediately with leaking from serviced parts.
clean water and get prompt medical attention. • Move the controls and check that the machine is
• If acid is accidentally swallowed, drink large operating properly.
quantities of water or milk and call a physician
immediately.
• If acid contacts skin or clothing, wash off imme-
diately with clean water.
• Wear safety glasses and gloves when working with Disposing of wastes
batteries.
• Batteries generate flammable and explosive gases.
Keep arcs, sparks, flames and lighted tobacco
away.
• Use a flashlight to check battery electrolyte level.
• Stop the engine and shut off electrical equipment
while inspecting or handling the battery.
• Do not short circuit the battery posts with metal
items.
• Always unfasten the negative (–) battery cable first
when disconnecting the battery cable. Always con- • Funnel spent fluids from the machine into contain-
nect the negative (–) battery cable last when fasteners. Disposing of fluids improperly destroys the
ing the battery cable. environment.
• Loose battery terminals may result in sparks. Be • Follow the prescribed regulations when disposing
sure to fasten terminals tightly. of oil, fuel, engine coolant, refrigerant, solvents,
• Make sure the vent caps are tightened securely. filters, batteries or other harmful substances.
• Do not charge a battery or jump-start the engine if
the battery is frozen. Warm to 15°C (60°F) or the
battery may explode.
Have a Takeuchi service agent repair

welding cracks or other damage
Ask a Takeuchi service agent to repair any welding

problems which are detected. If not feasible, make
sure the welding is done by a qualified person in a
properly equipped workplace.
Safety signs
• Keep all safety signs clean and legible.

• Replace all missing, illegible or damaged safety
and warning signs.
TB175 I-8
GENERAL
CAUTIONS DURING DISASSEMBLY AND CAUTIONS DURING REMOVAL AND
ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION OF THE HYDRAULIC UNITS
1. Clean the machine before disassembly operation. 1. Make sure that the temperature of the hydraulic
oil has dropped.
2. Before disassembly, check the machine condi-
tions and record them. 2. To prevent a loss of flow of the hydraulic oil, the
• Model, Machine Serial Number, Hourmeter residual pressure in the piping and the internal
• Reason for Repairs, Repair History pressure in the hydraulic tank should be released.
• Dirtiness of Filters
• Fuel and Oil Conditions 3. Be sure to install caps or plugs on all openings in
• Damage to each parts, etc. the hydraulic unit to prevent dirt from getting into
the unit through the openings.
3. To make reassembly operations easy, make match-
PLUG
ing marks at the necessary points.
4. Clean all disassembled parts and new parts, then

arrange them in the proper sequence.
5. Be sure to replace all seals and cotter pins, etc.,

with new parts.
PLUG
6. Keep parts which should not come in contact with
oil and water separate from parts with oil on them.
• Electrical Parts, Rubber, V-Belts, etc.
7. When installing bearings, bushings and oil seals,

as a rule, use a press. When a hammer, etc., is 4. It is easy to mistake hydraulic oil adhering to the
used, it leaves bruises. hydraulic unit for an oil leak, so wipe the unit off
thoroughly.
8. Wipe all joining surfaces clean so that there is no
dirt or dust adhering to them. 5. Be sure that no damage is done to the plating on
the rod in the hydraulic cylinder.
9. Wrap seal tape from the front end, Wrapping it
tight and leaving 1 or 2 threads bare, Overlap the 6. As a rule, removal and installation of the hydrau-
tape by about 10 mm. lic cylinder should be done with the rod fully
retracted.
SEALING TAPE
7. Be sure to bleed the air after replacing the hydrau-
lic oil or removing any of the hydraulic devices.
“III. Machine Configuration, Hydraulic Sys-
tem”
LEAVE 1 OR 2 THREAD MARGIN
10. When fitting the snap rings, the bigger, rounder

side of their circumferences should face the mat-
ing surfaces.
I-9 TB175
GENERAL
CAUTIONS DURING REMOVAL AND HANDLING OF SEALS
INSTALLATION OF PIPING
1. Clean the grooves for O-rings and if there is any
1. When hydraulic hoses are installed, tighten them burr, etc., remove it.
once to the prescribed torque, then loosen them
slightly and retighten them to the prescribed
torque.
• Tighten the fittings after the installation sur- BURR
faces fit snugly together.
• Pieces wrapped with seal tape are excluded.
2. Use 2 spanners, each on an opposite side, to DIRT

remove and tighten fittings so that the hoses or
steel pipes are not twisted.
2. Be careful not to twist O-rings. If an O-ring is

twisted, remove the twist with the fingertips.
3. During insertion, be careful not to damage the

seal.
4. Handling of Floating Seals

• Wipe all oil off the O-ring and housing of the
floating seal.
• When assembling, apply a thin coating of gear
3. After installation of hydraulic hoses or steel pipes, oil to the contact surface of the housing.
apply the maximum working pressure 5 or 6 times • After assembly, turn the seal 2 or 3 times to get
and confirm that there is no leakage. it to fit snugly.
5. Apply grease to the lip of the oil seal.

• This is to prevent wear when it is first started up
after assembly.
GREASE
TB175 I-10
GENERAL
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Hydraulic Hoses
Torque
UNION NUT
Hose Fitting Size Union Nut (G) Taper Thread (R)
N·m ft-lb N·m ft-lb
+4.9 +3.5
1/8 9.8 0 7.3 0 11.8 ±1.2 8.7 ±0.8
+4.9 +3.5
1/4 24.5 0 18.1 0 29.4 ±2.9 21.7 ±2.1 TAPER THREAD
+4.9 +3.5
3/8 49 0 36.2 0 53.9 ±5.4 39.8 ±3.9
1/2 58.8 +4.9
0 43.4 +3.5
0 88.3 ±8.8 65.1 ±6.4
+4.9 +3.5
3/4 117.7 0 86.8 0 147.1 ±14.7 108.5 ±10.7
+4.9 +3.5
1 137.3 0 101.3 0 196.1 ±19.6 144.7 ±14.3
Bite Type Pipe Fitting for Steel Pipe
Pipe Outer Diameter Torque

(mm) N·m ft-lb
8 34.3 ±4.9 25.3 ±3.5
10 41.7 ±2.5 30.7 ±1.7
12 58.8 ±4.9 43.4 ±3.5
15 88.3 ±4.9 65.1 ±3.5
16 93.2 ±4.9 68.7 ±3.5
18 132.4 ±4.9 97.6 ±3.5
22 205.9 ±9.8 151.8 ±7.2
27.2 245.2 ±9.8 181.0 ±7.2
28 313.8 ±19.6 231.4 ±14.3
32 313.8 ±19.6 231.4 ±14.3
35 411.9 ±19.6 303.7 ±14.3
I-11 TB175
GENERAL
Joints for Piping
Torque
Nominal Thread
Diameter Steel Cast Steel
(R) N·m ft-lb N·m ft-lb
1/8 11.8 ±1.2 8.7 ±0.8 10.8 ±1.1 8.0 ±0.7
1/4 29.4 ±2.9 21.7 ±2.1 24.5 ±2.5 18.1 ±1.7
3/8 53.9 ±5.4 39.8 ±3.9 49 ±4.9 36.2 ±3.5
1/2 88.3 ±8.8 65.1 ±6.4 73.5 ±7.4 54.3 ±5.3
3/4 147.1 ±14.7 108.5 ±10.7 127.5 ±12.7 94.1 ±9.3
1 196.1 ±19.2 144.7 ±14.3 171.6 ±17.2 126.6 ±12.5
Joints for Piping (O-ring Seal Type)

Nominal Thread Torque
Diameter
(G) N·m ft-lb
1/8 19.6 ±2.0 14.5 ±1.4
1/4 34.3 ±4.9 25.3 ±3.5
3/8 53.9 ±4.9 39.8 ±3.5
1/2 63.7 ±4.9 47.0 ±3.5
3/4 93.2 ±4.9 68.7 ±3.5 O-RING
1 107.9 ±9.8 79.5 ±7.2

1-1/4 117.7 ±9.8 86.8 ±7.2
1-1/2 137.3 ±9.8 101.2 ±7.2
Nominal Thread Torque

Diameter
(UNF) N·m ft-lb
7/16–20 16.7 ±2.0 12.3 ±1.4
1/2–20 22.6 ±2.0 16.6 ±1.4
9/16–18 31.4 ±2.9 23.1 ±2.1
3/4–16 59.8 ±4.9 44.1 ±3.5
1-1/16–12 102.0 ±5.9 75.2 ±4.4
1-5/16–12 135.3 ±7.8 99.8 ±5.8
1-5/8–12 181.4 ±9.8 133.8 ±7.2
TB175 I-12
GENERAL
Bolts and Nuts (for ISO Strength Category 10.9)
Torque
Thread Size × Pitch General Tightening Points Special Tightening Points
N·m kgf·m ft-lb N·m kgf·m ft-lb
M6 × 1.0 9.8 ±0.5 1.0 ±0.05 7.2 ±0.4 11.8 ±0.6 1.2 ±0.06 8.7 ±0.4
M8 × 1.25 22.6 ±1.1 2.3 ±0.11 16.6 ±0.8 26.5 ±1.3 2.7 ±0.13 19.5 ±0.9
M10 × 1.5 47.1 ±2.4 4.8 ±0.24 34.7 ±1.7 54.9 ±2.7 5.6 ±0.28 40.5 ±2.0
Coarse M12 × 1.75 83.4 ±4.1 8.5 ±0.42 61.5 ±3.0 97.1 ±4.8 9.9 ±0.49 71.6 ±3.5
M14 × 2.0 134.4 ±6.7 13.7 ±0.68 99.1 ±4.9 155.9 ±7.7 15.9 ±0.79 115.0 ±5.7
M16 × 2.0 207.9 ±10.4 21.2 ±1.06 153.3 ±7.7 241.2 ±12.1 24.6 ±1.23 177.9 ±8.9
M20 × 2.5 410.9 ±20.5 41.9 ±2.09 303.1 ±15.1 475.6 ±23.7 48.5 ±2.42 350.8 ±17.5
M8 × 1.0 24.5 ±1.2 2.5 ±0.12 18.1 ±0.9 28.4 ±1.4 2.9 ±0.14 21.0 ±1.0
M10 × 1.25 50.0 ±2.5 5.1 ±0.25 36.9 ±1.8 58.8 ±2.9 6.0 ±0.30 43.4 ±2.2
M12 × 1.5 87.3 ±4.3 8.9 ±0.44 64.4 ±3.2 102.0 ±5.1 10.4 ±0.52 75.2 ±3.8
Fine
M14 × 1.5 135.3 ±6.8 13.8 ±0.69 99.9 ±5.0 157.9 ±7.8 16.1 ±0.80 116.5 ±5.8
M16 × 1.5 220.6 ±11.0 22.5 ±1.12 162.7 ±8.1 256.0 ±12.7 26.1 ±1.30 188.8 ±9.4
M20 × 1.5 452.1 ±22.6 46.1 ±2.30 333.4 ±16.6 524.7 ±26.1 53.5 ±2.66 387.0 ±19.2
1. General Tightening Points (Non-lubricated) 4. If tightening torque values are provided in this
• All securing points other than the special tight- manual, then tightening should be done accord-
ening points. ing to those values.
(This indicates that the tightening torque differs
2. Special Tightening Points (Grease with molyb- from the values given in this table.)
denum disulfide applied.)
• Points where particularly necessary due to 5. In order to tighten bolts and nuts evenly, they
function. should be tightened alternately top, bottom, left,
Special tightening positions and associated right.
instructions are given in the text.
3. Points where thread-locking compound is used

(Three Bond #1324 is applied.)
Thread-locking compound positions and associ-
ated instructions are given in the text.
I-13 TB175
GENERAL
TB175 I-14
II . SPECIFICATIONS
II-1
I-15 TB175
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
Names of Components .......................................................................................................................................... 3

Dimensions ............................................................................................................................................................ 4
Lifting Capacities .................................................................................................................................................. 6
Specification Tables ............................................................................................................................................ 11
Mass Tables ......................................................................................................................................................... 18
Recommended Lubricants ................................................................................................................................... 19
Types of Crawler Belts ........................................................................................................................................ 20
Types of Attachments .......................................................................................................................................... 21
Servicing Standards ............................................................................................................................................. 22
Standards for Judging Performance ..................................................................................................................... 32
Reference Value Table .................................................................................................................................. 32
Methods for Inspecting Performance ............................................................................................................ 34
In regard to Standard Values and Allowable Values

The terms used in the items “Servicing Standards” and “Standards for Judging Performance” have the following
meanings.
Standard Value ......... This indicates the standard value for the new machine at the time of shipping from the factory.
It should be used as the target value for maintenance work after operation.
Allowable Value ....... The dimensions of parts change during use because of wear and deformation. Also, the
performance of pumps, motors, and other hydraulic equipment drops, and this is the
estimated value indicating the use limit for the respective part. It is decided under reference
to the standard at the time of shipping, the results of various tests, etc. As the use conditions,
the degree of repairs, etc., differ for each machine, these should be combined and used as
reference for servicing standards and standards for judging performance.
* Do not use the standard values and the allowable values as standards for customer claims.
TB175 II-2
II-16
NAMES OF COMPONENTS SPECIFICATIONS
NAMES OF COMPONENTS
24 20 28 4 3 6 10 9 5 11 1
23
8
25
26 12
16
22 31
15
27
17
18
14
30
13 19
21 29
L3B000
1. Cab 12. Crawler Belt 23. Arm

2. Engine Hood 13. Idler 24. Arm Cylinder
3. Fuel Tank 14. Track Roller 25. Boom
4. Hydraulic Tank 15. Carrier Roller 26. Boom Cylinder
5. Hydraulic Pump 16. Travel Motor 27. Swing Bracket
6. Slew Motor 17. Slew Bearing 28. Swing Cylinder
7. Pilot Valve 18. Track Adjuster 29. Dozer Blade
8. Battery 19. Pilot Valve (Travel) 30. Dozer Blade Cylinder
9. Control Valve (Mono Block) 20. Swivel Joint 31. Pilot Valve (Swing)
10. Control Valve (3-Section) 21. Bucket
11. Engine 22. Bucket Cylinder
II-3 TB175
SPECIFICATIONS DIMENSIONS
DIMENSIONS
Mono-Boom
V
M
Q L
R
P N
W
B D
S E
K F
J G
H T U
A
E
F
G
J
K
D
C
H
B
A
L3B001
TB175 II-4
DIMENSIONS SPECIFICATIONS
Machine Dimensions
Unit: mm
Standard Arm Long Arm Telescopic Arm∗
Rubber Crawler Steel Crawler Rubber Crawler Rubber Crawler
A 6555 ← ← ←
B 2245 ← ← ←
C 2570/2610∗∗ 2565 2570 ←
D 1720 ← ← ←
E 785 760 785 ←
F 2210 2180 2210 ←
G 2855 2830 2855 ←
H 2150 ← ← ←
J 450 ← ← ←
K 385 360 385 ←
L 2180 ← 2430 2320
M 1635 ← 1870 1735
N 2060 ← 2310 2180
P 695 ← ← ←
Q 735 ← ← ←
R 2150 ← ← ←
S 500 ← ← ←
T 4840 4845 4975 4925
U 2000 1995 2000 ←
V 80° ← ← ←
W 50° ← ← ←
∗: Telescopic arm fully retracted.
∗∗: Equipped with roof guard.
Operating Ranges
Unit: mm
Telescopic Arm
Standard Arm Long Arm
Arm Fully Retracted Arm Fully Extended
Rubber Crawler Steel Crawler Rubber Crawler Rubber Crawler Rubber Crawler
A 7055 ← 7385 7065 8125
B 6905 6910 7245 6915 7995
C 4240 4260 4590 4245 5445
D 3475 3500 3830 3155 4365
E 7025 7005 7290 7025 7715
F 4995 4970 5255 5005 5695
G 1935 1915 1630 1935 
H 4630 ← 4700 5075 5235
J 525 505 ← 525 ←
K 410 435 ← 410 ←
II-5 TB175
SPECIFICATIONS DIMENSIONS
2-Piece Boom
TB175 II-6
II-5-1
DIMENSIONS SPECIFICATIONS
Machine Dimensions
Unit: mm
Rubber Crawler
A 6560
B 2245
C 2570/2610∗
D 1720
E 785
F 2210
G 2855
H 2150
J 450
K 385
L 2505
M 1955
N 2385
P 690
Q 730
R 2150
S 500
T 4845
U 2000
V 80°
W 50°
∗∗: Equipped with roof guard.
Operating Ranges
Unit: mm
A 7650
B 7510
C 4440
D 3955
E 7970
F 6000
G 2310
H 4630
J 525
K 410
II-7
II-5-2 TB175
SPECIFICATIONS LIFTING CAPACITIES
LIFTING CAPACITIES
• The loads in the charts do not exceed 87% of
hydraulic lift capacity or 75% of tipping load.
• Rated lift capacities limited by rated hydraulic lift
capacity are identified by an asterisk. (*)
• The mass of slings and any auxiliary lifting devices
shall be deducted from the rated load to determine
the net load that may be lifted.
• The load point is the bucket hinge pin, and the
bucket posture is with the standard bucket com-
pletely retracted under the arm.
• Units: kg (lbs.) / 2-Piece boom -daN (lbs.)
Load hooking system

A load hooking system with all of the following
capacities must be provided and used.
1. A system which can withstand a weight of two
times the rated lift capacity no matter at what
position the load is applied.
2. A system in which there is no risk of the lifted load
falling from the hooking device, for example one
equipped with a hook slippage prevention device.
3. A system in which there is no risk of the hooking
system slipping from the hoe attachment.
Load safety device

In addition, the following load safety devices must be
installed. (For details, contact a designated service
outlet.)
1. An overload warning device.
2. A boom lowering control device.
WARNING
• DO NOT attempt to lift or hold any load that is
greater than these rated values at their speci-
fied load radii and height.
• All rated lift capacities are based on the ma-
chine being level and on a firm supporting
surface. For safe working loads, the user is
expected to make due allowance for the par-
ticular job conditions such as soft or uneven
ground, non-level condition, side loads, haz-
ardous conditions, experience of personnel,
etc. The operator and other personnel should
fully acquaint themselves with the operator’s
manual furnished by the manufacturer before
operating this machine, and rules for safe
operation of equipment shall be adhered to at
all times.
TB175 II-8
II-6
LIFTING CAPACITIES SPECIFICATIONS
Equipped with Standard Arm Unit: kg (lbs.)
Over Front; Dozer Blade Up
Over Rear Over Side
L3K004A
II-9
II-7 TB175
Equipped with Long Arm Unit: kg (lbs.)

Over Rear Over Side
L3K006A
TB175 II-10
II-8
Equipped with Telescopic Arm (Fully Extended) Unit: kg (lbs.)
Over Rear Over Side
L3K008A
II-11
II-9 TB175
Equipped with Telescopic Arm (Fully Retracted) Unit: kg (lbs.)

Over Rear Over Side
L3K010A
TB175 II-12
II-10
2-Piece Boom Unit: daN (lbs.)
Over Rear Over Side
II-13
II-10-1 TB175
TB175 II-14
II-10-2
SPECIFICATION TABLES SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATION TABLES
SPECIFICATIONS
Machine Type Mono-Boom 2-Piece Boom

Machine Mass (not including operator)
Rubber Crawler kg 7280 7940
Steel Crawler kg 7405 8145
Engine Rated Output kW/min–1 42.8/2100 (43.5/2100∗) ←
Bucket Capacity (Standard Bucket)
Rated Capacity m3 0.245 ←
Struck Capacity m3 0.185 ←
Performance
Slew Speed min–1 7.6/10.7 ←
Travel Speed: Rubber Crawler 1st / 2nd km/h 2.9/5.5 ←
Steel Crawler 1st / 2nd km/h 2.8/5.3 ←
Gradeability % (degree) 35 ←
Ground Pressure: Rubber Crawler kPa 32.9 35.9
Steel Crawler kPa 33.9 36.9
Noise Level: Sound-power level dB (A) LWA 100 ←
Sound-pressure level dB (A) LpA 75 ←
Auxiliary Hydraulic Flow Rate 1st / 2nd L/min 69.3 (82∗∗)/53.1 69.3/53.1
Dimensions
Overall Length in Transport Position mm 6555 6560
Overall Width mm 2245 ←
Overall Height:Rubber Crawler mm 2570 2570 (2610∗∗∗)
Steel Crawler mm 2565 2565 (2605∗∗∗)
Dimensions of Base Machine
Tail Swing Radius mm 1720 ←
Distance of Rearmost Upper Structure from Axis of Rotation mm 1715 ←
Clearance Height under Upperstructure:
Rubber Crawler mm 785 ←
Steel Crawler mm 760 ←
Distance between Centerlines of Drive Sprockets and Idlers:
Crawler
Overall Length: Rubber Crawler mm 2855 ←
Overall Width mm 2150 ←
Crawler Shoe Width mm 450 ←
Minimum Ground Clearance :
∗: 17510003~17512104
∗∗: High flow
∗∗∗: Equipped with roof guard.
II-15
II-11 TB175
SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATION TABLES
Machine Type Mono-Boom 2-Piece Boom

Working Equipment (Hoe Attachment)
Boom Swing Angle: L.H. degree 80 ←
R.H. degree 50 ←
Maximum Reach mm 7055 7650
Maximum Reach at GRP mm 6905 7510
Minimum Level Cut Radius with Bucket Flat on GRP mm 2140 1810
Maximum Digging Depth mm 4240 4440
Radius at Maximum Digging Depth mm 3030 2665
Vertical Digging Depth mm 3475 3955
Maximum Digging Height mm 7025 7970
Radius at Maximum Digging Height mm 3015 1355
Maximum Dumping Height mm 4995 6000
Radius at Maximum Dumping Height mm 2835 2090
Minimum Dumping Height mm 1935 2310
Minimum Front Swing Radius mm 2180 2505
Minimum Front Swing Radius at Boom Offset mm 1635 1955
Overall Height at Minimum Front Swing Radius mm 5255 4825
Overall Height at Minimum Front Swing Radius at Boom Offset mm 5255 4825
Maximum Bucket Offset Volume: Left mm 695 690
Right mm 735 730
Digging Force: Bucket kN 52.7 ←
Arm kN 36.7 36.0
Working Equipment (Dozer Blade)
Dozer Blade: Width mm 2150 ←
Height mm 500 ←
Dozer Blade:
Maximum Lifting Range above Ground Level mm 525 ←
Maximum Lowering Range below Ground Level mm 410 ←
TB175 II-16
II-12
SPECIFICATIONS OF DEVICES
Serial Number 17510003~17512104 17512105~

Engine
Model Yanmar 4TNE98-TBZ Yanmar 4TNV98-VTBZ
Type 4-cycle, vertical, water-cooled,
←
in-line, 4-cylinder diesel engine
Number of Cylinders – Bore × Stroke mm 4 – 98 × 110 ←
Maximum Torque N·m 228~250 243
Total Displacement mL 3318 3319
Compression Ratio 18.0 18.5
Specific Fuel Consumption (at rated output) g/kW·h 245 239
Maximum No-load R.P.M. min–1 2230 ±60 2290 ±25
Minimum No-load R.P.M. min–1 1100 ±80 1100
Starter Output V – kW 24 – 3.5 ←
Alternator Output V – kW 24 – 0.96 ←
Battery
Type 95D31R 95D31-MF
Capacity V – A·h 24 – 64 × 2 ←
Hydraulic Pump (Piston)

Model K3SP36C-130R-9002
Type Variable displacement type double axial piston
Delivery: P1 L/min 69.3
P2 L/min 69.3
Rated Pressure:P1 MPa 27.5
P2 MPa 27.5
Hydraulic Pump (Gear)
Model SDYA255F1H1-R
Type Tandem gear
Delivery: P3 L/min 53.1
P4 L/min 10.7
Rated Pressure:P3 MPa 24.5
P4 MPa 3.4
Control Valve (Mono-Block)

Model KVMM-80-TB
Number of Circuits Mono-Block
Main Relief Valve Pressure Setting MPa 27.5
Port Relief Valve Pressure Setting MPa 33.3
MPa 20.6
Control Valve
Model KVSE-31-3
Number of Circuits 3
II-17
II-13 TB175
Control Valve
Model KVSE-31-4
Number of Circuits 4
MPa 20.6
Solenoid Valve
Use Speed Shift (Slew), Speed Shift (Travel) and Lever Lock
Model 3K3LNF5G/G24N-316A
Number of Solenoids 3
Solenoid Rated Voltage V 24
Relief Valve Set Pressure MPa 3.4
17510003~17511262
Solenoid Valve
Use Swing, Auxiliary
Model GA-1718E
17510003~17511262
Solenoid Valve
Use Swing, Auxiliary
Model 07827-0001A
Solenoid Valve
Use 2-Piece boom
Model 07973-000A
Proportional Control Valve

Use 1st/2nd Auxiliary Hydraulics
Model 2KWE5G-20/G24R-237
Pilot Valve
Model TH40K
Secondary Side Pressure (Ports 1, 3) MPa 0.54~2.06
(Ports 2, 4) MPa 0.64~1.86
Operating Angle: Single (Ports 1, 3) degree 19
Single (Ports 2, 4) degree 25
TB175 II-18
II-14
Pilot Valve (Travel, With Damper)

Model RCVD8CC4118
Secondary Side Pressure MPa 0.44~2.11
Pilot Valve (Travel)

Model RCVD8C4131
Pilot Valve (Swing)

Model PV6P1013A
Reducing Valve
Model V4030-001
Set Pressure MPa 1.96
Boom Cylinder
Bore Diameter × Rod Diameter mm 80 × 55
Stroke mm 815
Fully Retracted Length (Pitch) mm 1410
Cushion Mechanism Rod End
Boom Cylinder (2-Piece Boom)

Stroke mm 725
Cushion Mechanism Rod End
Arm Cylinder
Stroke mm 910
Cushion Mechanism Both Ends
Arm Cylinder (2-Piece Boom, Emergency Shut-off Valve)

Stroke mm 875
II-19
II-15 TB175
Bucket Cylinder
Stroke mm 660
Cushion Mechanism 
Swing Cylinder
Stroke mm 690
Dozer Blade Cylinder

Stroke mm 165
Tensioning Cylinder
Stroke mm 115
Travel Motor
Model PGT010MV53G46SA
Type 2-Speed Piston Motor
Total Displacement:
1st cm3/rev 2424.3
2nd cm3/rev 1257.7
Motor Displacement
1st cm3/rev 53.2
2nd cm3/rev 27.6
Reduction Gear Ratio 1/45.569
2-Speed Control Pressure MPa 3.43
Parking Brake Torque N·m 147.1
Parking Brake Release Pressure MPa 1.13 ±0.15
Amount of Reduction Gear Lubricant L 1.5
TB175 II-20
II-16
Slew Motor
Model MSG-44P-21
Type Piston Motor
Total Displacement cm3/rev 702.4
Motor Displacement cm3/rev 34.1
Redution Gear Ratio 1/20.615
Relief Valve Pressure Setting MPa 23.5
Parking Brake Torque N·m 177.9
Parking Brake Release Pressure MPa 1.5
Swivel Joint
Model YV-7127B
II-21
II-17 TB175
SPECIFICATIONS MASS TABLES
MASS TABLES
UNIT MASS (DRY MASS)
Unit: kg
Machine Type Cab
Upper Machinery
Engine 255 (250∗)
Radiator 6 (13∗)
Hydraulic Pump (Piston) 44
Hydraulic Pump (Gear) 7.1
Hydraulic Tank 55
Fuel Tank 54
Control Valve (Mono-Block) 67
Control Valve (3-Section) 9.5
Pilot Valve 5
Slew Motor 80
Cab 248
Counterweight 609
Swing Bracket 220 (178∗∗)
Swing Cylinder 96
Lower Machinery
Swivel Joint 22.5
Slew Bearing 103
Crawler Belt: Rubber/Steel 376/440
Travel Motor 80
Carrier Roller 6.5
Track Roller 18.7
Idler 86
Sprocket 35
Track Adjuster 48
Dozer Blade 292
Dozer Blade Cylinder 35 (40∗)
Hoe Attachment
Boom 327
Arm 130
Bucket: Standard 161
Boom Cylinder 49
Arm Cylinder 74
Bucket Cylinder 44
∗: 17510003~17512104
∗∗: 17510003~17512050
TB175 II-22
II-18
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS SPECIFICATIONS
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS
Use different fuels, lubricants and greases according to the temperature, referring to the chart below.
• Change the lubricant earlier than as show in the table if it is extremely dirty or its performance has deteriorated severely.
• Whenever possible, use the same brand of lubricant as before. If changing with a different brand, replace the entire quantity
– do not mix different brands.
Type by temperature
Replacement
Part Type -22 -4 14 32 50 68 86 104°F Capacity
interval
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40°C
Upper limit
SAE 5W-20 10.2L
Diesel engine oil After first 50 hrs.
Engine oil pan API service SAE 10W-30
Every 250 hrs. Lower limit
CD
SAE 15W-40 5.7L
Antiwear ISO VG68 Total system

hydraulic oil 132L
Hydlaulic tank ISO VG46 Every 2000 hrs.
(Option: Biode-
gradable oil) ISO VG32 Tank level
68L
Use a clean, Quality fuel for performance and optimum engine life.
• To prevent fuel flow problems in cold weather, use diesel fuel with
Fuel tank Diesel fuel a pour point of at least -12°C (10°F) below the lowest expected Tank level
ambient temperature. 120L
• Minimum cetane number is 45. Low temperature or high altitude
operation may require the use of fuel with a higher cetane number.
Engine cooling Coolant 30% coolant mixture

Every 1000 hours 9.5L
system (water**+Coolant***) 50% coolant mixture
Travel reduction Gear oil SAE 90 After first 50 hrs. 1.5L

gear API-GL-4 Every 1000 hrs.
Carrier Roller Diesel engine oil SAE 30  150mL

API service CD
17510003~
17510098 17510099~
Track Roller Mobil gear  
SHC 680
170mL 130mL
Idler Diesel engine oil SAE 30  150mL

API service CD
Slew Grease Bath   8500mL
Slew bearing  Every 50 hrs.

Lithium grease
EP-2
Working NLGI No. 2 Daily or erery 10
 As required
equipment hrs.
Levers  When required
* If the percentage of the traveling time within the total operating time is high, replace the gear oil earlier than the specified time.
** For water, use tap water (soft). Do not use well or river water.
*** When the ambient temperature drops below 0°C, add coolant (antifreeze). Follow the coolant manufacture’s instructions to
determine the mixture ratio.
II-19 TB175
SPECIFICATIONS TYPES OF CRAWLER BELTS
TYPES OF CRAWLER BELTS
Shoe Width Number of Overall Crawler Groud Pressure Overall Mass

Type Width (kPa)
(mm) Links (kg)
(mm) Canopy Cab
Rubber 450  2150  32.9 376

Steel
(Standard) 450 39 2150  33.9 440
Steel (wide) 550 39 2250  28.1 497
Steel Rubber
L2B001 L2B002
TB175 II-20
TYPES OF ATTACHMENTS SPECIFICATIONS
TYPES OF ATTACHMENTS
TYPES OF ATTACHMENTS
Type Specification
Outer Width (mm) Capacity (m3) Number of Teeth Mass (kg)
0.137 (Heaped)
430 3 131
0.116 (Struck)
0.137 (Heaped)
500 3 142
0.116 (Struck)
Hoe Bucket
0.202 (Heaped)
650 4 168
0.156 (Struck)
0.245 (Heaped)
750 (Std.) 4 180
0.185 (Struck)
0.261 (Heaped)
3-Holes Bucket 4 188
0.210 (Struck)
Length Max. Digging Depth Vertical Digging Depth Mass
(mm) (mm) (mm) (kg)
Arm
1780 4240 3475 130
2130 4590 3830 154
Vertical Digging Depth Mass
Max. Digging Depth (mm)
Telescopic (mm) (kg)
Arm 4245 (retracted) 3155
360
5445 (extended) 4365
Boom: 240
2-Piece Boom 4440 3955
Inter Mediate Boom: 230
Height Width Lifting Range (mm) Mass
(mm) (mm) Above Below (kg)
Dozer Blade
500 2150 525 410 292
500 2250 525 410 297
Hoe Bucket Arm
A
G4B001 G4B002
A: Outer Width B: Arm Length
II-21 TB175
SPECIFICATIONS SERVICE STANDARDS
SERVICE STANDARDS
TRAVEL SYSTEM
Steel Crawler Belt
D
E
H G
F
L2B003
Unit: mm
Servicing
Code Item Designated Standard Procedure
Basic Dimension Allowable Value
A Link Height
Build up
80 ±0.2 75
or replace.
B Grouser Height 20 ±1 14
C Link Pitch 154 ±1 156

+0.05
D Bushing Outer Diameter 46.22 0 44.5
Basic Allowable Tolerance

Standard Allowable Replace
Dimension Shaft Hole
E Bushing and Link Interference
+0.27 +0.04
46 +0.22 0 0.18~0.27 
+0.28 +0.05
F Regular Pin and Link Interference 30 +0.23 0 0.18~0.28 
-0.03 +0.05 Replace with
G Master Pin and Link Clearance 30 0 0 0~0.08  oversize pin
Standard Clearance Standard Clearance Allowable Clearance
(One Side) (Both Sides) (Both Sides) Replace
H Link Clearance
0.5 1.0 6.0
TB175 II-22
SERVICE STANDARDS SPECIFICATIONS
Rubber Crawler Belt
A
L3B011
Unit: mm
Code Item Designated Standard Servicing Procedure
A Crawler Cracks or Cuts Steel cable is exposed.

Replace.
B Steel Cable Is severed.
II-23 TB175
Carrier Roller
C B
A
L3B012
Unit: mm
Servicing
Basic Dimension Allowable Value Build up
A Outer Diameter of Tread
or replace.
98 92

Standard Allowable
Shaft and Bearing Bore Di- Dimension Shaft Hole
B
ameter Interfence +0.021 0 0.008~ 
35 +0.008 -0.010 0.031
Roller and Bearing Outer 0 -0.009 0.004∗ Replace
C 72 
Diameter Fit -0.013 -0.039 0.039∗∗
Standard Value Allowable Value
D Shaft End Play
0.6 1.1
∗ : Max. clearance ∗∗ : Max. interference
TB175 II-24
Track Roller
D C C
A B E F
L2B006
Unit: mm
Servicing
A Outer Diameter of Brim
148 142
B Outer Diameter of Tread 120 114 Replace
C Width of Tread 39 45
D Width of Brim 10.5 7.5

Standard Allowable
Shaft and Bushing Bore Dimension Shaft Hole
E
Diameter Clearance
0 +0.113
40 -0.025 +0.074 0.074~0.138 
Roller and Bushing Outer +0.069 +0.025 Replace
F Diameter Interference 50 +0.034 0 0.009~0.069 

G Shaft End Play
0.7 1.2
II-25 TB175
Drive Sprocket
A A B
C D
L2B007
Unit: mm

A Sprocket Teeth Profile Wear
3.75 8
B Sprocket Teeth Width 50 45 Replace
C Sprocket Outer Diameter 538 530
D Sprocket Teeth Lower Diameter 475.85 462
TB175 II-26
Idler
C D C
A B E F
L2B008
Unit: mm
Servicing
A Outer Diameter of Brim
494 -20 488
B Outer Diameter of Tread 436 430 Replace
C Width of Tread 34.5 37
D Width of Brim 56 50

Standard Allowable
Shaft and Bushing Bore Dimension Shaft Hole
E
Diameter Clearance
0 +0.144
55 -0.03 +0.098 0.098~0.174 
Idler and Bushing Outer +0.083 +0.03 Replace
F Diameter Interference 65 +0.041 0 0.011~0.083 

G Shaft End Play
0.9 1.4
II-27 TB175
Track Adjuster
A A
L2B009
Unit: mm
Basic Value Allowable Value
Rubber Steel Rubber Steel

A Crawler Adjusting Range
-7 -35 +20 0
Replace
Length when Free 323 
B Coil Spring Length when Installed 291 ±1.0 
Set Load 50.8 kN 
TB175 II-28
ATTACHMENTS
Pin and Bushing Clearances
N
G
F
H
J
C
A
B D
K
P
O
L
G4B016
II-29 TB175
Unit: mm
Servicing
Code Connection Between Designated Standard Procedure
Basic Allowable Tolerance Standard Allowable
Dimensions Shaft Hole Clearance Clearance
-0.02 +0.17
A Bucket & Arm 50 0.14~0.22 1.0
-0.05 +0.12
-0.02 +0.17
B Bucket & Link 50 0.14~0.22 1.0
-0.05 +0.12
-0.02 +0.17
C Arm & Link 50 0.14~0.22 1.0
-0.05 +0.12
Link Side
+0.17 0.14~0.22
-0.02 +0.12
D Bucket Cylinder & Link 50 1.0
-0.05 Cylinder Side
+0.25 0.07~0.30
+0.05
-0.02 +0.25
E Bucket Cylinder & Arm 50 -0.05 +0.05 0.07~0.30 1.0
-0.02 +0.17
F Arm & Boom 60 -0.05 +0.12 0.14~0.22 1.0
-0.02 +0.25
G Arm Cylinder & Arm 60 +0.05 0.07~0.30 1.0
-0.05
+0.25 Replace
-0.02
H Arm Cylinder & Boom 60 +0.05 0.07~0.30 1.0
-0.05
-0.02 +0.19
I Boom & Swing Bracket 65 +0.14 0.16~0.24 1.0
-0.05
-0.02 +0.25
J Boom Cylinder & Boom 55 +0.05 0.07~0.30 1.0
-0.05
-0.02 +0.25
K Boom Cylinder & Swing Bracket 55 +0.05 0.07~0.30 1.0
-0.05
-0.02 +0.10
L Swing Bracket & Turntable 100 +0.03 0.05~0.15 1.0
-0.05
-0.02 +0.25
M Swing Cylinder & Swing Bracket 75 +0.05 0.07~0.30 1.0
-0.05
-0.02 +0.25
N Swing Cylinder & Turntable 75 +0.05 0.07~0.30 1.0
-0.05
-0.02 +0.25
O Dozer Blade Cylinder & Dozer Blade 60 0.07~0.30 1.0
-0.05 +0.05
-0.02 +0.25
P Dozer Blade Cylinder & Lower Frame 60 0.07~0.30 1.0
-0.05 +0.05
-0.02 +0.17
Q Dozer Blade & Lower Frame 50 0.14~0.22 1.0
-0.05 +0.12
TB175 II-30
Axial Clearances for Boom, Arm and Bucket
Unit: mm
Standard Clearance Allowable Clearance

A Side of Boom Foot
0.2~0.5 
Adjust shim
B Side of Arm Center 0.2~0.5 
C Side of Arm Point 0.2~0.5 
Tooth
L2B012
Unit: mm
Basic Dimension Allowable Values

A Wear of Tooth
165 100 Replace
Damage to Point Even though small, if hole developes
II-31 TB175
SPECIFICATIONS STANDARDS FOR JUDGING PERFORMANCE
STANDARDS FOR JUDGING PERFORMANCE

REFERENCE VALUE TABLE
Serial Number 17510003~17512104 17512105~

Item Unit Standard Values Allowable Values Standard Values Allowable Values
Engine Speed High min-1 2230 ±60  2260 ±60 
FC min-1 1700 ±50  1720 ±50 
Low min-1 1400 ±50  1420 ±50 
Decelerate min-1 1100 ±80  1140 ±80 
Hydraulic Pressure
Boom MPa 27.46 +1.77
-0.2  27.5 +1.0
-0.2 
Arm MPa 27.46 +1.77
-0.2  27.5 +1.0
-0.2 
Dozer Blade MPa 24.52 +1.47
-0.2  24.0 +1.5
-0.2 
Slew MPa 23.54 +1.96
-0.49  23.5 +2.0
-0.5 
Pilot Pressure MPa 3.43 +0.59
0  3.7 ±0.3 
Travel
Travel Speed (5 rev.)
Steel Crawler Low Speed s 39.0 ±1.8 44.7 38.0 ±2.0 43.8
High Speed s 20.9 ±1.3 25.1 19.8 ±1.5 24.1
Rubber Crawler Low Speed s 38.0 ±1.8 43.6 37.3 ±1.8 42.8
High Speed s 20.4 ±1.3 24.6 19.6 ±1.3 23.6
Travel Speed (10m)
Steel Crawler Low Speed s 12.9 ±1.2 15.4 12.4 ±1.2 14.8
High Speed s 6.9 ±1.0 8.9 6.6 ±0.7 8.2
Rubber Crawler Low Speed s 12.4 ±1.0 14.6 12.1 ±1.0 14.3
High Speed s 6.8 ±0.7 8.5 6.6 ±0.7 8.2
0
Travel Curve mm 0
125 -125 300 125 -125 300
Natural Travel drop mm 0  0 
Slew
Slew Time Normal Speed s 11.1 ±0.8 13 11.0 ±0.8 12.9
Slow Speed s 15.0 ±2.0 19 15.0 ±2.0 19
Overrun When Slewing Stops mm 370 462 370 462
Natural Slew Drop mm 0  0 0
Cylinders
Cylinder Speed
Boom Extended s 2.4 ±0.4 3.2 2.3 ±0.4 2.9
Retracted s 2.5 ±0.4 3.3 2.7 ±0.4 3.4
Arm Extended s 3.3 ±0.4 4.1 3.2 ±0.4 3.9
Retracted s 2.9 ±0.4 3.7 2.9 ±0.4 3.7
Bucket Extended s 3.4 ±0.4 4.2 3.4 ±0.4 4.2
Retracted s 2.1 ±0.3 2.7 2.1 ±0.3 2.7
Dozer Blade Extended s 3.0 ±0.3 3.6 3.0 ±0.3 3.6
Retracted s 2.1 ±0.3 2.7 2.1 ±0.3 2.7
Swing Extended s 7.9 ±1.0 9.4 7.3 ±1.0 9.0
Retracted s 8.1 ±1.0 9.6 7.6 ±1.0 9.4
TB175 II-32
STANDARDS FOR JUDGING PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS
Serial Number 17510003~17512104 17512105~

Item Unit Standard Values Allowable Values Standard Values Allowable Values
Cylinders
Natural Cylinder Drop
Boom mm 6 -60 9.0 6 -60 9.0
Arm mm 8 -80 12.0 8 -80 12.0
Bucket mm 5 -50 7.5 5 -50 7.5
Dozer Blade mm 5 -50 7.5 5 -50 7.5
Swing mm 5 -50 7.5 5 -50 7.5
0 0
Bucket Tip mm 100 -100 150 100 -100 150
Levers
Lever Operating Force
Boom N 10.79 ±3.9   
Arm N 10.79 ±3.9   
Bucket N 9.81 ±3.9   
Slew N 9.81 ±3.9   
Travel N 12.75 ±4.9   
Dozer Blade N 29.42 ±4.9  29.0 ±5 
Swing N 37.27 ±9.8   
Lever Play
Boom mm 4 -40 5.0 or less 4 -40 5.0 or less
Arm mm 4 -40 5.0 or less 4 -40 5.0 or less
Bucket mm 4 -40 5.0 or less 4 -40 5.0 or less
Slew mm 4 -40 5.0 or less 4 -40 5.0 or less
Travel mm 4 -40 5.0 or less 4 -40 5.0 or less
Dozer Blade mm 15 ±10 15 ±10 ← ←
Slew Bearing
Backlash mm 30 ±10 110 30 ±10 110
Slew Bearing Play mm 0.16 ±0.1 0.4 0.16 ±0.1 0.4
Crawler
Crawler Tension Steel mm 260~280  260~280 
Rubber mm 160~180  160~180 
II-33 TB175
METHODS FOR INSPECTING PERFOR-

MANCE
Hydraulic Oil Pressure (Main Relief Valve Set

Pressure)
Boom, Arm
Measuring Method
• Engine : Rated r.p.m.
P2
• Hydraulic Oil Temp. : 50~60°C
• Mount the pressure gauge on the pressure detec- P1
tion port, operate the desired hydraulic circuit P3
and measure the relief pressure.
P4
L3B013
Pressure Detection Port
Circuit Relief Valve
Port Position Size
Boom P1 G1/4
R1
Arm P2 G1/4
R1
L3B014
Adjusting Method
1. Loosen locknut (2), then begin adjusting pressure
by turning setting screw (1). 1 2
Turning clockwise ................ raises the set pressure.
Turning counterclockwise .... lowers the set pressure.
2. In order to keep the setting screw from turning
after pressure has been adjusted, tighten the lock-
nut while at the same time holding the setting
screw firmly in place.
3. Operate the relief valve once more to confirm that
the pressure that has been set it stabilized.
L2B015
TB175 II-34
Dozer Blade
Measuring Method
• Mount the pressure gauge on the pressure detec-
tion port, operate the desired hydraulic circuit
and measure the relief pressure.
P2
Circuit Relief Valve P1
Port Position Size
P3
Dozer Blade P3 G1/4 R3
P4
L3B013
R3
L3B015
Adjusting Method
1. Loosen locknut (2), then begin adjusting pressure 1
by turning setting screw (1). 2
Turning counterclockwise .... lowers the set pressure.
2. In order to keep the setting screw from turning
3. Operate the relief valve once more to confirm that
L2B017
II-35 TB175
Hydraulic Oil Pressure (Slewing Relief Valve

Set Pressure)
Measuring Method SR2
• Mount the pressure gauge on the pressure detec- SR1
tion port and set a solid obstacle so that the
upperstructure cannot slew in the direction to be D
measured. Next, operate the circuit to be mea-
sured and measure the relief pressure.

Circuit Relief Valve E
Port Position Size L3B016
Right Slew D G1/4 SR1

Left Slew E G1/4 SR2
Adjusting Method
1. Loosen locknut (2), then begin adjusting pressure
by turning setting screw (1).
Turning counterclockwise .... lowers the set pressure. 1
2. In order to keep the setting screw from turning 2
3. Operate the relief valve once more to confirm that L3B017
TB175 II-36
Hydraulic Oil Pressure (Pilot Relief Valve Set
Pressure)
Measuring Method
• Hydraulic Oil Temp. : 50~60˚C
• Mount pressure gauge on the pressure detection
port and measure the pilot relief pressure.
P2
Relief Valve P1
Port Position Size
P3
P4 G1/4 PR
P4
L3B013
II-37 TB175
Travel Speed (5 Revolutions)

• Measurement Posture : Excavator body raised
using both hoe attachment and dozer blade.
• Set crawler belts in motion. Starting after one
full revolution, measure the time required for 5
revolutions. (To measure speed after it has sta-
bilized.)
Travel Speed (10m)

• Measurement Posture : Travel Posture
• Set excavator in motion. Starting after a distance MEASURED
APPROACH
of 5 meters, measure the time required to travel STRETCH
START
10 meters. Do this on level ground.
■ Travel Posture
Fully extend the arm and bucket cylinders and
adjust the hoe attachment so that its lowest part
is even with the excavator’s minimum ground
clearance level. The hoe attachment, of course, MIN. GROUND
should be in a no-load state and the dozer blade CLEARANCE
should not be touching the ground.
Travel Curve
• Measurement Posture : Travel Posture
• Starting after an approach of 5 meters, drive the
excavator in a turn for 10 meters, then measure
the distance of X (5 m point). Do this on level
ground.
TB175 II-38
Natural Travel Drop
• Engine : Stopped
• Gradient : 15°
• Measurement Posture : Fully extend the boom,
arm and bucket cylinders and completely retract
the dozer blade cylinder.
• With the excavator parked at angle for 5 min-
utes, measure the extent of natural drop.
Slew Time
• Engine : Rated r.p.m. BUCKET PIN BOOM FOOT PIN
• Measurement Posture : Completely retract the
arm cylinder, fully extend the bucket cylinder
and adjust so that boom foot pin and bucket pin
are at matching height. Rest the dozer blade on
the ground.
• With the hoe attachment in a no-load state, wait
1 rotation, then measure the time required for
the next 2 rotations.
Overrun When Slewing Stops

• Measurement Posture : Same as that for mea-
suring slew time. LEVER BACK
START TO NEUTRAL
• Draw matching marks on the outer race of the
slew bearing and lower frame at an exactly 180 OVER RUN
degrees rotation from the starting point. With
the hoe attachment in a no-load state, rotate 180
degrees at, which point return the operation
lever to neutral. Measure the differential be-
tween the position marks and the point the hoe
attachment stops.
Natural Slew Drop

TION
• Engine : Stopped DEVIA
• Gradient : 15°
suring slew time.
• Rotate the upper machinery so that it is directly
abeam of the grade, then draw positional marks
on the slew bearing’s outer race and the lower
frame. Then measure the distance that develops
between the marks after 5 minutes.
II-39 TB175
Boom Cylinder Speed

arm cylinder, fully extend the bucket cylinder
and rest the dozer blade on the ground.
• Then measure the time required for the bucket to
reach its highest elevation point (lowest point)
from its lowest point (highest point) resting on
the ground. (Do not include the cushioning
time.)
Arm Cylinder Speed

arm cylinder, fully extend the bucket cylinder,
position the arm horizontally and rest the dozer
blade on the ground.
• Then measure the time required for the arm
cylinder to completely retract (extend) from a
fully extended state (retracted state).
Bucket Cylinder Speed

FULLY
• Engine : Rated r.p.m. RETRACTED
arm cylinder, position the arm horizontally and
rest the dozer blade on the ground.
• Then measure the time required for the bucket
cylinder to completely retract (extend) from a
fully extended state (retracted state). FULLY EXTENDED
Dozer Blade Cylinder Speed

• Measurement Posture : Using the hoe attach-
ment, lift up the dozer blade end of the excava-
tor.
• Then, raising and lowering the dozer blade full
stroke, measure the time required per stroke in
each direction.
TB175 II-40
Swing Cylinder Speed
suring slew time.
• While swinging the boom left (right) to right
(left), measure the time required for a full stroke
each way.
(Do not include the cushioning time.)
Natural Cylinder Drop

Boom, Arm, Bucket, Dozer Blade, Bucket Tip
dozer blade and arm cylinders, fully extend the
bucket cylinder and adjust the bucket pin posi-
tion to the same height as the boom foot pin.
• Maintain this position for 10 minutes, then mea-
sure the change in rod length and the distance the
bucket tip falls.
Swing Cylinder
• Engine : Stopped
• Hydraulic Oil Temp. : 50~60˚C
• Gradient : 15˚
suring slew time.
• Rotate the upper machinery so that it is directly
abeam of the grade, then measure the change in
rod length after 5 minutes.
II-41 TB175
Lever Operating Force

• With the engine stopped, attach a push-pull
scale to the center of the operation lever’s handle
grip, or in the case of a pedal, position a push-
pull scale to its tip and record the measurement
at the point the lever/pedal reaches full stroke.
Lever Play
• Measure any discernible play at the tip of the
lever (pedal).
Backlash
arm cylinder and fully extend the bucket cylin-
der.
• Move the tips of the bucket teeth from side to
side (left and right) and measure the play.
Slew Bearing Play

1. Attach a dial gauge to the bot- 2. Raise the crawler on one side 3. Then raise the opposite
tom face of the slew bearing’s off the ground and set the dial crawler and read the dial
race located near the front of gauge to zero. gauge.
the upper machinery.
TB175 II-42
Crawler Tension
• Raise the excavator completely off the ground
using the hoe attachment and dozer blade.
Then measure the distance (of droop) between
the center point on the crawler frame and top of
the crawler shoe.
Note: For the rubber crawler, the measuring
should be performed after placing the
joint portion with “M” mark to the top
center.
II-43 TB175
TB175 II-44
III . MACHINE CONFIGURATION
II-45
III-1 TB175
MACHINE CONFIGURATION
CONTENTS
Drive System ......................................................................................................................................................... 3

Slew System ........................................................................................................................................................ 15
Travel System ...................................................................................................................................................... 19
Upper Frame ........................................................................................................................................................ 27
Control System .................................................................................................................................................... 35
Attachments ......................................................................................................................................................... 45
Hydraulic System ................................................................................................................................................ 51
Electrical System ................................................................................................................................................. 59
Engine Power ....................................................................................................................................................... 63
Auxiliary Engine Starting Device (Automatic Glow Circuit) ............................................................................. 65
Engine Throttle Control Device .......................................................................................................................... 67
Cluster Gauge ...................................................................................................................................................... 76
Other Parts (Acc. and B + Fuse Parts) ................................................................................................................. 81
Proportional Control ............................................................................................................................................ 85
Air Conditioner System ....................................................................................................................................... 89
Security System ................................................................................................................................................. 145
TB175 II-46
III-2
DRIVE SYSTEM MACHINE CONFIGURATION
DRIVE SYSTEM
CONSTRUCTION
Engine Mount: S/N 17510003~17512104
A: 241 N·m
B: 193 N·m
C: 55 N·m
D: 23 N·m
E: 47 N·m 1. Engine Foot FR 7. Cushion Rubber
F: 18 N·m 2. Engine Foot FL 8. Cushion Rubber
Apply thread-locking compound. 3. Engine Foot RR 9. Silencer
4. Engine Foot RL 10. Stopper
5. Exhaust Pipe 11. Stopper (inscribed as “A”)
6. Exhaust Pipe 12. Ground Cable
III-3 TB175
MACHINE CONFIGURATION DRIVE SYSTEM
Engine Mount: S/N 17512105~
A: 241 N·m
B: 193 N·m
C: 55 N·m
D: 23 N·m
Apply thread-locking compound. 1. Engine Foot FR 7. Cushion Rubber
2. Engine Foot FL 8. Cushion Rubber
3. Engine Foot RR 9. Silencer
4. Engine Foot RL 10. Stopper
5. Exhaust Pipe 11. Stopper (inscribed as “A”)
6. Exhaust Pipe 12. Ground Cable
TB175 III-3-1
III-4
Radiator and Oil Cooler: S/N 17510003~17512104
1/2
1. Stay 8. Cover
2. Stay 9. Shroud
3. Bracket 10. Guard
4. Plate 11. Cushion Rubber
5. Plate 12. Radiator
7. Net 14. Oil Cooler
III-5
III-4 TB175

2/2
A: Wind the seal tape around the sensor thread and apply
the liquid packing (ThreeBond 1104) over the seal
tape.
4.9 N·m
1. Joint 9. Hose
2. Air Hose 10. Hose
3. Air Cleaner 11. Air Hose
4. Radiator Hose (Top) 12. Coolant Level Sensor
5. Sub-Tank 13. Resonator
6. Radiator Hose (Bottom) 14. Pipe
7. Drain Valve 15. Resonator
8. Hose 16. Air Hose
TB175 III-4-1
III-6
1/2
1. Stay 10. Bracket

2. Stay 11. Bracket
3. Bracket 12. Cushion Rubber
8. Shroud 17. Cushion Rubber
9. Guard
III-4-2
III-7 TB175
Radiator and Oil Cooler: S/N 17512750~

1/2
1. Stay 10. Bracket

2. Stay 11. Bracket
3. Bracket 12. Cushion Rubber
8. Shroud 17. Cushion Rubber
9. Guard 18. Wire
TB175 III-4-3
III-8
Radiator and Oil Cooler: S/N 17512105~
2/2
A: 4.9 N·m
1. Joint 8. Drain Valve

2. Coolant Level Sensor 9. Hose
3. Air Cleaner 10. Hose
4. Sub-Tank 11. Air Hose
5. Radiator Hose (Top) 12. Hose
6. Radiator Hose (Bottom) 13. O-ring
7. Air Hose 14. Radiator Hose (Top)
III-4-4
III-9 TB175
Pump Coupling
4
3
D C
B
1
L3C102
A: Supply molybdenum disulfide grease.
B: 207.8 N·m
C: 54.9 N·m
D: 255.8 N·m 1. Engine Housing
2. Hydraulic Pump (Piston)
3. Coupling
4. Hydraulic Pump (Gear)
The pump coupling connects the engine flywheel and

the hydraulic pump’s drive shaft. It is constructed so
that it absorbs vibrations, torsions, impact and out of
center of the engine and hydraulic pump. P4 P3 P2, P1
• Refer to the table concerning the responsibility

of each of the pumps shown in the drawing at
right.
G4C103
P1 Right Travel, Boom, Bucket
P2 Left Travel, Arm, Swing, Auxiliary
P3 Slew, Dozer Blade
P4 Lever Lock, Slew Speed Shift,
2nd Speed Travel, Slew P.B. Release
TB175 III-10
III-5
Fuel Tank and Lines: S/N 17510003~17512104
1. Fuel Tank
2. Cap
3. Strainer
4. Drain Valve
5. Fuel Sender
6. Water Separator
7. Feed Pump
III-11
III-6 TB175
Fuel Tank and Lines: S/N 17512105~
1. Fuel Tank
2. Cap
3. Strainer
4. Drain Valve
5. Fuel Sender
6. Water Separator
7. Feed Pump
8. Fuel Filter
9. Bracket
TB175 III-6-1
III-12
Fuel Supply Pump: S/N 17510003~17510353

#

#
#
#
3
1
2
A: 0.78 N·m
1. Box 9. Hose
2. Resistor 10. Plug
3. Switch 11. Level Switch
4. Relay 12. Pump
5. Box 13. Strainer
6. Wire Harness 14. Wire Harness
7. Diode 15. Fuse
8. Hose 16. Float
III-6-2
III-13 TB175
Fuel Supply Pump: S/N 17510354~

#

#
#
#
A: 0.78 N·m
1. Box 9. Hose
2. Resistor 10. Plug
3. Switch 11. Level Switch
4. Relay 12. Pump
5. Box 13. Strainer
6. Wire Harness 14. Wire Harness
7. Diode 15. Fuse
8. Hose 16. Float
TB175 III-6-3
III-14
Engine Control
A: Allow a minimum bending radius of at least 250 mm.
1. Throttle Motor Assembly

2. Bracket
3. Accelerator Wire
4. Emergency Stop Wire
5. Bracket
6. Armrest With Switch
7. Link Ball
III-15
III-7 TB175
Throttle Motor
4 5
A
17.7
190.1 C
2 3
D
100
74 2
8
4
A
3.2 4
24.5
4.2 B
6
L3C105
A: Apply thread-locking compound.
B: Liquid packing [Three Bond 1104]
C: Silicon rubber [Three Bond 1212]
1. Bracket
2. Lever
3. Cover
4. Limit Switch 1
5. Limit Switch 2
6. Motor
7. Bolt
8. Rubber Nut
TB175 III-16
III-8
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Removing the Engine

1. Disconnect the battery ground cable (1) from the
battery.
2. Remove the engine hood, side cover L and R and

engine cover [front].
“Removing the Covers”
3. Remove the Counterweight.

“Removing the Upper Frame”
4. Disconnect the electrical wiring from the air 1 L3C106
cleaner (3). Next, remove the air cleaner (3).
5. Disconnect the coolant drain hose (2).
6. Remove the radiator and oil cooler.

“Removing the Radiator and Oil Cooler” 3
7. Remove the hydraulic pump.

“Removing the Hydraulic Pump”
8. Close the valve (4), then disconnect the heater

hoses [two] and fuel hoses (5).
9. Disconnect the battery cable (6) and all the con- L3C107
nections on the engine side of the electric wirings

(7).
• Attach identification labels to individual wir- 4
ings.
• Disconnect the wirings from the clamp and the
band.
10. Disconnect the engine ground cable (8).
11. Disconnect the emergency stop wire [S/N

17510003~17512104] (9) and accelerator wire
(10) from the engine. 9
• When re-assembling, make sure that the mini- 2
mum bending radius of the wire is at least 250 10 11 12 5 L3C108
mm and check that the wire moves smoothly.
12. Remove the nuts (11) and then the stoppers (12)
and cushion rubbers.
• When re-assembling, install the stopper in the
correct place that is marked A.
Nut: 241N·m (upper)
Nut: 193N·m (lower)
8 L3C109
III-17
III-9 TB175
13. Suspend the engine temporarily, and remove the

mount and the engine.
Engine: 255 kg
Installing the Engine

Follow the same procedure as for removal in the
reverse order.
Removing the Radiator and Oil Cooler

engine cover [front].
1
2. Drain the oil from the tank.
“Removing the Hydraulic Tank”
3. Remove the Battery.

a. Remove the battery ground cable from the
battery.
b. Remove the battery cable.
c. Remove the installation bolts, them remove L3C110
the battery.
Nut: 9.8 N·m
4. Loosen the drain valve (1) to drain the engine

coolant.
• Coolant volume: 9.5L
5. Disconnect the radiator hoses [upper] (2) and

[lower] (3) and hoses from the radiator.
6. Disconnect the oil cooler hoses (5) and (6).
7. Remove the fan guard (7) and stays (8), (9) from
the radiator (10).
8. Remove the installation bolts, then hoist the ra-

diator.
• Lift the radiator and oil cooler slowly, sliding
it out forward so the shroud doesn’t hit against
the cooling fan.
TB175 III-18
III-10
Installing the Radiator and Oil Cooler

reverse order.
• The radiator should be mounted at right angles to
PARALLEL
the main body frame and parallel to the cooling fan.
RIGHT ANGLE
III-19
III-11 TB175
Removing the Hydraulic Pump

5
center cover.
“Removing the Covers” 1
2. Remove the silencer. 3

a. Remove the fixing bolts, then remove the si-
lencer (1) from the exhaust pipe.
b. Remove the fixing bolts, then remove the si-
lencer (1) from the bracket. 6
3. Drain out the oil from the hydraulic tank. 4

“Removing the Hydraulic Tank”
3 2 L3C113
4. Disconnect the discharge hoses (3) and hydraulic

hoses (4) from the pump.
7
5. Disconnect the drain hose (7) from the pump.
6. Disconnect the suction hose (2) from the pump.
7. Remove the fixing bolts (5) and take out the

hydraulic pump (6).
Bolt: 255.8 N·m
Apply molybdenum disulfide grease to the
spline section (A).
L3C114
Installing the Hydraulic Pump

reverse order. A
Cautions when starting the hydraulic pump

1. Fill the pump housing with clean hydraulic oil
before starting the pump.
• Loosen the drain hose (7), fill in the oil through
the opening until the oil overflows, and fasten
the drain hose.
G4C114
2. After starting the engine, let it run at a low idling
speed for a while to completely bleed out the air
within the circuit.
TB175 III-20
III-12
Removing the Fuel Tank
1. Remove the covers around the tank.
2. Loosen the drain valve (1) to drain out the fuel.

• Fuel tank capacity: 120L
3. Disconnect the fuel sender wiring (2), fuel pump

wiring (3) and water separator wiring (8).
4. Disconnect the fuel hoses (4) and (5).
5. Suspend the fuel tank (6) temporarily and remove

the fixing bolts (7). L3C115
6. Suspend the fuel tank (6) and remove it.

Fuel tank: 53 kg 6
7
L3C116
Installing the Fuel Tank

Follow the same procedure as for removal in the 6
reverse order. 4
5 L3C117
III-21
III-13 TB175
TB175 III-22
III-14
SLEW SYSTEM MACHINE CONFIGURATION
SLEW SYSTEM
CONSTRUCTION
3 B A
1 2
L3C200
A: 256 N·m
Apply thread-locking compound.
B: 134 N·m
1. Slew Bearing
2. Swivel Joint
3. Stopper
4. Slew Motor
III-23
III-15 TB175
MACHINE CONFIGURATION SLEW SYSTEM
Slew Bearing
3 6 4 1
5 2
L2C201
1. Outer Race 4. Spacer

2. Inner Race 5. Seal
3. Ball 6. Seal
The slew bearing is a ball type bearing, with balls (3)

and spacers (4) aligned alternately in the groove 1
between the outer race (1) and inner race (2). The slew
bearing is installed by attaching the outer race to the
turntable and the inner race to the lower frame using
hex bolts.
The slew speed reducer’s pining, mounted on the
turntable, engages with the gear formed on the inside
of the inner race and rotates, slewing the machine’s
4
frame during operation.
3 2
L2C202
TB175 III-24
III-16
SLEW SYSTEM MACHINE CONFIGURATION
Removing the Slew Motor

4
1. Remove the center cover T (4) and center cover
F (5).
5
2. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses (1) from the slew
motor (2).
3. Take out the installation bolts (3), suspend the

slew motor and remove it.
Bolt: 256 N·m
Apply thread-locking compound to the bolts. L3C201
Slew motor: 80 kg
1 1
2
Installing the Slew Motor
reverse order.
3
L3C202
Removing the Slew Bearing

1. Remove the hoe attachment
“Attachments, Disassembly and Assembly”
2. Remove the upper frame.

“Removing the Upper Frame”
3. Remove the inner race fixing bolts.

Bolt: 256 N·m
Apply thread lock to the bolts.
4. Suspend the slew bearing and remove it.

Slew bearing: 103 kg
III-25
III-17 TB175
MACHINE CONFIGURATION SLEW SYSTEM
Installing the Slew Bearing

reverse order.
• When mounting the slew bearing on the upper
frame, be sure to position the reamer bolts and the
grease holes as illustrated in the right figure.
• Apply grease to the inner teeth of the slew bearing.
Removing the Swivel Joint

1. Remove the upper frame.
“Removing the Upper Frame” 3
1 1
2. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses (1) from the hub
side of the swivel joint. 2
• Make match marks at the connection positions
of the hoses.
3. Remove the swivel joint fixing bolts (2).

Bolt: 134 N·m 1
Apply thread-locking compound to the bolts. 1
L2C206
4. Suspend the swivel joint (3) and remove it.

Swivel joint: 22.5 kg
Installing the Swivel Joint

reverse order.
• When mounting the swivel joint, tighten it tempo-
rarily with the fixing bolts, and center the swivel
joint by using a dial gauge.
• Adjust the centering so that the deviation from the
center is within 0.25 mm. G4C205
TB175 III-26
III-18
TRAVEL SYSTEM MACHINE CONFIGURATION
TRAVEL SYSTEM
CONSTRUCTION
Steel Crawler Belt
1 2 6 11 5 10 8 9 7 4 3 1. Link R
2. Link L
3. Master Link R
4. Master Link L
5. Bushing
6. Track Pin
7. Bushing
8. Master Pin
9. Collar
10. Split Pin
11. Seal
L2C300
Rubber Crawler Belt
1 2 3
1. Cover Rubber
2. Steel Cord
3. Core
L2C301
III-27
III-19 TB175
MACHINE CONFIGURATION TRAVEL SYSTEM
Carrier Roller
6 1 3 5 4 2 1. Roller
2. Shaft
A 3. Bearing
4. Cover
5. Oil Seal
6. Oil Filler Plug
L3C302
A: 255.8 N·m
Track Roller
1. Roller
2. Cover
2 1 6 3 4 5 2 3. Shaft
4. Bushing
5. Floating Seal
6. Oil Filler Plug
L3C303
A: 102 ±5.1 N·m
TB175 III-28
III-20
Idler
1 1. Idler
2. Slide
6 3. Shaft
4. Bushing
5. Floating Seal
6. Oil Filler Plug
L3C304
Track Adjuster
1. Cylinder
1 4 2 3 2. Reach Rod
3. Plate
4. Spring
L3C305
III-29
III-21 TB175
Travel Motor
1. Travel Motor
2 2. Sprocket
A
L3C306
A: 241 N·m
B: 155.8 N·m
TB175 III-30
III-22
Removing the Rubber Crawler

When the travel speed switch is set to the 2nd speed
side while the engine is running, the tensioning cylin-
der rods extend and the crawlers are tightened.
Always keep the switch at the 1st speed side except
when tightening the crawlers.
1. Start the engine and raise the machine body with
the hoe attachment and dozer blade.
2. Stop the engine.
3. Remove the valve covers at the center of the left
and right crawler frames.
4. Loosen the lock plate (1) counterclockwise. L2C307
5. Turn the valve handle (2) counterclockwise to

loosen the tension of the crawler.
6. Once the crawler is completely loose, tighten the
valve handle (2).
7. Tighten the lock plate (1).
8. Do the same for the other side.
9. Slowly lower the dozer blade side of the machine
body, by the dozer blade lever. (Do not start the
engine.)
10. Ground the crawlers and lower the machine body
so that the crawler slack is maximum.
11. When the crawlers come away from the idlers,
slide the crawlers to the outside and remove them.
12. Disengage the crawlers and sprockets, then re-
move the crawlers from the crawler frames.
L2C309
Installing the Rubber Crawler

1. Engage the crawlers with the left and right sprock-
ets.
2. Set the left and right crawlers on the idlers.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press the travel speed switch once and set it to the
2nd speed side. The left and right crawlers are
tightened simultaneously.
5. Check that the crawlers are properly tightened.
Standard value.
• “II. Specifications, Standards for judging
performance” concerning adjustment dimen-
sions and methods. L2C307
III-23 TB175
Removing the Steel Crawler

• Stop the machine so that the master pin is
positioned at the front of the idler.
1. Raise the body.
2. Release the crawler tension.

“Removing the Rubber Crawler”
3. Pull out the master pin and detach the crawler.
4. Slowly run the travel motor in reverse and gradu-

ally remove the crawler (1).
Steel crawler: 440 kg
Installing the Steel Crawler

1. Raise the body and position the crawler under the
frame.
• Be careful to install the crawler belts in the
proper direction.
2. Engage the links in the sprockets, then slowly run

the travel motor in forward and wrap on the
crawler.
3. Lower the body, then install the master pin and

engage the crawler. L2C310
• After lining up the pin hole, first insert the

temporary pin.
4. Tension the crawler.

• Turn on the travel speed switch and tension the
crawler.
• “II. Specifications, Standards for judging
performance” concerning adjustment dimen-
sions and methods.
L2C311
TB175 III-24
Removing the Carrier Roller
1. Loosen the tension in the crawler belt.
2. Using a hydraulic jack, push up the crawler belt.
3. Loosen the installation nut (3) and remove the

bolt, then remove the upper roller (4).
3
Installing the Carrier Roller
Follow the procedure used to remove the upper roller
in reverse order.
• When tightening the installation nut, apply 4
G4C307
thread-locking compound to the threads.
Nut: 255.8 N·m
Removing the Track Roller

1. Loosen the crawler tension.
2. Loosen the roller installation bolt (1) slightly

(approximately 1 turn).
2
1
3. Raise the machine body, take out the installation
bolt (1) and remove the roller (2).
Installing the Track Roller

1. Tighten the roller (2) installation bolt (1) tempo-
rarily. L3C307
2. Bring the machine body in full contact with the

ground, then tighten the bolts.
Bolt: 102 ±5.1 N·m
Apply thread-locking compound to the in-
stallation bolts.
3. Raise the machine body, then adjust the tension of

the crawler.
III-25 TB175
Removing the Idler and Track Adjuster

1. Remove the Crawler.
“Removing the Crawler”
2. Remove the cover, then disconnect the hydraulic

hoses from the tensioning cylinder.
3. Pull out the idler (3).

Idler: 86 kg
4. Pull out the track adjuster’s track spring (4) and

the tensioning cylinder (2).
Track adjuster: 48 kg
L2C314
Installing the Idler and Track Adjuster

Follow the procedure used for removal in reverse
order.
• Apply grease to the rubbing surfaces of the track
adjuster piston and cylinder. 3
L2C315
Removing the Travel Motor

1. Remove the crawler.
“Removing the Crawler”
2. Remove the installation bolts (1) and remove the

sprocket (2).
Bolt: 158.5 N·m
Apply thread-locking compound to the bolts.
3. Remove the motor cover and disconnect the hy-

draulic piping (4).
4. Suspend the travel motor (3) temporarily and

remove the fixing bolts (5).
Bolt: 241 N·m 4
5. Suspend the travel motor (3) and remove it.

Travel motor: 80 kg
Installing the Travel Motor

order. 4
5 G4C309
TB175 III-26
UPPER FRAME MACHINE CONFIGURATION
UPPER FRAME
CONSTRUCTION
Turntable
A: 522 N·m
Apply thread-locking compound. 1. Turntable
2. Counterweight
3. Bushing
4. Extra weight R
5. Extra weight L
III-27 TB175
MACHINE CONFIGURATION UPPER FRAME
Floor Plate
A 3 2 1
5 5 7 4
L3C401
A: 87.3 N·m
1. Floor Plate
2. Floor Mat
3. Cover
4. Cab Mount
5. Cab Mount
6. Cover
7. Pipe
TB175 III-28
Heater

D: Grease with molybdenum disulfide applied.
1. Cover 9. Filter
2. Plate 10. Cover
3. Selector Damper 11. Duct Hose
4. Bracket 12. Heater Hose
5. Panel 13. Heater Assembly
6. Duct 14. Switch
7. Wire 15. Valve
8. Wire
III-29 TB175
Covers 1/2
A: 54.9 N·m
B: 26.5 N·m
1. Engine Cover [Front] 7. Bracket

2. Engine Hood 8. Wire
3. Side Cover R 9. Hinge
4. Side Cover L 10. Cover
5. Stay 11. Gas Spring
6. Hook
TB175 III-30
Covers 2/2
1. Front Cover 7. Tool Box

2. Center Cover F 8. Plate
3. Center Cover T 9. Cover
4. Under Cover 10. Handrail
5. Cover 11. Cover
6. Handrail 12. Cover
III-30-1
III-31 TB175
Removing the Upper Frame 1

1. Remove the hoe attachment.
“Attachments, Disassembly and Assembly” 1
2. Remove the cab.

“Removing the Cab”
3. Remove the center cover T and center cover F.

“Removing the Covers” 2
4. Remove the floor plate.

“Removing the Floor Plate” 1 L3C404
5. Take out the bolts and remove the counterweight.

• Attach and tighten the hoisting cable to the
counterweight.
Counterweight: 609 kg
3
6. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses (1) from the swivel
joint.
• Make match marks on the installation position
of the hoses before disconnecting them.
7. Take out the fixing bolts and remove the stopper

(2).
Bolt: 134 N·m L3C405
8. Disconnect the grease pipe (3) from the slew

bearing.
9. Remove the fixing bolts (7) from the outer race of

the slew bearing, leaving only two bolts each on
7
the front and the rear of the machine.
• When mounting the slew bearing, be careful of
the positions of the grease hole and reamer
bolts.
“Installing the Slew Bearing”
Bolt: 256 N·m
Apply thread-locking compound to the L3C406
bolts.
10. Suspend the upper frame temporarily and remove

the remaining fixing bolts while keeping the
frame well balanced.
11. Suspend the upper frame and remove it.
Installing the Upper Frame

reverse order.
TB175 III-32
III-31
Removing the Floor Plate
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable from the
battery.
2. Remove the cab.

3. Remove the lever stand (1) from the floor plate

(2).
“Removing the Lever Stand”
4. Remove the travel, auxiliary and swing levers (3)

from the floor plate (2).
“Remove the travel, auxiliary and swing
levers”
5. Disconnect the duct hose and electrical wiring (6)

from the heater box (5).
6. Remove the cover from the heater box (5) and

disconnect the heater hoses (7).
5
7. Hoist and remove the floor plate (2).
Floor plate: 60 kg
7
Installing the Floor plate
Follow the procedure used for removal in reverse 6 L3C407
order.
• After installing the floor plate, partially tighten
the floor plate installation bolts, then tighten
them completely after installing the cab.
III-33
III-32 TB175
Removing the Covers

1. Disconnect the battery ground cable from the 1
battery.
3
2. Remove the engine hood (1). 3 2
a. Open the engine hood and suspend it tempo-
rarily.
b. Disconnect the electric wiring (2) of the tail-
light.
c. Remove the installation bolts and the gas
springs (3).
3. Open the side cover L (4) and remove the pin from
the link. Then remove the installation bolt (6) L3C408
from the hinge.

• Remove side cover R in the same way.
4
4. Remove the center cover T (7).
5. Disconnect the electrical wiring from the air

cleaner (8), then remove the engine cover [front]
(9).
6
6. Disconnect the coolant reservoir hose, then re- 9
move the coolant reservoir (10) from the engine
cover [front] (9).
10 8
7. Remove the installation bolts, then hoist the en- L3C414
gine cover [front] (9).

Cover [front] : 37 kg
14 7 9
8. Remove center cover F (12) and the plate (13).
9. Remove the installation bolts and the light’s elec-

trical wiring, then remove the front cover (14). 13
10. Remove undercovers from the bottom of the

frame.
Installing the Covers

Follow the same procedure as for removal in the 12 L3C409
reverse order.
TB175 III-34
III-33
Removing the Cab
battery.
2. Remove the operator seat from the bracket.
3. Remove the installation bolts, lift cover R (1),

disconnect the antenna line, electrical wiring (4)
from the radio with cassette player (2), then
remove cover R (1).
6
4. Remove the installation bolts, remove the con- 2 1 5
troller (3), then disconnect the electrical wiring
from the controller (3). L3C410
5. Disconnect the electric wiring (4).
6. Disconnect the electric wiring and hose from the

2 3
tank (5).
7. Remove the installation bolts, then remove cover

L (6).
8. Remove defroster hoses (7).
9. Remove installation bolts (8) [six], then hoist and

remove the cab.
Cab: 248 kg L3C411
Installing the Cab

order. 3
• Suspend the cab temporarily, keeping it level,
and fasten it temporarily while it is still sus-
pended.
L3C412
L3C413
III-35
III-34 TB175
TB175 III-34-1
III-36
CONTROL SYSTEM MACHINE CONFIGURATION
CONTROL SYSTEM
CONSTRUCTION
Travel, Swing Lever Unit

C: Applying thread-locking compound.
1. Bracket 6. Bracket
2. Right Travel Lever 7. Bracket
3. Left Travel Lever 8. Swing Pedal
4. Right Travel Pedal 9. Pilot Valve (Travel)
5. Left Travel Pedal 10. Pilot Valve (Swing)
III-37
III-35 TB175
MACHINE CONFIGURATION CONTROL SYSTEM
Hydraulic Pilot Unit: S/N 17510003~17511262

A Type (ISO)
4Pb3
11 4Pb2
5Pb2 8
a2
T4 4Pa2
1 b2
5Pa2
RP R4
SH R3 4Pa3
R2 RT R1
5
12 2
D
A1
A2
B2 B1
BST C1 LP L4
C2 L3
L1
BSP
TRT
4 L2 LT
6 TRP
SSP SST SSP
3 SST
7 L3C501
5Pb4
10 5Pb3 8
4Pb1 5Pb1
T13 A2 Dr PDB
5Pb5
9
PP
5Pa3
T2 5Pa1 PT
PA
T6 4Pa1
PPL
T7 4Pa4
4Pa2a 5Pa4
5Pa5
13
5
PST
PSH
PSF
PSD
PSB PSE
PSA
BS1 PSG
TRT PSC
6 BS2 TRP
TR3 7
3 TR1
TR2
SSA
TR4 SSB
L3C510
TB175 III-38
III-36
♦ Table of Connections ♦
1 R1 ↔ 4Pb2 8 4 D ↔ SH 12
1 R2 ↔ 4Pa3 8 3 TRP ↔ BSP 6
1 R3 ↔ 4Pa2 8 5 T4 ↔ BST 6
1 R4 ↔ 4Pb3 8 5 TRP ↔ SSP 7
1 RP ↔ BSP 6 3 TRT ↔ SST 7
1 RT ↔ TRT 3 6 BS1 ↔ PSE 13
2 L1 ↔ B2 4 6 BS2 ↔ PSA 13
2 L2 ↔ 5Pb2 8 7 SSA ↔ PSC 13
2 L3 ↔ A2 4 7 SSB ↔ PSG 13
2 L4 ↔ C2 4 8 5Pb4 ↔ PSB 13
2 LP ↔ SSP 7 8 5Pb1 ↔ PSH 13
2 LT ↔ SST 7 8 5Pa4 ↔ PSF 13
3 TR1 ↔ 5Pa5 8 8 5Pa1 ↔ PSD 13
3 TR2 ↔ 5Pb5 8 5 T6 ↔ PST 13
3 TR3 ↔ 4Pa1 8 8 Dr ↔ T2 5
3 TR4 ↔ 4Pb1 8 8 PDB ↔ 5Pa3 8
3 TRP ↔ A2 10 9 PA ↔ 4Pa2a 8
3 TRT ↔ T7 5 9 PPL ↔ 4Pa4 8
4 A1 ↔ BL-b2 11 9 PP ↔ 5Pb3 8
4 B1 ↔ BL-a2 11 9 PT ↔ T13 5
4 C1 ↔ 5Pa2 8
1. Right Pilot Valve

2. Left Pilot Valve
3. Pilot Valve (Travel)
4. Shuttle Valve
5. Hydraulic Tank
6. Pilot Valve (Swing)
7. Solenoid Valve (Auxiliary)
8. Control Valve (Mno-Block)
9. Pilot Selector
10. Solenoid Valve (3-Section)
11. Control Valve (3-Section)
12. Slew Motor
III-39
III-37 TB175
Hydraulic Pilot Unit: S/N 17511263~

A Type (ISO)
With Slide Switch
TB175 III-37-1
III-40
1 R1 ↔ 4Pb2 8 4 D ↔ SH 12
1 R2 ↔ 4Pa3 8 3 TRP ↔ BSP 6
1 R3 ↔ 4Pa2 8 5 T4 ↔ BST 6
1 R4 ↔ 4Pb3 8 3 TRP ↔ SSP 7
1 RP ↔ BSP 6 6 BS1 ↔ 5Pb1 8
1 RT ↔ TRT 3 6 BS2 ↔ 5Pa1 8
2 L1 ↔ B2 4 8 5Pb4 ↔ SSA2 7
2 L2 ↔ 5Pb2 8 8 5Pa4 ↔ SSA1 7
2 L3 ↔ A2 4 5 T6 ↔ SST 7
2 L4 ↔ C2 4 8 Dr ↔ T5 5
2 LP ↔ SSP 7 8 PDB ↔ 5Pa3 8
2 LT ↔ TRT 3 9 PA ↔ 4Pa2a 8
3 TR1 ↔ 5Pa5 8 9 PPL ↔ 4Pa4 8
3 TR2 ↔ 5Pb5 8 9 PP ↔ 5Pb3 8
3 TR3 ↔ 4Pa1 8 9 PT ↔ T13 5
3 TR4 ↔ 4Pb1 8
3 TRP ↔ A2 10
3 TRT ↔ T7 5
4 A1 ↔ BL-b2 11
4 B1 ↔ BL-a2 11
4 C1 ↔ 5Pa2 8

2. Left Pilot Valve
4. Shuttle Valve
5. Hydraulic Tank
7. Proportional Control Solenoid Valve
9. Pilot Selector
12. Slew Motor
III-37-2
III-41 TB175
Hydraulic Pilot Unit: S/N 17510003~17511262

A Type (ISO) ↔ G Type (JCB)
4Pb3
11 a2
4Pb2
5Pb2
8
T4
1 b2 4Pa2
5Pa2
RP R4
SH R3
4Pa3
R2 RT R1
12 LP
L3 L4
D
A1 L1
A2 L2 LT
B2 B1
C1
2
BST
C2
6 BSP 4 14
TRT
S1 S4
SC SD
TRP
S2 S3
SST SSP SA
3 SSP
SB
7 SST
L3C502
5Pb4
10 5Pb3 8
4Pb1 5Pb1
T13 A2 Dr PDB
5Pb5
9
PP
5Pa3
T2 5Pa1 PT
PA
T6 4Pa1
PPL
T7 4Pa4
4Pa2a 5Pa4
5Pa5
13
5
PST
PSH
PSF
PSD
PSB PSE
PSA
BS1 PSG
TRT PSC
6 BS2 TRP
TR3 7
3 TR1
TR2
SSA
TR4 SSB
L3C510
TB175 III-42
III-38
1 R1 ↔ 4Pb2 8 4 B1 ↔ BL-a2 11
1 R2 ↔ SA 14 4 C1 ↔ 5Pa2 8
1 R3 ↔ 4Pa2 8 4 D ↔ SH 12
1 R4 ↔ SB 14 3 TRP ↔ BSP 6
1 RP ↔ BSP 6 5 T4 ↔ BST 6
1 RT ↔ TRT 3 5 TRP ↔ SSP 7
2 L1 ↔ B2 4 3 TRT ↔ SST 7
2 L2 ↔ SC 14 6 BS1 ↔ PSE 13
2 L3 ↔ A2 4 6 BS2 ↔ PSA 13
2 L4 ↔ SD 14 7 SSA ↔ PSC 13
2 LP ↔ SSP 7 7 SSB ↔ PSG 13
2 LT ↔ SST 7 8 5Pb4 ↔ PSB 13
3 TR1 ↔ 5Pa5 8 8 5Pb1 ↔ PSH 13
3 TR2 ↔ 5Pb5 8 8 5Pa4 ↔ PSF 13
3 TR3 ↔ 4Pa1 8 8 5Pa1 ↔ PSD 13
3 TR4 ↔ 4Pb1 8 5 T6 ↔ PST 13
3 TRP ↔ A2 10 8 Dr ↔ T2 5
3 TRT ↔ T7 5 8 PDB ↔ 5Pa3 8
14 S1 ↔ 4Pa3 8 9 PA ↔ 4Pa2a 8
14 S2 ↔ 4Pb3 8 9 PPL ↔ 4Pa4 8
14 S3 ↔ 5Pb2 8 9 PP ↔ 5Pb3 8
14 S4 ↔ C2 4 9 PT ↔ T13 5
4 A1 ↔ BL-b2 11

2. Left Pilot Valve
4. Shuttle Valve
5. Hydraulic Tank
7. Solenoid Valve (Auxiliary)
9. Pilot Selector
12. Slew Motor
14. Selector Valve
III-43
III-39 TB175
Hydraulic Pilot Unit: S/N 17511263~

A Type (ISO) ↔ G Type (JCB)
With Slide Switch
TB175 III-39-1
III-44
1 R1 ↔ 4Pb2 8 4 B1 ↔ BL-a2 11
1 R2 ↔ SA 13 4 C1 ↔ 5Pa2 8
1 R3 ↔ 4Pa2 8 4 D ↔ SH 12
1 R4 ↔ SB 13 3 TRP ↔ BSP 6
1 RP ↔ BSP 6 5 T4 ↔ BST 6
1 RT ↔ TRT 3 3 TRP ↔ SSP 7
2 L1 ↔ B2 4 6 BS1 ↔ 5Pb1 8
2 L2 ↔ SC 13 6 BS2 ↔ 5Pa1 8
2 L3 ↔ A2 4 8 5Pb4 ↔ SSA2 7
2 L4 ↔ SD 13 8 5Pa4 ↔ SSA1 7
2 LP ↔ SSP 7 5 T6 ↔ SST 7
2 LT ↔ TRT 3 8 Dr ↔ T5 5
3 TR1 ↔ 5Pa5 8 8 PDB ↔ 5Pa3 8
3 TR2 ↔ 5Pb5 8 9 PA ↔ 4Pa2a 8
3 TR3 ↔ 4Pa1 8 9 PPL ↔ 4Pa4 8
3 TR4 ↔ 4Pb1 8 9 PP ↔ 5Pb3 8
3 TRP ↔ A2 10 9 PT ↔ T13 5
3 TRT ↔ T7 5
13 S1 ↔ 4Pa3 8
13 S2 ↔ 4Pb3 8
13 S3 ↔ 5Pb2 8
13 S4 ↔ C2 4
4 A1 ↔ BL-b2 11

2. Left Pilot Valve
4. Shuttle Valve
5. Hydraulic Tank
9. Pilot Selector
12. Slew Motor
13. Selector Valve
III-39-2
III-45 TB175
Hydraulic Pilot Unit

2-Piece Boom
TB175 III-39-3
III-46
1 R1 ↔ 4Pb2 8 4 D ↔ SH 12
1 R2 ↔ 4Pa3 8 3 TRP ↔ BSP 6
1 R3 ↔ 4Pa2 8 5 T4 ↔ BST 6
1 R4 ↔ 4Pb3 8 3 TRP ↔ 1SP 13
1 RP ↔ BSP 6 3 TRT ↔ 1ST 13
1 RT ↔ TRT 3 6 BS1 ↔ 5Pb1 8
2 L1 ↔ B2 4 6 BS2 ↔ 5Pa1 8
2 L2 ↔ 5Pb2 8 13 1SA ↔ MPp 14
2 L3 ↔ A2 4 13 1SP ↔ SSP 7
2 L4 ↔ C2 4 8 5Pb4 ↔ SSA2 7
2 LP ↔ 1SP 13 8 5Pa4 ↔ SSA1 7
2 LT ↔ 1ST 13 5 T6 ↔ SST 7
3 TR1 ↔ 5Pa5 8 8 Dr ↔ T5 5
3 TR2 ↔ 5Pb5 8 8 PDB ↔ 5Pa3 8
3 TR3 ↔ 4Pa1 8 9 PA ↔ 4Pa2a 8
3 TR4 ↔ 4Pb1 8 9 PPL ↔ 4Pa4 8
3 TRP ↔ A2 10 9 PP ↔ 5Pb3 8
3 TRT ↔ T7 5 9 PT ↔ T13 5
4 A1 ↔ BL-b2 11
4 B1 ↔ BL-a2 11
4 C1 ↔ 5Pa2 8

2. Left Pilot Valve
4. Shuttle Valve
5. Hydraulic Tank
9. Pilot Selector
12. Slew Motor
14. Selector Valve
III-39-4
III-47 TB175
Control Box
1 3 5
4
2
L3C503
1. Control Panel L 3. Control Panel R 5. Panel Cover R

2. Cover 4. Cover 6. Cluster Gauge
Dozer Blade Lever
3
2
4
1
L3C504
1. Bracket 4. Control Cable

2. Lever 5. Yoke
3. Cover
TB175 III-48
III-40
5 6
Removing the Lever Stand
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable from the [-]
terminal of the battery. 2
2. Remove the cab.

3
4
3. Disassemble control box R.
a. Remove the cover, then disconnect the control
cable (1) from the dozer blade lever (2). Next, 1
disconnect the bracket (3) from the lever
stand. L3C505
b. Remove the screw, then remove cover (4).

c. Remove the cap screw, disconnect the electri-
5
cal wiring the armrest (5), then remove the
armrest. 7
d. Remove the cap screw, disconnect the electri-
cal wiring from the cluster gauge (6), then
8
remove the cluster gauge.
e. Remove the cap screw, disconnect the electri-
cal wiring from the panel cover (7), then re- 9 6
move the panel cover.
f. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses (8) from the
pilot valve.
g. Disconnect the electrical wiring (9) from floor
plate. L3C506
4. Disassemble control box L. 12

a. Remove the spring pin, then remove the lever
(10).
b. Remove the cap screw, then remove cover
(11). 13 14
c. Remove the cap screw, then remove the arm-
rest (12).
d. Remove the screw, remove the panel (13) and
cover (14), then disconnect heater wires (15) 10
and (16) and the electrical wiring from the
panel (13).
e. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses (17) from the 11
pilot valve. L3C507
f. Disconnect the electrical wiring (18) from

floor plate.
5. Disconnect the installation bolts, then hoist the

lever stand.
16
15
17
Installing the Lever Stand 18
reverse order.
L3C508
III-49
III-41 TB175
Removing the Travel, Auxiliary and Swing

Levers
1. Remove the installation bolts, then remove lever 1
brackets (1) from the floor plate.
2. Disconnect the electrical wiring from travel le-

ver.
3. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses from the pilot 3 2

valves (2) and (3).
Installing the Travel, Auxiliary and Swing

Levers L3C509

reverse order.
TB175 III-50
III-42
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
Adjusting Stroke
Adjust the lever’s stroke to correspond to the control
valve spool stroke using the setscrew.
1. The control valve’s spool should be in the neutral

position.
2. Turn the rod and position the lever in the center of
the stroke, then fasten the rod with the nut.
3. Move the lever and hold it at the stroke end of the
valve spool.
4. Set the setscrew.
G4C508
III-43 TB175
TB175 III-44
ATTACHMENTS MACHINE CONFIGURATION
ATTACHMENTS
CONSTRUCTION
11
8
9
3
2 4 13
1
10 12
L3C600
1. Bucket 8. Boom
2. Bucket Link 9. Boom Cylinder
3. Guide Link R 10. Swing Bracket
4. Guide Link L 11. Swing Cylinder
5. Bucket Cylinder 12. Dozer Blade Cylinder
6. Arm 13. Dozer Blade
7. Arm Cylinder
III-45 TB175
MACHINE CONFIGURATION ATTACHMENTS
General Cautions
• When disconnecting hydraulic hoses, be sure to Air Bleeding Operation
bleed off any residual pressure in the hoses and in 1. Start the engine and let it idle for about 5 minutes.
the Hydraulic Tank. 2. With the engine running at slow speed, extend
• Plug openings which are opened up when piping is and retract the cylinders 4 or 5 times.
disconnected to prevent dust and mud, etc. from • Move the piston rods to a position 100 mm
getting in. before the end of the stroke, taking care not to
• During assembly, be sure to adjust all the parts with allow any relief whatsoever.
shims so that there will be no looseness in the 3. Perform the operation in (2) with the engine at top
mounts. speed, then with the engine at slow speed, move
• When aligning pin hole positions, absolutely do the piston rods to the stroke end, allowing relief.
not insert a finger in any pin holes.
• When all the hydraulic equipment such as hydrau-
lic cylinders and piping have been removed and the
hydraulic cylinders are being operated for the first
time after reassembly, be sure the bleed the air out
of the hydraulic circuits by the following proce-
dure.
• Keep the clearance at the pin connecting section to 0.5~1.0mm C4C601
0.5 mm or less by using the shim.
• When fastening the lock bolt with double nuts,
maintain a clearance between the nuts and the
bushing of 0.5~1.0 mm when tightening the double
nuts.
Removing the Bucket

1
• Move the back side of the bucket so that it is
down, then lower it fully to the ground.
2 3
1. Take out the lock bolt (1) and remove the pin (2).
1
2. Take out the lock bolt (1) and remove the pin (3).
3. Remove the bucket.

Standard bucket: 161 kg
G4C601
Installing the Bucket A B

order.
• Position the O-ring at the “A” position on the
outer perimeter of the bucket bush before
mounting the bucket. Upon completion of the
mounting, move the O-ring to the prescribed
“B” position.
C4C603
TB175 III-46
Removing the Link
• Fully retract the bucket cylinder and lower the
front end of the arm to the ground.
4
1. Push out the pin (3) on the rod side and remove the
bucket link (4).
a. Guide links (6) ... Be careful not to drop 1
b. Cylinder (1) ........ Set on a tie 3
c. Bucket link (4) ... Attach and tighten hoisting
cable
2. Push out the link installation pin (5), then remove 2

the guide links (6). 6
5 L2C604
Installing the Link

order.
Removing the Arm

1. Disconnect hydraulic hoses (1) from the bucket 7
cylinder (2). Next, disconnect hydraulic hoses (3) 6
from the auxiliary ports (4).
5
2. Push out the pin (5) on the head side, then hoist the
1
bucket cylinder (2). 2
cylinder beforehand.
Bucket cylinder: 44 kg
3. Push out the pin (6) on the rod side and detach the 4 3
rod side of the arm cylinder (7). L2C605
• Set the cylinder on a tie beforehand.
4. Push out the boom point pin (8) and hoist the arm
(9). 9
• Attach and tighten the hoisting cable to the arm
beforehand.
Arm: 130 kg
Installing the Arm

order.
8
L2C606
III-47 TB175
Removing the Boom

• Lower the front end of the boom so that it is in
full contact with the ground.
1. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses (1) and grease

hose (2) from the arm cylinder (3).
2. Push out the pin (4) on the head side hoist the arm
cylinder (3).
Arm cylinder: 74 kg
3. Remove the boom cylinders. L3C607

a. Remove the covers (5), (11) and plates (6)
from boom cylinder R and L.
b. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses (7) from boom
cylinders R and L.
c. Remove the pin from the rod head side of boom
6
cylinder L, then hoist boom cylinder L.
Boom cylinder: 49 kg
5
d. Remove the pin from the rod head side of boom
cylinder R, then hoist boom cylinder R.
Boom cylinder: 49 kg 11
7
4. Disconnect the boom light wiring. 6 L3C608
5. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses (8) from the pipes.
6. Push out the boom foot pin (9) and hoist the boom
(10).
boom beforehand.
Boom: 326 kg
L3C609
Installing the Boom

order.
TB175 III-48
Removing the Swing Bracket
1. Remove the cover (1) and clamp (2) from the
swing bracket (3).
2. Remove the plate (4), push out pin (5), and

remove the swing cylinder.
3. Attach and tighten the hoisting cable to the swing

bracket (3), push out pins (6) and (7),then hoist
the swing bracket (3).
• Be careful not to damage the hoses.
Swing Bracket: 178 kg
Installing the Swing Bracket

reverse order.
Removing the Dozer blade

• Lower the dozer blade fully to the ground.
1. Disconnect hydraulic hoses (1) from dozer blade

cylinder R and L.
2. Attach and tighten the hoisting cable to dozer

blade cylinder R (2), push out pins (3) and (4),
then hoist dozer blade cylinder R (2).Next, re-
move dozer blade cylinder L in the same way.
Dozer Blade Cylinder: 40 kg
3. Attach and tighten the hoisting cable to the dozer

(5), push out pin (6) and hoist the dozer blade.
Dozer Blade: 292 kg
Installing the Dozer Blade

order.
III-49 TB175
Adjusting the Clearance Between the Bucket

and Arm
Adjust the clearance between the bucket and arm so
that it is 0.5 mm.
1. Clean the bucket mount and the area around it

thoroughly.
2. Slide the O-ring (1).
3. Measure the clearance (X).

• The opposite side (Y) should be fitting tightly
with no clearance.
4. Calculate the amount of the clearance adjustment

(the number of shims which need to be moved).
• Subtract the recommended clearance, 0.5 mm
from the value calculated above [clearance
(X)]. However, since the thickness of the ad-
justment shims is 0.5 mm, the actual clearance
will be a value near 0.5.
Example: If the clearance (X) is 1.8 mm,
1.8 – 0.5 = 1.3 mm
Shims to be moved: 2 shims
5. Loosen the bolts (2), leave one and take out the
other 2.
6. With the bolt remaining in the end plate (3),

flange (4) and shim (5), remove the parts so that
their assembly order is not destroyed.
7. Take out only the number of shims required for

clearance adjustment from between the bushing
(6) and flange.
8. Insert the shims which were just removed be-

tween the flange and the end plate, then reas-
semble the parts.
Tighten the 3 bolts uniformly.
Bolt: 54.9 N·m
9. Return the O-ring to its proper position.
TB175 III-50
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM MACHINE CONFIGURATION
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
Mono-Boom: S/N 17510003~17511262
L3C706
III-51 TB175
MACHINE CONFIGURATION HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Mono-Boom (With Slide Switch): S/N 17511263~17512104
L3C707
TB175 III-52
Mono-Boom (With Slide Switch): S/N 17512105~
III-53 TB175
2-Piece Boom: S/N 17510003~17512104
L3C708
TB175 III-54
2-Piece Boom: S/N 17512105~
III-54-1 TB175
Hi-Flow: S/N 17510003~17512104
L3C709
TB175 III-54-2
Hi-Flow: S/N 17512105~
III-54-3 TB175
TB175 III-54-4
CONSTRUCTION
Hydraulic Tank

A: 54.9 ±2.7 N·m
1. Tank 9. Plug
2. Cover 10. O-ring
3. Air Breather 11. Sight Gauge
4. Cover 12. O-ring
5. Spring 13. O-ring
6. Check Valve 14. Plug
7. Suction Filter 15. Check Valve
8. Return Filter
III-55 TB175
Function
1. This tank stores the quantity of hydraulic oil
necessary to operate the cylinders and hydraulic
motors.
2. It keeps air, moisture and dirt out of the hydraulic

oil.
3. It dissipates heat and lowers the oil temperature.
4. Volume of Hydraulic Oil.

Check the oil level with the arm cylinder and
bucket cylinder both fully retracted and with the
bucket and dozer blade both lowered to the ground.
Reference
If the amount of hydraulic oil is insufficient, the
disturbances in the flow of oil can not be calmed, and
this will result in air bubbles getting in the hydraulic
oil. If these bubbles are sucked into the hydraulic
pumps, they could cause cavitation. Heat dissipation
time would also become shorter and would result in a
rise in the oil temperature.
If more than the specified amount of hydraulic oil is
supplied, the amount of air in the tank will become
small and changes in the oil level could cause the
pressure fluctuation in the tank to become severe.
TB175 III-56
Removing the Hydraulic Tank

battery.
2. Remove the covers around the tank.

2
3. Drain the oil from the tank.
a. Bleed the air from air bleeder (1).
b. Loosen the drain plug (2) and drain out the oil.
• Tank level capacity: 68L
L3C702
4. Remove the installation bolts, then remove the

throttle motor assembly (3) from the hydraulic
tank. 1 4 7
“Adjusting the Throttle Motor Assembly”
5. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses (5) and electrical 5

wiring (7) from the solenoid valve (4). Next,
remove the solenoid valve (4) from the hydraulic
tank.
6. Disconnect the drain hoses (8) from the hydraulic

tank.
6 3
8
7. Disconnect the suction hoses (9) from the hydrau- L3C703
lic tank.
8. Disconnect the cooler pipe (10) and return hose

(11) from the hydraulic tank. 11
9. Take off the fixing bolts (6), and suspend the tank
and remove it.
Bolt: 54.9 N·m 8
Tank: 54 kg
10
Installing the Hydraulic Tank

Follow the same procedure as for removal in the 9 L3C704
reverse order.
III-57 TB175
Filling with Hydraulic Oil

1. Fill the tank with the specified amount of hydrau-
lic oil through the filler inlet.
2. Bleed the air.

“Bleeding the air”
3. Run the engine for 2~3minutes at low speed.
4. Retract the arm and bucket cylinders fully, lower

the boom and lower the bucket to the ground.
5. Lower the dozer blade to the ground.
6. Check if the oil level is proper using a level gauge.
Bleeding the Air

Bleed the air after replacing the hydraulic oil or
reassembling hydraulic devices or hoses.
1. Disconnect the drain hose (7) on the hydraulic
pump and bleed the air from the housing. Connect 7
the drain hose (7) once hydraulic oil begins to
come out.
• Be sure to stop the engine.
2. Loosen the hydraulic hoses (2), (3), (4) and the

plug (5) of the control valve. Then loosen the air
release plug (6) of the slew motor.
3. Start the engine and run the engine at low idle.
4. In case the hydraulic oil overflows through the L3C114
plug and hose installation holes, tighten the plugs

and hoses.
5. Slowly operate the cylinders until the air is bled. 6

2
5
6. Bleed the air from the cylinders.
a. With the engine running at slow, extend and
contract the cylinders 4 or 5 times.
• Move the piston rods to 100 mm before the
stroke end. DO NOT extend them com-
pletely.
b. Repeat step “a” above with the engine running
3 4
at full, then run it at slow and extend the piston
rods completely to the stroke end. L3C705
TB175 III-58
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM MACHINE CONFIGURATION
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAM
S/N: 17510003~17511262
L3C813
III-59 TB175
MACHINE CONFIGURATION ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
S/N: 17511263~17512104
L3C815
TB175 III-60
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM MACHINE CONFIGURATION
S/N: 17512105~
III-61 TB175
MACHINE CONFIGURATION ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM

#
+ $ "
+, $ # % # $ "

* # !! $
' & &

# ' !

-. / ( (

!

)

! ) *

0 ( (

0

0 ) !
!
$ !

$ / 1!233
TB175 III-62
ENGINE POWER MACHINE CONFIGURATION
ENGINE POWER
LAYOUT DIAGRAM
1
4 5
L3C802
1. Battery
2. Generator
3. Starter Motor
4. Safety Relay (inside right control box)
5. Key Switch (inside right control box)
6. Fusible Link
7. Air Bleeding Feed Pump
III-63 TB175
MACHINE CONFIGURATION ENGINE POWER
OPERATION g. The start signal from the key switch’s C pin is also
applied to the fuel pump. This is the circuit for the
Engine Starting automatic air bleeding system.
a. The start signal from the key switch’s C pin is Air bleeding is completed when the key switch is
applied to the safety relay’s coil, activating the turned to the start position and the engine is
safety relay and closing the C (common) pin and cranked, even if there is no fuel.
NO (normal open) pin.
Supplementary explanation
The +24 V voltage from the battery is directly
connected to the B+ pin of the starter motor.
The +24 V voltage from the battery is also wired
through the fusible link (large fuse) to the safety
relay, key switch, and fuse B+ heater relay.
b. At this time, the +24 V voltage from the battery is

connected to the starter motor’s S pin, the starter
motor’s electromagnetic switch is activated, and
the starter motor turns.
c. When the starter motor turns, the engine starts

and the engine speed increases, the generator
begins generating. At this time, the generator’s P
pin (generating signal) is applied to the safety
relay’s P pin and turns the safety relay OFF.
d. When the safety relay is turned OFF, the starter

motor is also turned OFF, preventing overrun-
ning of the safety relay by the engine.
Even if the starter switch is accidentally turned to
the start position while the engine is starting, the
generating signal of the generator’s P pin is ap-
plied to the safety relay’s P pin, turning the safety
relay OFF, so the starter motor is not turned
accidentally.
e. When the generator starts generating, a voltage of

28.5 V is generated from the B pin (generating
pin) and charges the battery via the battery relay.
Furthermore, the regulator (rectifier and voltage
regulator) is incorporated into the generator.
f. When the generator starts generating power, a

voltage of approximately 28.5 V is generated
from the generator’s L (indicator) pin. This signal
voltage drives the hour meter of the cluster gauge
(instrument panel) and turns off the charge indi-
cator lamp (indicating the generating mode).
This signal voltage also sends the engine start
signal to the throttle controller.
TB175 III-64
AUXILIARY ENGINE STARTING DEVICE (AUTOMATIC GLOW CIRCUIT) MACHINE CONFIGURATION
AUXILIARY ENGINE STARTING DEVICE (AUTOMATIC GLOW CIRCUIT)
LAYOUT DIAGRAM
4 3 1
L3C803
1. Air heater
2. QHS controller
3. QHS water temperature sensor
4. Heater relay
III-65 TB175
MACHINE CONFIGURATION AUXILIARY ENGINE STARTING DEVICE (AUTOMATIC GLOW CIRCUIT)
OPERATION
Air Heater
a. When the key switch is set to the ACC ON
position, the ACC voltage activates the QHS
controller (for air heater).
The QHS controller uses the special QHS water
temperature sensor installed on the engine to
measure the engine coolant water temperature,
the appropriate heater operating time is set auto-
matically based on this temperature, and voltage
is applied to the heater relay coil. As a result, the
air heater is activated.
At the same time, the glow lamp on the cluster
gauge lights.
The preheating time differs with the coolant tem-
perature: one second when the coolant tempera-
ture is at 10°C, ten seconds at 0°C, or 15 seconds
at –10°C or below. As soon as the glow lamp turns
off, the engine key switch turns to the start posi-
tion.
The +24 V voltage from the battery is connected
through the fusible link to the C (common) pin of
the heater relay. The NO (normal open) pin of the
heater relay is connected to the engine’s air heater
pin.
b. Furthermore, when the key switch is turned from

the ON to the start position, the air heater’s power
is turned on automatically.
c. When the key switch is returned to the ON posi-

tion from the start position, the air heater auto-
matically performs after-heating of the coolant.
The after-heating time is 120 seconds when the
coolant temperature is under 20°C, or less than
two seconds when the coolant temperature is
20°C or higher.
The air heater’s capacity is 55 A. If the engine
should fail to start, wait at least 30 seconds
before trying again.
TB175 III-66
ENGINE THROTTLE CONTROL DEVICE MACHINE CONFIGURATION
ENGINE THROTTLE CONTROL DEVICE
LAYOUT DIAGRAM
1
2
L3C804
1. Armrest with switch

2. Throttle controller
3. Throttle motor assembly
4. One-touch decel. switch
5. Cluster gauge
III-67 TB175
MACHINE CONFIGURATION ENGINE THROTTLE CONTROL DEVICE
Throttle Controller
L3C805
NOTE:
If you must weld parts, etc., to the TB175, heed
the following so as not to damage the throttle 1. Idling (1100 rpm)
controller: 2. “L” position (1400 rpm)
1) Disconnect the negative battery cable from 3. “FC” position (1800 rpm)
the battery. 4. “H” position (2200 rpm)
2) Disconnect the two connectors connected 5. Connector terminal
to the throttle controller.
TB175 III-68
Throttle Motor Assembly
8 9
W1-C809
A: Engine stopping direction
B: Engine running direction
NOTE:
If the throttle motor assembly on the engine
needs to be removed from the machine, do the 1. Limit Switch 1
following: 2. Adjusting Bolt
Make sure not to loosen the throttle cable on 3. Throttle Cable
both the throttle motor assembly and the en- 4. Ball Joint
gine, and remove them as they are. 5. Throttle Motor Shaft Lever
The engine’s throttle control bracket is mounted 6. Adjusting Bolt
on the engine foot with two bolts. Removing 7. Limit Switch 2
these two bolts allows the bracket to be re- 8. Forced starting bolt (painted red)
moved. 9. Forced starting bolt locking nut
III-69 TB175
OPERATION
The TB175’s throttle controller is electrical. It is

controlled with the pushbutton stand mounted on the
armrest and the one-touch decel. switch.
Electric Throttle
a. The electric throttle is activated when the key
switch is set to the ON or start position. Buttons
for setting the engine speed (L, FC, H, up and
down) are provided on the armrest.
The one-touch decel. switch sets the engine to the
idling speed.
The engine speeds corresponding to the buttons
are as follows:
One-touch decel. switch: 1100 rpm
L: 1400 rpm
FC: 1800 rpm
H: 2200 rpm
The margin of error for these speeds is ±50 rpm.
b. When the key switch is set to the ON position, the

microprocessor built into the throttle controller is
activated.
At first, the throttle motor is turned so that the
engine stop position A within the engine’s throttle
lever (1) angle is automatically detected.
The DC +24 V voltage from the battery passes
through the fusible link (large fuse), then from pin
B to pin BR when the key switch is set to ON, and
is supplied from the ACC 10 A fuse via the cluster 1
gauge to the throttle controller.
L3C806
c. When the engine stop position A within the

engine’s throttle lever angle is found, the throttle
motor is automatically turned so that the throttle
lever is pulled to the L position (1400 rpm) with
that position as the reference point (angle 0°).
The L indicator lamp on the cluster gauge lights
at this time.
d. Once the L indicator lamp lights, the engine can

be started.
When the key switch is turned to the start posi- 1
tion, the engine turns at a speed of 1400 ±50 rpm.
Actually, all the above operations are performed L3C807
simply by turning the key switch from OFF to

ON, then to the start position.
TB175 III-70
e. When any engine speed button other than L is
operated while the engine is running, the throttle
controller sends a rotation command equivalent 2
to the desired speed angle minus the current speed
angle to the throttle motor, the throttle motor
turns by the angle equivalent to this rotation
command, then stops and holds.
When the up and down speed buttons are pressed,
the above calculation is repeated between a maxi-
mum of 2200 rpm and a minimum of 1100 rpm,
so the engine speed can be set at will.
When the one-touch decel. switch (2) is pressed, the
throttle controller sends a rotation command equiva-
lent to the current speed angle minus the idling speed L3C808
angle (1100 rpm) to the throttle motor, the throttle

motor turns, and the engine is set to the idling speed.
The one-touch deceleration circuit is equipped
with a previous speed memory function, so if the
one-touch decel. switch is pressed again after it
has been pressed once and the engine has reached
the idling speed, the engine speed returns to the
speed set before the switch was pressed.
f. When the H engine speed setting button is pressed,

the throttle controller turns the throttle motor so
that the throttle lever (1) is pulled to the H position
(2200 rpm).
The throttle motor turns to the engine’s maximum
speed limiter position B, then stops and holds.
Also a limit switch is provided just above the
maximum speed limiter to prevent the throttle
motor from overrunning.
The H indicator lamp on the cluster gauge lights.
g. The engine is stopped simply by turning the key 1

switch to OFF. L3C809
When the key switch is set to OFF, the ACC

power supply to the throttle controller is cut, and
the throttle controller automatically switches to
the B+ fuse power supply.
At the same time, the throttle motor is turned so
that the throttle lever returns to the engine stop
position detected in step “b”.
When the microprocessor detects that the throttle
lever has returned to the engine stop position, the
voltage of the generator’s L pin is monitored, and
the stop position is held until the engine stops and
the generator voltage drops.
After this, the B+ power supply being supplied to
the throttle controller itself is turned OFF. This is
to prevent the battery from going dead.
h. The above describes the operation under normal

operating conditions. The throttle controller also
performs the operations described below. These
are not malfunctions.
III-71 TB175
When the engine key is quickly switched from Throttle Motor Assembly
ON to OFF then back to ON The TB175 is equipped with the throttle assembly
Under normal usage conditions, the TB175 operates whose structure is shown on page III-65.
as follows if the above operation is performed while This motor is a stepping motor with a structure com-
the engine is running: pletely different from that of normal DC motors.
• If the time for which the engine key is set to OFF Stepping motors are brushless motors, and are widely
is within 1 second: The speed is set to L (1400 rpm). used for computer printers, automobile automatic
• If the time for which the engine key is set to OFF speed control devices, etc.
is over 1 second: The engine stops. This motor’s rotor uses powerful permanent magnets
Do not switch the key switch repeatedly between in minute ring form, and has no brushes or other such
ON and OFF for no reason. Doing so may lead to parts.
malfunction. The stator has small gear-like iron cores surrounding
the rotor.
When the engine key is switched from ON to Coils are wound around the bases of the stator’s iron
OFF, then the engine is restarted as soon as it cores, and the magnetic poles can be rotated with
stops: extremely high precision.
As described in step “g” above, once the engine stop When the magnetic poles rotate, the rotor is drawn by
command is issued, the throttle controller checks that the stator’s poles and rotates.
the engine has stopped, then performs a series of In addition, the stepping motor only rotates by the
operations until its own power is turned OFF. angle set for that motor (0.1°, etc., called the step
Thus, in this case the controller’s power is off, so it angle) for each rotation command, so such motors are
will not operate normally. suited for angle control, and unlike normal DC motors
In such cases the L indicator lamp on the cluster gauge they do not require a feedback circuit.
does not light. The TB175 uses a large stepping motor with a maxi-
If the engine key switch is set to OFF, the throttle mum torque of 4.9 N·m.
controller is reset. After it is reset, wait several sec- The stepping motor is controlled by the throttle con-
onds before turning the key switch to ON, then check troller and is mounted as shown on the diagram on
that the L indicator lamp on the cluster gauge is lit page III-64.
before starting the engine.
Do not switch the key switch between ON and a. When the key switch is turned to ON, a command
OFF for no reason. Doing so may lead to mal- signal is issued from the throttle controller to the
function. If a situation you believe is a malfunc- stepping motor to detect the engine stop position,
tion should arise, set the key switch to OFF to as described in the section on electric throttle
reset the throttle controller and restore normal operation.
operation.
b. When the stepping motor receives this command,
If the engine is started at the idling speed or any it immediately turns to the engine stop side and
speed other than 1400 rpm hits the limit switch set at the engine stop position.
If the engine key switch is set to ON and the L The signal of the limit switch is input to the
indicator lamp on the cluster gauge is lit, the throttle throttle controller.
controller accepts rotation change commands from
other buttons even when the engine is stopped. It is c. When the throttle controller receives the signal
possible to start the engine at any speed. from the engine stop position limit switch, it
The default setting is the L position (1400 rpm) in issues the rotation command for pulling the throttle
consideration of starting in cold weather. Avoid to the L position (1400 rpm), and the stepping
starting the engine at other speeds in cold motor turns the specified number of steps, then
weather. stops and holds. At this time, the L indicator lamp
on the cluster gauge lights.
d. Once the L indicator lamp lights, the engine can

be started.
The stepping motor stops and holds in this state
until the next command is received. Subsequent
operation is as described on page III-66.
TB175 III-72
e. When the H position button on the armrest is
pressed while the engine is running, the throttle
controller issues a command to the stepping mo-
tor to pull the throttle to 2200 rpm. At this time,
the stepping motor turns until the switch set at the
maximum speed position is hit.
When the limit switch is hit, its signal is input to
the throttle controller.
f. Even if the engine speed increases due to the

loosened maximum speed limiter of the engine
due to some accident, a maximum speed limit
switch provided on the motor issues a signal to the
throttle controller that instructs the stepping mo-
tor to stop and hold to prevent the engine from
rotating too fast. (The maximum speed limit
switch is a safety switch and is turned off in
normal conditions.)
III-73 TB175
ADJUSTMENT Throttle Motor Assembly Adjustment

The throttle motor assembly is rigorously adjusted
Engine Speed Adjustment before the TB175 is shipped from the factory, but if a
The TB175’s engine speed can be fine-adjusted from problem arises, it can be adjusted as described below.
the throttle controller, without touching the engine In a safe place, lock the levers, then install a speed
itself. gauge on the engine so that the engine speed can be
As shown on the diagram on page III-64, there are seen from the operator’s seat.
four trimmers located next to the throttle controller’s
connector. These trimmers correspond to the speed Adjustment procedure
setting buttons. a. Remove the machine’s cover, then remove the
throttle motor assembly’s locking bolt.
Adjustment procedure When doing this, be careful not to loosen the
The engine speed is rigorously adjusted before the control cable connected to the engine throttle
TB175 is shipped from the factory, but this adjust- lever. If it must be loosened, mark it, measure the
ment may go slightly off over time. amount by which the nut is screwed in, and make
If a problem arises, the engine speed can be adjusted a note of this.
as described below.
In a safe place, lock the levers, then install a speed b. Disconnect the stepping motor’s round water-
gauge on the engine so that the engine speed can be proof connector.
seen from the operator’s seat. When doing this, do not disconnect the two limit
Start the engine at the L position. switch harnesses in the throttle motor assembly.
• Slowly loosen the L (1400 rpm) trimmer with a Disconnecting the limit switch harnesses will
screwdriver and set it to 1400 ±50 rpm. result in loss of control.
• Press the decel. switch (1100 rpm).
• Slowly loosen the decel. switch (1100 rpm) trim- c. It should now be possible to turn the stepping
mer with a screwdriver and set it to 1100 ±50 rpm. motor by hand.
• Press FC (1800 rpm). Turn the lever inside in the direction of pulling the
• Slowly loosen the FC (1800 rpm) trimmer with a engine throttle.
screwdriver and set it to 1800 ±50 rpm. Stop just before the spring action kicks in, then set
• Press H (2200 rpm). the key switch to ON.
• Slowly loosen the H (2200 rpm) trimmer with a Check that all four throttle lamps on the cluster
screwdriver and set it to 2200 ±50 rpm. gauge light.
Turn the speed setting trimmers slowly.
Stop the trimmers at a position where the speed d. After checking that all four engine throttle lamps
is stable. For the H position in particular, note on the cluster gauge are lit, start the engine.
that if the maximum speed limiter is activated, the The engine should run at below the set speed
speed will not increase any more even if the (about 500 rpm).
trimmer is turned further.
In addition, turn the trimmers less than one full e. Once the engine starts, slowly turn the stepping
turn. If possible, use an insulated screwdriver. motor shaft lever to the stop side (in the direction
of pushing the throttle cable towards the engine)
until the engine stops.
f. Once the engine stop position is found, adjust the

adjust bolt ON the stepping motor shaft lever so
that limit switch 1 turns on at this stop position.
Push the limit roller in until a click is heard.
When adjusting, be careful to hold the motor shaft
so that it does not turn. No tester, etc., is required.
g. Set the key switch to OFF.
TB175 III-74
h. Reconnect the stepping motor’s round water- o. Start the engine as is. Press the H button on the
proof connector. armrest to set the full throttle mode. Read the
With the key switch still at OFF, turn the stepping rotational speed in the full throttle mode. If the
motor shaft lever until just before it pushes limit rotational speed is not proper, adjust it by turning
switch 1 and set it there. the trimmer of the throttle controller (see III-64).
Be careful not to push limit switch 1. Insert a sheet of paper between the engine’s
maximum speed stopper and the engine’s speed
i. Set the key switch to ON. Check that the speed is control lever to confirm whether the speed stop-
set to 1400 rpm after the stepping motor shaft per is contacting the control lever. Turn the
lever hits limit switch 1. trimmer until the speed stopper contacts the
Set the key switch to OFF (to reset the system.) control lever.
The maximum rotational speed is maintained by
j. Set the key switch back to ON. Check that the the mechanism that adsorbs the overload on the
speed is set to 1400 rpm after the stepping motor motor shaft.
shaft lever hits limit switch 1. Again make sure that the engine’s maximum
Also check that only the L indicator lamp on the rotational speed is within the range of 2200 ±50
cluster gauge is lit. rpm.
If the stepping motor or limit switch 1 chatters or
vibrates after the system is reset, the engine stop p. When the rotational speed at the H position reaches
position and the limit switch 1 ON position may the speed mentioned above, pull the engine’s
not be the same. emergency stop lever to stop the engine.
If this happens, readjust the adjust bolt (step “ f ”). (The key switch should be kept ON.)
Then, while the engine is rotating at the maxi-
k. Turn the key switch from ON to the start position mum speed, tighten and lock the nut without
and start the engine. allowing clearance between the roller of the limit
Press the throttle buttons on the armrest and the switch 2 and the adjuster bolt.
one-touch decel. switch to check that the throttle (The limit switch contact can be left turned OFF.)
controller is operating properly, then lock the
adjust bolt’s nut. q. Once the above adjustment is completed, reas-
semble the throttle motor assembly as it was
l. Next, check that the engine stops without fail before.
when the key switch is turned OFF from any Check that the throttle controller is operating
engine speed set with the throttle control buttons. properly, then install the machine’s cover.
If the engine does not stop, perform the above
adjustment again.
m. Next adjust the engine speed. Adjust the four

throttle controller trimmers as described under
“Engine speed adjustment” to the set speed.
If the set speed is not reached at the H position,
adjust the maximum speed limiter.
Adjusting the maximum rotational speed of the
engine
The maximum rotational speed of the engine has been
set in the range of 2200 ±50 rpm when shipped from
the factory. If this speed is not suitable for your
application, you can adjust the setting by the follow-
ing procedure. However, make sure the setting does
not exceed the range of 2200 ±50 rpm, or it may cause
engine failure.
n. Carefully perform the adjustments in steps “a” to

“ j ”, then set the key switch to OFF.
Slightly loosen the adjust bolt for pushing limit
switch 2 on the stepping motor shaft lever.
Be careful not to loosen it very much.
III-75 TB175
MACHINE CONFIGURATION CLUSTER GAUGE
CLUSTER GAUGE
LAYOUT DIAGRAM
7 14
10
5
11
1 4 3 6
13
2
12 8
L3C810
1. Cluster Gauge 6. Slew Speed Switch 11. Coolant Temperature Switch

2. Throttle Controller 7. Fuel Sending Unit 12. Detector
3. Throttle Button 8. Air Cleaner Switch 13. Coolant Level Sensor
4. Decel. Switch 9. Engine Oil Pressure Switch 14. Water Separator Water Detection Switch
5. Travel Speed Switch 10. Coolant Temperature Sensor
1. Engine Throttle Indicator

2. Engine Emergency
2 3. Battery Charge
1 L FC H
3 4. Engine Oil Pressure/Coolant Level
4 5. Coolant Temperature
9 6. Air Cleaner
5
7. Water Separator
6
10 8. Fuel Level
7
9. Coolant Temperature Gauge
8 10. Fuel Gauge
13
14 11. Glow
12 12. Slew Speed Indicator
11 13. Hour Meter
L3C811 14. Travel Speed
TB175 III-76
CLUSTER GAUGE MACHINE CONFIGURATION
DESCRIPTION OF CIRCUITRY If either the engine emergency stop circuit or the
engine emergency idling circuit is activated, they
Cluster Gauge Circuits can only be activated either by turning the key
a. This cluster gauge includes the following cir- switch to OFF or by connecting to each other the
cuits: two deactivation connectors clamped with blue
Engine emergency stop circuit, engine emer- tape to the cluster gauge harness.
gency idling circuit, travel speed holding circuit,
slow slew holding circuit, intermittent windshield d. Travel speed holding circuit and travel speed
wiper circuit, hour meter circuit, water tempera- lamp
ture gauge, fuel gauge, low fuel warning lamp, Pressing the second speed switch once on the
engine throttle indicator lamp, engine oil pres- travel lever activates the holding circuit in the
sure/coolant quantity warming lamp, charge lamp, cluster gauge to hold the travel speed to the
engine water temperature warning lamp, air second speed. Pressing the switch again releases
cleaner clogging warning lamp, water separator the second speed holding mode and the first speed
warning lamp, travel speed lamp, slew speed is restored.
indicator lamp, auto glow indicator lamp, cluster Also, if you turn the key switch OFF while the
gauge illumination lamp. second speed is held, the second speed is re-
leased; if you turn the key switch ON again, the
b. Engine emergency stop circuit travel speed is set to the first speed.
The engine hydraulic switch and the engine cool- The engine is designed not to start suddenly at the
ant level sensor are used as sensors. If engine oil second speed.
escapes due to a damaged engine oil pan, etc., the At this time, travel speed lamp lights. The travel
engine oil pressure switch detects a drop in pres- speed holding circuit uses a relay to drive the
sure and its contact is closed. solenoid valve for the second speed.
The engine oil pressure switch is connected to the
cluster gauge’s engine emergency stop circuit. If e. Slow slew holding circuit and slew speed indica-
the engine oil pressure does not return to normal tor lamp
for about 15 seconds after it drops, this circuit When the slew speed switch located in the right
automatically cuts OFF the throttle controller’s control box is pressed once, its signal activates
ACC power supply and stops the engine. In the holding circuit in the cluster gauge and the
addition, the cluster gauge’s emergency lamps slewing speed is held at slow speed.
flash alternately and a buzzer is sounded. If the slew speed switch is pressed again, slewing
The engine coolant level sensor is fitted within returns to the normal speed.
the radiator hose to monitor the flow of coolant The slow slew holding circuit is deactivated if the
within the radiator hose. If the coolant flow drops key switch is set to OFF when the slow slew speed
suddenly due to some accident, an abnormality is being held, and slewing returns to the normal
signal from the coolant level sensor is picked up speed when the key switch is set back to ON.
by the detector. This activates the relay to stop the The slew speed is not set to slow speed (slower
engine’s emergency stop circuit, the same as than the normal speed) when the engine is started.
when the engine hydraulic switch is activated. The slew speed indicator lamp also lights.
The slow slew holding circuit drives the slow
c. Engine emergency idling circuit slew solenoid with a relay.
The engine water temperature switch is a sensor.
If the engine should overheat, the engine water f. Intermittent windshield wiper circuit
temperature switch’s contact is closed. The windshield wiper control switch located in
The engine water temperature switch is con- the right control box has two positions. The first
nected to the cluster gauge’s engine emergency is intermittent (windshield wiper functions every
idling circuit. This circuit automatically closes 5 seconds), the second continuous.
the contact of the relay wired in parallel with the The washer operates whenever the windshield
one-touch decel. switch if the engine water tem- wiper switch is pressed, regardless of the switch’s
perature switch is activated for about 15 seconds. position.
As a result, the engine is set to the idling speed and When the intermittent mode is set, the intermit-
the engine coolant water is cooled. In addition, tent windshield wiper unit in the cluster gauge is
the cluster gauge’s emergency lamps flash alter- activated, electric signals are emitted every 5
nately and a buzzer is sounded. seconds, and the intermittent windshield wiper
relay is driven.
III-77 TB175
The intermittent windshield wiper relay turns warning lamp flashes and the buzzer is sounded.
OFF in about 1 second, the windshield wiper
motor automatically conducts the return action, m. Water separator warning lamp
and the windshield wiper stops at its original The water separator is installed at the rear of the
position. machine’s fuel tank.
The water separator has a float switch that turns
g. Hour meter and charge lamp circuit ON when water accumulates in the fuel.
These circuits are driven by the generating signal This float switch is connected to the alarm lamp
from the engine generator’s L pin. circuit of the cluster gauge. When the switch is
The hour meter’s indicator lamp flashes once turned on, the alarm lamp lights and the buzzer
every 2 seconds. sounds.
The charge lamp is also connected to the
generator’s L pin via a diode. n. Auto glow indicator lamp
This is the auto glow circuit’s indicator lamp. The
h. Water temperature gauge auto glow circuit is activated when the key switch
The water temperature gauge indicates the resis- is turned to ON and start.
tance of the water temperature sensor installed in When the auto glow circuit is activated, the QHS
the engine, converted into temperature. controller is activated, the engine water tempera-
Normally the gauge should be within the green ture is automatically measured by sensor, and the
range. air heater is operated for a suitable amount of
time.
i. Fuel gauge and low fuel warning lamp The QHS controller’s lamp also lights as an
The fuel gauge indicates the resistance of the fuel indicator.
sending unit installed in the engine, converted
into volume. o. Cluster gauge illumination lamp
The low fuel warning lamp lights if the fuel level When the light switch ON the right control panel
drops below E. is turned on, the panel illumination lamp in the
The low fuel warning lamp circuit uses a ther- cluster gauge lights.
mistor. If the fuel level drops below the ther-
mistor, the resistance changes, and this is used to
light the lamp.
j. Engine water temperature warning lamp

The engine water temperature switch is a sensor.
If the engine should overheat, the water tempera-
ture switch’s contact is closed, the warning lamp
is activated and the buzzer is sounded. The engine
emergency idling circuit is also activated.
k. Engine throttle indicator lamp (refer to the sec-

tion on the engine emergency idling circuit)
When a throttle button on the armrest is pressed
during operation, the signal passes through the
throttle controller and lights the engine throttle
indicator lamp on the cluster gauge.
The engine throttle indicator lamp uses a light-
emitting diode, so there is no worry of the bulb
burning out.
l. Air cleaner clogging warning lamp

The clog switch installed on the engine air cleaner
is a sensor.
If the air cleaner gets clogged, the clog switch’s
contact is closed.
The clog switch is connected to the air cleaner
clogging warning lamp on the cluster gauge. The
TB175 III-78
CLUSTER GAUGE MACHINE CONFIGURATION
OPERATION
a. Turning ON the key switch activates the initial

check circuit within the cluster gauge, turns ON
all the lamps for approximately one second, and
sounds the buzzer.
Check that no bulbs are burnt out.
b. When approximately one second has passed after

turning ON the key switch, all the lamps go off,
excluding the charge indicator lamp and the
engine’s hydraulic alarm/coolant level alarm lamp
that remain on, and the buzzer stops sounding.
Also, the water temperature gauge and fuel gauge
are activated, and engine throttle indicator lamp L
lights.
In cold weather, the auto glow indicator lamp also
lights.
c. When the engine starts, all the lamps including

the charge indicator lamp and the engine’s hy-
draulic alarm/coolant level alarm lamp go off,
except for the engine throttle lamp L which is
turned on. This is the normal condition.
In addition, the hour meter is activated and the
hour meter indicator flashes.
III-79 TB175
Replacing The Cluster Gauge’s Bulbs

If one of the bulbs used on the cluster gauge burns out,
it can replaced using the procedure below. These are
special small bulbs, so order them from Takeuchi.
Using bulbs other than the specified ones could ad-
versely affect the cluster gauge and result in malfunc-
tion.
1. Remove the installation bolt (1) from the bottom

of the cluster gauge and remove the cover (2).
2. Remove the installation bolt (3) from the rein-

forcing plate, then remove the printed circuit
board (4). The bulbs and glass can now be re-
placed.
TB175 III-80
OTHER PARTS (ACC. AND B+ FUSE PARTS) MACHINE CONFIGURATION
OTHER PARTS (ACC. AND B+ FUSE PARTS)
LAYOUT DIAGRAM
1 4 7
2 9
5 3 6 8
10
11
L3C812
1. Horn
2. Horn Switch
3. Lever Lock Limit Switch (inside left control box)
4. Light Switch
5. Water Heater (Air Conditioner: Optional)
6. Heater Switch (Air Conditioner Switch: Optional)
7. Radio
8. Battery
9. Fusible Link
10. Room Lamp
11. Side Light
III-81 TB175
MACHINE CONFIGURATION OTHER PARTS (ACC. AND B+ FUSE PARTS)
DESCRIPTION OF CIRCUITRY auxiliary solenoids 2 and 3. This switches the

remote control hydraulic source from boom swing
The TB175 has other circuits containing the ACC use to auxiliary use, allowing the boom swing
fuse. They include the following: pedal to be used as the auxiliary pedal that enables
Lever lock circuit, auxiliary hydraulic circuit (ON/ proportional control of the auxiliary circuit by
OFF control), auxiliary hydraulic circuit (propor- means of pedal operation.
tional control), water heater circuit, light circuit, radio At this time, the settings of switches A and B on
circuit, air conditioner circuit (optional), second aux- the left grip (for ON/OFF control of the same
iliary hydraulic circuit (ON/OFF control) (optional), auxiliary circuit) are automatically cancelled.
lift alarm circuit (optional), travel alarm circuit (op- During proportional operation, the auxiliary pro-
tional), auto-greasing circuit (optional), and fuel sup- portional control lamp on the right control box
ply pump circuit (optional). lights.
Pressing the P switch on the left grip again or
Other Circuits Incorporating The ACC Fuse turning OFF the key switch will reset the propor-
a. Lever lock circuit tional control back to the boom swing mode.
Z ∗ Flip-flop circuit
WARNING
The flip-flop circuit is a circuit that holds the state
For your safety, NEVER use the lever lock re- when the switch is pressed once and resets the
lease connectors during normal operation. Use state when the switch is pressed again or the key
them only when the attachment must be re- switch is turned OFF. A flip-flop circuit is also
moved for repair. used in the travel speed holding circuit and the
second slew speed circuit.
The +24 VDC voltage from the ACC fuse is
applied through the lever lock limit switch L to d. Water heater circuit
the lever lock solenoid. The +24 VDC voltage is applied to the water
During normal operation, the lever lock solenoid heater unit whose minus side is grounded through
is turned ON. The solenoid is turned OFF when the heater fan motor switch in the control box L.
the lever is locked. Turning ON this heater fan motor switch can
If the lever lock limit switch fails, the attachment provide two airflow levels: low airflow (level 1)
is locked. If the attachment needs to be removed and high airflow (level 2).
for repair, lever lock release connectors for emer-
gency are available. e. Light circuit
The lever lock release connectors (male and fe- The +24 VDC voltage from the ACC fuse is
male) for emergency are separately taped to the connected to the light relay. Turning on the light
main harness which travels from the control box switch activates the light relay to turn ON the
L to the main unit harness. Connecting the male boom light, side light, working light, cluster gauge
and female connectors will release the lever lock. illumination lamp, and tail light.
b. Auxiliary hydraulic circuit (ON/OFF control) f. Radio circuit

The +24 VDC voltage from the ACC fuse is The +24 VDC voltage from the ACC fuse is
applied through the overheat protect resistor to directly applied to the radio circuit.
the auxiliary solenoid 1 whose minus (–) side is
connected to the auxiliary relay. Pressing either g. Air conditioner circuit (optional)
switch A or B on the left grip activates the The +24 VDC voltage from the ACC fuse is
auxiliary relay that then activates the auxiliary applied to the air conditioner control switch in the
solenoid 1 to ground its minus side. control box L. Turning ON this air conditioner
control switch and the fan motor switch in the
c. Auxiliary hydraulic circuit (proportional control) control box L provides three levels of airflow:
The +24 VDC voltage from the ACC fuse is very small airflow (level 1), small airflow (level
applied through the overheat protect resistor to 2), and large airflow (level 3).
the auxiliary solenoids 2 and 3 whose minus (–) The compressor of the air conditioner is equipped
sides are connected to the flip-flop circuit. The with an electromagnetic clutch and is controlled
auxiliary solenoids 2 and 3 are used to switch the by the air conditioner’s thermostat and relay
boom swing pedal to the auxiliary pedal. Pressing provided under the chair, the same as the
the P switch on the left grip activates the flip-flop capacitor’s fan.
circuit to ground and holds the minus side of the
TB175 III-82
OTHER PARTS (ACC. AND B+ FUSE PARTS) MACHINE CONFIGURATION
h. Second auxiliary circuit (ON/OFF control) (op- When the suction hose of the fuel supply pump is
tional) put into the fuel drum and the fuel supply pump’s
The +24 VDC voltage from the ACC fuse is switch is turned on, the “full tank detecting” level
applied through the overheat protect resistor to switch mounted on the fuel tank checks whether
the auxiliary solenoid 4 whose minus side is the tank is empty. If it is empty, the fuel supply
connected to the auxiliary relay. Pressing either pump is activated. If the switch detects that the
switch C or D on the right grip activates the tank is full, the motor of the fuel supply pump is
auxiliary relay to activate the auxiliary solenoid 4 automatically stopped.
to ground its minus side.
i. Lift alarm circuit (optional)

The lift alarm sensor is mounted on the boom
cylinder head.
applied through the sensor switch to the lift alarm
sensor. The sensor output is connected to the
minus side of the horn relay coil. When the
boom’s lifting operation is performed while the
lift alarm sensor switch is turned ON, the sensor
monitors the pressure applied to the head of the
boom cylinder. If the boom attempts to lift a load
exceeding its lifting ability (that may cause the
machine to become unbalanced and topple over),
the lift alarm sensor activates the horn relay and
sounds the horn to alert the operator.
j. Travel alarm circuit (optional)

The travel alarm circuit is a pressure switch
mounted on the travel remote control valve.
applied through the travel alarm pressure switch
to the relay coil.
When the travel lever is moved, the generated
travel remote control pressure is detected by the
travel alarm pressure switch that closes its con-
tact, activates the relay, and sounds the alarm
(beep).
k. Auto-greasing circuit (optional)

This system automatically supplies grease to the
attachment or other required sections by means of
the auto-greasing controller and motor-driven
greasing pump.
directly applied to the auto-greasing controller.
Upon elapse of the operating time set on the auto-
greasing controller, the motor of the greasing
pump is automatically activated.
l. Fuel supply pump circuit (optional)

This system supplies fuel by a motor-driven pump.
The +24 VDC from the ACC fuse is directly
applied to the fuel supply pump. The minus side
of the fuel supply pump is connected to the full
tank autostop circuit that utilizes the flip-flop
circuit.
III-83 TB175
MACHINE CONFIGURATION OTHER PARTS (ACC. AND B+ FUSE PARTS)
B+ Fuse Circuitry
The TB175’s B+ fuse circuit consists of the horn and
room lamp circuits. These cannot be turned off with
the main battery switch or the key switch.
“III-77”
a. Horn circuit
The +24 VDC voltage from the B+ fuse is applied
through the horn relay mounted on the lever cover
of the dozer blade in the right control box to the
horn. Pressing the horn switch on the right grip
activates the horn relay and the horn sounds.
The horn circuit is also wired in parallel for
backup use of the radio station selection.
b. Room lamp circuit

The DC +24 V voltage from the B+ fuse is applied
to the room lamp located in the cab.
The minus side of the room lamp is grounded
through the cab door switch.
Like in a regular passenger car, the room lamp has
a three-position selector switch. The room lamp
is lit continuously at the ON position, off at the
OFF position, and lights when the DOOR is
opened and turns OFF when the DOOR is closed
at the OFF position.
Be careful not to leave the room lamp on over
night. Doing so may use up the battery.
TB175 III-84
PROPORTIONAL CONTROL MACHINE CONFIGURATION
PROPORTIONAL CONTROL
The driving current flowing through the proportional control solenoid valve (4) is controlled by the proportional
control lever (2) of the left pilot valve (1) and the proportional controller (3), and the flow rate of the auxiliary piping
is changed by the proportional control solenoid valve (4) controlling the pilot pressure of the control valve
[auxiliary] (5).
By using the built-in current limiting circuit (PWM

control), the proportional controller (3) controls the
driving current of solenoids A and B of the propor-
Solenoid Driving Current
tional control solenoid valve (4) in response to the

proportional signals input by the tilted proportional
control lever (2), based on the driving current control
diagram.
Proportional Signal Input

N0C821E
The force to move the spools of solenoids A and B is 3 MPa

proportional to the driving current through the coil,
thus the secondary pressure from ports A1 and A2 that
SECONDARY PRESSURE
are proportional to the driving current can be output,

as shown in the figure. 2
0
0 400 700 mA
INPUT CURRENT (AVERAGE) N0C822E
III-85 TB175
MACHINE CONFIGURATION PROPORTIONAL CONTROL
The secondary pressure from ports A1 and A2 enters

the pilot port of the control valve [auxiliary] (5) to
control the spool. Therefore, the desired flow rate of 5 A
the auxiliary piping can be achieved by operating the A3 B3 B
proportional control lever (2) at certain angles. P15 P16
A1
A
B
A2
4
T9C813
When button (6) or (7) of the left pilot valve is pressed,

the maximum driving current can be output for the
proportional control solenoid valve (4), despite the
size of the signals input by the proportional control 2
lever (2). Pressing button (6) outputs the maximum
driving current for solenoid valve A. Pressing button
(7) outputs the maximum driving current for solenoid
valve B. At that time, the flow rate of the auxiliary 6 7
piping A or B becomes maximum.
T9C814
Inspection and Adjustment

Checking the proportional controller
The proportional controller (3) has a built-in fault
detection function, and thus shuts down the solenoid
driving current output by the proportional control
solenoid valve (4) when any of the events described
below is detected. The fault detection function is self-
retained until it is reset at power-up after the error has
been eliminated.
1. Sensor error
1A
1B
G
NE
OL
SE
The proportional signals are continuously moni-

P1
tored with respect to range. When the signal falls
outside the operating range due to a wire break or P2
the like, a sensor error is detected. If this occurs,

the “SE” LED on the controller lights up.
• Repair the wiring connected to the propor-
tional control lever (2), or replace the handle
3
assembly of the pilot valve. T9C815
TB175 III-86
PROPORTIONAL CONTROL MACHINE CONFIGURATION
2. Neutral error
When the solenoid driving current output by the
proportional control solenoid valve (4) falls out-
side the neutral zone for a certain time (1 second)
after the power is turned on, a neutral error is
detected. If this occurs, the “NE” LED on the
1A
1B
G
NE
OL
controller lights up.
SE
• Remove any foreign matter from the propor-
tional control lever (2) and clean it, or replace P1
the handle assembly.
P2
T9C816
3. Overcurrent
When the driving current output by either sole-
noid valve A or B exceeds the limit due to a short
circuit or the like, an overcurrent error is detected.
If this occurs, the “OL” LED on the controller
1A
1B
G
NE
OL
lights up.
SE
• Repair the wiring between the controller and
the proportional control solenoid valve A or B. P1
P2
Adjusting the proportional controller T9C817
Although the adjusting trimmer is set for the maxi-

mum flow rate at the factory, the driving current for
the proportional control solenoid valve (4) can be
reduced by using the trimmer. Therefore, the flow rate
can be controlled and the inching of the auxiliary
piping A and B can be improved by dropping the pilot
1A
1B
G
NE
OL
SE
pressure of the control valve (auxiliary) (5).
P1
1. Turn the starter switch on (ACC), and release the
lever lock condition. P2
2. While checking the driving current of the propor-

tional control solenoid valve (4) with the voltage
of current monitor terminals G-1A and G-1B,
turn trimmers P1 and P2 anticlockwise to reduce T9C818
the driving current.

• The driving current (maximum flow rate) is set
to 0.62 A at the factory.
• The relation between the voltage of the current
monitor terminal and the driving current is 1 V
= 1 A, where the voltage value and current
value are equal.
• The secondary pressure (pilot pressure) of the
proportional control solenoid valve (4) drops
by approximately 0.6 MPa per 0.1 A.
Monitor terminal Trimmer
Auxiliary piping A G-1A P1
Auxiliary piping B G-1B P2
III-87 TB175
MACHINE CONFIGURATION PROPORTIONAL CONTROL
TB175 III-88
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM MACHINE CONFIGURATION
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
CONSTRUCTION: S/N 17510003~17511008
Compressor Assembly
A: Allow a clearance. 1. Bracket

B: Press on the center of the belt with a finger. The belt’s 2. Shaft
tension is normal if it bends about 8 mm when pressed
3. Compressor
with a force of about 98N.
4. Belt
5. Pulley
6. Collar
7. Cover
8. Fan Guard
III-89 TB175
MACHINE CONFIGURATION AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Condenser Assembly
1. Bracket
2. Receiver-Dryer
3. Condenser
4. Valve
TB175 III-90
Air Conditioner Unit
1. Air Conditioner Unit 8. Bracket

2. Thermistor 9. Damper
3. Wire Harness 10. Plate
4. Box 11. Control Switch
5. Cover 12. Damper
6. Duct 13. Hose
7. Manifold
III-91 TB175
Defroster Assembly, Electrical Wiring
1. Hose 7. Thermostat
2. Hose 8. Relay
3. Louver 9. Wire Harness
4. Cover 10. Diode
5. Box 11. Wire Harness
6. Cover 12. Diode
TB175 III-92
CONSTRUCTION: S/N 17511009~
Compressor Assembly
A: Allow a clearance.
B: Press on the center of the belt with a finger. The belt’s
tension is normal if it bends about 8 mm when pressed
with a force of about 98N.
1. Engine Foot FR 6. Guard

2. Bracket 7. Compressor
3. Guard 8. Pulley
4. Shaft 9. Belt
5. Collar
III-93 TB175
Conditioner Assembly
1. Hose 5. Solenoid Valve 9. Hose

2. Hose 6. Wire Harness 10. Hose
3. Hose 7. Diode
4. Hose 8. Hose
Condenser Assembly
1. Cover
2. Cover
3. Condenser Assembly
4. Hose
TB175 III-94
Air Conditioner Unit 1/2
1. Bracket 4. Wire 7. Cover

2. Cover 5. Wire Harness 8. Panel
3. Damper 6. Valve 9. Hose
Air Conditioner Unit 2/2
1. Hose 5. Cover
2. Air Conditioner Unit 6. Hose
3. Tube Assembly 7. Hose
4. Duct
III-95 TB175
Defroster Assembly
1. Box
2. Cover
3. Cover
4. Cover
5. Connector
6. Duct
TB175 III-96
Condenser, Air Conditioner Unit, Panel Assembly
1. Condenser Assembly 8. Hose 15. Filter

2. Air Conditioner Unit 9. Switch 16. Air Conditioner Switch
3. Panel Assembly 10. Motor Assembly 17. Knob
4. Condenser 11. Thermostat 18. Control Cable
5. Drier 12. Expansion Valve 19. Control Cable
6. Motor Assembly 13. Evaporator Assembly 20. Rotary Switch
7. Guard 14. Heater Core Assembly
III-97 TB175
TB175 III-98
Overview of System Operation
• Truck and Heavy Equipment Systems
Click on any of these
subject headings to go • Air Conditioner-System Operation
directly to the page • Heater System Operation
• Environmental Effects on System Operation
• Chapter Review
Truck and Heavy Equipment Systems

A variety of HVAC systems are in use today, some old and some new. There are:
• Vehicle manufacturer installed systems
• Owner specified systems
• Add-on systems
• Retrofit systems
The system components come in different colors, shapes, and sizes. They may be
mounted in or on the cab in varied locations. Owners or fleet maintenance people can
modify systems by adding controls, auxiliary units or ducts. Major components are
sometimes replaced due to damage or failure. All systems were, at least originally,
designed and installed to meet the needs of an operator. Figure 2-1 includes
illustrations of various AC and Heater systems. They illustrate system advantages
and disadvantages explained in the paragraphs that follow.
The HVAC system includes both heater and air conditioner components, usually
a common control, and air ducts. The system cools the cab by removing heat energy.
It removes moisture from damp air in the cab and adds fresh outside air to the cab.
In this way, the operator can work comfortably in all kinds of weather.
A sleeper unit, built in or added on, increases the air volumes in the cab. The air
conditioner or heater must circulate and cool or heat a larger amount of air. This is
accomplished by routing ducts and controls to the sleeper compartment as part of
system design. Components may be increased in size to handle the larger cab air
volume. A bigger heater core, air conditioning evaporator coil, condenser, blower or
fan may be included. Often, on long haul trucks, auxiliary air conditioning and heater
components and controls are added. The objective remains the same, to move heat
energy and maintain occupant comfort.
III-99 TB175
System Operation
Figure 2-1
These illustrations show a
basic heater, HVAC system,
the combo system with
sleeper unit, add on AC roof
top and in cab units, roof
mounted condenser and
auxiliary units.
By law, all trucks have a heater/defroster as part of the standard equipment. When there
is a reason to add air conditioning, there are options to meet different needs. The available
space in the cab, operating environment, and owner preference can all play a part in the
type of AC unit selected. You will probably encounter roof-mounted and in-cab add on
systems, and even systems where the condenser is mounted on the roof and the
evaporator is attached to the back panel or mounted under the dash. In cooler climates
you may come across a cab with two heaters, the original and an auxiliary unit.
Air Conditioner—System Operation

We have described the movement of heat energy and basic HVAC system function in
Chapter 1. Now we will go into some detail on how an air conditioner operates. The
system is sealed to keep out air and moisture. To operate properly, the inside of the system
contains a measured amount of refrigerant and special refrigerant oil that keeps the
system lubricated. Figure 2-2 is an illustration of system components without the cab
outline, in-cab controls, component housing, and air ducts or vents. Please study it for
a moment. Note the information printed next to each component. Remember that the
components may be positioned and attached to the truck in various locations.
TB175 III-100
The following AC components are discussed in detail in this section:

1. Compressor/Clutch Assembly
2. Condenser
3. Receiver-Drier
4. Expansion Valve
5. Evaporator Coil
Figure 2-2
Air Conditioner components
are connected together to
illustrate system operation.
The components shown are
not to scale. The refrigerant
and refrigerant oil are clear
in color and not visible in
this drawing. The small
arrows inside the compo-
nents and connecting hoses
show the direction of
refrigerant flow (refrigerant
circuit).
1. Compressor/Clutch Assembly
The compressor/clutch assembly is the heart of the system. When the clutch is
engaged, the compressor pumps refrigerant and oil around the system. It raises the
temperature and pressure of the refrigerant gas, and forces it to the condenser where
it changes state and becomes a liquid. The compressor also sucks the vaporized
refrigerant out of the evaporator and back inside itself in the form of gas. One way
valves inside the compressor separate the compressed gas (high pressure) side of the
system from the suction (low pressure) side. Figure 2-3 shows a cutaway view of a
compressor with the high and low pressure sides noted.
III-101 TB175
System Operation
Figure 2-3
The compressor inlet is low
pressure and the outlet is
high pressure. The reed
valves are one way. They
open to allow refrigerant gas
to enter the compressor on
the down stroke and exit on
the upstroke. Note the open
valves in the illustrations.
The clutch is mounted on the shaft of the compressor and is engaged by electromagnetic
action. Part of the clutch assembly is an electromagnetic wire coil. The coil is energized
through a thermostat that senses the temperature in the evaporator coil. If the evaporator
is too warm the electrical contacts close and allows power to flow to the clutch. The
compressor shaft is engaged and moves the refrigerant around inside the system. Figure
2-4 is a cutaway view of the clutch mounted on the compressor.
Figure 2-4
The clutch shown here has
its electromagnetic coil
mounted on the compressor
body. When the coil is
energized, magnetic force
pulls the clutch drive plate
into the pulley. This action
locks the pulley to the
compressor drive shaft and
drives the compressor.
2. Condenser
The refrigerant gas leaves the compressor and moves through a high pressure hose to the
condenser. Inside the condenser the gas “changes state” and becomes a liquid. It is still
hot and under pressure. Remember in Chapter 1 when we talked about water at 212
degrees Fahrenheit? Heat energy was involved in the “change of state,” but the
temperature did not change. The same kind of action happens inside the AC system. The
refrigerant gas gives up a lot of heat energy to the outside air as it “changes state” in the
condenser. Figure 2-5 illustrates a condenser. Air moving through the condenser absorbs
heat from the refrigerant. The amount of air flow through the condenser is the major
factor in how well the condenser functions.
TB175 III-102
Figure 2-5
As the refrigerant gas moves
through the tubing coil from
top to bottom, it condenses
(changes state) into a liquid.
For ease of installation,
condenser fittings are often
routed close together.
3. Receiver-Drier
The liquid refrigerant continues to move inside the system, out of the condenser through
a tube or hose to the receiver-drier. The receiver-drier serves as a small storage tank and
filter for the refrigerant. It is also a good location to mount pressure switches and often
contains a sight glass (small window) used to view activity inside the system. The
receiver-drier, Figure 2-6, also separates gas (bubbles) from the liquid with a pick-up
tube as shown in this illustration. Some receiver-driers have a spring to preload the
desiccant pack.
Figure 2-6
This cutaway view of a
receiver-drier shows the
filter elements, inlet, outlet
and refrigerant path. The
sight glass is a small
window into the system used
in diagnosis and when
adding refrigerant (charging
the system).
III-103 TB175
System Operation
4. Expansion Valve (Refrigerant Metering Device)

When refrigerant moves from the receiver-drier, it travels through another high pressure
hose to a metering device at the inlet of the evaporator coil. The metering device can be
an expansion valve, an expansion tube or a combination (multiple function) valve.
Between the compressor and this point inside the system, the pressure is high and can
range from 150 to 250 pounds per square inch. The expansion valve (TXV) is closely
connected to the evaporator. A diaphragm opens the valve by exerting pressure on the
spring. Pressure comes from gas inside the diaphragm housing on top of the valve and
in the sealed sensing bulb. The sensing tube is located in the outlet of the evaporator and
picks up heat from warm refrigerant leaving the evaporator. The gas in the valve
diaphragm housing and sensing tube expands when it gets warmer and forces the
expansion valve open at the metering orifice.
Figure 2-7
This block type expansion
valve cutaway view will
give you a better idea how
these valves work. Spring
pressure holds the valve
closed.
5. Evaporator Coil
The expansion valve or other type of metering device bleeds high pressure refrigerant
into the evaporator coil, where the pressure is low. The refrigerant expands rapidly in this
low pressure environment. When it expands it “changes state”. The sudden drop in
pressure brings the refrigerant temperature down quickly inside the evaporator coil.
Figure 2-8 shows an evaporator coil and thermostat. Refrigerant is sprayed into the
evaporator by the high side pressure when the expansion valve opens. The refrigerant
absorbs heat from the air when the blower forces the air through the fins. When the
thermostat probe senses the upper limit of the thermostat heat setting, a circuit closes.
The compressor clutch engages and the compressor operates and moves more refrigerant
to the high side of the system.
TB175 III-104
Figure 2-8
The evaporator coil as
shown is of fin and tube
construction. The thermostat
probe is positioned in
between the evaporator fins
and senses the temperature.
Note: Moisture in the air (humidity) condenses on the fins of the

evaporator as water droplets which drain out of the evaporator
through a drain hose. This action dehumidifies the air in the cab
as part of system operation, and contributes to operator comfort.
Cab air forced across the evaporator coil gives up heat energy to the cold
refrigerant inside the coil. The cooled air circulates in the cab for occupant
comfort. Refrigerant continues to expand and absorb heat energy in the
evaporator coil. Refrigerant changes from liquid to gas before it leaves the
evaporator on the way back to the compressor. The refrigerant gas moves to the
compressor through a low pressure (suction) hose. When the compressor is
operating, it sucks the refrigerant gas back inside, compressing and raising its
temperature and pressure.
Some of AC system operation is controlled by the operator, and some is automatic.
The operator can turn the system on and off, regulate the air velocity with the blower
control, and in some designs adjust the thermostat control. The system and compo-
nent operating range settings automatically cycle the clutch on and off. The operation
of the expansion valve or other refrigerant metering device at the inlet to the
evaporator is automatic.
Individual system features may differ, but the basic system function remains the
same. Variations in components and controls are described in Chapters 4 and 5. The
engine provides the power for both air conditioner and heater operation. It drives the
AC compressor and the cooling system water pump. Engine RPM affects the
efficiency of both the heater and air conditioner. The slower the engine RPM, the less
capacity a heater or AC system will have.
WARNING When an AC system is operating, the high pressure side

components, fittings and high pressure lines or hoses can be
hot enough to burn your skin if you touch them. This includes
the compressor, clutch, hoses, condenser, receiver-drier, and
any control devices or metal tubing. The low pressure side
will be cool to the touch. In operation the AC system is under
load and high side pressures normally range between 150 and
250 pounds per square inch for R-12 and higher for some
other refrigerants.
III-105 TB175
System Operation
Heater System Operation

Heater and air conditioner systems both have the same basic function of moving heat.
They take advantage of nature’s laws where heat energy always moves from a
warmer to a cooler area. In a heater system there is no “change of state” involved in
system operation. The system is sealed and operates under pressure, but the pressure
is low when compared to an air conditioner.
A heater system uses the engine coolant to carry excess heat energy to the cab air.
The heart of the system is the water pump. The water pump forces hot coolant through
a hose from the engine block and through the heater core. The coolant is returned to
the engine cooling system either at the suction side of the water pump or to the
radiator.
A control cable, attached to a water valve between the water pump and the heater
inlet, is used to control the flow of coolant to the heater. The heater fan or blower
forces cab air through the heater core where heat energy moves from the engine
coolant to the air in the cab. Figure 2-9 illustrates the main heater system compo-
nents. In-cab controls, component housing and air vents are not shown.
The following heater components are discussed in detail in this section:
1. Heater Core
2. Water Valves
3. Defrosters and Ducts
4. Blowers and Fans
Figure 2-9
This view of a heater system
shows the main components
and how they are connected.
Additional heater controls, ducts, air vents, blend-air doors, temperature regulating
devices and auxiliary heaters may be installed as part of a heater system. These may
be air, vacuum, electrical or mechanically operated.
TB175 III-106
Environmental Effects
1. Heater Core
Heater cores are like small radiators. The fin and tube construction is designed
to route coolant flow for the best possible heat energy transfer from coolant to
cab air. Hoses from and to the engine are connected to the core with clamps. The
core outlet may be larger or the same size as the inlet.
2. Water Valves
Water valves may be cable, vacuum or air controlled. The valve can be either
open, closed or set part way open. Some valves have a bypass design to return
coolant to the engine. Most are manually controlled although electronic
systems are now being installed.
3. Defrosters and Ducts

Defrosting is accomplished by directing heated dry air through ducts to the
windshield. The heater system serves the dual purpose of defrosting and
heating. Controls are used to route the air flow to the windshield and occupant
areas by opening and closing duct doors. Controls may be manual, air or
vacuum.
Many vehicles use a “defrost interlock” system which utilizes the air
conditioner to dry the defrost air and clear the cab windows more quickly.
4. Blowers and Fans

Blowers or fans are used in the system to move cab air through the heater core
and evaporator. Air can be pushed or pulled through the core depending on
system design. Blower or fan speed is usually selected by the operator.
Environmental Effects on System Operation

The environment outside the cab involves more than the weather. It may be hot and
humid or cold and dry. That is only part of the condition the HVAC system must
handle to maintain an ideal comfort range. A truck can be at idle, in traffic or moving
along for hours on the Interstate at 65 M.P.H. The load condition on a trip can include
going out full, coming home empty, or driving across the Rockies or Kansas plains
during the day or night. The truck color and shape, the windows and angle of the sun
are all variables that can increase or decrease the “load” on the system. The following
are a few examples of environmental effect:
• A black cab-over (COE) with a dark color interior will be more
difficult to cool than the same vehicle with white paint and a light
colored interior. The black cab picks up and holds the radiant heat
from the sun more easily than the white one.
• In Florida or Houston the humidity in mid summer can be very high
with the temperature in the high 90’s or low 100’s. The AC unit must
remove a lot of moisture from the air in the cab as the air moves
through the evaporator fins. The more moisture on the fins, the less
effective the transfer of heat is to the refrigerant inside the evaporator
coil.
III-107 TB175
System Operation
• On a cold day the temperature can drop below zero. The engine may
run cooler so the engine coolant is cooler when it circulates through
the heater. The heat in the cab moves out of the cab faster (remember
heat always moves to a cooler area until both are the same tempera-
ture—nature’s law). To maintain cab comfort you have to increase the
flow of coolant through the heater, increase coolant temperature, and/
or move more air through the heater core.
• On a hot day, an off-road vehicle experiences cooling at a slower rate
than an on-road vehicle. This is a result of high sun-load, large window
area and often less insulation.
It is important for you to keep environmental effects in mind when you are servicing
or diagnosing heater or air conditioner systems. If you work in Denver the altitude will
affect system function and pressure. In Houston the heat and humidity may lower heat
transfer to the air at the condenser and increase system operating pressures.
Chapter Review
• HVAC systems range from simple cab heaters to multi-function
combination systems. The multi-function system can heat and cool
the cab and sleeper unit, and have separate auxiliary components and
controls for driver and passenger comfort.
• Both heater (engine) coolant and air conditioner refrigerant circulate
inside sealed, pressurized systems. The normal air conditioner oper-
ating pressure ranges from 150 to 250 pounds per square inch,
sometimes higher with a different refrigerant.
• Air conditioners have a high and a low pressure side within the system.
The compressor is the starting point of the high side. Pressure drops
at the expansion valve opening to the evaporator.
• The basic components of an AC system are the compressorclutch
assembly, high pressure lines, condenser, receiver-drier, expansion
valve, evaporator, thermostat, blower assembly, and suction lines.
There may be other controls installed for more complex systems.
• The basic components of a heater system are the inlet and outlet hoses,
a water valve and valve control, heater core and fan or blower
assembly. There may be other controls for more complex systems.
• An air conditioner system uses the “change of state” of refrigerant
inside the system to move heat from the cab air to the outside air.
Refrigerant changes from a gas to a liquid in the condenser, and back
to a gas in the evaporator.
• A heater system uses the heat from the engine, carried to the heater
core by the action of the water pump, to warm the air in the cab. There
is no change of state within the heater system.
• Environmental conditions affect how both heaters and air condition-
ers work. Weather, driving conditions, color of the vehicle are factors.
All contribute to heat gain or loss inside a cab and how much heat
energy must be moved to maintain occupant comfort.
TB175 III-108
Inspection and Maintenance-
without gauges
Click on any of these • Discussion of Inspection & Maintenance Survey Results
subject headings to go
directly to the page • Visual Inspection - System Off
• Electrical System Inspection
• Performance Inspection - Engine Running
• Heater System Inspection
• Preventive Maintenance Worksheet
• Chapter Review
Discussion of Inspection & Maintenance Survey Results

There are three reasons for regular inspection and maintenance procedures:
1. They save money in the long run by reducing down time and often
prevent more costly repairs.
2. They help to insure driver comfort and safety.
3. They add to your store of knowledge about these systems and maintain
your level of efficiency.
About half of all heavy duty vehicles have air conditioners. Surveys of AC system
owners find that over 30% of the systems are serviced every six months or less, and
another 62% are serviced at least once a year.
The survey also covered how often the different components required mainte-
nance. Figure 7.1 below shows survey finding percentages. Failure of any of the AC
components listed in the survey could cause a system to malfunction or stop cooling.
Figure 7-1 INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE SURVEY

This chart shows mainte-
nance frequency, lists key
parts and how often they
require maintenance.
Note: The above survey results may not apply to your situation. Actual
operating conditions for the vehicles you service will determine
or influence maintenance frequency and requirements.
The following inspection procedures should take about 15 to 20 minutes, longer
if corrective steps, part replacement or adding refrigerant is necessary. There is a
“Preventive Maintenance Worksheet” you may use at the end of this chapter,
Figure 7-9
III-109 TB175
Inspection & Maintenance
Visual Inspection - System Off

Your observations and the corrective measures you take may be different depending
on circumstances. The following inspection procedures are explained in more detail
below:
1. Observe the System
2. Inspect Parts
3. Check Hoses and Fittings
4. Check for Refrigerant Leaks
Use the following procedures as a general rule in performing a visual inspection with
the AC system off:
1. Observe the System

Your first inspection step is to answer the following question if you can:
• Has the vehicle just come in off the road and has the HVAC system
been in use?
• Did the operator or work order explain or describe any problems
about the system?
• Did someone else work on the system yesterday, 700 miles down
the road? Your first inspection step is to answer these questions if
you can.
CAUTION Even when someone has told you what is wrong with an
HVAC system, you should perform a visual inspection.
Always make a visual inspection before you hook up the
manifold gauge set. Never add refrigerant to a system until
you have made a complete visual and performance inspec-
tion.
2. Inspect Parts
Look at the system for what might come loose, leak, wear out or become dirty
and not function the way it should. The main points for visual inspection of the
system are emphasized in Figure 7-2.
TB175 III-110
Visual Inspection
Figure 7-2
This system illustration
notes the main points for
visual inspection.
A. Condenser – Is it free of leaves, bugs, bird feathers or mud? The condenser

must be relatively clean to work well as a heat exchanger. How you clean the
condenser depends on where it is mounted. The condenser fin comb, air hose
and nozzle, or soap and water may be used. Where possible, check condenser
mounting bolts or screws and tighten them if necessary.
Condenser failure often results from loose hoses. Hose movement will cause
fatigue failure of condenser tubing adjacent to the fittings. Make sure the hoses
are securely clamped.
While inspecting the condenser check the receiver-drier sight glass and
connections. Look to see if the sight glass has a moisture indicator that is
showing moisture in the system.
B. Components Under the Hood – Tip the cab or raise the hood. Look at the
compressor mounting bracket, compressor clutch assembly, drive belt and
pulley alignment. The mounting bracket, compressor, clutch and drive pulley
should be fastened securely, and a clutch groove (there may be two groves)
should be in line with the drive pulley. Tighten all bolts shown in Figure 7-3,
as you inspect.
Figure 7-3
Engine and compressor
vibration can work mounting
bolts loose. Tighten all
mounting bolts as you
inspect the system. Slots in
the mounting bracket are
used to move the compres-
sor clutch assembly in order
to adjust belt tension or
alignment.
III-111 TB175
C. Drive Belt – The drive belt should be tight and in good condition. Use a belt
tension gauge to check tension (120 pounds maximum). With experience, you
can feel belt tension by twisting the belt. Try feeling belt tension after using the
gauge, when you know the tension is correct. Replace belts if they are frayed
or look worn.
If the clutch pulley/belt alignment is obviously off, you need to loosen the
compressor or mounting bracket, or both—and use the alignment bar to line up
the clutch pulley with the drive pulley. Tighten compressor mounting bolts
first, then the bolts holding the bracket. The mounting bracket should have slots
or other means of adjustment to allow you to adjust the tension of the drive belt.
When you use a pry bar to apply tension, be sure you do not pry against the
compressor. Pry against the mounting bracket.
3. Check Hoses and Fittings

Check all hoses and fittings. Look for places where hoses flex when the cab is tilted.
Any places the hoses or fittings are fastened, clamped, connected, bent or secured are
potential wear points. This also applies to places where hoses are not clamped or
supported but should be (often near the condenser). All of these spots are potential
leak or damage points. Tighten, re-fasten, add, or replace as indicated by your
inspection.
4. Check for Refrigerant Leaks

System refrigerant leaks can be anywhere but there are obvious places. You can spot
some by looking for signs of refrigerant oil forced out with refrigerant leakage. One
location leaks frequently occur is the compressor shaft seal. The shaft and seal are
hidden behind the clutch assembly, but centrifugal force will throw the oil off the
shaft and against the engine, bracket or whatever is close. Check these points when
you examine the compressor clutch and mounting bracket. A solution of soap and
water applied around potential leak points works well for detecting leaks. A leak in
the evaporator may be indicated if you feel around the condensate drain hole and find
oil present.
Note: You can add inexpensive dry nitrogen gas to the system instead of R-
12 if system pressures are low. Dispense the gas at no more than 200-
250 PSI as this is sufficient pressure to cause or indicate a leak point
in the AC system. AC service procedures for complete system
recovering of refrigerant, evacuating, and recharging are covered
and illustrated in Chapter 9.
Note: A leaking heater core could also result in coolant at the condensate
drain.
TB175 III-112
Electrical System Inspection
You can feel for oil at the bottom of all connections (see Figure 7-4) if the
system is not too hot. Of course, a few minutes with an electronic leak detector
is the best way to check for leaks. Keep in mind that pressure is different in a
system at rest, so small leaks may be hard to find. Pressure in a system at rest,
will equalize at from 60 to 95 PSI, depending on outside air temperature. This
means there is more pressure in the low side of the system at rest than during
normal system operation. Just the opposite is true of the high side; at rest, high
side pressure is lower. You may want to use the detector to check for leaks in
the high side when the air conditioner is operating, if you suspect a leak and
can’t find it when the system is at rest.
Figure 7-4
This illustration shows a
potential refrigerant leak
point at the condenser
fitting.

The two stages of an electrical inspection are explained in more detail below:
1. Inspect Electrical Connections
2. Check Electrical Current Flow and Device Functions
Use the following procedures to perform an electrical system inspection:
1. Inspect Electrical Connections

First, while you are making your visual inspection under the hood (cab) and/or
at the roof top condenser, take a moment and check all electrical connections
visually and by feel. Look for any corrosion on leads or connectors and clean
them. Make sure all leads and wires are properly supported and securely
connected.
2. Check Electrical Current Flow and Device Functions

Perform the following steps to check current flow and electrical device
functions:
A. Turn the Ignition On – To check current flow the ignition must be on.
III-113 TB175
B. Turn the AC System On – This will power the thermostat and clutch.
If it does not come on, use the AC mode switch to check the leads to the
switch. You should be able to hear a “click” from the thermostat and hear
the clutch drive plate “snap” against the clutch pulley. You can not check
thermostat cycling on and off until you do the performance inspection.
Figure 7-5 illustrates a typical AC electrical system and the places you
should inspect.
Figure 7-5
The electrical system
inspection points are noted
with check marks (✔) on
this wiring diagram
(electrical schematic).
C. Check Fuses – If there is a failure and you have made sure all
connections are clean and tight, you need to check fuses—in-cab as well
as in-line.
D. Check Clutch Engagement – Since you can’t see and may not hear the
clutch engage, get out and look at the clutch. If it’s engaged, you will see
that the drive plate is against the pulley and not slightly spaced from it. If
you are not sure the clutch is engaged, look for the lead wire connector near
the clutch. Break and close that connection. The clutch will disengage and
engage again.
E. Test Blower Speed Operation – Some systems have a common switch

that turns on the air conditioner and powers the blower motor. Test blower
speed operation by adjusting this or the separate blower control switch.
Feeling the air flow from the ducts or note blower sound (speed) changes.
F. Inspect Roof Mounted Condensers – Don’t forget to inspect roof

mounted condensers and AC systems for dirt and debris. Be sure the
condenser fan(s) are working properly and all parts and electrical connec-
tions are securely fastened. The roof mounted condenser fans may come
on when the system is turned on. Like the thermostat and most clutches,
the normal on-off cycling action can not be observed until the engine is
running with the AC system on.
TB175 III-114
Performance Inspection – Engine Running

The purpose of visual and electrical inspection is to detect obvious problems and
assure AC system function for an accurate performance inspection. If you do the
performance inspection first, you could be mislead. Problem areas discovered during
the performance inspection can give you false clues or symptoms, and result in repair
errors and come-backs. The following performance inspection procedures are
explained in more detail below:
1. Inspect System Component Cycling and
Cab Temperature Levels
2. Check Clutch Cycling Under Load
3. Check Sight Glass
The performance inspection does not cover pressure and temperature sensitive
safety devices (cutout switches, fan control, Trinary etc.). Testing these devices
requires the use of the manifold gauge set for observation of internal system
pressures during tests. These are explained in Chapter 8.
Use the following procedures as a general rule in a performance inspection:
1. Inspect System Component Cycling and Cab

Temperature Levels
A. Turn On the Engine and Air Conditioner – Inspect for system
component cycling and cab temperature levels.
Note: System performance testing will be much faster if all doors

and windows in the cab are closed.
The cab air must cool down to thermostat control setting levels
before system components will cycle on and off, indicating
correct function. This is called ‘stabilizing the system’ and takes
about five minutes of operation. In very hot weather the system
may not cycle.
B. Check Thermometer Readings – In the cab you can use your
thermometer to measure air temperature at the vents. When the evaporator
is easy to reach with a thermometer probe without removing some of the
dash or duct work, use the probe to measure evaporator temperature.
When the AC unit is on and working correctly, you can see the thermom-
eter dial needle move down to about 32 degrees, then rise six to ten degrees
and move back down again. The movement up and down indicates that the
cycling clutch and thermostat, or orifice tube and accumulator pressure
switch (to the clutch) are functioning correctly. In systems with a non-
cycling clutch, this movement indicates correct function of the refrigerant
metering device.
The needle movement is called “temperature swing.” When you can
adjust the thermostat setting, the range of swing should change. For
example, from full cooling (cold) to moderate (between cold and warm),
the swing may change from 32-38 to 32-42 degrees.
III-115 TB175
These readings at the vents will be higher and temperature swing slower
and not as obvious. Also blower speed will cause the temperature, levels
to read higher (high air speed) or lower (low air speed) at the same
thermostat setting. When you measure air temperature, an electronic
thermometer/pyrometer is a great tool to have. You can easily measure
cab air temperature at several locations quickly.
Swing temperatures vary depending on where you measure tempera-
ture, and on outside temperature, humidity and altitude. The chart in
Figure 7-6, shows some examples of typical temperature variables. Don’t
forget that cab and sleeper area temperatures can vary within the same
vehicle. Also, electronic controls used in newer HVAC systems often
keep the temperature spread within a narrower range.
AIR TEMP. 70° 80° 90° 100° Figure 7-6

DEGREES F. The chart of AC system and
AIR QUALITY HUMID DRY HUMID DRY HUMID DRY HUMID DRY cab temperature range shows
you typical variables.
CENTER OUTLET 43° 40° 44° 40° 47° 40° 52° 41°
AIR TEMP. to to to to to to to to
DEGREES F. 47° 44° 48° 44° 51° 44° 56° 45°
LEFT & RIGHT AIR OUTLET TEMPERATURE WILL VARY
LEFT RIGHT LEFT RIGHT LEFT RIGHT LEFT RIGHT
OUTLET AIR TEMP. 40° 41° 41° 43° 46° 47° 48° 50°
RANGE DEGREES F. to to to to to to to to
41° 44° 45° 47° 52° 54° 55° 56°
2. Check Clutch Cycling Under Load

The following operating inspections, visual and by feel, are done outside the
cab while you wait for the system to stabilize.
A. Lift hood – With the hood up (or cab tilted) observe the clutch cycling
under load.
Note: If the condenser is hood mounted you may not have adequate air
flow through it.
B. Touch suction and discharge lines – Soon after system start up you
can safely feel the suction and discharge lines and note their change in
temperature. The discharge line will get hot (after a while it may be to hot
to touch) and the suction line will get cooler.
3. Check Sight Glass

The sight glass is the only point where you can actually see inside the air
conditioner during operation. Check the sight glass through the window on the
top of the receiver-drier (or the separate in-line sight glass). If the system is
functioning properly and cooling the cab adequately, the sight glass should be
clear (you will not see anything in it). If it is not clear when the system is first
turned on, wait a few minutes for the system to stabilize, then look again. Figure
7-7 illustrates and explains what you may observe in the sight glass. Roof
mounted condenser fans may run continuously or cycle on and off. If you can’t
tell by sound you may have to climb a ladder and observe the fan blades.
TB175 III-116
Performance Inspection
Figure 7-7
These drawings illustrate
conditions you may observe
in the sight glass window.
Note: A roof mounted condenser or AC unit assembly often includes

a roof mounted receiver-drier (and sight glass) close to the
condenser.
Heater System Inspection

A heater system inspection is really a combination engine cooling system and heater
inspection. All heater/cooling system rubber parts deteriorate due to the air (ozone),
heat, coolant and oils. They should be replaced at regular intervals to prevent
breakdown on the road. Metal parts and gaskets are subject to malfunction or
breakdown due to fatigue and corrosion.
Coolant has a limited life and should be replaced regularly. If it is dirty, the cooling
system should be drained and flushed or back flushed (using special equipment)
before refilling with clean water and anti-freeze. Coolant must be hot when using the
hydrometer to check protection (freeze-up) level. The following inspection proce-
dures are explained in more detail below:
1. Check Heater Control Valve Function
2. Inspect Other Functions
1. Check Heater Control Valve Function

Many air conditioner/heater systems depend on the heater control valve for
temperature control and positive closure. You can easily check heater control
valve function as follows.
A. Cool engine – Start with the engine cool, set the temperature to cold
and leave the fan off. As the engine warms up, feel the heater return hose.
If the hose feels warm or hot, the heater control valve is leaking internally.
This type of leak can seriously reduce air conditioning performance.
III-117 TB175
B. Warm up engine – Next, let the engine warm up to normal operating

temperature and set both fan and temperature on high. Feel both heater
supply and return hoses. If there is a noticeable difference in their
temperature, it indicates a low flow of coolant through the heater core (a
partially closed or blocked heater control valve). This could result in poor
heating performance during cold weather conditions.
Figure 7-8
Heater/cooling system
potential problem areas and
checks are indicated in this
drawing.
2. Inspect Other Functions

There are some things you can’t see or feel when you inspect the thermostat,
heater core, radiator pressure cap, electrical switch and control valve functions.
Some of these can be checked with the pressure and thermostat testers as
described in Chapter 6. A hand pump pressure tester can also be used to check
for coolant leaks. This is done by using the pump to raise the pressure inside the
system above normal operating pressure to force small suspected leaks to show
up.
Heater/cooling electrical and valve component inspection is the same as air
conditioner inspection. The controls are operated to see if they function
correctly to maintain or vary cab temperature and air flow.
Preventive Maintenance Worksheet

Please feel free to modify or copy the worksheet in Figure 7-9. Actual vehicle use,
mileage, operating conditions and maintenance budget may influence service
frequency.
TB175 III-118
Chapter Review
Chapter Review
The purpose of these brief inspection procedures is for vehicle system maintenance
and to determine if further, more detailed service is required. The uses of a manifold
gauge set, system troubleshooting, recovery, flushing, evacuating and charging are
explained in the next chapter.
High usage and operating condition variations are tough on air conditioning and
heater components. You should establish and follow regular inspection and mainte-
nance procedures to improve overall system function and component service life.
The typical inspection should not take more than 15 to 20 minutes unless
component replacement and/or complete system evacuation and recharging is
warranted. The survey results shown in Figure 7-1, indicate belts, compressor clutch
assembly, condenser and the refrigerant lines are the most frequent problem areas.
However, your own experience with service and maintenance may vary from survey
results.
Inspection should first be visual and by feel. Some of your electrical system
inspection will be done as you inspect other components (checking leads, connec-
tions and for loose wires). When you check the electrical circuit, begin with the
engine off but ignition on. A system performance inspection with the engine running
and system on really combines electrical and AC or heater system function.
III-119 TB175
TB175 III-120
Troubleshooting
& Service Procedures
Click on any of these • Troubleshooting Overview
subject headings to go
directly to the page • Understanding System Function
• A Troubleshooting Example
• Manifold Gauge Set Installation
• Troubleshooting by Manifold Gauge Set Readings
• Review of Frequent Problem Areas
• Conclusion
Can you fix an air conditioner or heater system without finding and correcting
the cause of the problem? You bet you can! It happens every day and it’s not good
for business. Here is an example. A truck pulls in off the road and the operator asks
to have his rig serviced in a hurry. He tells you the air conditioner isn’t cooling like
it should and dashes into the restaurant for lunch.
You tip the hood, and check the sight glass on top of the receiver-drier. You see
bubbles, not a lot but a fairly constant stream of them. It is obvious the system is low
on refrigerant so you hook up the manifold gauge set, purge the gauge set hoses of
air, and add refrigerant until the sight glass clears. Then you check evaporator
temperature and it’s OK. The air conditioner is repaired right? Wrong! What you
did is add refrigerant and the problem went away. You did not find and fix the cause
of the problem.
Component failure in an air conditioning system may be the result of a problem
elsewhere in the system. For example, a belt or clutch failure might be caused by a
dirty condenser restricting air flow and increasing head pressures. High head
pressures commonly create problems with other system components. Take time to
look beyond the obvious for a potential hidden problem.
Troubleshooting Overview
Troubleshooting includes collecting enough information to locate the cause of the
problem, then correcting the problem and its cause by replacement, adjustment, and/
or repairing. You begin by gathering information from the most to the least important
sources.
Starting with the most important:
1. Your personal knowledge and experience with AC systems.
2. The vehicle operator's knowledge and experience—question him or her.
3. The work order.
4. Good test equipment and the HVAC system
The routine you follow when troubleshooting should proceed from the most to least
productive way of locating the problem and fixing the cause.
III-121 TB175
Troubleshooting & Service Procedures
Experienced troubleshooters talk to the operator if they can, then personally verify
the symptoms of the problem whenever possible. They attempt quick fixes on the
basis of their knowledge of common system problems and causes when appropriate.
They know where components are located, and make repairs when they have a good
idea of what the problem is. They fix the cause or causes as well as the problem. They
are confident of their knowledge and ability.
Note: The best troubleshooters all know who to call when they get
stuck. They know someone who knows more than they do and
are not too proud to ask for help or suggestions when needed.
The key—understanding system function
The Key–Understanding System Function

Your complete understanding of AC and heater systems and how they work,
plus what can go wrong, is the key to troubleshooting and repair. We have talked
about components and system function before. Now let’s take a little different
approach in describing what happens when the air conditioner is turned on. In Figure
8-1 we have used numbers on the illustration to track normal air conditioner function.
Figure 8-1
An illustration of the typical
HVAC system. The numbers
follow the action when the
AC part of the system is
working properly (moving
heat out of the cab and into
the outside air).
TB175 III-122
Understanding System Function
When you turn on the air conditioner at the control panel (1), the thermostat (2), is
supposed to sense a warm temperature at the evaporator. A circuit in the thermostat
should close, allowing current to flow through the thermostat to the compressor
clutch field coil (3). When this happens, the clutch field coil becomes an electromag-
net and pulls the clutch drive plate (4) tight against the clutch pulley (5).
Note: The same AC switch (1) may also turn on the fan or blower
motor (2a) to circulate air in the cab. The air feels warm at first
but will cool quickly.
A belt connects the clutch pulley to a drive pulley (6) on the engine. The engine
provides the power to turn the clutch pulley and drive the compressor (7) when the
clutch is engaged. When operating, the compressor compresses and pushes refrig-
erant gas to the condenser (8), through the receiver-drier (9), and to the expansion
valve (10) orifice. When it does, it puts a lot of pressure on the gas. The compressor
raises the temperature and pressure of the refrigerant inside the high side of the
system.
At the same time, the compressor is also sucking in low pressure refrigerant gas
from the expansion valve orifice, evaporator and through the low side of the system.
The movement of the refrigerant inside the system transfers heat energy from the cab
to the outside air for occupant comfort.
The automatic functions of the thermostat (or the pressure valve on some
accumulators), and the expansion valve, help maintain pressures and temperatures
inside the system at safe and efficient operating levels. Pressure and temperature are
constantly changing due to compressor and expansion valve action, the amount of
heat energy being moved and the environment or weather conditions.
The engine cooling system fan and clutch (11), and the evaporator blower motor
(2a), move a sufficient amount of air through the condenser and evaporator. On the
road, vehicle speed provides most of the (ram) air required for the condenser to work
right. In a parked or slow moving vehicle the engine fan (or roof or remote mounted
condenser and fans) moves sufficient air through the condenser fins.
Note: Clean refrigerant and refrigeration oil should be inside the

system in the amount specified by the manufacturer. Moisture,
sludge (moisture combined with refrigerant oil or desiccant), or
desiccant particles will prevent the correct performance of the
system and may cause component damage.
A Troubleshooting Example
Remember the story at the beginning of this chapter? The vehicle operator pulled in
off the road and asked you to repair the rig. He was in such a hurry he didn’t tell you
anything except that the air conditioner wasn’t cooling. Here is the best way to handle
that kind of situation.
III-123 TB175
Use your knowledge and experience. Ask yourself what could have caused a lack of
cooling in that rig! Did the compressor drive belt break? Did a pressure switch or
relief valve cutout the compressor because of high or low system pressure? Does the
switch or valve in this type of system reset itself? Could there be a superheat switch
and thermal limiter with a melted fuse. Did someone else service the system recently
and put in too much refrigerant?
Could there be contaminants in the system blocking the expansion valve (expan-
sion tube)? If there is a leak, why and how did refrigerant get out of the system? You
know if refrigerant can get out, air and moisture may get inside as well, especially
if the leak is on the suction side of the system. Could there be a restriction to
refrigerant flow in one of the high pressure lines because of a kink? From your
knowledge and experience, you already know about these possibilities and others
when you talk to the operator (before he has the chance to leave).
The right kind of questions can speed up troubleshooting and your service work
by pinpointing the problem(s) that needs fixing. Your conversation with the operator
might be as follows:
• How long ago did the AC system stop cooling?

Answer: About an hour ago.
• What steps did you take when you noticed the lack of cooling?
Answer: I put it on maximum cool.
• Then what did you do?

Answer: When it wouldn’t cool, I opened the window and
turned the air conditioner off.
• Is this problem new or has it happened before, and when?

Answer: In the last few days I’ve had problems with cooling off
and on—this is the first time it’s happened when I was close to
a place that did AC service.
• Do you get any cooling at all?

Answer: Yes but it seems to quit after a while.
• Do you still get air flow at the vents from the blower?
Answer: Yes.
• When was your air conditioner checked thoroughly?

Answer: Before I bought the rig last May (a year ago).
• Has the heater been used recently and did it work OK?
Answer: Yes.
TB175 III-124
A Troubleshooting Example
• Have you had other service problems in the last few months?
Answer: No.
• (If the answer was yes, you should ask—When? Where?

What was fixed or replaced?).
• Finally, ask the operator if he or she has a wiring diagram for the
system.
Now let’s look at the information you have gathered from the operator and what you
know from experience. He believes the problem is that the AC system quits cooling
after it has been on for a while! You know that the AC system has not been maintained
since the rig was purchased a year ago. Because of that, there could be several causes
for the problem (lack of cooling) and there may be other potential problems about
to develop.
It is possible that some refrigerant has leaked. Moisture and other contamination
may be inside the system. You have been told there are no heater problems, but that
doesn’t mean there are none that might affect AC system operation. The AC system
has quit cooling several times in the last few days. The problem may have become
more severe than when it quit cooling the first time.
If enough refrigerant or oil has leaked out, a low pressure cutout switch may have
cut the circuit to the clutch, protecting the compressor. Because the system has not
been maintained in a year, there may be other components that should be serviced.
You could fix the probable causes, and the system might work and then break down
again as the rig drives out of your place. From your knowledge and what the operator
has just told you, you know this may not be a quick fix problem.
It’s up to you to describe the service situation to the operator. Tell him you need
to do a complete system maintenance inspection to find and correct the problem or
other potential problems. He can give you the go ahead for full service and repair
now, wait till you have inspected the system to determine cause and cost, or delay
repair until he has some down time available.
Normally when the operator can tell you what the problem is, you would first
operate the system to verify the problem. In this situation your troubleshooting (your
own knowledge added to what the operator told you), indicates the next step. You
need to do a complete maintenance inspection instead! Proceed as described in
Chapter 7. Correct any obvious problems and check carefully for leaks. Leak testing
should be visual, by feel and with a leak detector. Next, do your performance test with
the engine running and the AC system on.
Note: Don’t forget to check the heater system too! If the water valve
is not closed, then hot engine coolant flowing through the heater
core would warm the air at the same time the evaporator was
trying to cool it. The result would be the appearance of an AC
problem.
III-125 TB175
If your AC and heater visual, electrical and leak inspections don’t turn up any
problems, save time by hooking up the manifold gauge set before you make the
performance test. If you find a leak and can correct it easily by tightening a
connection, do so. But if too much refrigerant leaked out, you may have to add some
refrigerant to the system for an effective performance test. We will get into detail on
troubleshooting with gauges after we explain manifold gauge set installation and
adding refrigerant.
Manifold Gauge Set Installation
CAUTION Never hook up the gauge set when the engine and air
conditioner are running. Be sure all the valves on the mani-
fold are closed all the way (turn them clockwise). Check the
hose connections on the manifold for tightness.
Locate the low and high side system service fittings and remove their protective caps.
Position or hang the manifold gauge set in a convenient location. Figure 8-2
illustrates a good example of manifold gauge set hookup in one service situation.
Figure 8-2
A typical manifold gauge set
hookup is shown in this
illustration. The center hose
on the gauge set is con-
nected to the vacuum pump.
The manifold gauge set is a necessary tool in troubleshooting AC system problems.

The following steps are performed during and after installing the manifold gauge set:
1. Purging Air from the Gauge Set Hoses
2. Adding Refrigerant to the System
3. Stabilizing the AC System.
TB175 III-126
1. Purging Air From Gauge Set Hoses

Environmental regulations require that all service hoses have a shutoff valve
within 12 inches of the service end. These valves are required to ensure only a
minimal amount of refrigerant is lost to the atmosphere. R-12 gauge set hoses
have a valve near the end of all three hoses. R-134a gauge sets have a
combination quick disconnect and shutoff valve on the high and low sides. The
utility (center) hose also requires a valve.
The initial purging is best accomplished when connected to recovery or
recycle equipment. Figure 8-3 illustrates the gauge set connections for purging
and refrigeration recovery.
Figure 8-3
The purging setup for
manifold gauge set and
compressor service valves
are shown here.
Note: The manifold gauges read system pressure when the hand
valves are closed if the hose end valves, and the stem type
service valves (if included) are open.
2. Adding Refrigerant to the System

Now that the gauges are connected, you may need to add some refrigerant to the
AC system before you can do an effective performance inspection. However,
if leaks are obvious they should be repaired prior to adding refrigerant.
Note: Loss of some refrigerant is not unusual over an extended period

of time. Adding refrigerant is a typical procedure when the AC
system is maintained on a regular basis.
When adding refrigerant to the system, connect the center hose from the
manifold gauge set to the refrigerant dispensing valve on the container. Figure
8-4 illustrates this connection.
III-127 TB175
Figure 8-4
In this illustration we have
noted how refrigerant is
added to the air conditioner.
Before adding refrigerant to the system you should study the sight glass while
the engine is running and the air conditioner is on. Even if you found a leak
during the system inspection and corrected it, you have no way of knowing how
much refrigerant has leaked. You will not be able to tell how much refrigerant
is in there, but you can see if bubbles are present.
Then check the gauges for unusually high or low readings, or a lack of
pressure. Following this procedure, and using your knowledge and experience,
decide if it is safe and makes sense to add refrigerant in order to make your full
performance inspection.
You are now ready to add refrigerant to the system. For your safety and to
prevent system damage use the following procedure.
1. Turn on the engine and set the idle at 1200 to 1500 RPM and then
turn on the air conditioner.
CAUTION Do not open the high pressure hand valve on the manifold
gauge set. The compressor could pump refrigerant into the
container and cause it to BURST. Be sure to keep the
refrigerant container upright to prevent liquid refrigerant
from entering the compressor.
2. Open the refrigerant dispensing valve on the container and then the
low pressure hand valve on the manifold. This allows refrigerant to
enter the system as a gas on the low pressure or suction side of the
compressor. The compressor will pull refrigerant into the system.
TB175 III-128
3. Add refrigerant until the gauges read in the normal range and the
sight glass appears clear. The sight glass may not be clear for a
moment just before or after the clutch cycles on and off but should
generally be clear. Gauge readings will fluctuate as the compressor
cycles on and off.
Note: Pressures within the air conditioning system vary with ambient
temperature. A normal pressure range is defined as follows:
Low side 15–30 PSIG
High side 150–280 PSIG
If R-134a is used in place of R-12 the high side readings will be
about 20 PSI higher. For this reason many OEMs are recom-
mending an increase in condenser capacity when retrofitting to
the new refrigerant, R-134a.
CAUTION If the gauges show any abnormally high or low pressures as

you are adding refrigerant, stop and investigate for probable
cause. Never add more than one pound of refrigerant. If the
system is low enough on refrigerant to require more than that
amount you should stop and check again for leaks. Then
recover all of the refrigerant, repair, evacuate and recharge
the air conditioner. (See Chapter 9). You may want to add dry
nitrogen gas to the AC system instead of R-12 if pressures are
below normal and a leak is suspected. Nitrogen gas is sold in
cylinders under high pressure, 1800 to 2000 PSI. Be sure the
cylinder has a pressure regulating valve to control the pres-
sure when dispensing nitrogen gas. Dispose the gas at no
more than 200-250 psi, as this is sufficient pressure to cause
or indicate a leak point. See note under Troubleshooting by
Manifold Gauge Set Readings in this chapter.
4. When the gauges show normal, close the hand valve on the
manifold, the hose end shutoff valve, and the valve on the refriger-
ant container. You can now proceed with the performance inspec-
tion.
3. Stabilizing The AC System

For reliable gauge readings as an aid in troubleshooting, the AC system must
be stabilized.
CAUTION Be sure your tools and test equipment are clear of all moving
parts of the engine and air conditioner.
III-129 TB175
Start the engine and set to a fast idle of 1200 to 1500 RPM. Turn on the air
conditioner. After a quick in-cab performance test of control function, blower
speeds and air flow, set the AC system controls to maximum cooling and blower
speed on high. All windows must be closed. If cab temperature is hot (rig has
been sitting in the sun with the windows closed), open the windows for a minute
or so to let the hot air out. Run the engine and air conditioner about five minutes
for the system to stabilize. In hot humid weather or where the AC condenser
can’t receive adequate air flow from the engine fan you may have to use a floor
mounted fan to force sufficient air flow through condenser fins. This helps to
stabilize the system by simulating ram air flow found under normal operating
conditions.
When a vehicle has a tilt cab or hood and the condenser is part of the grill,
you must use the floor fan to get air to the condenser. You could tilt the cab or
hood back to normal position, carefully routing the manifold gauge set and
hoses away from moving parts. Then place the gauges so you can read system
pressure.
Troubleshooting by Manifold Gauge Set Readings

The series of figures that follow (Figures 8-6 through 8-15) show gauges with typical
readings indicating AC system problems. Each figure is followed by troubleshooting
tips, probable causes for the gauge readings shown, and appropriate service and
repair procedures.
Low Refrigerant Charge in the System Figure 8-5

Gauge reading, low
refrigerant charge in the
system.
Tip: You see bubbles in the sight glass. The air from vents in
the cab is only slightly cool.
Cause: Insufficient refrigerant (charge) in the system.
TB175 III-130
Manifold Gauge Set Readings
Repair Procedure:
Check for leaks with your leak detector. If you find a leak
at a connection, tighten it then add refrigerant as neces-
sary. If a component or line is leaking (defective), recover
all refrigerant from the system. Replace the defective part
and then check the compressor oil level and replace
missing oil. Evacuate and recharge with refrigerant, then
check AC operation and performance.
Figure 8-6
Gauge reading, extremely Extremely Low Refrigerant Charge in the System
low refrigerant charge in
system.
Tip: The sight glass is clear or shows oil streaks. The air from
vents in the cab seems warm. If there is a low pressure or
Trinary™ switch in the system it may have shut off the
compressor (clutch).
Cause: Extremely low or no refrigerant in the system. There is a

leak in the system.
Repair Procedure:
Add refrigerant to the system, at least half of the normal
full charge amount. Then perform your leak test. As an
alternative to a refrigerant, add dry nitrogen gas to the
system and then test for leaks.
Note: It may be necessary to use a jumper wire to bypass some

types of low pressure cutout switches to operate the
compressor (clutch) when you add refrigerant to the
system.
III-131 TB175
After finding a leak, recover all refrigerant from the

system and repair the leak. Check the compressor and
replace any refrigeration oil lost due to leakage. Evacuate
and recharge the system with refrigerant, then check AC
operation and performance.
Air and/or Moisture in the System Figure 8-7

Gauge reading, air and/or
moisture in the system.
Tip: The sight glass may be clear or show some bubbles. The
air from vents in the cab is only slightly cool. In a cycling
clutch type system with a thermostatic switch, the switch
may not cycle the clutch on and off, so the low pressure
gauge will not fluctuate.
Cause: Air and/or moisture in the system.
RepairProcedure:
Test for leaks, especially around the compressor shaft seal
area. When the leak is found, recover refrigerant from the
system and repair the leak. Replace the receiver-drier or
accumulator because the desiccant may be saturated with
moisture (there is no way to tell). Check the compressor
and replace any refrigeration oil lost due to leakage.
Evacuate and recharge the system with refrigerant, then
check AC operation and performance.
TB175 III-132
Figure 8-8 Excessive Air and/or Moisture in the System

Gauge reading, excessive air
and/or moisture in the
system.
Tip: There may be occasional bubbles in the sight glass. Air

from vents in the cab is only slightly cool.
Cause: System contains excessive air and/or moisture.
Repair Procedure:
Test for leaks, recover refrigerant from the system and
repair the leak. Depending on the type of system, replace
the receiver-drier or accumulator. The desiccant is satu-
rated with moisture. Check and replace any compressor
oil lost due to leakage. Evacuate and recharge the system,
then check AC operation and performance.
Figure 8-9 Expansion Valve (TXV) Stuck Closed or Plugged

Gauge reading, expansion
valve (TXV) stuck closed.
Tip: Air from vents in the cab is only slightly cool. The
expansion valve body is frosted or sweating.
III-133 TB175
Cause: An expansion valve malfunction could mean the valve is

stuck in the closed position, the filter screen is clogged
(block type expansion valves do not have filter screens),
moisture in the system has frozen at the expansion valve
orifice, or the sensing bulb is not operating. In vehicles
where the TXV and sensing bulb are accessible, perform
the following test. If not accessible, then proceed to
Repair Procedure.
Test: 1. Warm diaphragm and valve body in your hand or

carefully with a heat gun. Activate system and watch
to see if the low pressure gauge rises.
2. Next, carefully spray a little nitrogen, or any substance

below 32 degrees Fahrenheit, on the capillary coil
(bulb) or valve diaphragm. The low side gauge needle
should drop and read at a lower (suction) pressure on
the gauge. This indicates the valve was part way open
and that your action closed it. Repeat the test, but first
warm the valve diaphragm or capillary with your hand.
If the low side gauge drops again, the valve is not stuck.
3. Clean the surfaces of the evaporator outlet and the

capillary coil or bulb. Make sure the coil or bulb is
securely clamped to the evaporator outlet tube and the
insulation is in place. Next proceed with recovering
refrigerant from the system.
Repair Procedure:
Inspect the expansion valve screen (except block type
valves). To do this you must recover all refrigerant from
the system. Disconnect the inlet hose fitting from the
expansion valve. Remove, clean and replace the screen,
then reconnect the hose. Any signs of contamination will
require flushing the system. Next, replace the
receiverdrier. Then evacuate and recharge the system
with refrigerant, and check AC operation and perfor-
mance.
TB175 III-134
Note: If the expansion valve tests did not cause the low
pressure gauge needle to rise and drop, and if the other
procedures described did not correct the problem, the
expansion valve is defective. You must recover all
refrigerant from the system again, and replace the ex-
pansion valve and receiver-drier. Evacuate and recharge
the system with refrigerant, then check AC operation
and performance.
Figure 8-10 Expansion Valve (TXV) Stuck Open

Gauge reading, expansion
valve (TXV) stuck open.
Tip: Air from vents in the cab is warm or only slightly cool.
Cause: The expansion valve is stuck open and/or the capillary

tube (bulb) is not making proper contact with the evapo-
rator outlet tube. Liquid refrigerant may be flooding the
evaporator making it impossible for the refrigerant to
vaporize and absorb heat normally. In vehicles where the
TXV and sensing bulb are accessible, check the capillary
tube for proper mounting and contact with the evaporator
outlet tube. Then perform the following test. If the TXV
is not accessible, then proceed to Repair Procedure.
Test: 1. Operate the AC system on it’s coldest setting for a few

minutes. Carefully spray a little nitrogen or other cold
substance, on to the capillary tube coil (bulb) or head
of the valve.
2. The low pressure (suction) side gauge needle should

now drop on the gauge. This indicates the valve has
closed and is not stuck open. Repeat the test, but first
warm the valve diaphragm with your hand.
III-135 TB175
3. If the low side gauge shows a drop again, the valve is

not stuck. Clean the surfaces of the evaporator outlet
and the capillary coil or bulb. Make sure the coil or
bulb is securely fastened to the evaporator outlet and
covered with insulation material. Operate the system
and check performance.
Repair Procedure:
If the test did not result in proper operation of the expan-
sion valve, the valve is defective and must be replaced.
Recover all refrigerant from the system and replace the
expansion valve and the receiver-drier. Evacuate and
recharge the system with refrigerant, then check AC
System High Pressure Side Restriction Figure 8-11

Gauge reading, system high
pressure side restriction.
Tip: Air from vents in the cab is only slightly cool. Look for
sweat or frost on high side hoses and tubing, and frost
appearing right after the point of restriction. The hose or
line may be cool to the touch near the restriction.
Cause: There could be a kink in a line, or other restriction in the

high side of the system.
TB175 III-136
Repair Procedure:
After you locate the defective component containing the
restriction, recover all of the refrigerant. Replace the
defective component and the receiver-drier. Evacuate and
recharge the system with refrigerant, then check AC
Figure 8-12 Compressor Malfunction

Gauge reading, compressor
malfunction.
Tip: The compressor may be noisy when it operates.
Cause: Defective reed valves or other compressor components. If

the compressor is not noisy, there may be a worn or loose
compressor clutch drive belt.
Repair Procedure:
If you find the belt worn or loose, replace or tighten it and
recheck system performance and gauge readings. To
inspect and service the compressor, you must isolate
(front seat the stem type compressor service valves) and
recover refrigerant, or fully recover R-12 from systems
containing Schrader valves. Remove the compressor cyl-
inder head and check the appearance of the reed valve
plate assembly. If defective, replace the valve plate and
install with new gaskets, or replace the compressor assem-
bly.
III-137 TB175
If you find particles of desiccant in the compressor,

remove and replace it and the receiver-drier. Before doing
so, back flush other system components (except the ex-
pansion valve) using a flushing kit. If there are stem type
valves and you isolate the compressor, the rest of the
system must be purged of refrigerant before you can
disconnect and flush system components (Chapter 9
describes the flushing procedure). After flushing, reas-
semble the components. Always check the oil level in the
compressor, even if you install a new or rebuilt unit.
Tighten all connections and evacuate the system. Re-
charge the air conditioner with refrigerant and check
system operation and performance.
Note: Rotary compressors have a limited oil reservoir. Extra

oil must be added for all truck installations
Condenser Malfunction or System Overcharge Figure 8-13

Gauge reading, condenser
malfunction or system
overcharge.
Tip: The air from vents in the cab may be warm. In R-12
systems there can be bubbles in the sight glass. The high
pressure hoses and lines will be very hot. Don’t forget to
check the engine cooling system components—fan and
drive belt, fan clutch operation, and the radiator shutter.
TB175 III-138
Cause: The condenser is not functioning correctly or there may be

an overcharge of refrigerant inside the system. Another
possibility is lack of (ram) air flow through the condenser
fins during testing. Engine cooling system component
malfunction can cause high pressure by blocking air flow
(radiator shutter) or not providing air flow (fan clutch) in
sufficient quantity.
Repair Procedure:
Inspect the condenser for dirt, bugs or other debris and
clean if necessary. Be sure the condenser is securely
mounted and there is adequate clearance (about 1-1/2
inches) between it and the radiator. Check the radiator
pressure cap and cooling system, including the fan, fan
clutch, drive belts and radiator shutter assembly. Replace
any defective parts and then recheck AC system opera-
tion, gauge readings and performance.
If the problem continues, the system may be over- charged

(have too much refrigerant inside). Recover the system
slowly until low and high pressure gauges read below
normal, and bubbles appear in the sight glass. Then add
refrigerant (charge the system) until pressures are normal
and the bubbles disappear. Add another quarter to half
pound of refrigerant and recheck AC system operation,
gauge readings and performance.
If the high gauge readings do not change, you should

recover all of the refrigerant and flush (it may be partially
plugged) or replace the condenser. Also replace the re-
ceiver-drier or accumulator. Then connect the compo-
nents and evacuate the system. Recharge the air condi-
tioner with refrigerant and check system operation and
performance.
III-139 TB175
Thermostatic Switch Malfunction Figure 8-14

Gauge reading, thermostatic
switch malfunction.
Tip: The low side gauge needle may fluctuate in a very narrow
range compared to a normal range. The compressor clutch
may be cycling on and off more frequently than it should.
The low side gauge needle may fluctuate in an above

normal range as the clutch cycles. This may be an indica-
tion that the thermostat is set too high (someone may have
attempted to adjust the factory setting). A new thermostat
may have been installed incorrectly (capillary tube not
inserted between the evaporator fins in the proper posi-
tion).
Cause: The thermostatic switch is not functioning properly or at

all.
Repair Procedure:
Replace the thermostatic switch. When you remove the
old thermostat, replace it with one of the same type. (They
operate in a factory preset temperature range.) Take care
in removing and handling the thermostat and thin capil-
lary tube attached to it. Don’t kink or break the tube.
Position the new thermostat capillary tube at or close to

the same location and seating depth between the evapora-
tor coil fins as the old one. Connect the electrical leads.
TB175 III-140
Review of Frequent Problem Areas
Note: See the Thermostat section in Chapter 10. Fan clutch,

radiator shutter, condenser, compressor, and the newer
air and water valve control systems are covered in
Chapter 10.
Review of Frequent Problem Areas

In HVAC systems a limited number of things can go wrong. Moving parts of the
compressor, clutch, and expansion valve or refrigerant metering device can malfunc-
tion or break down from metal fatigue, contamination, abnormal pressure or lack of
lubrication. Electrical connections may corrode, become disconnected or break.
Fuses blow from shorts or overload. Belts slip or break.
Vibration from the engine or road surface can work bolts and air or vacuum lines
loose, or rub and break or wear parts out. Motors may burn out. The inside of the
system can become contaminated from moisture, air or desiccant material break-
down. Refrigerant may leak out of the system quickly or very slowly. Moisture in the
system can combine with refrigerant to form acid and attack (corrode) metal parts
from the inside. Moisture and refrigeration oil can combine to form sludge that may
block refrigerant flow.
The following problems are discussed in more detail in this section:
1. Belts and Compressor Clutch
2. Condenser
3. Refrigerant Lines, Hoses, and Fittings
4. Refrigerant Metering Valves
5. Other Problems
1. Belts and Compressor Clutch

Let’s review problem areas listed at the beginning of Chapter 7. The most
frequent repairs are replacing belts and servicing or replacing the compressor
or clutch. Heavy duty vehicle operation puts a lot of stress on these parts. There
are several main reasons.
There is often continuous operation for long periods of time. There may be
frequent sudden RPM variations when shifting gears up or down. For this
reason the AC clutches used in heavy duty systems usually have double row ball
bearings. Vibration and road shock contribute to loose or broken mounting
brackets, electrical connections and fittings. Belts, bearings and compressor
reed valves wear out.
Various compressor clutch cutout switches are used because the AC design-
ers know about compressor operating conditions. System leaks, high operating
pressures, malfunctioning engine cooling system components—all cause com-
pressor problems and failures. When refrigerant and refrigeration oil leaks out
of a system or there is contamination blocking oil flow, the compressor will be
starved for oil and seize.
III-141 TB175
2. Condenser
Condensers get dirty and the dirt reduces heat movement by insulating the
condenser. The fittings come loose or break from stress if the condenser or
connecting hoses are not secured properly to keep the effects of vibration at a
minimum.
Heat transfer efficiency and pressure in the condenser are affected by the
amount of outside air flowing through condenser fins. A lack of air flow can
mean the refrigerant doesn’t give up enough heat energy to the outside air (it
doesn’t change state). The refrigerant arrives at the evaporator as a gas and can’t
pick up any heat energy from cab air. In the cab, air from the vents is only
slightly cool or warm.
One possible cause of condenser malfunction could be the engine cooling
system. This is why fan clutches and radiator shutters are often controlled or
overridden by AC switch function. In fact, we can add fan clutch, radiator
shutters and also fan motors to condenser problems. If they don’t function to
allow sufficient air through the condenser, pressure inside the system may
become dangerously high. A lack of air through the condenser fins can raise
high side pressure and blow out the weakest point in a system, or damage the
compressor.
3. Refrigerant Lines, Hoses and Fittings

Problems with these parts may be caused by normal deterioration, vibration
damage, lack of maintenance or human error (improper installation or replace-
ment). All rubber parts are attacked by ozone (oxygen) in the air. Rubber parts
break down slowly and become more vulnerable to the effects of vibration with
the passage of time.
Heavy duty vehicle vibration causes stress on all lines, fittings and connections.
Regular maintenance includes checking and tightening any suspect line, or
hose retainers, or grommet position where the grommet is protecting a line or
hose from abrasion. Any insulating material wrapped around hoses must be in
place and securely fastened.
4. Refrigerant Metering Valves

When you consider valve problems there are obvious differences in valve
construction and what can go wrong. If a valve is clogged with sludge or other
obstruction, the result is a valve problem but the cause is contamination in the
system. Valves get stuck open or closed, although most often closed when the
gas charge is lost from the diaphragm housing in a traditional TXV. The
capillary tube can vibrate loose from the evaporator outlet tube. The capillary
can break and the small quantity of temperature sensitive gas can escape. The
diagnosis of a valve as defective calls for replacement.
5. Other Problems—Leaks, Moisture, and Adding

Refrigerant
Before any refrigerant was put inside the AC system, someone used a vacuum
pump to evacuate any air and moisture. Vacuum is really a force pulling against
all hoses, fittings and components from the inside. When the system is charged
with refrigerant, the pressure goes from minus (a vacuum) to plus pressure
inside the hoses and all components. The refrigerant and refrigeration oil are
trying to escape from the system at all times.
TB175 III-142
Conclusion
Technicians frequently add refrigerant to a system, replacing refrigerant

seepage through system connections or fittings. If the system has been main-
tained regularly (every three to six months), adding a small amount of
refrigerant may result in normal system function. However, the best procedure
is to check all connections and look for, find and repair any leaks before adding
refrigerant.
When your leak detector indicates the presence of a leak, you can’t tell how
long the system has been leaking. Finding one leak doesn’t mean there are not
others. Until you have some AC system work experience, it will be hard to guess
how much refrigerant may have leaked. If you have to top a system off with a
half pound of refrigerant or more, adding refrigerant is not the answer.
Find the leak. Recover all of the refrigerant and repair the system. The
moisture absorbing capacity of any desiccant material is limited and cannot be
measured. For that reason, replace the receiver-drier or accumulator. Then
evacuate the system for an hour and recharge with refrigerant.
When a compressor shaft seal has leaked oil and the refrigerant charge is a
little low, the shaft seal may have leaked because the air conditioner was not
used. The seal can get a little out of round from the weight of the crankshaft and
leak above the shaft. Running the compressor may cause the seal to swell and
close up the leak. The shaft rotation exerts force all around the seal and puts life
back into it. To prevent this from happening, manufacturers recommend
regular AC system operation a minimum of every couple of weeks even in cool
weather.
Keep in mind that the compressor can cause a vacuum inside the system if there
is a restriction in the system. That means it can suck air and moisture inside
under some conditions. It will pull these contaminants in through the same
space where refrigerant and refrigerant oil has leaked out.
Conclusion
What could the air conditioning problem and it’s cause have been at the beginning
of this chapter? The operator was in a hurry, but you were able to start your
troubleshooting with the answers he gave you. Problems your inspection may have
turned up are a very low refrigerant charge, a contaminated system or defective
compressor. Those are not quick fix jobs.
On the other hand, you might have found enough debris on the condenser fin
surface to boost high side pressures to an abnormal level during the hottest part of
the day. So the Trinary™ or high pressure switch would cut out from high pressure—
but reset itself. You cleaned the condenser, added a half pound of refrigerant and AC
system pressures and function returned to normal. Service and repair took a half hour.
But there was no way to tell without using your knowledge and experience. By now
you are pretty familiar with AC system problems, the reasons for some of them,
troubleshooting and repair. In Chapter 9 we will describe complete system purging,
evacuation, flushing and recharging.
III-143 TB175
MACHINE CONFIGURATION
TB175 III-144
SECURITY SYSTEM MACHINE CONFIGURATION
Security System
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Notes on Use ................................................................................................................................... 146

Overview of Functions ...................................................................................................................... 147
Loss of an Immobilizer Key .............................................................................................................. 148
Obtaining Multiple Immobilizer Keys ................................................................................................ 148
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................... 151
III-145 TB175
MACHINE CONFIGURATION SECURITY SYSTEM
NOTES ON USE
The Security System has a Registration Key and two Immobilizer Keys.
Registration Key (gray key grip): used for registra- Immobilizer Key (black key grip): used for every-
tion or de-registration of the key. day operation.
N0C950 N0C951
Once this security system is implemented, the existing key(s) cannot be used to start the engine.
Use either the Registration Key or Immobilizer Key to start the engine.
Important
• Although the system includes an anti-theft mechanism, it is not completely theft-proof as the
mechanism itself could be removed. Take special caution while parking or storing the machine.
• Since the Registration Key is required for registration or de-registration, keep it safely to avoid losing
it. If you lose it, the system may need to be replaced. Use the Immobilizer Key for everyday operation
whenever possible.
• The Registration Key and Immobilizer Key(s) will work only for a specific machine (controller), and will
not work on other machines. Keep these keys separate from keys of other machines.
• Do not use a key chain, etc. to hold more than one

Registration or Immobilizer Key, otherwise the engine may
fail to start due to an incorrect signal received by the
machine from the key.
N0C952
• Keep metal away from the Registration or Immobilizer Key when starting the engine, otherwise the
engine may fail to start due to an incorrect signal received by the machine from the key.
TB175 III-146
OVERVIEW OF FUNCTIONS
1. Protection of Illegal Engine Startup

Prevent illegal operation by limiting the engine startup with the Registration Key and Immobilizer Key
(hereafter, “authorized key”) registered to the controller on the machine.
2. Horn Alarm
If an attempt to start the engine using a key other than the authorized key is made five times within three minutes,
the warning horn will sound for four minutes and then stop.
To stop the horn, use an authorized key to turn the starter switch position to ON.
Notes
• Starter switch (key switch) operation is counted as one when the switch position is changed from OFF
to ON, then to START. Switching between ON and START is not considered as one operation.
OFF
ON
START
N0C953E
• The illegal attempt count is reset if four subsequent illegal operations are not made within three minutes
after the first one.
• If the battery is disconnected while the horn is sounding and then reconnected, the horn alarm will sound
for four minutes from the time when the battery is connected.
III-147 TB175
LOSS OF AN IMMOBILIZER KEY
If you lose an Immobilizer Key, perform step 1 or 2 below to prevent the lost key from being misused.
1. De-register the lost Immobilizer Key (without purchasing a new Immobilizer Key)
Delete the registration of the lost Immobilizer Key with the controller on the machine to prevent its use.
2. Re-register a new Immobilizer Key (purchasing a new Immobilizer Key)

Re-register a new Immobilizer Key with the controller and delete the old registration of the lost key.
For details of registration or de-registration, refer to “De-registering or Re-registering an Immobilizer Key” on the
next page.
OBTAINING MULTIPLE IMMOBILIZER KEYS
You can register up to five Immobilizer Keys with one machine, provided the key has not been registered with
another machine.
For adding a registration, please refer to “De-registering or Re-registering an Immobilizer Key” on the next page.
TB175 III-148
De-registering or Re-registering an Immobilizer Key
Prepare the following:

1. Registration Key of the machine you want to de-register/re-register with
2. All Immobilizer Keys that have been registered with the above machine (except the lost one)
3. A new Immobilizer Key you want to register (for re-registration only)
4. Clock/Timer (capable of counting 10 seconds): recommended for assured registration
Checking before Registration:

• Check that you can start the engine with the Registration Key of 1 above. If not, the key is probably the Registration
Key of another machine. Prepare the correct Registration Key.
Important: You must use the authorized Registration Key to perform the registration.
• Check that you can start the engine with the Immobilizer Key of 2 above. If not, the key is probably the Immobilizer
Key of another machine. Prepare the correct Immobilizer Key.
Important: Do not try to register an Immobilizer Key that has already been registered with a different
machine.
Notes
• You cannot start the engine with the Immobilizer Key of 3 above, as it is unregistered.
• Trying to start the engine with the wrong key five times for three minutes will activate the horn alarm
for security.
• If a key fails to start the engine, do either of the following to prevent the horn alarm from being activated.
(1) Use the Authorized Key (engine-starting key) to start the engine.
(2) Pull out the key and wait for at least three minutes.
• If the horn starts sounding, turn the starter switch position from OFF to ON with an authorized key to
stop the horn alarm.
III-149 TB175
Registration Procedure
Insert the Registration Key (see 1 on the previous

page) into the starter switch and turn it from OFF
to ON.
Wait for 10 (or 5 to 15) seconds at the ON position.
Turn it back to OFF, and pull out the Registration

Key.
Within 10 seconds af-
ter turning to OFF
Insert one of the Immobilizer Keys (see 2 or 3 on
Within 10 seconds after turning to OFF

the previous page) into the starter switch and turn
it from OFF to ON.

Repeat these steps for each Immobilizer
Key to be registered (all keys of 2 and 3 on
Turn it back to OFF, and pull out the Immobilizer the previous page).
Key.
Finished the above steps with all Immobilizer Keys No.

to be registered?
Yes.
Within 10 seconds af-
ter turning to OFF
Insert the Registration Key (see 1 on the previous
page) into the starter switch and turn it from OFF
to ON.
Turn it back to OFF, and pull out the Registration

Key.
Can you start the engine with any key (Registration

No.
Key or Immobilizer Keys) registered through the Unsuccessful registration. Return to the first step.
steps above?
Yes.
Registration completed.
Important
During the registration procedure, you may find that the key you are trying to register is a wrong key or
that you moved to a wrong step. If this happens, stop the registration where you are, wait for at least 30
seconds, then restart the procedure from the first step.
TB175 III-150
TROUBLESHOOTING
If the engine fails to start, check the following.
Checking the Machine
No.
Are the battery terminals connected? Connect the battery.
Yes.
No.
Is the battery voltage normal? Replace the battery.
Yes.
Yes.
Is the starter motor working? The machine is faulty.
No.
Checking the Key
Are you using a key registered with the machine No. Use a key registered with the
you want to operate? machine.
Yes. No idea.
Refer to “Check the Name of the

Unregistered
Key” of the instruction manual
of the office, and check whether The name on the key is illegible.
the key has been registered with
the machine in question.
Registered.
Can you start the engine with another key (Immo- The key is faulty. Use another
Yes.
bilizer Key or Registration Key) registered with registered key or register a new
the machine? immobilizer key.
No.
Important
<Proceed to Checking the System on the Machine> You may use the Registration Key to check the
system, but take care because if you lose or
damage it, the system may need to be replaced.
III-151 TB175
Checking the System on the Machine
Yes.
Is the fuse on the main harness blown? Replace the fuse.
No.
Is the antenna in the starter switch section installed No.

Install the antenna properly and restart the engine.
in the proper location?
Yes. If the restarting fails
Remove the connector (Pin 2) connecting the an-

tenna and main harness, and measure the resistance No.
Antenna is faulty. Replace the antenna.
between the two pins on the antenna side. Is the
resistance value 1.2 ohms or less?
No.
Checking the Connector Terminals

Check the continuity of the connector terminals connected to the controller on the machine and make
sure the voltage is proper.
Terminal No. Function Check Condition Normal value

5 - earth ∗1 Power Voltage Normal Battery voltage
7 - earth ST Voltage Starter switch at “START” Battery voltage
8 - earth ON Voltage Starter switch at “ON” Battery voltage
1 - earth GND Continuity Normal Continuity exists
2 - 10 Antenna Resistance Normal 1.2 Ω or less
∗1: Connect the earth to the frame grounding.
Connector Terminal No.

1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9 10
Normal Abnormal
Controller is faulty. Check the connectors and their connections in the

Replace the system. system according to the installation manual.
If there is no problem with the connections, the
harness may be faulty.
Replace the harness.
TB175 III-152
IV . HYDRAULIC UNITS
IV-1 TB175
HYDRAULIC UNITS
CONTENTS
Hydraulic Pump ..................................................................................................................................................... 3

Gear Pump ........................................................................................................................................................... 17
Control Valve (Mono-Block) .............................................................................................................................. 25
Control Valves ..................................................................................................................................................... 51
Pilot Valve: S/N 17510003~17512104................................................................................................................ 67
Pilot Valve: S/N 17512105~............................................................................................................................. 76-1
Pilot Valves (Travel) ........................................................................................................................................... 77
Pilot Valve (Swing) ............................................................................................................................................. 93
Solenoid Valve (2-Section) ................................................................................................................................. 97
Solenoid Valve (3-Section) ............................................................................................................................... 101
Solenoid Valve (1-Section) ............................................................................................................................ 104-1
Solenoid Valve (1-Section) ............................................................................................................................ 104-3
Pilot Selector ..................................................................................................................................................... 105
Selector Valves ............................................................................................................................................... 108-1
Proportional Control Solenoid Valve ............................................................................................................. 108-3
Port Relief Valve ............................................................................................................................................ 108-7
Shut-Off Valves .............................................................................................................................................. 108-9
Cylinders ............................................................................................................................................................ 109
Tensioning Cylinder .......................................................................................................................................... 125
Travel Motor ...................................................................................................................................................... 129
Slew Motor ........................................................................................................................................................ 153
Swivel Joint ....................................................................................................................................................... 181
TB175 IV-2
HYDRAULIC PUMP HYDRAULIC UNITS
HYDRAULIC PUMP
CONSTRUCTION
40 49 28 29 39 38 36 37 46 33 31 54 32 51 50 43
42
45
52
44
61
V V
34
35
52 30
27 26
13 20 17 41 57 21 22 53 60 47 66 62 67
48
9 15
10
5 56
4 18
SECTION “V-V”
63 55 59
X X 14
SECTION “X-X”
24 23
58
W W
14 25 51
2 SECTION “W-W”
3 64 12 8 7 16 11 6 19 66 65
L3D100E
1. Shaft 15. Pin 29. Case 43. Adjusting Screw 57. Packing
2. Coupling 16. Housing 30. Spring Seat 44. Adjusting Screw 58. Oil Seal
3. Collar Bearing 17. Cover 31. Spring 45. Piston 59. Backup Ring
4. Needle Bearing 18. Cover 32. Spring 46. O-ring 60. Backup Ring
5. Spacer 19. Valve Plate 33. Stem 47. O-ring 61. Nut
6. Cylinder Block 20. Pin 34. Nut 48. O-ring 62. Nut
7. Piston 21. Piston 35. Cover 49. O-ring 63. Ring
8. Shoe 22. Stopper 36. Sleeve 50. O-ring 64. Ring
9. Shoe Holder 23. Seat 37. Spool 51. O-ring 65. Ring
10. Guide 24. Stopper 38. Pin 52. O-ring 66. Spring Pin
11. Spring 25. Ball 39. Pin 53. O-ring 67. Adjusting Screw
12. Swash Plate 26. Pin 40. Piston 54. O-ring
13. Bushing 27. Lever 41. Pin 55. O-ring
14. Pin 28. Piston 42. Case 56. O-ring
IV-3 TB175
HYDRAULIC UNITS HYDRAULIC PUMP
OPERATION
4 2 1
Piston Pump
This pump is a variable displacement piston pump
with a single cylinder block, which discharges two 5
equal volumes.
3
Ten pistons (2) are installed in the cylinder block (1),
and the end surface is in contact with the valve plate
(3). The suction port C and the discharge port A of the
pump P1 and the discharge port B of the pump P2 are
arranged in the valve plate (3). On the other hand, the
swash plate (4) is fastened to the housing at a given
inclination, and the pistons (2) rotate along this swash
plate (4). L3D101
When the shaft (5) is rotated, the cylinder block (1)

rotates, the pistons (2) in the cylinder block execute

reciprocating movement along the swash plate (4),
and the pump executes suction and discharge. At this

time, the pistons in contact with the discharge port A
of the valve plate (3) operate as the pump P1, while the
pistons in contact with the discharge port B operate as
the pump P2.
In this way, the ten pistons (2) execute one suction and

discharge stroke with each revolution of the cylinder

block (1), so that suction and discharge are executed
continuously when the shaft (5) is rotated continu-

ously.
As the piston stroke displacement depends on the
inclination of the swash plate (4), the discharge flow

quantity can be changed by changing the inclination
of the awash plate (4).
Discharge volume control

The lever (1) can pivot on the pin and is linked with 11 8
the sleeve (2) and pin (3). The pin (3) is linked with the 2
swash plate (4) to change the inclination of the swash
plate.
P3 7
The force exerted by the springs (7) and (8) acts on the 6 P2
spool (6) while the average discharge pressure from 1 P1
pumps P1 and P2 and discharge pressure from pump
P3 act on the piston (9). Also, the discharge pressure 10
selected by the shuttle valve (11) and transmitted 3
9
through the sleeve (2) and spool (6) acts on the servo
piston (10). 4
L3D103
TB175 IV-4
When the discharge pressure from pump P1 or P2
exceeds the setting value, the average pressure of the P2 2 7 8
discharges from pumps P1 and P2, (P1 + P2)/2, acts P1
on the piston (9). Then, the spool (6) is pushed and
moved to the right until this operating pressure bal- 9
ances the force exerted by the springs (7) and (8).
When the spool (6) moves, the hydraulic oil passes 1
6
through the sleeve (2), spool (6), and hydraulic pas-
3 10
sage (11), and is supplied to the large bore of the servo 11
piston (10). This pushes the servo piston (10) to the
left, decreasing the inclination of the swash plate (4). 4
The movement of the servo piston (10) is conveyed
via the piston (3) to the lever (1). The lever (1) pivots
on the pin fixed on the housing and moves the sleeve L3D104
(2) to the right. The sleeve (2) continues to move until

the hydraulic oil passage (11) connected to the large P2 2 7 8
bore is closed. P1
When the discharge pressure from pumps P1 and P2

is reduced, the spool (6) is pushed back to the left by 1
the force exerted by the springs (7) and (8), and the 6
hydraulic oil passage (11) connected to the large bore
3 10 11
is connected to the tank passage. Then the servo
piston (10) moves to the right by pressure from the
small bore on its own, increasing the inclination of the 4
swash plate (4). The lever (1) pivots on the pin and
moves the sleeve (2) to the left. This operation contin-
ues until the openings of the sleeve (2) and spool (6) L3D105
are closed.
Thus, by changing the inclination of the swash plate

(4) the discharge is controlled and only minimum
pressure and flow required for the load are supplied
from the pump. This minimizes the pressure loss of
the pump. The inclination of the swash plate (4) varies
depending on the operating pressures not only by the
pumps P1 and P2 but also by the pump P3. Thus, the
P-Q curve for the piston pumps shows that the engine's
power is fully utilized (full horse power control).
L3D124E
IV-5 TB175
General Cautions
• Carry out disassembly and assembly operations in • Replace all seals with new ones each time the pump
a clean place and provide clean containers to place is disassembled, coating them lightly with grease.
the disassembled parts in. • Check each part to make sure there is no abnormal
• Before disassembly, clean around the ports and wear or seizing and use sandpaper, etc. to remove
remove the paint from each joint using a wire any burrs, sharp edges, etc.
brush. • Adjust adjustment screws only when required.
• Clean each of the disassembled parts with a clean-
ing oil such as diesel fuel.
• Make match marks on each part so that they will be
assembled in the same positions when assembled.
Disassembly
1. Loosen the drain plug (1) and drain out the oil.
1 L3D106
2. Remove the cap screws and remove the gear

pump.
3. Remove the coupling.
L3D107
4. Remove the cap screws and remove the cover.

• Remove the cover in horizontal condition.
L3D108
TB175 IV-6
5. Remove the valve plate.
L3D109
6. Disassemble the cylinder block.

a. Remove the cylinder block from the shaft.
L3D110
b. Remove the guide (3), the springs (4), the 5 7 6

holder (5), and the pistons (6) from the cylinder
3
block (7).
• Disassemble the inside of the cylinder block
(7) only when required.
4 L3D111
7. Remove the swash plate.
8. Remove the pin R and pin L.
L3D112
IV-7 TB175
9. Remove the shaft while tapping its rear end with

a plastic hammer.
L3D113
11. Remove the two springs [inside, outside].
12. Remove the spring seat.
L3D114
14. Remove the lever.
L3D115
15. Remove the sleeve, the spool and piston.
L3D116
TB175 IV-8
16. Remove the plug and the pin.
L3D117
17. Remove the piston.

• Screw the bolt into the screw hole (M4) at the
end face of the piston, and grab the bolt to pull
out the piston.
L3D118
18. Loosen the lock nut (3) and remove the adjusting
screw (2).
• Record the length of the adjusting screw pro-
trusion before starting the disassembly.
3
2 L3D119
IV-9 TB175
Assembly
1. Install the adjusting screw (2).
• Fix the adjusting screw (2) to the same length
as previously assembled using the lock nut (3).
Lock nut: 98 N·m
3
2 L3D119
2. Install the piston.
L3D118
3. Install the drain plug (1).
1 L3D106
4. Install the oil seal.
5. Install the shaft in the housing.

• Tap the spline end with a plastic hammer to
positively install the outer race of the bearing
in the housing hole.
L3D120
TB175 IV-10
6. Fit the pin R and L on the swash plate.
L3D121
7. Install the swash plate in the housing.

• Insert the bushing into the swash plate.
• Apply grease on the sliding surfaces of the
swash plate, pin R and pin L.
L3D122
8. Mount the pin and tighten the plug.

Plug: 29.4 N·m
L3D117
9. Mount the piston in the housing.
L3D123
IV-11 TB175
10. Mount the sleeve and spool.
L3D116
11. Install the lever on the housing.
12. Install the cover and install the cap screws.

Cap screw: 29.4 N·m
L3D115
13. Install the spring seat.

• Apply grease to the spherical part of the spring
seat.
14. Install the two springs [inside, outside].
L3D114
15. Assemble the cylinder block. 5 7 6

a. Install the springs in the cylinder block.
3
b. Install the guide (3) in the cylinder block.
• Apply grease to the spherical part of the
guide.
c. Attach the pistons (6) to the shoe holder (5),
and install the shoe holder (5) in the cylinder
block.
4 L3D111
TB175 IV-12
16. Install the cylinder block matching the spline of
the shaft.
• Apply grease to the sliding surfaces of the
piston shoes and the plate.
L3D110
17. Apply grease to the rear of the valve plate and

install it to the cover, matching the knock hole.
18. Install a large and a small O-ring in the cover.
19. Install the cover and install the cap screws.

• Install the cover parallel to the housing instal-
lation surface.
Cap screw: 235 N·m
L3D108
20. Install the coupling on the end of the main pump

shaft.
21. Unite the main pump and gear pump and fix them
with the cap screws.
Cap screw: 56.9 N·m
L3D107
IV-13 TB175
Checking the Parts
Parts Judgment Criteria Treatment

Piston and cylinder • A clearance S of 0.05 mm or more • Exchange
block assembly between the piston and the cylinder
block
• Occurrence of scratches, scoring, • Exchange.
abnormal wear, etc. on sliding parts
Slack of the piston • A slack S of 0.2 mm or more for the • Exchange

shoe piston shoe
Shaft and oil seal OIL SEAL MOUNT • A wear amount of 0.025 mm at the • Exchange
installation part installation part of shaft and oil seal
STANDARD DIMENSION
Valve plate • No abnormal scratches (0.02 mm or • Correct by lapping

more), wear, or sticking for the slid- or exchange.
ing surfaces
Bushing • No abnormal wear or harmful • Exchange
scratches of the sliding surfaces
Seals and O-rings • At the time of reassembly after dis- • Exchange
assembly
Drive gear and • No abnormal scratches, wear, or • Exchange
driven gear flaking of the tooth surfaces
Ball bearings and • No abnormal scratches, wear, or • Exchange the shaft
needle bearings flaking of the rolling surfaces and the assembly.
TB175 IV-14
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Probable Causes Remedy

Noise is loud. Abnormal • The suction hose is pinched or the suc- • Remove the dirt or eliminate the pinched
noise is generated. tion filter is clogged. condition of the hose.
• The suction side joint is loose and air is • Retighten each joint.
being sucked in.
• The hydraulic oil’s viscosity is too high • Replace the hydraulic oil with oil of the
and cavitation is occurring. proper viscosity.
• The pump is off center with respect to • Center the pump with respect to the
the engine. engine.
• There are bubbles in the hydraulic oil. • Investigate the cause of the bubbles and
repair it.
• The engine’s speed is higher than the • Operate the engine at the specified speed.
specified speed.
• The drain back pressure is higher than • Check and replace the drain piping.
the specified pressure.
• The bearing, etc. is mechanically dam- • Replace the damaged parts or replace
aged. the pump.
Discharge is insufficient. • The engine’s speed is too low. • Operate the engine at the specified speed.
• The oil temperature is abnormally high. • Stop the machine and let the oil cool off,
then check again.
• The hydraulic oil’s viscosity is too high. • Replace the hydraulic oil with oil of the
proper viscosity.
• The pump’s volumetric efficiency has • Replace the pump.
dropped.
• The horsepower setting adjustment • Reset the screw and lock it.
screw is loose.
• The oil level in the tank is low. • Replenish the tank with hydraulic oil to
the specified level.
• The suction side pipe or the suction • Clean the piping.
filter is clogged.
• The amount of leakage from hydraulic • Repair the hydraulic device or replace
devices other than the pump is increasing. it.
Pressure doesn’t rise. • The relief valve setting has dropped. • Reset the relief valve setting.
• The amount of leakage from hydraulic • Repair the hydraulic device or replace
devices other than the pump is increasing. it.
• The pump’s volumetric efficiency has
dropped. • Replace the pump.
The rotational speed drops • The peak pressure is generated due to a • Repair the relief valve or replace it.
when there is a dynamic drop in the relief valve’s response.
load. • There is foreign matter trapped in the • Remove the foreign matter and repair or
pilot line or foreign matter is caught in replace the scratched parts.
the sliding parts of the control equip-
ment.
Abnormal heat is gener- • Leakage from the pump is increasing. • Replace the pump.
ated. • The bearings, etc. are mechanically dam- • Replace the damaged parts or replace
aged. the pump.
• There is seizing of sliding parts. • Replace the damaged parts or replace
the pump.
Hydraulic oil is leaking. • Seals are damaged. • Replace the seals.
• The shaft surface which slides against • Replace the shaft or replace the pump.
the oil seal is worn.
• The plug or bolts are loose. • Tighten them or replace the seals.
IV-15 TB175
TB175 IV-16
GEAR PUMP HYDRAULIC UNITS
GEAR PUMP
CONSTRUCTION
1. Flange 6. Adapter Plate 11. Bushing 16. Gasket

2. Housing 7. Rear Cover 12. Bushing 17. Gasket
3. Drive Gear 8. Drive Gear 13. Gasket 18. Oil Seal
4. Driven Gear 9. Driven Gear 14. Gasket 19. Snap Ring
5. Bushing 10. Bushing 15. Buckup Ring
Gear Pump
The gear pump consists of a single gear case, inside of
which is a drive gear (1) and a driven gear (2) engaged
with each other. By turning the drive shaft (3), the
space between the case and the gears is filled with oil.
This oil is thus sent through the pump from the inlet
to the outlet.
INLET OUTLET
Y1-D101E
IV-17 TB175
HYDRAULIC UNITS GEAR PUMP
General Cautions
• Carry out disassembly and assembly operations in • Replace all seals with new ones each time the pump
brush. • Adjust adjustment screws only when required.
• Clean each of the disassembled parts with a clean-
ing oil such as diesel fuel.
Following is an explanation of the gear pump disas-

sembly procedure.
Follow the procedure used to disassemble the gear
pump in reverse order when reassembling it.
1. Remove the cap screws.

Screw: 98~108 N·m
2. Remove the flange (1).

1
3. Remove the snap ring (3) and the oil seal (4) from 4
the flange (1).
• Be careful not to scratch or otherwise damage 3
the flange.
• When re-assembling, install the oil seal using
the jigs A and B.
L4D151
4 1
T7D152
TB175 IV-18
4. Remove the gasket (2) from the flange (1).
5. Remove the backup ring (5) and gasket (6) from

the flange (1).
6
5
2
1
L4D153
SUCTION SIDE
DISCHARGE SIDE
6
5 L4D152E
6. Remove the bushing (7), the bushing (8), the

drive gear (9), and the driven gear (10) from the
housing. 9
• Be careful to keep the bushings separated and
in their original places.
• Be careful not to scratch or otherwise damage 7
the inside of the housing.
8
10
L4D154
7. Remove the gasket (2) from the adapter plate

(11). DISCHARGE SIDE
8. Remove the backup ring (5) and gasket (6) from

the adapter plate (11).
5
6
SUCTION SIDE
11
2 L4D155E
IV-19 TB175
9. Remove the rear cover (17).

14
10. Remove the gasket (12) from the adapter plate
(11). 15
13
18
11. Remove the bushing (13), bushing (14), the drive 12 11
gear (15), and the driven gear (16).
in their original places. 17 19
• Be careful not to scratch or otherwise damage
the inside of the rear cover.
16
12. Remove the gasket (18), (19) from the bushing
(13) and the bushing (14). L4D156
in their original places.
TB175 IV-20
Checking Parts
After checking the disassembled parts for dirt or
discoloration, clean them with diesel fuel. However,
do not let diesel fuel get on rubber parts. Check each
part for the following points and if there is any trouble,
repair or replace the part.
Housing
SUCTION SIDE
SUCTION SIDE DISCHARGE SIDE

CONTACT MARKS
DISCHARGE SIDE DEPTH OF CONTACT MARKS:

CONTACT MARKS T7D157E A 0.15mm T7D158E
The gear pump is made so that the crests of the gear

teeth make light contact with the housing walls as a
means of increasing its efficiency. Therefore, contact
marks can be seen near the suction port in any pump
that has been operated.
It is normal if the depth of the contact marks is within
0.1 mm. If the depth exceeds the use limit in the above
figure, replace the pump assembly.
Bushing
The ideal situation is for the sliding surfaces to have
no roughness and for the suction side half to be
lustrous. Also, it is satisfactory if strong contact
marks can be seen on the side surface on the suction
side and minute contact marks can be seen on the
discharge side.
• Contact marks can be seen on the sliding surface of
the entire bearing inner diameter and it is so rough
that it looks like it has been clawed.
• There is a large number of scratches around the
circumference of the side surface and it is so rough
that it looks like it has been clawed.
• There are marks from foreign matter biting into the
sliding surface of the bearing inner diameter and
the side surface.
Dirty hydraulic oil is one likely cause of such wear. In
such a case, replace the hydraulic oil and flush out
affected hydraulic circuit completely.
IV-21 TB175
Other likely causes are as follows.

• Excessive load due to damage to the relief valve.
• Cavitaion or aeration.
• Hydraulic oil temperature is too high.
• Hydraulic oil is deteriorated.
• Hydraulic oil’s viscosity is low.
If it is necessary to replace the bushings, this means
that the gear shaft and gear side surfaces are also
rough or worn severely, so replace the gears at the
same time as the bushings are replaced.
Gear
Replace a gear if it is in the following condition.
1. The shaft or the gear side surfaces ar so rough that
they look like they have been clawed.
2. There are cracks in the tooth roots and there is
extreme abnormal wear in the tooth surfaces.
3. None of the points coming into contact with the
oil seal should be abraded to a depth in excess of
0.1 mm.
Seals
• Check oil seals for scratches in the seal surface,
wear, deformation or deterioration of the rubber’s
elasticity. If a seal is abnormal, replace it.
• Replace seals when the hydraulic pump is disas-
sembled.
• Check the backup ring for scaling and cutting. If it
is abnormal, replace it.
Test Operation
The best method for testing the pump’s operation is to 4. Next, run the pump so that it reaches the rated
mount it in a test stand. However, if that cannot be pressure ( “II. Specifications, Specification
done, test it under the conditions it would be subjected Tables”) for 5 minutes at a time for each addi-
to if it were installed in the machine. tional 1.96~2.94 kPa of pressure.
Also, if any abnormal wear is discovered during Afterward, after operating each ciruit for about 5
disassembly, be sure to replace the hydraulic oil and minutes, replace the return filter or clean it.
return filter. In addition, during the process of raising the pressure,
1. Install a pressure gauge in the high pressure pay careful attention to the oil temperature, the pump’s
piping near the pump. surface temperature and the operating noise. If the oil
2. Run the engine at 500~1,000 rpm and set the temperature or the pump’s surface temperature be-
control valve in the neutral position. come abnormally high, eliminate the load from the
3. Run the pump for 10 minutes under the conditions pump and let the temperature drop before resuming
in (2), then increase the engine’s speed to the test.
1,500~2,000 rpm and run it for another 10 min-
utes.
TB175 IV-22
Measuring the Discharge Volume
After completing the test operation, measure the
discharge volume.
1. Connect a tester (1) to the discharge side of the
pump (2).
• There should be no mistakes made in the
tester’s pipe installation.
2. Open the tester’s loading valve and start the
engine.
3. Run the engine at the rated speed.
4. Gradually close the loading valve and apply the
rated pressure to the pump (2).
5. Measure the discharge volume and the pump’s
speed (engine speed).
IV-23 TB175
TROUBLESHOOTING

Pump won’t discharge. • Direction of rotation is reversed. • Run the pump in the specified direc-
tion.
• Oil level in the tank is low. • Replenish the oil to the specified level.
• Suction side pipe or suction filter is • Clean the pipes.
clogged.
• Hydraulic oil’s viscosity is too high. • Replace the hydraulic oil with oil of the
proper viscosity.
• Speed is low. • Run the pump at the specified speed.
Noise level is high. • Suction side hose is crushed, the suc- • Remove the dirt or eliminate the crushed
Abnormal noise is tion filter is clogged or cavitation is condition of the hose.
generated. occurring.
• Suction side joint is loose and air is • Tighten all the joint.
being sucked in.
• Hydraulic oil’s viscosity is too high, • Replace the hydraulic oil with oil of the
and cavitation is occurring. proper viscosity.
• Pump and engine are out of center with • Correct the centering between the pump
respect to each other. and engine.
• There are bubbles in the hydraulic oil. • Investigate the cause of the bubbles
and correct it.
Oil leaks from oil seals. • Oil seal is worn, damaged or deformed. • Replace the oil seal.
Oil leaks from mating sur- • Body seal is damaged or worn by rub- • Replace with a new part.
faces between housing and bing.
flange and between hous-
ing and cover.
Discharge volume is low. • Bushing seal is damaged. • Replace the bushing.
• Cavitation is occurring. • Clean the suction filter and suction side
piping.
• Aeration is occurring. • Check for insufficient tightening of
pipes, etc. and repair.
• Viscosity of the hydraulic oil is too • Replace the hydraulic oil with oil of the
low. proper viscosity.
TB175 IV-24
CONTROL VALVE HYDRAULIC UNITS
CONTROL VALVE (MONO-BLOCK)
CONSTRUCTION
8 9 4
3
C B A
D D
E E
F F
G G
H H
K K
J J
C B A
7 6 5 1 2
L3D200
1. Right Travel Section

2. Bucket Section
3. Boom [1] Section
4. Arm [2] Section
5. Left Travel Section
6. Auxiliary Section
7. Boom [2] Section
8. Arm [1] Section
9. Swing Section
IV-25 TB175
HYDRAULIC UNITS CONTROL VALVE
1. Cover 7. Cover 13. Poppet

2. Spool End 8. O-ring 14. O-ring
3. Holder 9. Shuttle 15. Plug
4. Spring 10. Spring 16. Spring
6. O-ring 12. Plug
TB175 IV-26

1. Housing 6. Port Relief Valve

2. O-ring 7. O-ring
3. Spring Holder 8. Plug
4. Spring 9. Spring
5. Spool End 10. Poppet
IV-27 TB175

1. O-ring 9. O-ring 17. O-ring

2. Plug 10. Plug 18. Spring
3. Spring 11. Backup Ring 19. Poppet
4. Poppet 12. O-ring 20. Anti-Drift Valve
5. Spring 13. Spring 21. Spacer
6. Poppet 14. Poppet 22. Spring
7. Sleeve 15. Sleeve 23. Poppet
8. Port Relief Valve 16. Plug
TB175 IV-28

1. Port Relief Valve 9. O-ring

2. Plug 10. Backup Ring
3. O-ring 11. Plug
5. Poppet 13. Plug
6. Port Relief Valve 14. Sleeve
7. Poppet 15. Spring
8. Spring 16. Poppet
IV-29 TB175

1. Plug
2. O-ring
3. Poppet
4. Spring
5. Plug
6. Main Relief Valve
TB175 IV-30
Main Relief Valve
1. Plug 8. O-ring
2. Sleeve 9. Backup Ring
2 3 7 4 5 10 6 11 1 13 14 12 3. Main Poppet 10. O-ring
4. Piston 11. O-ring
5. Needle Valve 12. Set Screw
6. Spring 13. Washer
7. Spring 14. Nut
9 8
L2D206
Port Relief Valve

1. Housing 10. Set Screw
5 3 16 7 6 1 8 9 2 1112 10 2. Plug 11. Washer
3. Poppet 12. Nut
4. Poppet 13. O-ring
6. Needle Valve 15. Backup Ring
9. Spring 18. Backup Ring
4 18 17 14 15 13
L2D207
Anti-Drift Valve
1. Body
14
2. Poppet
3 3. Plug
4 4. Piston
5 5. Spool
7 6. Sleeve
13 7. Spring
8. Spring
11
9. O-ring
15
10 10. O-ring
15 9 11. Backup Ring
12. Backup Ring
12 13. O-ring
14. Plug
16 15. O-ring
6 2 8 1 L2D208 16. Spring Holder
IV-31 TB175
OPERATION
This control valve has a structure incorporating a 4-

section and a 5-section part.
10
P2 2
T1 T2
5P
3
14
12 1 11
13 4P 16
PH PT
9 8 4 15 7
P1
5
PP
6
L3D209
When All Spools are in the Neutral Positions (2).

Center bypass passage Concurrently, the oil that passed through the signal
The oil supplied from the pump P1 flows through the land (12) passes through the signal land (13) and
center bypass passage (1) and the tank passage (2) of flows into the tank passage (14).
the 4-section part, and through the ports T1 and T2, On the other hand, the oil that passed through the
and then back to the tank. passage (15) and entered the signal passage of the
The oil supplied from the pump P2 flows through the travel spool of the 4-section part flows through the
center bypass passage (3) and the passage (4) of the 5- signal land (16) to the tank passage (2).
section part, the tank passage (2) of the 4-section part,
the ports T1 and T2, and then back to the tank.
Signal passage
The oil supplied from the port PP of the signal passage
passes through the filter (5), orifice (6), passage (7),
and flows into the pilot chamber (9) of the straight
travel spool (8). At the same time, the oil from the
signal land of individual spools of the 5-section part
passes through the passage (10), signal lands of indi-
vidual spools of the 4-section part, signal land (11) of
the bucket spool, and then flows into the tank passage
TB175 IV-32
Independent Operation
Travel spool switching
11 10
6
P2 8
9
7
4 2 5
1
3
2
L3D210
Switching the spool (1) on the right travel lever closes the oil supplied from the pump P2 to pass through the
the center bypass passage (2), and the oil supplied parallel passages (6), the head of straight travel spool
from the pump P1 passes through the center bypass (7), the passages (8) and (9), and to flow into the port
passage (2) and bridge passage (3), and flows into the 5A5. The return oil flows from the port 5B5 to the tank
port 4A1. The return oil flows from the port 4B1 passage (4). Part of the oil from the pump P2 passes
through the head of the spool (1) and back to the tank through the orifice (10), raises the poppet (11), passes
passage (4). through the passage (3), and flows into the port 5A5.
Switching the spool (5) on the left travel lever allows
Bucket spool switching

5B4 5A4
5Pb4 5Pa4
4Pb2 4Pa2
4Pa2
4B2 4A2 7 1
5
2 3 4 L3D211
Switching the spool (1) by pressurizing the port 4Pa2 tank passage (6). Also, part of the oil is supplied from
closes the center bypass passage (2). The oil supplied the orifice (7) to the left travel section, enabling
from the pump P1 raises the parallel passages (3) and concurrent operations of the buckets during right and
the load check valve (4). Then the oil flows through left travel operations.
the passage (5) and the head of the spool (1), and
enters the port 4A2. The return oil flows from the port
4B2 through the head of the spool (1), and back to the
IV-33 TB175
Boom spool switching

1. When the spool is in the neutral position
4 2 5 1
3
L2D212
The poppet (1) of the anti-drift valve mounted on the the passage (2), spool (3), passage (4), and spring
cylinder head of the boom [1] is seated by the pressure chamber (5).
from the port 4B3. This pressure is applied through
2. Raise
16 18 15
12
14
13 19
11 17 7
8
1 6 10 9
L2D213
Switching the spool (6) of the boom [1] by pressuriz- passage (17), and then joins into the port 4B3. Part of
ing the port 4Pb3 closes the center bypass passage (7). the oil through the orifice (18) of the spool (12)
The oil supplied from the pump P1 passes through the returns to the tank.
parallel passages (8), load check valve (9), passage The return oil flows from the port 4A3 through the
(10), and the head of the spool (6). Then the oil raises head of the spool (6) of the boom [1], and back to the
the poppet (1) of the anti-drift valve and flows into the tank passage (19).
port 4B3.
Concurrently, the spool (12) of the boom [2] is switched
by the passage (11) to close the center bypass valve
(13). The oil supplied from the pump P2 passes
through the parallel passages (14), load check valve
(15), passage (16), the head of the spool (12), and the
TB175 IV-34
3. Lower
20
8
3 5 1 6 9 10
L2D214
Switching the spool (6) of the boom [1] by pressuriz- Pressurizing the ports 4Pa3 and PLc1 at the same time
ing the port 4Pa3 closes the center bypass passage (7). switches the spool (3) of the anti-drift valve. This
The oil supplied from the pump P1 passes through the reduces the pressure in the spring chamber (5) through
parallel passages (8), load check valve (9), passage the drain port Dr1 to open the poppet (1). The return
(10), and the head of the spool (6), and then flows into oil flows through the head of the spool (6) of the boom
the port 4A3. [1], orifice, notch, and back to the tank passage (20).
Swing spool switching

5 4
2
6
L2D215
Switching the spool (1) by pressurizing the port 5Pb1

closes the center bypass passage (2). The oil supplied
from the pump P2 passes through the parallel pas-
sages (3), load check valve (4), passage (5), and the
head of the spool (1), and then flows into the port 5B1.
The return oil flows from the port 5A1 through the
head of the spool (1), and back to the tank passage (6).
IV-35 TB175
Arm spool switching

1. Dump
1 46 7 3
5 15
2
8 13
9
17 11 10 14 12
L2D216
Switching the spool (1) of the arm [1] by pressurizing to close the center bypass passage (9). The oil sup-
the port 5Pb2 closes the center bypass passage (2). plied from the pump P1 flows through the center
The oil supplied from the pump P2 passes through the bypass passage (9), passage (10), and check valve
center bypass passage (2), tandem check valve (3), (11), and joins into the port 5B2. Part of the oil from
passage (4), and the head of the spool (1), and then the pump P1 also, flows through the tandem check
flows into the port 5B2. valve (12), the passages (13) and (4), and the head of
Concurrently, part of the oil from the pump P2 flows the spool of the arm [1], and then joins into the port
through the parallel passages (5), orifice (6), load 5B2. Part of the oil from the orifice (14) of the spool
check valve (7), and the passage (4), and then enters flows into the tank.
the port 5B2. The return oil flows from the port 5A2 through the
Switching the spool (1) of the arm [1] causes the spool head of the spool (1) of the arm [1], and back to the
(17) of the arm [2] to be switched by the passage (8) tank passage (15).
2. Load
1 18 7 3 4
5
2 13 16
9
17 11 10 14 12 L2D217
TB175 IV-36
Switching the spool (1) of the arm [1] by pressurizing to close the center bypass passage (9). The oil sup-
the port 5Pa2 closes the center bypass passage (2). plied from the pump P1 flows through the center
The oil supplied from the pump P2 passes through the bypass passage (9), passage (10), check valve (11),
center bypass passage (2), tandem check valve (3), passage (4), and the head of the spool (1) of the arm
passage (4), and the head of the spool (1) of the arm [1], and then joins into the port 5A2.
[1], and then flows into the port 5A2. The oil from the pump P1 raises the tandem check
Also, part of the oil from the pump P2 flows through valve (12) and from the passage (13) joins into the
the parallel passages (5), orifice (6), load check valve port 5A2.
(7), and passage (4), and then enters the port 5A2. The Part of the oil from the orifice (14) of the spool returns
orifice (6) is provided as a priority throttle for the to the tank.
concurrent operation with the boom offset operation. The return oil flows from the port 5B2 through the
Switching the spool (1) of the arm [1] causes the spool orifice and notch of the head of the spool (1) of the arm
(17) of the arm [2] to be switched by the passage (16) [1], and back to the tank passage (18).
Compound Operations during Traveling
10 11
5
6
2 3
4
4
7 9
1 8
P1
L3D216
When the attachment is operated while traveling, the

passages (1) and (2) are closed, causing the pressure
of the port PP to switch the straight travel spool (3) to
block the flow from the parallel passages (4) of the 5-
section part to the passage (5). This stops the oil
supply from the pump P2 to the left travel spool (6),
and the hydraulic oil from the pump P2 is supplied to
the sections for the attachment. Concurrently, the
hydraulic oil from the pump P1 is separated into two
flows: one flow is from the center bypass (7) of the 4-
section part to the right travel spool (8); and the other
flow raises the poppet (9), passes through the head of
the straight travel spool (3) and passage (5), and
reaches the left travel spool. This keeps the travel
straight.
Part of the oil from the pump P2 flows through the
parallel passages (4), orifice (10), and load check
valve (11), and is supplied to the travel section to
relieve the deceleration shock at the time of switching
of the straight travel spool (3).
IV-37 TB175
Anti-Drift Valve
This valve is installed in the boom cylinder head line
to prevent the oil from leaking at the boom cylinder
head line so that the boom will not fall down sponta-
neously when the boom spool is in the neutral posi- 3 2
tion.
5 1
1. Neutral
The pressure from the cylinder port is applied through
the passage (2), hollow in the spool (3), passage (4),
and to the spring chamber (5). Due to the spring force
and the force produced by the difference in the poppet
areas, the poppet (1) is firmly seated.
4 L2D219
2. Raise
The oil supplied from the pump opens the poppet (1)
and flows into the cylinder port.
L2D220
3. Lower
Switching the spool (3) by pressurizing the port PLc1
causes the oil from the spring chamber (5) to flow
through the passage (4) into the tank port Dr1. This 3
opens the poppet (1), and the return oil from the
5 1
cylinder port 4B3 flows through the spool of the boom
[1] and back to the tank.
4 L2D221
TB175 IV-38
Main Relief Valve
A main relief valve is mounted between the pump
circuit and tank circuit of each inlet housing and
serves to maintain the circuit pressure at the set value.
When the Relief Valve is NOT Operating

When the pressure in the circuit is low with respect to
the set value, the relief valve maintains equilibrium.
Hydraulic oil from the pump passes through the
orifice from chamber (C) and arrives at the spring
chamber (D) and the needle valve (1). On the other
hand, forces F and F1 are acting in the respective
arrow directions on both sides of the main poppet (2).
F = P × A Fl = P × A1
P: Pressure A, A1: Cross Sectional Area
Since the cross sectional area of A is less than that of
A1, the main poppet (2) is pushed by the force
“F1 - F” to the seat surface on the left side.
When the Relief Valve is Operating

If the circuit's pressure becomes greater than the set
value of the spring (3), the needle valve (1) is pushed
to the right by hydraulic pressure and oil flows to the
tank passage (T). When this happens, a pressure
differential is generated between the two ends of
orifice of the main poppet (2), and this hydraulic
pressure pushes the main poppet toward the right. As
a result, the pressurized oil in the circuit flows to the
tank passage.
This operation maintains the pressure in the circuit at
the set value.
IV-39 TB175
Port Relief Valve

Relieving Operation
the set value, the relief valve is maintained at equilib-
rium. Pressure from the pump passes from chamber B
to the orifice in piston (4), then reaches chamber C and
the needle valve (5). On the other hand, forces F and
F1 are acting in the arrow directions on both sides of
the main poppet (6).
F = P × A F1 = P × A1
P: Pressure A,A1: Sectional Area
Since the sectional area of A is less than that of A1, the
main poppet (6) is pushed by the force “F1-F” to the
seat surface on the left side.
If the pressure in the circuit becomes higher than the

force of the spring (7), the needle valve (5) is pushed
to the right by hydraulic pressure, opening. Oil then
flows around the circumference of the needle valve
(5) and passes through the slits, flowing into the tank
passage (T).
When the needle valve (5) opens, the pressure drops

on the back side of the piston (4), pushing the piston
(4) to be pushed to the right, seating with the needle
valve (5). This shuts off the flow of hydraulic oil to the
rear of the main poppet (6). As a result, the pressure
in chamber C on the inside drops.
Compared to the chamber B side, the pressure in

chamber C is low and there is no equilibrium in
pressure. For this reason, the main poppet (6) opens
and pressurized oil flows to the tank passage (T).
TB175 IV-40
Suction Operation
When the cylinder is operated at high speed, and the
supply of oil cannot keep up with it, creating a vacuum
in chamber B, oil is supplied from the tank side,
preventing the occurrence of cavitation.
When the pressure in chamber B is lower than the
pressure in the tank passage (T), the differences in the
sectional areas A and A1 cause the main poppet (6) to
open. Thus, sufficient oil from the tank passage (T)
enters chamber B, filling the empty space.
IV-41 TB175
WARNING
• Never disassemble the valve before releasing
the pressure. Otherwise, high pressure oil will
spout out or some parts may jump out, causing
injuries. Be sure to fully release the pressure
before starting the disassembly operation.
• Do not damage the sliding surface of the
spool. Otherwise, the spool will become stuck
and may cause the actuator to be uncontrol-
lable.
General Cautions
• Since all parts in control valves are precision • Replace all seals with new ones each time the
machined, carry out disassembly and assembly valves are disassembled.
operations in a clean place. • Spools and section bodies are specially selected for
• Before disassembly, clean the outside surfaces a precise fit. Therefore, if any damage is found in
around the valves. either of these parts, replace the section assembly
• Clean each of the disassembled parts and apply as a unit.
clean hydraulic oil to them. • Be sure to number each section and spool to avoid
• Apply hydraulic oil to sliding surfaces and apply a mistakes during assembly.
thin coating of grease to seals when assembling
them.
Following is an explanation of the control valve

disassembly procedure.
Follow the procedure used to disassemble the control
valve in reverse order when reassembling it.
• Before disassembly, number each section and spool. 3
Disassembly
1. Remove the main relief valve (2), then remove 2
the O-ring from the valve.
Valve: 49~54 N·m
3
L3D224
2. Remove the port relief valve (3), then remove the

O-ring from the valve.
• Do not disassemble the port relief valve, as the
pressure cannot be adjusted after it is reas-
sembled.
• Install the valve in the same position as it was
in before disassembly.
Valve: 59~69 N·m
TB175 IV-42
3. Remove the plug (4), then remove spring (5) and
spool (6). Next, remove the O-ring from the plug.
Plug: 78~88 N·m
4
6
5
4
L3D225
4. Disassemble the arm [1] and [2] and load check

87
valve. 9
a. Remove the plug (7), then remove the O-ring 1
from the plug.
Plug: 167~196 N·m
b. Remove the spring (8) and poppet (9).
c. <Arm [1]> Remove the sleeve (10), spring 12
11
(11) and poppet (12). 10
9
<Arm [2]> Remove the sleeve (1). 8
7
L3D226
5. Disassemble the booms [1] and [2], auxiliary,

bucket, offset and the load check valves at the
three common check valves.
a. Remove the plug (13), then remove the O-ring
from the plug.
Plug: 88~98 N·m
b. Remove the spring (14) and poppet (15).
15 15
14 14
13 13
L3D227
6. Disassemble the left travel load check valve.

a. Remove the plug (16), then remove the O-ring
from the plug.
16
Plug: 167~196 N·m 17
18
b. Remove the sleeve (17), spring (18) and pop- 19
pet (19).
7. Disassemble the right travel plug (20). Next,

remove the O-ring from the plug.
Plug: 105.9~141.2 N·m 20
L3D228
IV-43 TB175
8. Remove the cap screws, then remove cover (21).

Next, remove the O-ring from the cover.
Cap screw: 8.8~10.8 N·m 21
L3D229
9. Remove the individual spool assemblies from the

valve housing.
• Pull out the spool straight so that the spool
surface will not be damaged.
L3D230
10. Remove the cap screws, then remove cover (23).

Next, remove the O-ring from the cover.
Cap screw: 8.8~10.8 N·m
23
L3D231
11. Disassemble the spool.

• Hold the spool with two pieces of wood so that 27
the spool will not be damaged.
28
• Locktite is applied to the thread, so heat the
section around the thread to approximately
200°C. 29
a. Remove the screw (27), then remove the spools.
Cap screw: 19~22 N·m
28
b. Remove the spring holder (28), spring (29) and
spring holder (28).
L2D232
TB175 IV-44
12. Pull out the plug (33) and remove the spring (34)
and poppet (35). Then remove the O-ring and
backup ring from the plug (33).
• Screw the bolt into the screw hole (M6 × 1.0)
at the end face of the plug, and grab the bolt to
pull out the plug.
35
35 34
34 33
33 L3D236
Anti-Drift Valve
1. Remove the plug (1), then remove the O-ring
from the plug.
Plug: 69~78 N·m 4
3
2
2. Remove the piston (2), spool (3) and spring (4).
1
L2D237

from the plug.
Plug: 69~78 N·m 13
12
4. Remove the sleeve (6). Then remove the O-rings 11 7
9
(8) and (9), and the backup rings (10) and (11) 10 8
from the sleeve (6). 6
• When re-assembling, be sure to put the O-rings
and the backup rings in place. Otherwise the 5
boom can fall spontaneously.
5. Remove the poppet (7), spring seat (12), and

spring (13). L2D238
• When re-assembling, be sure to apply grease to

the edge of the poppet (7) to prevent the spring
seat and the spring from being displaced. 14
6. Remove the cap screws, then remove the body

(14) from the housing.
Cap screw: 8.8~10.8 N·m
7. Remove the O-ring from the body (14).
L2D239
IV-45 TB175
8. Remove the spacer (15).

• Screw the bolt into the screw hole (M4 × 0.7)
at the end face of the spacer, and grab the bolt 15
to pull out the spacer. 17
16
9. Remove the O-ring (16) and backup ring (17) 18
from the spacer (15).
10. Remove the spring (18) and poppet (19) from the 19
body (14).
L2D240
Main Relief Valve

1. Disassemble the plug assembly (1) and sleeve
(2), spring (3) and main poppet (4).
• The pilot seat is caulked by the tip of the plug
and cannot be disassembled.
2. Remove the lock nut (5), washer (6) and set screw
(7) from the plug assembly.
• When assembling, after installing the set screw,
first partially tighten the lock nut, then fully
tighten it after adjusting the pressure.
3. Remove the spring (8) and needle valve (9) from

plug assembly (1).
4. Remove the O-ring (10), backup ring (11) and O-

ring (12) from plug assembly (1).
TB175 IV-46
Checking the Parts

Housing, • Scratches, rust, corrosion of the portion which slides • Replace
Section Body against the spool.
• Scratches, rust, corrosion of the seal pocket portion of • Replace
the part that enters the spool.
• Scratches, rust, corrosion of the port seal portion which • Replace
is in contact with the O-ring.
• Scratches, rust, corrosion of the seal portion of the relief • Replace
valve, etc.
• Other damage which could be a hindrance to correct • Replace
function.
Spool • Scratch marks like being clawed around the outer cir- • Replace
cumference sliding portion.
• Scratches on the portion that slides against the seals on • Replace
both ends.
• Spool not operating smoothly. • Repair or replace.
Load Check Valve • Imperfect sealing due to damage to the valve or spring. • Repair or replace.
• Does not catch, but operates lightly when inserted in the • Normal
section body and operated.
Around Springs • Rust, corrosion, deformation, breakage or other marked • Replace
damage to the spring, holder or cover.
Around Spool Seal • Oil leaking to the outside. • Repair or replace.
• Rust, corrosion or deformation of the seal holder. • Repair or replace.
Main Relief Valve, • External rust, damage. • Replace
Port Relief Valve, • Damage to valve seat contact surface. • Replace
Anti-Cavitation Valve • Damage to poppet contact surface. • Replace
• Abnormality in the spring. • Replace
• O-rings, backup rings, seals • As a rule, all these
should be replaced.
Adjusting the Main Relief Valve Pressure

1. Install a pressure gauge in the following pressure
sensor port.
• Control valve pressure sensor port.
“II. Specifications, Standards for Judg-
ing Performance”
2. Run the pump at the rated speed.
3. Operate the control valve’s cylinder spool over its
full stroke and read the value indicated by the 1 2
pressure gauge.
4. Turn the set screw (1) while watching the pres-
sure gauge to adjust.
Turning it to the right increases the set pressure.
Turning it to the left decreases the set pressure.
5. After completing the pressure adjustment, tighten
the lock nut (2) while holding the set screw (1) so
it won’t turn.
Operate the relief valve again and check if the
pressure is stabilized. L2B015
IV-47 TB175
TROUBLESHOOTING
The following items are a list of all the problems that compound the trouble. It is therefore desirable to
might occur individually, but in actual practice, 2 or proceed so that the causes can be eliminated one at a
3 of these problems might occur simultaneously to time.

Oil leaks from spool seal. • Seal is scratched or the seal lip is worn • Replace with a new part.
due to long use.
• Spool’s seal sliding portion was dam- • Repair or replace the spool.
aged by some external cause (bruise,
scratch, etc.).
• Seal bulged out and the cover was in- • Return to the correct shape and check
stalled in a warped state. for eccentric wear of the seal lip.
• Paint adhered to the sliding portion of • Remove paint with paint thinner or re-
the spool’s seal portion during painting. move it mechanically. However, at this
time, be careful not to damage the spool
surface or the seal lip.
• Tank circuit’s pressure became high • Eliminate the factors causing excessive
and exceeded the pressure level that the flow resistance.
seal was capable of withstanding.
Spool’s sliding is not • Foreign matter is biting into the spool’s • Overhaul and repair or replace.
smooth. sliding surface.
• Oil film between the spool and body • Use some method to lower the oil tem-
disappears due to abnormally high oil perature or if the relief valve is operat-
temperature. ing frequently, investigate the cause
and reduce the frequency.
• Lubrication is improper due to deterio- • This could be alleviated by simply re-
rating oil. placing the hydraulic oil, or it could
require an overhaul of the circuit.
• Spool is worn from long use or due to • Check the spool’s diameter and con-
pressure bearing on one side only. sider the necessity of replacement.
• Spool is bent from externally applied • Check the spool’s straightness and other
pressure. factors, then repair or replace.
• Entire valve is strained due to strain in • Loosen the installation bolts, then cut
the installation face. the installation face and edge and check.
• Valve was used at a pressure or a flow • In the case of pressure, check with a
volume which was out of specification. pressure gauge. In the case of flow
volume, check by the actuator’s speed
of movement and the capacity.
• Bolts used to assemble the valve were • Check if the assembly bolts are tight-
tightened excessively. ened to the specified torque. If the torque
deviates markedly from the specified
torque, tighten them again.
• Oil is accumulating in the cover (the • The spool is leaking oil, so when the
side with a spring or a detent) opposite spool moves, oil leaks from the cover.
the side where the spool operates. After confirming this, replace the seal.
Cylinder drops while • Foreign matter is biting into the load • Disassemble and check, then overhaul
shifting to a lift operation. check valve seat or large scratches were or replace.
made by foreign matter biting into the
valve's seat previously.
TB175 IV-48

Can’t be held in the spool • Could be mistaken for a great amount of • Check if it isn't just the cylinder’s natu-
neutral position (cylinder leakage in the cylinder. ral drop when the cylinder is held. If the
drops). problem is in the cylinder, disassemble
and repair it.
• The gap between the spool and body is • Replace the spool or replace the valve
large, so the amount of oil leaking from block assembly.
the spool is great.
• Spool won’t return completely to the • Manually Operated :
neutral position. Check if there is something interfering
with the link mechanism.
Pilot Operated:
Check the pilot pressure.
• Foreign matter is biting into the port • Disassemble and check, then overhaul
relief valve seat or the anti-cavitation or replace.
valve seat and oil is bypassing. Or a seat
is damaged.
The load won’t move. • Foreign matter is biting into the relief • Disassemble and check, then overhaul
(Pressure won’t increase.) valve seat and oil is bypassing. Or the or replace.
seat is damaged.
• The relief valve’s adjustment screw is • Try tightening the adjustment screw. If
loose. it is loose, correct the setting and tighten
the lock nut securely.
• Foreign matter is biting into the port • Disassemble and check, then overhaul
relief valve seat or the anti-cavitation or replace.
valve seat and oil is bypassing. Or a seat
is damaged.
• Spool stroke is not the specified stroke. • Manually Operated:
Check if there is something interfering
with the link mechanism. Check if a pin
or a pin hole in the link connection is
worn.
Pilot Operated:
Check the pilot pressure.
• Pump is damaged and no oil is dis- • Check if the pump is abnormal or not. If
charged. the pump is bad, replace it. Check if the
cause of the abnormality is air being
sucked in, deterioration of hydraulic oil
or shafts not centered, etc.
Load doesn’t move. (Pres- • The load is too heavy. • Compare with an object of the specified
sure rises.) weight.
• Mechanical resistance of connecting • Check and replenish hydraulic oil, etc.,
parts is great regardless of the hydraulic modify or repair.
pressure in the operating unit.
• A large piece of foreign matter is trapped • Find the affected place and repair it.
in the circuit or a pipe is bent, causing
great resistance.
• Spool stroke is not the specified stroke. • Check if there is something interfering
with the link mechanism. Check if a pin
or a pin hole in the link connection is
worn or not.
IV-49 TB175
TB175 IV-50
CONTROL VALVES HYDRAULIC UNITS
CONTROL VALVES
CONSTRUCTION
1. Nut 8. Port Relief Valve

2. Tie Rod 9. Spacer Section
3. Slew Flow Control Section Assembly 10. Slow Slew Speed Adjusting Valve
4. Dozer Blade Section Assembly 11. Auxiliary Section Assembly
5. Slew Section Assembly 12. Port Relief Valve
6. Outlet Housing 13. High Flow Section Assembly
7. Main Relief Valve
IV-51 TB175
HYDRAULIC UNITS CONTROL VALVES
Slew Flow Control Section

1. Screw
2. Sleeve
3. Pin
4. O-ring
5. Piston
6. Spring Holder
7. Spring
8. Cover
9. O-ring
10. Cover
11. O-ring
12. Cap Screw
13. O-ring
Dozer Blade Section

1. Screw
2. Spring Holder
3. Spring
4. Cover
5. Seal Holder
6. Load Check Valve
7. Spring
8. Wiper
9. O-ring
10. O-ring
Slew Section
1. Cover
2. Screw
3. Spring Holder
4. Spring
5. Cover
6. Load Check Valve
7. Spring
8. O-ring
9. O-ring
TB175 IV-52
Auxiliary Section
1. Cover
2. Screw
3. Spring Holder
4. Spring
5. Cover
6. Load Check Valve
7. Spring
8. O-ring
9. O-ring
Outlet Housing
1. Filter
2. Orifice
Spacer Section
1. Plug
2. Adjusting Screw
3. Nut
4. O-ring
5. O-ring
6. O-ring
IV-53 TB175
High Flow Section Assembly

1. Cover
2. Screw
3. Spring Holder
4. Spring
5. Cover
6. Load Check Valve
7. Spring
8. O-ring
9. O-ring
10. Plug
11. O-ring
12. Plug
13. O-ring
14. Plug
15. O-ring
Main Relief Valve
1. Housing 9. Lock Nut

2. Plug 10. Spring
3. Sleeve 11. Spring
4. Main Poppet 12. O-ring
5. Seat 13. Backup Ring
6. Needle Valve 14. O-ring
7. Adjusting Screw 15. O-ring
8. Washer 16. O-ring
Port Relief Valve
1. Housing 11. Lock Nut

2. Plug 12. O-ring
3. Sleeve 13. Backup Ring
4. Main Poppet 14. O-ring
5. Piston 15. Backup Ring
8. Spring 18. Wave Washer
9. Adjusting Screw 19. O-ring
10. Washer
TB175 IV-53-1
IV-54
Port Relief Valve
1. Housing
2. Adjusting Screw
3. Poppet
4. Spring
5. Lock Nut
6. O-ring
7. O-ring
IV-55
IV-54 TB175
OPERATION
When the Spool is in the Neutral Position

When the control valve spool is not moving, hydrau-
lic oil flows through the center bypass passage (1) and
then through the tank passage (T) in the arrow direc-
tion, returning to the tank.
When the Spool is Actuated

Explanation is given for the case where the spool is
moved to the right.
When the spool (2) is moved to the right, the center
bypass passage (3) is closed and hydraulic oil entering
from the pump passes through the load check valve
(5) from the parallel passage (4), flowing from the A
port to the actuator. On the other hand, oil returning
from the B port flows through the tank circuit (T) and
returns to the tank.
Load Check Valve

A load check valve (5) is included in each section
except the travel (right, left) sections.
This valve prevents oil from flowing backward due to
the load pressure (C) from the actuator port during
switching of the spool.
TB175 IV-55
IV-56
High Flow
When the solenoid (1) is powered on, the pilot pres-

sure from the pilot valve (2) operates the spool of the
auxiliary hydraulic section of the control valve (3) to
let the hydraulic oil from the pump P2 flow into the
auxiliary hydraulic (A). The pilot pressure is led to the
port a3 of the control valve (high flow) (4) to operate
the spool of the control valve (high flow) (4) and to let
the hydraulic oil from the pump P3 flow to the
auxiliary hydraulics (A). This will combine the hy-
draulic oil flows from the pump P2 and the pump 3
together.
Slew Flow Control Function

This function switches the quantity of hydraulic oil
flowing to the slew motor to change the slewing speed
between normal and slow. It also keeps the flow to the
motor steady even when the supply pressure changes
during slow speed slewing.
Normal speed mode

When there is no pilot pressure at port FC, spool (1),
push rod (2) and piston (3) are positioned at the left
side by spring (4). In addition, pre-choke pressure P1
is led to the left side of spool (1) through pilot hole (5)
and post-choke pressure P2 is led to the right side of
spool (1) through pilot hole (6). At this time, all the oil
supplied from port P3 flows to the slew motor.
IV-57
IV-56 TB175
Slow speed mode

When the pilot pressure reaches port FC, piston (3)
moves to the right side, push rod (2) and spool (1) also
move, and the difference between pre-choke pressure
P1 and post-choke pressure P2 at spool (1) works to
maintain a constant pressure (PC). Part of the hydrau-
lic oil supplied from port P3 passes through the
control orifice (7) and flows to the slew motor, and the
remaining oil flows to tank port T2. The pressure at
port P3 (PS) at this time increases, and when the flow
increases, the difference in pressure between P1 and
P2 increases, so spool (1) moves to the right side, the
control orifice (7) is choked, the pressure difference
[P1 – P2] is kept at PC, and the flow to the slew motor
does not increase.
Inversely, when the pressure (PS) at port P3 de-

creases, the difference in pressure between P1 and P2
decreases, so spool (1) is moved to the left side by
spring (4) until the pressure difference reaches PC and
orifice (7) opens, so the flow to the slew motor does
not decrease.
In this way, only a specific quantity of the oil supplied
flows to the slew motor even when the supply pres-
sure changes, the remaining being release to tank port
T2. This makes it possible to slew in the slow speed
mode with a slow flow.
Main Relief Valve

A main relief valve is mounted between the pump
circuit and tank circuit of each inlet housing and
serves to maintain the circuit pressure at the set value.
When the Relief Valve is NOT Operating

the set value, the relief valve maintains equilibrium.
Hydraulic oil from the pump passes through the
orifice from chamber (C) and arrives at the spring
chamber (D) and the needle valve (1). On the other
hand, forces F and F1 are acting in the respective
arrow directions on both sides of the main poppet (2).
F = P × A Fl = P × A1
P: Pressure A, A1: Cross Sectional Area
Since the cross sectional area of A is less than that of
A1, the main poppet (2) is pushed by the force
“F1 - F” to the seat surface on the left side.
TB175 IV-56-1
IV-58
When the Relief Valve is Operating
If the circuit's pressure becomes greater than the set
value of the spring (3), the needle valve (1) is pushed
to the right by hydraulic pressure and oil flows to the
tank passage (T). When this happens, a pressure
differential is generated between the two ends of
orifice of the main poppet (2), and this hydraulic
pressure pushes the main poppet toward the right. As
a result, the pressurized oil in the circuit flows to the
tank passage.
This operation maintains the pressure in the circuit at
the set value.
Port Relief Valve

A port relief valve is located between the actuator port
and the tank circuit and when abnormal pressure due
to shock pressure or external pressure generated when
the actuator port is suddenly blocked by the spool or
when there is an overload occurs, these valves act to
protect the actuator.
Relieving Operation
the set value, the relief valve is maintained at equilib-
rium. Pressure from the pump passes from chamber B
to the orifice in piston (4), then reaches chamber C and
the needle valve (5). On the other hand, forces F and
F1 are acting in the arrow directions on both sides of
the main poppet (6).
F = P × A F1 = P × A1
P: Pressure A,A1: Sectional Area
Since the sectional area of A is less than that of A1, the
main poppet (6) is pushed by the force “F1-F” to the
seat surface on the left side.
If the pressure in the circuit becomes higher than the

force of the spring (7), the needle valve (5) is pushed
to the right by hydraulic pressure, opening. Oil then
flows around the circumference of the needle valve
(5) and passes through the slits, flowing into the tank
passage (T).
When the needle valve (5) opens, the pressure drops

on the back side of the piston (4), pushing the piston
(4) to be pushed to the right, seating with the needle
valve (5). This shuts off the flow of hydraulic oil to the
rear of the main poppet (6). As a result, the pressure
in chamber C on the inside drops.
IV-59
IV-57 TB175
Compared to the chamber B side, the pressure in

chamber C is low and there is no equilibrium in
pressure. For this reason, the main poppet (6) opens
and pressurized oil flows to the tank passage (T).
Suction Operation
When the cylinder is operated at high speed, and the
supply of oil cannot keep up with it, creating a vacuum
in chamber B, oil is supplied from the tank side,
preventing the occurrence of cavitation.
When the pressure in chamber B is lower than the
pressure in the tank passage (T), the differences in the
sectional areas A and A1 cause the main poppet (6) to
open. Thus, sufficient oil from the tank passage (T)
enters chamber B, filling the empty space.
For Auxiliary
The figure at right shows when hydraulic pressure
arrives at chamber A from the actuator port. If this
pressure becomes stronger than the set value of the
spring (1), it pushes the poppet (2) to the right side and
pressurized fluid from the actuator port flows to the
tank passage.
TB175 IV-58
IV-60
General Cautions
• Since all parts in control valves are precision • Replace all seals with new ones each time the
machined, carry out disassembly and assembly valves are disassembled.
operations in a clean place. • Spools and section bodies are specially selected for
• Before disassembly, clean the outside surfaces a precise fit. Therefore, if any damage is found in
around the valves. either of these parts, replace the section assembly
• Clean all disassembled parts in cleaning solvent. as a unit.
Use a lint free cloth, or air dry the parts. • Be sure to number each section and spool to avoid
• Apply hydraulic oil to sliding surfaces and apply a mistakes during assembly.
thin coating of grease to seals when assembling • Do not turn adjusting screws if not required.
them.
Following is an explanation of the control valve

disassembly procedure.
Follow the procedure used to disassemble the control
• Before disassembly, number each section and spool.
Disassembly
Valve Assembly
1. Loosen the nuts and remove the tie rods, then
remove the sections.
Nut: 19.0 N·m
2. Remove the O-ring.

• The mating surfaces are metal seals, so be
careful not to scratch, bruise or otherwise dam-
age them.
3. Remove the main relief valves and the port relief

valves, then remove the O-rings from the relief
valves.
• Do not disassemble the relief valves unless it is
necessary.
• When using a spanner or adjustable wrench, be
sure to attach it in the place shown in the figure
at right.
Relief valve: 68~78.5 N·m
IV-61
IV-59 TB175
4. Remove the load check valve.

• Remove the spring (3), then remove the poppet
(4).
Manually Operated Section

1. Remove the cap screws (5), the cover (6) and the
spool assembly (7).
Cap screw: 7.3 N·m
2. Loosen the screw (8) from the spool assembly (7).

Screw: 5.2 N·m
3. Remove the spring holder (9), spring (10), and

spring holder (9).
TB175 IV-60
IV-62
4. Remove the seal holder (12), then remove the
backup ring (13) and O-ring (14).
5. Remove the screws on the spool yoke end side of

the section, then remove the seal holder, backup
ring and O-ring.
Screw: 2.5 N·m
Pilot Operated Section

1. Take out the cap screw (5) and remove the cover
(15), then remove the O-ring (16) from the cover
(15).
Cap screw: 7.3 N·m
2. Remove the spool from the section.
IV-63
IV-61 TB175
3. Take out the screw (17) and remove the spring

holder (18), spring (19) and spring holder (18).
Screw: 4.9 N·m
4. Take out the cap screws (5) and remove the cover
(21).
5. Remove the O-ring (16) from the cover (21).

Cap screw: 7.3 N·m
Disassembling the Slew Flow Control Block

1. Remove cap screws (1), then remove cover (2),
spring (3), spring holder (4) and spool (5).
Cap screw: 9.8 N·m
2. Remove O-ring (6) from cover (2).
3. From the opposite side of the block, remove cap

screws (7), then remove cover (8), piston (9), pin
(10) and sleeve (11).
Cap screw: 9.8 N·m
4. Remove O-ring (12) from cover (8).
5. Remove O-ring (13) from sleeve (11).
TB175 IV-62
IV-64
Main Relief Valve
1. Remove the plug (1) from the housing (2).
Plug: 49~54 N·m
2. Remove the O-ring (3) from the plug (1).
3. Remove the sleeve (4) from the plug (1) and

remove the spring (5) and main poppet (6) from
the sleeve (4).
4. Remove the O-ring (7) and backup ring (8) from

the seat (9).
5. Remove the lock nut (10), washer (11) and adjust-

ing screw (12) from the plug (1), then remove the
O-ring (13) from the adjusting screw (12).
• During assembly, after installing the adjusting
screw (12), lock the lock nut (10) temporarily,
then tighten it after adjusting the pressure.
Lock nut: 27~31 N·m
6. Remove the spring (14) and needle valve (15).
IV-65
IV-63 TB175
Checking the Parts

Housing, • Scratches, rust, corrosion of the portion which slides • Replace
Section Body against the spool.
• Scratches, rust, corrosion of the seal pocket portion of • Replace
the part that enters the spool.
• Scratches, rust, corrosion of the port seal portion which • Replace
is in contact with the O-ring.
• Scratches, rust, corrosion of the seal portion of the relief • Replace
valve, etc.
• Other damage which could be a hindrance to correct • Replace
function.
Spool • Scratch marks like being clawed around the outer cir- • Replace
cumference sliding portion.
• Scratches on the portion that slides against the seals on • Replace
both ends.
• Spool not operating smoothly. • Repair or replace.
Load Check Valve • Imperfect sealing due to damage to the valve or spring. • Repair or replace.
• Does not catch, but operates lightly when inserted in the • Normal
section body and operated.
Around Springs • Rust, corrosion, deformation, breakage or other marked • Replace
damage to the spring, holder or cover.
Around Spool Seal • Oil leaking to the outside. • Repair or replace.
• Rust, corrosion or deformation of the seal holder. • Repair or replace.
Main Relief Valve, • External rust, damage. • Replace
Port Relief Valve • Damage to valve seat contact surface. • Replace
• Damage to poppet contact surface. • Replace
• Abnormality in the spring. • Replace
• O-rings, backup rings, seals • As a rule, all these
should be replaced.
Adjusting the Main Relief Valve Pressure

“II. Specifications, Standards for Judging Per-
formance”
TB175 IV-64
IV-66
Adjusting The Slow Slew Speed Adjusting
Valve
The slow slew speed can be adjusted in the range of
38% to 71%. The slow slew speed has been set to 71%
at the factory. (The right figure shows the setting at the
factory.)
• Adjustable distance A: 3 mm
1. Loosen the lock nut (2) and turn the set screw (1)
to fine adjust the slew speed.
Turning to the left will reduce the speed.
Turning to the right will increase the speed.
2. Upon completion of the adjustment, tighten the
lock nut while holding down the set screw to
prevent it from turning.
3. Operate the valve again to confirm that the set
screw is stable.
TROUBLESHOOTING
“IV-48~49”
IV-67
IV-65 TB175
TB175 IV-66
IV-68
PILOT VALVE HYDRAULIC UNITS
PILOT VALVE: S/N 17510003~17512104
CONSTRUCTION
1. Casing 10. Spool 19. Washer 2

2. Port Plate 11. Plug 20. Spring
3. Seal Washer 12. Push Rod 21. Spring
4. O-ring 13. Push Rod 22. Spring
5. Cap Screw 14. Seal 23. Lock Nut
6. Spring Pin 15. O-ring 24. Joint
7. Bushing 16. Washer 1 25. Disc
8. Plate 17. Spring Seat 26. Adjusting Nut
9. Spool 18. Spring Seat
IV-67 TB175
HYDRAULIC UNITS PILOT VALVE
OPERATION
The pilot valve casing contains a vertical shaft hole

with a reducing valve incorporated into it. When the
handle is tilted, the push rod and spring seat are
pushed down changing the secondary pressure spring’s
pressure.
The casing provides the inlet port P (the primary

pressure) and the tank port T. The secondary pressure
commensurate with the variation of the operation
angle of the handle (1) is taken out through the output
ports A and B below the vertical shaft hole. The
secondary pressure functions as the pilot pressure to
actuate the spool of the control valve (2).
When the Handle (1) is at the Neutral Position:

The force of the spring (3) for setting the secondary
pressure that determines the output pressure of the
pilot valve is not conveyed to the spool (4). Therefore,
the spool (4) is pushed up by the return spring (5), and
the output ports A and B are connected with the tank
port T, making the pressures in the ports A and B equal
to the pressure in the tank port T.
When the Handle (1) is Tilted:

When the handle (1) is tilted and the push rod (6) is
pushed, the spool (4) moves downward and the input
port P is connected with the output port A. Then, the
oil from the pilot pump flows into the output port A,
generating a pressure.
When the Handle (1) is Kept at a Certain Position:

When the pressure in the output port A increases to the
level equivalent to the force of the spring (3) set by
inclination the handle (1), the hydraulic pressure
balances with the spring force. When the pressure in
the output port A becomes higher than the set spring
force, the output port A and the input port P close
while the output port B and the tank port T open.
When the pressure in the output port A becomes lower
than the set spring force, the output port A and the
input port P open while the output port B and the tank
port T close. Thus, the secondary pressure is always
kept constant.
TB175 IV-68
Table of Special Tools

NAME, DIMENSION Q’ty NAME, DIMENSION Q’ty
INSTALLATION JIG (A) INSTALLATION JIG (B)
A B
0.5 × 15°
42
R12
25
17
R4 C0.5
Ø26.5
Ø30
Ø25
Ø21
Ø28
23.5
Ø19
12
1 2
15
.2
9.5
R5
19 C0.5
50 13
65 10.4 4
14.5
MATERIAL A; S45C
MATERIAL B; SCM415N WITH CEMENTATION HARDENING MATERIAL B; SCM415N WITH CEMENTATION HARDENING
Y1-D302E Y1-D303E
General Cautions
• Since all parts in the pilot valve are precision • Replace all seals with new ones each time the pilot
machined, carry out disassembly and reassembly valve is disassembled.
operations in a clean place and take special care not • During assembly, remove all the foreign matter
to scratch the parts. from each part and check them to make sure there
• Before disassembly, clean the outside surfaces of are no burrs, bruises using or other marks on them.
the pilot valve. Remove all burrs and bruises using an oil stone.
• Clean each of the disassembled parts and apply • Apply thin coating of grease to seals when assem-
clean hydraulic oil to them. bling them.
Disassembly
1. Remove the lock nut and the adjust nut (1), then
remove the disc (2).
• Using copper or lead plates, fasten the valve in
a vise.
2. Remove the joint (3), then remove the plate (4).

• Use installation jigs (A) and (B).
IV-69 TB175
3. Take out the plug (5) then remove the push rod (6)
from the plug (5).
• If the plug is difficult to remove, use (–) screw
driver to remove it.
• Be careful not to let the plug fly out from the
spring’s force.
4. Remove the O-ring (7) and seal (8) from the plug.
5. Remove the reducing valve (12) and spring (13).

• Make match marks on the reducing valve and
casing hole so they can be placed in the same
position when they are reassembled.
6. Disassembled the reducing valve.

a. Remove washer 1.
• Stand the valve on a flat work bench with the
bottom of the spool down, then push the
spring seat down. (It cannot be pushed down
more than 6 mm.)
TB175 IV-70
b. Remove the spring seat (14), spring (15) and
washer 2 (16) from the spool (17).
7. Take out the cap screws.
8. Remove the port plate (18), O-ring (19) and

bushing (20) from the casing.
IV-71 TB175
Assembly
1. Fit the bushing (20) and O-ring (19), then install
the port plate (18).
• Align the positions of the spring pin (21) and
the casing hole.
2. Install the seal washer and cap screws.

Cap screw: 29.4 ±2.9 N·m
3. Assemble the reducing valve (12).

a. Install the washer 2 (16), spring (15) and spring
seat (14) on the spool (17).
b. Install washer 1.
more than 6 mm.)
• Hook the head of the spool with the sharp
edge of washer 1.
TB175 IV-72
4. Install the spring (13) and reducing valve (12).
• Install them in the positions they were in be-
fore disassembly.
5. Install the O-ring (7) and seal (8) in the plug (5).
6. Install the push rod (9) in the plug (5).

• Apply hydraulic oil to the push rod.
7. Install the plug (5) and plate (4), then install the
joint.
• Use installation jigs (A) and (B) to install the
joint.
Joint: 47.1 ±2.9 N·m
IV-73 TB175
8. Install the disc (2), the adjust nut (1) and the lock
nut.
• Tighten the adjust nut to the point where all 4
push rods are uniformly making contact.
• During tightening, the disc should not be
moved.
Adjust Nut: 68.6 ±4.9 N·m
Lock Nut: 49 ±3.4 N·m
9. Apply grease to the contact surfaces of the joint

rotating portion, the disc and the push rod.
TB175 IV-74
Checking the Parts

O-ring  • Replace
Seal  • Replace
Seal Washer  • Replace
Spool • Wear on sliding portions is 10 µm or greater compared to non- • Replace
sliding portions
• Scratches on sliding portions • Replace
• Spool doesn’t move smoothly • Repair or replace
Push Rod • Front end is worn 1 mm or more • Replace
• Scratches in the sliding portion • Replace

Plug • Seal is imperfect due to damage • Repair or replace
Operating Portion • Tightening is loose at the pin, shaft or joint of the operating • Tighten to the speci-
portion, with looseness of 2 mm or greater fied torque
• Due to wear, etc. tightening is loose at the pin, shaft or joint of • Replace
the operating portion, with looseness of 2 mm or greater
Casing, • Scratches, rust or corrosion on the spool and sliding portion • Replace
Port Plate • Scratches, rust or corrosion on seal portions which come in • Repair or replace
contact with the O-ring
IV-75 TB175
TROUBLESHOOTING

Secondary pressure doesn’t • Primary pressure is insufficient • Keep the primary pressure
rise • Spring is damaged or permanently • Replace the spring
deformed
• The clearance between the spool and • Replace the spool and casing assem-
casing is abnormally large bly
• There is looseness in the handle • Disassemble and reassemble, or re-
place the handle
Secondary pressure doesn’t • Sliding parts are catching • Repair or replace
stabilize • Tank line pressure fluctuates • Remove the abnormal portions of the
tank line
• Air gets mixed into the piping • Operate the machine several times
and bleed out the air
Secondary pressure is high • Tank line pressure is high • Remove the abnormal portions of the
tank line
• Sliding parts are catching • Repair or replace
TB175 IV-76
PILOT VALVE: S/N 17512105~
CONSTRUCTION
1. Casing 11. Washer 2

2. Plate 12. Spring
3. Spool 13. Spring
4. Plug 14. Spring
5. Push Rod 15. Spring
6. Push Rod 16. Joint
7. Seal 17. Disc
8. O-ring 18. Adjusting Nut
9. Spring Seat 19. Lock Nut
10. Spring Seat
IV-76-1 TB175

INSTALLATION JIG (A) INSTALLATION JIG (B)
1 2
MATERIAL A; S45C
MATERIAL B; SCM415N WITH CEMENTATION HARDENING MATERIAL B; SCM415N WITH CEMENTATION HARDENING
General Cautions
Disassembly
1. Remove the lock nut and the adjust nut (1), then
remove the disc (2).
• Using copper or lead plates, fasten the valve in
a vise.
2. Remove the joint (3), then remove the plate (4).

• Use installation jigs (A) and (B).
TB175 IV-76-2
3. Take out the plug (5) then remove the push rod (6)
from the plug (5).
• If the plug is difficult to remove, use (–) screw
driver to remove it.
spring’s force.
5. Remove the reducing valve (12) and spring (13).

• Make match marks on the reducing valve and
casing hole so they can be placed in the same
position when they are reassembled.
6. Disassemble the reducing valve.

a. Push in the spring sheet (14) to contract the
spring (15), and move the spool (17) from the
small hole to the large hole of the spring sheet
(14).
• Do not push in the spring sheet too far (at
most 6 mm).
IV-76-3 TB175
b. Remove the spring seat (14), spring (15) and

washer 2 (16) from the spool (17).
Assembly
1. Assemble the reducing valve (12).
a. Install the washer 2 (16), spring (15) and spring
seat (14) on the spool (17).
b. Push in the spring sheet (14) to contract the

spring (15), and move the spool (17) from the
large hole to the small hole of the spring sheet
(14).
• Do not push in the spring sheet too far (at
most 6 mm).
TB175 IV-76-4
2. Install the spring (13) and reducing valve (12).
fore disassembly.
3. Install the O-ring (7) and seal (8) in the plug (5).
4. Install the push rod (9) in the plug (5).

5. Install the plug (5) and plate (4), then install the
joint.
• Use installation jigs (A) and (B) to install the
joint.
Joint: 47.1 ±2.9 N·m
IV-76-5 TB175
6. Install the disc (2), the adjust nut (1) and the lock
nut.
• Tighten the adjust nut to the point where all 4
push rods are uniformly making contact.
• During tightening, the disc should not be
moved.
Adjust Nut: 68.6 ±4.9 N·m
7. Apply grease to the contact surfaces of the joint

rotating portion, the disc and the push rod.
“IV-75”
TROUBLESHOOTING
“IV-76”
TB175 IV-76-6
PILOT VALVES HYDRAULIC UNITS
PILOT VALVES (TRAVEL)
CONSTRUCTION
With Alarm

1. Casing 9. Plug 17. Snap Ring 25. Spring

2. Plate 10. Cup 18. Bushing 26. Spring
3. O-ring 11. Seal 19. Piston 27. Spring
4. O-ring 12. O-ring 20. Ball 28. Bushing
5. Sheet 13. Push Rod 21. Spool 29. Shaft
6. Sheet 14. Washer 22. Spring Seat 30. Cam
7. Ball 15. Washer 23. Washer 31. Set Screw
8. Cover 16. Spring Seat 24. Spring 32. Lock Nut
IV-77 TB175
HYDRAULIC UNITS PILOT VALVES
1. Seal 10. Snap Ring 19. Spring

2. O-ring 11. Bushing 20. Bushing
3. Cover 12. Piston 21. Shaft
4. Plug 13. Ball 22. Cam
5. Cup 14. Spring Seat 23. Set Screw
6. Push Rod 15. Washer 24. Set Screw
7. Washer 16. Spring 25. Lock Nut
8. Washer 17. Spring
9. Spring Seat 18. Sprig
TB175 IV-78
OPERATION
The pilot valve casing contains a vertical shaft hole The casing also contains an inlet port for hydraulic oil,
with a reducing valve incorporated into it. When the port P (primary pressure), and an outlet port, port T
handle is tilted, the push rod and spring seat are (tank), and secondary pressure is taken from 4 ports,
pushed down changing the secondary pressure spring’s port 1, port 2, port 3 and port 4, on the bottom of the
pressure. vertical shaft hole.
T C
A P
L3D302
When the Handle is in Neutral When the Handle is Tilted

In this case, the force of the secondary pressure setting When the handle (1) is tilted and the push rod is
spring, which determines the pilot valve’s output pushed, the spool moves downward and port P and
pressure (secondary pressure), is not transmitted to port A are joined. The oil in the pilot valve pump flows
the spool. Therefore, the spool is pushed up by the out to port A, generating pressure.
return spring and is in the output port C position When the pressure in port A is the same as the set force
shown above, with oil not flowing between port P and of the spring (set pressure), there is a balance between
the output port C but flowing between the T port and the hydraulic pressure and the spring force.
output port C. When the pressure in port A is greater than the set
pressure, port A and port P close and port A and port
T open.
When the pressure at port A is lower than the set
pressure, port A and port P open and port A and port
T close.
In this way, the secondary pressure is kept constant.
IV-79 TB175
Damping Mechanism
The damping feature prevents hunting due to insuffi-
cient oil supply when the pilot valve is operated
suddenly.
When the handle is inclined and the push rod (1) on
port 1 is pushed, the spool (2) and piston (3) are moved
downward. At this time, the oil in the piston chamber
(4) is damped out through the orifice (5) of the piston
1
(3), generating pressure. This damping pressure pre- 6
vents the push rod (1) from moving abruptly. 5
The push rod (6) on port 2 is moved upward via the
piston (7) by the force exerted by the spring. Then, the 4
oil in the tank chamber pushes up the ball (8) and 3
7
flows into the piston chamber (9) to prevent the
9
pressure in the piston chamber from becoming nega-
tive. The oil outside the piston chamber returns to the
tank through the tank passage on the upper end of the 2
casing.
8
L3D303
When the handle is inclined to the maximum and then

to the reverse direction, the push rod (6) on port 2 is
pushed down and the piston (7) moves downward.
Then the oil in the piston chamber (9) is damped out
through the orifice (10) of the piston, generating
pressure.
The push rod (1) on port 1 is moved upward via the
6
piston (2) by the force exerted by the spring. 1
At this time, the oil in the tank passage pushes up the 10
ball (8) and flows into the piston chamber (4) to
prevent the pressure in the piston chamber from
becoming negative. The oil outside the piston cham- 7 2
ber returns to the tank through the passage connected
4
to the tank on the upper end of the casing.
9
The mechanism has been designed so that operating
the handle from any position activates the damping
feature to prevent hunting.
8
L3D304
TB175 IV-80

JIG (A) JIG (B)
70
29 0.2
0. 5 9
R
ø10 -0.20
-0.25
1 1
ø12 -0.25
-0.40
30
°
¿32 -0.03
-0.08
¿25
¿40
20 2
32
C1
C0.5
C1
L3D305 L3D306
General Cautions
• Mark the casing hole and individual parts of the
pressure reducing valve before disassembling so
that they can be reassembled in the correct place
later.
Disassembly
1. Remove the boot from the cover.
• Use a copper or iron sheet to fasten the valve to
the vice.
L2D301
2. Remove the set screw.
L3D307
IV-81 TB175
3. Remove the cam pin, then remove the cam.

• Make match marks on the cam and cove so
they can be placed in the same position when
they are reassembled.
• Be careful not to let the push rod fly out from
the spring’s force.
L3D308
4. Loosen the cap screws and remove the cover.

• The cover and plug will rise from the surface if
the rebound spring is too strong, so loosen the
cap screws alternately so that the cover is flat.
• Mark the cover and casing so that they can be
reassembled in the same positions.
L3D309
5. Remove the push rods together with the plugs.

• Be careful not to let the push rod fly out from
the spring’s force.
L3D310
6. Take out the plugs then remove the caps and seals
from the plugs.
spring’s force.
L3D311
TB175 IV-82
7. Remove the pistons (5) and springs (3), (4).
L3D312
8. Remove the spring sates.
L3D313
9. Remove the balls.

• Use a magnet.
L3D314
10. Remove the sanp ring.
L3D315
IV-83 TB175
11. Remove the bushing.
L3D316
12. Remove the reducing valves and springs.
L3D317
13. Remove the bushing from cover.

• Use a jig (A).
L3D318
14. Disassemble the reducing valve.

a. Remove washer 1.
more than 4 mm.)
TB175 IV-84
b. Remove the spring seat, spring and washer
from the spool.
L3D319
15. Remove the cup from plug.
L3D320
1
L3D321
IV-85 TB175
Assembly
1. Assemble the reducing valves.
a. Install the washer, spring and spring seat on the
spool.
b. Install washer 1. L3D319

more than 4 mm.)
• Hook the head of the spool with the sharp
edge of washer 1.
L3D322
2. Install the springs and reducing valves.

fore disassembly.
• Take care not to plunge the lower end of the
spool of the pressure reducing valve against
the corner of the casing.
L3D317
3. Install the bushings in the casing.
L3D316
TB175 IV-86
4. Assemble the snap ring into the casing hole tem-
porarily.
fore disassembly.
• Make sure they are assembled level.
• Make sure the sharp edge of the snap ring faces
upward.
L3D315
5. Install the jig (B) into the casing hole and push it
until the snap ring enters the slot.
• Be sure to push the jib carefully so as not to
damage the inner surface of the casing.
L3D323
6. Install the balls in the bushing.
L3D314
7. Install the spring seat in the bushing.

fore disassembly.
L3D313
IV-87 TB175
8. Install the springs (3), (4) and pistons (5).

fore disassembly.
5
L3D312
9. Install the O-ring (1) and seal (2) in the plug.

• Make sure the seal installation direction is 1
correct.
1 2
L3D324
L3D321
10. Install the cups in the plug.
L3D320
11. Install the push rod in the plug.

L3D325
TB175 IV-88
12. Install the plugs in the casing.
L3D326
13. Using jig (A), pressure fit the bushing.

• Make sure the bushing ends are secured inside
the cover.
L3D318
14. Install the cover in the casing.

fore disassembly.
15. Install the cap screws.

• When tightening the cap screws, make sure the
cover is level.
78.5 ±9.8 N·m
L3D309
16. Install the cam and the cam pin.
L3D327
IV-89 TB175
17. Tighten the set screws.

Set screw: 6.9 ±1.0 N·m
• Apply Loctite #241 to the set screw.
L3D307
18. Adjust the height of the set screw so that the upper
surface of the cam becomes parallel with the
lower surface of the cover. Turn the cam to the
right and left and check there is no rattling at the
neutral position before tightening the lock nut.
Lock Nut: 33.3 ±3.4 N·m
• If the set screw pushes the push rod too far,
rattling may occur at the neutral position and
cause malfunctions.
L3D328
19. Supply grease into the top of the push rod and the
grease cup of the plug.
L3D329
20. Install the cover.

• Spray rust-preventive oil over the parts inside
the cover.
L3D330
TB175 IV-90
Checking the Parts

Seal  • Replace
Seal Washer  • Replace
Spool • Wear on sliding portions is 10 µm or greater compared to non- • Replace
sliding portions
• Scratches on sliding portions • Replace
• Spool doesn’t move smoothly • Repair or replace
Push Rod • Front end is worn 1 mm or more • Replace
• Scratches in the sliding portion • Replace

Plug • Seal is imperfect due to damage • Repair or replace
Operating Portion • Tightening is loose at the pin, shaft or joint of the operating • Tighten to the speci-
portion, with looseness of 2 mm or greater fied torque
• Due to wear, etc. tightening is loose at the pin, shaft or joint of • Replace
the operating portion, with looseness of 2 mm or greater
Casing, • Scratches, rust or corrosion on the spool and sliding portion • Replace
Port Plate • Scratches, rust or corrosion on seal portions which come in • Repair or replace
contact with the O-ring
IV-91 TB175
TROUBLESHOOTING

Secondary pressure doesn’t • Primary pressure is insufficient • Keep the primary pressure
rise • Spring is damaged or permanently • Replace the spring
deformed
• The clearance between the spool and • Replace the spool and casing assem-
casing is abnormally large bly
• There is looseness in the handle • Disassemble and reassemble, or re-
place the handle
Secondary pressure doesn’t • Sliding parts are catching • Repair or replace
stabilize • Tank line pressure fluctuates • Remove the abnormal portions of the
tank line
• Air gets mixed into the piping • Operate the machine several times
and bleed out the air
Secondary pressure is high • Tank line pressure is high • Remove the abnormal portions of the
tank line
• Sliding parts are catching • Repair or replace
TB175 IV-92
PILOT VALVE (SWING)
CONSTRUCTION
13
16 14
6 15
9
12
11
10
L3D350
1. Casing 9. Spring Seat

2. Cover 10. Washer
3. Plug 11. Spring
4. Seal 12. Spring
5. O-ring 13. Shaft
6. Push Rod 14. Bushing
7. Shim 15. Cam
8. Spool 16. Ball
IV-93 TB175
OPERATION
“IV-68”
General Cautions
“IV-69”
The following describes the disassembly procedure.

For assembly, refer to the construction diagram and
follow the disassembly procedure in the reverse or-
der.
Disassembly
1. Remove the boot from the cover.
• Use a copper or iron sheet to fasten the valve to
the vice.
• Apply grease to the cam and push rods.
L2D301
2. Remove the set screw.

Set screw: 6.9 N·m
• Apply Loctite #241 to the set screw.
L2D302
3. Remove the cam pin, then remove the cam (1).
L2D303
TB175 IV-94
4. Loosen the cap screws and remove the cover (2).
• The cover and plug will rise from the surface if
the rebound spring is too strong, so loosen the
cap screws alternately so that the cover is flat. 2
• Mark the cover and casing so that they can be
reassembled in the same positions.
Cap screw: 8.8 N·m
L2D304
5. Remove the push rods (4) together with the plug

4
(5).
5
L3D351
6. Remove the O-rings and seal (6) from the plug.
L3D352
7. Remove the spool assembly (7) and spring (8)

from the casing.
• Never disassemble the spool assembly as the
pressure has been adjusted by the shim. 7
L2D306
IV-95 TB175
“IV-91”
TROUBLESHOOTING
“IV-92”
TB175 IV-96
SOLENOID VALVE HYDRAULIC UNITS
SOLENOID VALVE (2-SECTION)
SWING, AUXILIARY
CONSTRUCTION

1. Body 6. Spring
2. Solenoid 7. Stopper
3. Sleeve 8. Ball
4. Spool 9. Sheet
5. Washer 10. O-ring
IV-97 TB175
HYDRAULIC UNITS SOLENOID VALVE
OPERATION
Solenoid Valve
When the solenoid valve is not electrified
The pressure oil from port A flows to port D via the
spool (1), shutting off the circuit to the shuttle valve
(2).
The pressure oil from port C pushes up the shuttle
valve (2) and flows into port B. The circuit from port 1
C to the solenoid valve is shut off by the shuttle valve
(2). D
2
C A L3D901
When the solenoid valve is electrified

An electromagnetic field is generated around the coil,
and the spool (1) is moved downward to shut off the
circuit from port A to port D to supply the pressure oil
from port A to the shuttle valve (2).
At this time, if the pressure at port A is higher than the
1
pressure at port C, the shuttle valve (2) allows the oil
to flow from port A to port B, shutting off the circuit
to port C. D
On the contrary, if the pressure at port C is higher than 2
the pressure at port A, the circuit to port A is shut off B
and the oil flows from port C to port B.
C A L3D902
TB175 IV-98
General Cautions
• Carry out disassembly and reassembly operations • The spool and body are selectively fitted, so if one
in a clean place and place disassembled parts in is found to be damaged, replace the valve assem-
clean containers. bly.
• Before disassembly, clean thoroughly around the • Apply a thin coating of hydraulic oil to sliding
ports and remove paint or thread lock, etc. from all surfaces and a thin coating of grease to seals when
joints with a wire brush. assembling them.
• Clean the disassembled parts with appropriate clean- • Replace seals with new parts each time disassem-
ing oils. bly is done.

der.
5 5
Disassembly
1. Loosen the cap screws and remove the solenoid
coil (5).
• Put matching marks on the solenoid and the
body so that they can be aligned when assem-
bling.
• Take care not to miss the push rod.
Cap Screw: 6.86 ±0.98 N·m L3D903
2. Remove the O-ring from the solenoid coil (5).
3. Remove the spool (6) and sleeve (7) from the 6

body.
• Record the positions of the spool, sleeve and
the body hole so that they can be aligned when
assembling. 7
• To take out the spool, hook the small orifice at
the end of the spool using a tool such as a
scriber. 8
• To remove the sleeve, turn the body upside
down and lightly tap it.
L3D904
4. Take out the plug (8) from the body.

Plug: 5.89 ±0.98 N·m
D H
5. Take out the sheet (9) and remove the ball (10).
Sheet: 14.7 ±2.0 N·m
• Apply Loctite #262 to the sheet.
B F
10
9
L3D905
IV-99 TB175
Checking the Parts

Solenoid coil • When the solenoid is burned, short-circuited, or has a wire • Replace
break
• Wiring short-circuit or wire break • Replace
Body • Scratches, rust, or corrosion at the sliding parts with the spool • Replace
• Scratches, rust, or corrosion of the seal part in contact with the • Replace
O-ring
• Other damage considered to impair the normal functions • Replace
Spool, plunger • Damage on the outer circumference which catches a fingernail • Replace
• No smooth movement • Adjust or replace
Spring • Rust, corrosion, deformation, breakage, or other notable dam- • Replace
age
O-Ring  • Replace
TROUBLESHOOTING

Solenoid valve does not • Wiring short-circuit or wire break • Replace
operate. • Solenoid coil short-circuit or wire break • Replace
• Catching of foreign matter by the spool • Overhaul and repair or replace.
• Damage on the outer circumference of the spool • Overhaul and repair or replace.
• Catching of foreign matter by the plunger • Overhaul and repair or replace.
• Damage on the outer circumference of the plunger • Overhaul and repair or replace.
Oil leakage from solenoid • Damaged O-ring • Replace
valve, cover, or relief • Damaged O-ring at the emergency manual but- • Replace
valve to the outside. ton of the solenoid valve
Pressure does not rise. • Catching of foreign matter by the relief valve • Clean or replace.
TB175 IV-100
SPEED SHIFT (SLEW), SPEED SHIFT (TRAVEL) AND LEVER LOCK
CONSTRUCTION
1. Housing
2. O-ring
3. Spool
4. Spring
5. Cover
6. Cap Screw
7. Solenoid Valve
IV-101 TB175
OPERATION
The solenoid valve consists of a relief valve which

keeps the pilot circuit pressure constant and 3 sole-
noid valves (one for lever lock, one for 2nd speed
switching, and one for slewing fine speed).) which
switch the pilot circuit.
Solenoid Valve
1. When current is not flowing.
Oil at port P is blocked by the spool (1). Also,
since port A and port T are connected, the pres-
sure in the pilot circuit downstream becomes the
same as the tank pressure.
2. When current is flowing.

A magnetic field is generated around the coil and
the plunger (2) is pulled down. This pushes the
spool (1) down. As a result, oil at port P flows into
port A and pressure is transmitted to the pilot
circuit at the bottom.
TB175 IV-102
General Cautions
• Carry out disassembly and assembly operations in • The spool and body are selectively fitted, so if one
a clean place and place disassembled parts in clean is found to be damaged, replace the valve assem-
containers. bly.
• Clean disassembled parts with light oil or other • Replace seals with new parts each time disassem-
cleaning oil. bly is done.
Following is a description of the solenoid valve block

disassembly procedure. Reassemble the solenoid valve
block by following this procedure in reverse order.
1. Fix the housing and remove the solenoid valve

(1).
Solenoid valve: 44 ±5 N·m
2. Remove the socket bolt, and then remove the

cover (2).
Cap screw: 3.4 ±0.5 N·m
3. Remove the spring (3) and the spool (4).

• Pull out the spool slowly, and take care not to
scratch or dent the circumference.
• At the time of reassembly, the spool must be
installed in the same housing hole.
4. Remove the relief valve.

Relief valve: 44 ±5 N·m
IV-103 TB175
Checking the Parts
Part Judgment Criteria Treatment

Coil assembly • When the solenoid is burned, short-circuited, or has a wire • Replace
break
Housing • Scratches, rust, or corrosion at the sliding parts with the • Replace
spool
• Scratches, rust, or corrosion of the seal part in contact with • Replace
the O-ring
Spool, plunger • Damage on the outer circumference which catches a finger- • Replace
nail
Spring • Rust, corrosion, deformation, breakage, or other notable • Replace
damage
O-Ring .. • Replace
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Main Causes Remedy

Solenoid valve does • Wiring short-circuit or wire break • Replace
not operate • Coil assembly short-circuit or wire break • Replace
• Catching of foreign matter by the spool • Overhaul and repair or re-
place
• Damage on the outer circumference of the spool • Overhaul and repair or re-
place
• Catching of foreign matter by the plunger • Overhaul and repair or re-
place
• Damage on the outer circumferenee of the plunger • Overhaul and repair or re-
place
Oil leakage from sole- • Damaged O-ring • Replace
noid valve, cover, or • Damaged O-ring at the emergency manual button of • Replace
relief valve to the out- the solenoid valve
side
Pressure does not rise • Catching of foreign matter by the relief valve • Clean or replace
TB175 IV-104
AIR CONDITIONER
CONSTRUCTION
1 3 5 6 4 2
N0H200
1. Plug 5. Spring
2. Solenoid 6. Spool
3. O-ring 7. Body
4. O-ring
IV-104-1
IV-105 TB175
OPERATION
“IV-104-4”
General Cautions
“IV-99”

der.
Disassembly
1. Remove the cap screws and remove the solenoid
coil (1). 1
bling.
Cap Screw: 3.9 ±1.0 N·m
N0H201

from the plug (2).
Plug: 20.6 N·m
4. Remove the spool (3) and spring (4) from the

body.
• Record the positions of the spool and the body 3
hole so that they can be aligned when assem-
bling. 4
2
N0H202
Checking the Parts

“IV-100”
TROUBLESHOOTING
“IV-100”
TB175 IV-104-2
IV-106
2-PIECE BOOM
CONSTRUCTION
1. Plug 5. Spring
2. Solenoid 6. Spool
3. O-ring 7. Body
4. O-ring
IV-104-3
IV-107 TB175
OPERATION
Solenoid Valve
When the solenoid valve is not electrified T
The oil in the port P is blocked by the spool (1). As the A
port A and port T are connected, the downstream pilot
circuit has the same pressure as the tank pressure.
1
L4D902
When the solenoid valve is electrified

A magnetic field is generated around the coil. The
push rod is pulled down to press down the spool (1), T
then the oil in port P flows into port A and conveys the A
pressure to the downstream pilot circuit.
L4D903
TB175 IV-104-4
IV-108
General Cautions
“IV-99”

der.
Disassembly
1. Remove the cap screws and remove the solenoid
coil (1).
bling.
Cap Screw: 4.9 N·m

from the plug (2).
Plug: 23.5 N·m
4. Remove the spool (3) and spring (4) from the

body.
• Record the positions of the spool and the body
hole so that they can be aligned when assem-
bling.
Checking the Parts

“IV-100”
TROUBLESHOOTING
“IV-100”
IV-104-5
IV-109 TB175
TB175 IV-104-6
IV-110
PILOT SELECTOR HYDRAULIC UNITS
PILOT SELECTOR
CONSTRUCTION

1. Body 5. Spring
2. Plug 6. Retainer
3. Connector 7. O-ring
4. Spool 8. O-ring
IV-105 TB175
HYDRAULIC UNITS PILOT SELECTOR
OPERATION

When the Spool is in the Neutral Position.
When pressure does not act on port PL, the spool (4)
is held in the neutral position by the spring (5).
At this time, the pressure oil from port P is shut off by
the spool (4) to connect port A and port T.

When the Spool is Actuated.

If pressure larger than that provided by the spring (5)
acts on port PL, the spool (4) moves downward as
shown in this figure to connect port P and port A.
The circuit to port T is shut off.

TB175 IV-106
PILOT SELECTOR HYDRAULIC UNITS
General Cautions
• Carry out disassembly and reassembly operations • The spool and body are selectively fitted, so if one
in a clean place and place disassembled parts in is found to be damaged, replace the valve assem-
clean containers. bly.
• Clean the disassembled parts with appropriate clean- • Replace seals with new parts each time disassem-
ing oils. bly is done.

der.
Disassembly
1. Take out the plug (1).
Plug: 70.6 ±7.0 N·m
2. Remove the O-ring from plug (1).
3. Take out the connector (2).

Connector: 26.5 ±2.6 N·m
4. Remove the O-ring from connector (2).
5. Remove the spring (3), retainer (4) and spool (5).
4
3
L3D954
IV-107 TB175
HYDRAULIC UNITS PILOT SELECTOR
Checking the Parts

Body • Scratches, rust, or corrosion at the sliding parts with the spool • Replace
• Scratches, rust, or corrosion of the seal part in contact with the • Replace
O-ring
Spool • Damage on the outer circumference which catches a fingernail • Replace
Spring • Rust, corrosion, deformation, breakage, or other notable dam- • Replace
age
O-Ring  • Replace
TROUBLESHOOTING

Oil leaking. • Oil is leaking due damage to oil seals or O-rings. • Replace the oil seals and O-
rings.
Ports are not connected • Catching of foreign matter by the spool • Overhaul and repair or replace.
even when the pilot port • Damage on the outer circumference of the spool • Overhaul and repair or replace.
is pressurized.
Ports continue to be con- • Catching of foreign matter by the spool • Overhaul and repair or replace.
nected even when pres- • Damage on the outer circumference of the spool • Overhaul and repair or replace.
sure at the pilot port is
reduced.
TB175 IV-108
SELECTOR VALVES HYDRAULIC UNITS
SELECTOR VALVES
CONSTRUCTION
Pilot Change
PL
A T
P
HYDRAULIC SYMBOL
A
3 PL
1
T
4 P
6
5
8
2
B
W2H300
A: 26.5 N·m
B: 70.6 N·m
1. Body 5. Spring
2. Plug 6. Retainer
3. Connector 7. O-ring
4. Spool 8. O-ring
IV-108-1
IV-109 TB175
HYDRAULIC UNITS SELECTOR VALVES
Swing/Adjust Change
B1 A1 B2 A2
2 4 1 4 3
PP T
P1 P2
HYDRAULIC SYMBOL
SECTION “X-X”
2 2
22 * *
6
6
A ) ) A
X X
9 0!-
A: 9.8 N·m
1. Spring
2. Cover
3. Cover
4. O-ring
TB175 IV-108-2
IV-110
PROPORTIONAL CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE HYDRAULIC UNITS
PROPORTIONAL CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
CONSTRUCTION
A: 7 ±0.5 N·m
1. Proportional Control Solenoid

2. Bolt
3. Spool
IV-108-3
IV-111 TB175
HYDRAULIC UNITS PROPORTIONAL CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
OPERATION PRINCIPLE
This valve controls the secondary pressure by using S 1

the built-in proportional pressure reducing valve. The
2 4
S=A1-B1
secondary pressure of this valve is proportional to the
magnitude of electric current flowing in the valve,
B1 A1
because the force to generate the secondary pressure
Fk
is applied by the solenoid based on the current passing Fs Fks
through the coil. Paxs
When a current flows in the solenoid, a thrust force

proportional to the current is generated and moves the
spool (1) so that the oil supplied from Port P is led to P A T
the secondary pressure side Port A, thus increasing
Paxs Fk Fs Fks
pressure Pa of Port A. T9H201
Pressure Pa is a function of the differential area S

between the cross sections A1 and B1 of the spool (1),
and the spool (1) is pushed to the solenoid side by the
oil pressure Pa × S. The spool (1) stops at a position
where the sum of the oil pressure Pa × S and the force
Fk exerted by the springs (2) is balanced with the
thrust force Fs generated by the solenoid. The weight
Fks of the spring (4) for fine adjustment of the
secondary pressure acts in the direction (left) to help
the thrust force from the solenoid.
When the thrust force is larger than the set value, the
spool (1) is moved to the left, connecting Port P 5 1
(primary, supply side) and Port A (secondary, dis-
charge side) through the notch (5).
P A T
T9H202
When the thrust force is smaller than the set value, the
spool (1) is moved to the right, connecting Port A 1 6
(secondary, discharge side) and Port T (outlet to tank)
through the notch (6).
Therefore, the opening areas of the supply side notch
(5) and discharge side notch (6) are controlled by the
movement of the spool (1), and secondary (pilot)
pressure created by the thrust force generated by the
solenoid can be provided.
P A T
T9H203
TB175 IV-108-4
IV-112
PROPORTIONAL CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE HYDRAULIC UNITS
General Cautions
• Carry out disassembly and assembly operations in • Apply a thin coating of hydraulic oil to sliding
a clean place and place disassembled parts in clean surfaces and a thin coating of grease to seals when
containers. assembling them.
• Before disassembly, clean thoroughly around the • Replace seals with new parts each time disassem-
ports and remove paint or thread lock, etc. from all bly is done.
joints with a wire brush.
• Clean disassembled parts with light oil or other
cleaning oil.
• The spool and body are selectively fitted, so if one
is found to be damaged, replace the valve assem-
bly.

For assembly, follow the disassembly procedure in 1
the reverse order.
Disassembly
1. Remove the bolts, and then remove the propor-
tional control solenoid (1).
Bolt: 6.9 ±1 N·m
T9H204
2. Remove the O-rings from the proportional con-

trol solenoid (1).
• Do not disassemble the sleeve (2) that is swaged
onto the solenoid (4) with the retaining ring
(3).
• Make sure that the spool (5) moves a little if
pushed from the sleeve (2) end.
4
3
2
5 T9H205
IV-108-5
IV-113 TB175
HYDRAULIC UNITS PROPORTIONAL CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Checking the Parts
Part Judgment Criteria Treatment

Coil assembly • When the solenoid is burned, short-circuited, or has a wire • Replace
break
Housing • Scratches, rust, or corrosion at the sliding parts with the • Replace
spool
• Scratches, rust, or corrosion of the seal part in contact with • Replace
the O-ring
Spool • Damage on the outer circumference which catches a finger- • Replace
nail
Spring • Rust, corrosion, deformation, breakage, or other notable • Replace
damage
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Main Causes Remedy

Solenoid valve does • Wiring short-circuit or wire break • Replace
not operate • Coil assembly short-circuit or wire break • Replace
• Catching of foreign matter by the spool • Overhaul and repair or re-
place
• Damage on the outer circumference of the spool • Overhaul and repair or re-
place
• Defective the proportional controller • Repair or replace
• Primary pressure is insufficient • Keep the primary pressure
Oil leakage from sole- • Damaged O-ring • Replace
noid valve • Damaged seal nut • Replace
TB175 IV-108-6
IV-114
PORT RELIEF VALVE HYDRAULIC UNITS
PORT RELIEF VALVE
CONSTRUCTION
P1 P2
HYDRAULIC SYMBOL
X X
11 3
9 17
4
16
5 18
10
6 1 13
16 8
2 7
15 14 12
SECTION “X-X”
W2H400E
1. Housing 10. Backup Ring

2. Plug 11. Pin
3. Sleeve 12. Adjusting Screw
4. Main Poppet 13. Body
5. Spring 14. Lock Nut
9. Backup Ring 18. O-ring
IV-108-7
IV-115 TB175
HYDRAULIC UNITS PORT RELIEF VALVE
OPERATION
“IV-57~58”
Genaral Cautions
“IV-59”
Following is an explanation of the relief valve disas-

sembly procedure.
Follow the procedure used to disassemble the relief
Disassembly
1. Remove the port relief valves, then remove the O-
rings from the relief valves.
• Do not disassemble the relief valves unless it is
necessary.
• When using a spanner or adjustable wrench, be
sure to attach it in the place shown in the figure
at right.
Relief valve: 58.84 N·m
W2H401
TB175 IV-108-8
IV-116
SHUT-OFF VALVES HYDRAULIC UNITS
SHUT-OFF VALVES
CONSTRUCTION
Differential Pressure Detection (For Boom Cylinder Only)
1. O-ring
2. Stem
3. O-ring
4. Backup Ring
5. Lock Nut
IV-108-9
IV-117 TB175
HYDRAULIC UNITS SHUT-OFF VALVES
Pilot Operated Hydraulic System (Boom and Arm Cylinder)
1. Body 6. Plug
2. Relief Valve 7. Lock Nut
3. Plug 8. Adjusting Screw
4. Screw 9. Spring
5. Plug 10. Spool
TB175 IV-108-10
IV-118
OPERATION
The isolation valve prevents the boom or arm being

raised from falling. If the hydraulic hose breaks, the
valve blocks and isolates the hydraulic oil flowing to
the cylinder head.
Differential Pressure Detection (For Boom

Cylinder Only)
When the boom is raised, the oil from the hydraulic
pump flows through the port H, the hole on the spool
(1), the passage (2) and the port C into the boom
cylinder. Meanwhile, the pressure from the ports C
and H is led to the chambers A and B located on each
side of the spool (1).
If the hydraulic hose breaks, the pressures between

the chambers A and B on the sides of the spool (1)
become different. The force caused by this differen-
tial pressure moves the spool (1) to the left when the
force becomes larger than the force of the spring (3).
Then the flow cross-section area of the passage (2)
decreases and the pressure in the chamber (A) moves
the spool (1) to be seated on the body, blocking the
ports C and H. As a result, the oil flowing to the
cylinder head is blocked, which prevents the boom
from falling.
Pilot Operated Hydraulic System (Boom and

Arm Cylinder)
When the boom or arm is raised, the pressure oil from
the hydraulic pump flows through the port V2 to push
up the check valve (1) and then through the port C2
into the boom or arm cylinder.
When the boom or arm is lowered, the pilot pressure

from the pilot valve (2) is led to the port PDB. The
pilot pressure in the port PDB moves the spool (3) to
the left. The return oil from the cylinder flows from
the port C2 to the passage through the spool (3) and
the check valve (1), the port V2 and into the tank
passage.
IV-108-11
IV-119 TB175
The boom or arm does not fall in case of hydraulic

hose breakage, because the oil flow leading to the
boom or arm is blocked and isolated in the passage
through the check valve (1) and the spool (3) if a hose
breaks.
Never adjust the adjuster screws on the isolation

valve. Otherwise, the valve may not work properly, or
the boom or arm may fall.
TB175 IV-108-12
IV-120
TROUBLE SHOOTING
When the hose of the boom or arm cylinders are

ruptured and the boom or arm falls, the emergency
shut-off valve is activated and stops the boom or arm
part way through the fall.
WARNING
If the boom or arm drops and the emergency
shut-off valves are activated, immediately move
away from the suspended object.
Differential Pressure Detection (For Boom Cylin-

der Only)
1. Check for safety in the working area and for
stability of the machine and lifted load.
2. Loosen the emergency shut-off valve’s lock nut

(3) and stem (4) to lower the boom.
3. Check for stability of the hoe attachment and

load.
4. Tighten the stem (4) secure it with the lock nut (3).
Tightening torque:
Stem (4): 1.0 ~ 1.5 N·m
Lock nut (3): 3.2 N·m
Pilot Operated Hydraulic System (Boom and

Arm Cylinder)
If the engine can be started, the boom or arm can be
lowered with the operating lever. Check for safety,
then slowly lower the boom or arm.
If the engine cannot be started, the boom or arm can
be lowered using the procedure described below.
IV-108-13
IV-121 TB175
1. Check for safety in the working area and for

stability of the machine and lifted load.
2. Remove the cap (2).
3. Loosen the lock nut (3).
4. Tighten the stem (4) to lower the boom or arm.
5. Check for stability of the hoe attachment and

load.
6. Loosen the stem (4) secure it with the lock nut (3).
TB175 IV-108-14
IV-122
CYLINDERS HYDRAULIC UNITS
CYLINDERS
CONSTRUCTION
Boom Cylinder
1. Piston Packing 7. O-ring 13. Dust Seal 19. Piston

2. Rod Packing 8. O-ring 14. Rod Cover 20. Wear Ring
3. Dust Seal 9. O-ring 15. Bushing 21. Grease Nipple
4. Buffer Ring 10. Tube 16. Snap Ring 22. Set Screw
5. Backup Ring 11. Bushing 17. Cushion Bearing 23. Ball
6. Backup Ring 12. Piston Rod 18. Cushion Seal 24. Grease Nipple
Boom Cylinder (2-Piece Boom)
1. Buffer Ring 8. Piston Packing 15. Bushing 22. Nut

2. Rod Packing 9. Tube 16. Snap Ring 23. Set Screw
3. Dust Seal 10. Bushing 17. Holder 24. Ball
4. O-ring 11. Piston Rod 18. Cushion Ring 25. Dust Seal
5. Backup Ring 12. Bushing 19. Collar 26. Grease Nipple
6. O-ring 13. Rod Cover 20. Piston 27. Grease Nipple
7. Backup Ring 14. Cushion Bearing 21. Wear Ring
IV-109 TB175
HYDRAULIC UNITS CYLINDERS
Arm Cylinder
28 4 14 7 6 5 16 6 8 6 17 18 19 20 9 20 21 22 25 23 24 26
13 11
12 27 3 2 1 15 27 10
L2D401
1. Buffer Ring 8. O-ring 15. Bushing 22. Ball

2. Rod Packing 9. Piston Packing 16. Snap Ring 23. Cushion Bearing
3. Backup Ring 10. Tube 17. Cushion Bearing 24. Cushion Seal
4. Dust Seal 11. Bushing 18. Cushion Seal 25. Snap Ring
5. O-ring 12. Piston Rod 19. Piston 26. Stopper
6. Backup Ring 13. Bushing 20. Wear Ring 27. Dust Seal
7. O-ring 14. Rod Cover 21. Set Screw 28. Grease Nipple
Arm Cylinder (2-Piece Boom)
1. Buffer Ring 9. Tube 17. Holder 25. Cushion Ring

2. Rod Packing 10. Bushing 18. Cushion Ring 26. Snap Ring
3. Dust Seal 11. Piston Rod 19. Collar 27. Stopper
4. Backup Ring 12. Bushing 20. Piston 28. Dust Seal
5. O-ring 13. Rod Cover 21. Wear Ring 29. Grease Nipple
6. O-ring 14. Cushion Bearing 22. Set Screw
7. Backup Ring 15. Bushing 23. Ball
8. Piston Packing 16. Snap Ring 24. Cushion Bearing
TB175 IV-109-1
IV-110
Bucket Cylinder: S/N 17510003~17512104

1. Seal Ring 7. O-ring 13. Rod Cover 19. Set Screw

2. Rod Packing 8. Piston Packing 14. Piston 20. Ball
3. Backup Ring 9. Tube 15. Bushing 21. Grease Nipple
4. Dust Seal 10. Bushing 16. Snap Ring 22. Grease Nipple
5. O-ring 11. Piston Rod 17. Dust Seal
6. Backup Ring 12. Bushing 18. Wear Ring
Bucket Cylinder: S/N 17512105~
11
4 13 7 1 6 5 15 14 17 8 17 19 20 18 22
12
21 18 3 2 16 9 10
W2D402
1. Buffer Ring 7. O-ring 13. Rod Cover 19. Set Screw

2. Rod Packing 8. Piston Packing 14. Piston 20. Ball
3. Backup Ring 9. Tube 15. Snap Ring 21. Grease Nipple
4. Dust Seal 10. Bushing 16. Bushing 22. Grease Nipple
5. O-ring 11. Piston Rod 17. Wear Ring
6. Backup Ring 12. Bushing 18. Dust Seal
IV-111
IV-110 TB175
Dozer Blade Cylinder: S/N 17510003~1751204
19 3 11 6 13 4 5 14 20 9 7 12 15 1 15 16 17
8 18 10 2 18 8
L3D401
1. Piston Packing 6. O-ring 11. Rod Cover 16. Set Screw

2. Rod Packing 7. Tube 12. Piston 17. Ball
3. Dust Seal 8. Bushing 13. Buffer Ring 18. Dust Seal
4. Backup Ring 9. Piston Rod 14. Bushing 19. Grease Nipple
5. O-ring 10. Backup Ring 15. Wear Ring 20. Snap Ring
Dozer Blade Cylinder: S/N 17512105~
1. Piston Packing 6. O-ring 11. Piston 16. Ball

2. Rod Packing 7. Tube 12. Buffer Ring 17. Dust Seal
3. Dust Seal 8. Bushing 13. Bushing 18. Grease Nipple
4. Backup Ring 9. Piston Rod 14. Wear Ring 19. Grease Nipple
5. O-ring 10. Rod Cover 15. Set Screw 20. Snap Ring
TB175 IV-110-1
IV-112
Swing Cylinder: S/N 17510003~1751204
22 4 13 7 3 2 1 6 5 14 15 23 24 11 9 25 26 16 8 17 18 19 20 30 28 27 29
12 21 10 21
L3D402
1. Buffer Ring 9. Tube 17. Wear Ring 25. Cushion Bearing

2. Rod Packing 10. Bushing 18. Nut 26. Cushion Seal
3. Backup Ring 11. Piston Rod 19. Set Screw 27. Cushion Bearing
4. Dust Seal 12. Bushing 20. Ball 28. Cushion Seal
5. O-ring 13. Rod Cover 21. Dust Seal 29. Stopper
6. Backup Ring 14. Bushing 22. Grease Nipple 30. Snap Ring
7. O-ring 15. Snap Ring 23. Backup Ring
8. Piston Packing 16. Piston 24. O-ring
Swing Cylinder: S/N 17512105~
1. Buffer Ring 9. Tube 17. Cushion Seal 25. Cushion Bearing

2. Rod Packing 10. Bushing 18. Collar 26. Cushion Seal
3. Dust Seal 11. Piston Rod 19. Cushion Bearing 27. Stopper
4. O-ring 12. Bushing 20. Piston 28. Snap Ring
5. Backup Ring 13. Rod Cover 21. Wear Ring 29. Dust Seal
6. O-ring 14. Bushing 22. Nut 30. Grease Nipple
7. Backup Ring 15. Snap Ring 23. Set Screw
8. Piston Packing 16. Holder 24. Ball
IV-113
IV-111 TB175
OPERATION
Hydraulic oil flowing alternately in and out of the oil

outlet and inlet on both sides (head and rod sides) of
the piston acts on the piston and its force causes the
piston to move back and forth.
In cylinders equipped with a cushion mechanism, the
shock resulting from the piston colliding with the
cover at the stroke end acts on that mechanism and is
dampened by it.
Cushion Mechanism
1 3 2
A
4
DETAIL PORTION "A"
L1-D406E
When the piston (1) nears the stroke end, just before
it collides with the cover (2), if the cushion bearing (3)
that precedes it enters the inner diameter portion of the
cover, the oil in the back of the piston is restricted by
the cushion bearing (3) and the clearance (4) of the
cover inner diameter portion. This causes the piston’s
(1) back pressure to rise and slows the piston’s speed.
TB175 IV-112
Special Tools
See the table of special tools at the back of this section
for the jigs and tools used for disassembly and assem-
bly.
General Cautions
• Carry out disassembly and assembly operations in • Replace all seals with new ones each time the
a clean place and provide clean containers to place hydraulic units is disassembled.
brush. • Do not turn adjusting screws if not required.
• Clean all disassembled parts in cleaning solvent. • Apply hydraulic oil to sliding surfaces and apply a
Use a lint free cloth, or air dry the parts. thin coating of grease to seals when assembling
• Make match marks on each part so that they will be them.
In this manual, the procedure for the boom cylinder

(2-Piece boom) is described. When necessary, the
points which are different in other cylinders are men-
tioned.
Disassembly
Cylinder Assembly
1. Fasten the clevis of the tube in a vice and place the
other end on a support block made of wood to
fasten the cylinder in a horizontal condition.
2. Drain out hydraulic oil remaining in the cylinder.

• Move the piston rod gently to prevent the
hydraulic oil from spraying out and scattering
all over.
3. Free the locked portion of the rod cover.

• Since the lock is integrated with the cylinder
tube, be careful not to bend it or to scratch it
when the lock is being freed.
4. Loosen the rod cover.

• The piston rod should be pulled out approxi-
mately 200 mm beforehand.
• Measures should be taken to prevent the piston
rod from being hit.
IV-113 TB175
5. Pull the piston rod assembly out of the tube.

• Use a wooden block (1) so as not to scratch the
sliding surface, and pull the assembly straight
out.
Piston Rod Assembly

1. Fasten the piston rod assembly securely in a level
position.

a. Take out the set screw (2) and remove the steel
ball (3).
• The set screw is staked at 2 places with a
punch, so grind off the staked portions using
a hand drill.
b. Loosen the piston nut (4) and remove it.
• Use a wrench with a hydraulic jack (5).
c. Remove the piston (6).
3. Remove the cushion bearing (7) and cushion seal

(8).
4. Remove the cushion bearing.

a. Remove the snap ring (9).
b. Move the cushion bearing (10) and remove the
stopper (11).
c. Pull out the cushion bearing (10).
d. Remove the cushion seal (12).
5. Remove the rod cover from the piston rod.
TB175 IV-114
Piston
1. Remove the wear ring (13) from the piston.
• Spread the wear ring the minimum amount
necessary and remove it in the axial direction.
2. Remove the piston packing (14).

• Remove the piston packing by cutting it or
using a screwdriver.
Rod Cover
1. Remove the O-ring (17) and the backup rings (18)
from holder. 22 21 15 19 24 23 20 16 18 17 30 29
2. Remove the collar (30) and cushion seals (29).
3. Remove the O-rings (15), (16) and the backup

rings (20).
4. Remove the buffer ring (19) and rod packing (21).

• Extract using a eyeleteer with a pointed tip.
5. Remove the dust seal (22). W2D405
• Extract by raising the rubber part with a screw-

driver, etc., and striking.
6. Remove the snap ring (23).
Clevis
1. Remove the dust seal from the tube and piston
rod.
2. Remove the bushing using a setting tool (43).
IV-115 TB175
Assembly
Clevis
1. Using installation jig (B), pressure fit the bushing
(44) in the piston rod and tube.
2. Using a setting tool, install the dust seal.
Rod Cover
1. Install the O-rings (15), (16) and the backup rings
(20). 22 21 15 19 24 23 20 16
2. Using setting tool (G), pressure fit the dust seal
(22).
W2D406
3. Install the rod packing (21). < Swing >
4. Install the buffer ring (19).

23
<Swing> 19
• Attach the seal ring (25), bend the buffer ring
(26) into a U shape with your fingers, then set 25 (PROJECTION)
it in the groove. Make sure it is bent with a
radius of 6mm or greater to prevent wrinkles.
• Be sure to install it in the proper direction.
26 (SLIT)
5. Install the snap ring (23).
6. Install the collar (30) and the cushion seals (29). W2D407E
7. Install the O-ring (17) and the backup rings (18).
18 17 30 29
W2D408
TB175 IV-116
Piston
1. Install the O-ring (27) on the piston.
2. Cover the piston with the sliding jig (C), then,

using the fitting jig (D), insert the slipper ring (28)
rapidly.
3. Since the slipper ring (28) is extended when it is

installed, correct it using the corrective jig (E).
4. Install the wear ring (13).

• Spread the wear ring at the cut portion the
minimum amount necessary, installing it on
the piston from the shaft direction.
Piston Rod Assembly

1. Fasten the piston rod so that it is flat and install the
rod cover.
• Cover the piston rod thread with tape, etc., to
protect the seals from being scratched.
2. Install the cushion bearing (10).

a. Install the cushion seal (12).
• Set the side with the slits facing the screw
side.
b. Install the cushion bearing (10).
• Be sure to set with the flat side (A) in the
proper direction.
c. Install the stopper (11) on the piston rod, and
move the cushion bearing (10).
d. Install the snap ring (9).
3. Install the cushion seal (8) and cushion bearing

(7).
• Set the side of the cushion seal with the slits
facing the screw side.
• Be sure to set with the flat side (A) of the
cushion seal in the proper direction.
IV-117 TB175
4. Install the piston.

a. Install the piston (6).
b. Install the piston nut (4) and tighten it.
Piston nut: Refer to the table below.
c. Insert the steel ball (3).
d. Tighten the set screw (2) and caulk it at two
places with a punch.
Set screw: Refer to the table below.
Unit: N·m
Place Piston Piston Nut Set Screw
Boom 1060 (1325∗)  16.2
Boom (2-Piece Boom)  3500 56.9
Arm 2610 (2740∗)  31.5
Arm (2-Piece Boom) 3100  31.5
Bucket 1570 (1540∗)  31.5
Dozer Blade 1800 (2450∗)  31.5
Swing  3490 (4410∗) 56.9
∗: 17510003~17512104
Cylinder Assembly
1. Fasten the tube in a horizontal position, then
insert the piston rod assembly in the tube.
• During insertion, align the center of the piston
rod with the center of the tube, inserting it
straight so the seals will not be scratched.
2. Tighten the rod cover.

• Apply Three Bond #1901 or the equivalent to
the rod cover tread.
Rod cover Unit: N·m
Boom 451
Boom (2-Piece Boom) 1060
Arm 569
Arm (2-Piece Boom) 647
Bucket 490
Dozer Blade 647
Swing 1060
∗: 17510003~17512104
3. Bend the lock rib on the tube down in a notch of

the rod cover to lock it.
TB175 IV-118
Inspection after Disassembly

Clean each part thoroughly with cleaning oil, then
carry out the following checks. When a cylinder has
been disassembled, replace all the seals with new
ones.
Piston Rod
• Replace the rod if there are cracks. Measuring the Bend
• If the threads are damaged, repair them or replace
it.
• If the plating layer of the plated portion is broken,
rusted or scratched, replace it.
• If the rod is bent more than the limit of 1 mm in 1
m, replace it. (Measure by the method shown in the
figure at right.
If the bending of the rod is within the above limit,
yet is bent a lot in a small distance so that it won’t a. Support the portion of the rod with the same
move smoothly, replace the rod if it makes a diameter at both ends on V-blocks.
squeaking sound in the operation test after reas- b. Set a dial gauge at the center between the two
sembly or if it catches during movement. blocks.
• If the inner diameter of the clevis bushing is worn, c. Rotate the rod and take a reading of the maximum
replace the bushing. and minimum runout indicated by the dial gauge.
Tube
• If there are cracks in the welded portion, replace it.
• Replace the tube if the inside surface is scratched
or if it leaks hydraulic oil.
• If the inner diameter of the clevis bushing is worn,
replace the bushing.
Rod Cover
• If the bushing inner diameter is worn and the
clearance with the piston rod is greater than 0.25
mm, replace the bushing.
• If the inside surface of the bushing is scratched, and
the scratches are deeper than the depth of the
coating layer, replace the bushing.
IV-119 TB175
Inspection after Assembly

No Load Operation Test
1. Place the cylinder in a horizontal position with no
load.
2. Apply gentle pressure alternately to the ports at
both ends, operating the piston rod 5 or 6 times.
3. Make sure there is no abnormality in the operat-
ing condition.
Leak Test
External Leakage
1. Apply test pressure for 3 minutes each to the
retraction side and the extension side.
2. Make sure there are no abnormalities such as
external leakage or permanent deformation, etc.
in the rod seal, the rod cover mount, or in any
welded portion.
Internal Leakage
1. Disconnect the extension side hose.
2. Apply test pressure to the retraction side for 3
minutes.
3. Measure the amount of oil that has leaked from
the extension side.
• The amount of leakage should be 1 cm3 / 3min
or less.
Bleeding Air from the Hydraulic Cylinder

Bleed the air out of the cylinder when the cylinder is
removed or when the hydraulic piping, etc. is discon-
nected.
1. Start the engine and let it idle for approximately
5 minutes.
2. With the engine running at slow speed, extend
and retract the cylinder 4 or 5 times.
• Move the piston rod to a position 100 mm
before the end of the stroke, being careful not
to apply any relief at all.
3. With the engine at top speed, repeat the operation
in (2), then with the engine running at slow speed,
move the piston rod to the stroke end and apply
relief.
TB175 IV-120
TROUBLESHOOTING

Oil leaks from piston rod • Foreign matter is caught in the inner • Remove the foreign matter.
sliding surface (an oil ring diameter portion of the rod packing,
forms on the piston and backup ring or dust seal.
this enlarges and drips off). • The inner diameter lip of the rod packing, • Replace the affected parts.
backup ring or dust seal is damaged or
abnormal.
• Piston rod sliding surface is scratched. • Smooth the sliding surface with an oil
stone (1.6 S or lower)
• If it leaks after the sliding surface has
been smoothed, replace the rod pack-
ing and other seals.
• If it leaks after the seals have been
replaced, replace the piston rod.
• The hardened chrome plating is separat- • Repair the hardened chrome plating.
ing from the piston rod.
Oil leaks from the outer • O-ring is damaged. • Replace the affected parts.
circumference of the rod • Backup ring is damaged. • Replace the affected parts.
cover.
Oil leaks from welded por- • The tube’s welds are damaged. • Replace the affected parts.
tion.
Cylinder natural drop (this • Foreign matter is caught in the wear ring • Remove the foreign matter.
is the maximum amount sliding surface.
of movement of the piston • The sliding surface of the wear ring is • Replace the affected parts.
in 10 minutes when a static scratched or abnormal.
weight corresponding to • The piston packing sliding surface is • Replace the affected parts.
the maximum use pressure scratched.
multiplied by the • The O-ring is damaged. • Replace the affected parts.
cylinder’s surface area) is
0.5 mm or greater.
IV-121 TB175
TABLE OF SPECIAL TOOLS
Installation Jig (B)
MATERIAL: SS41
Unit: mm
Installation Jig (B)
A B C D E F
Boom 69 54.5 10 5 30 75
Boom (2-Piece Boom) 89 74.5 10 5 30 95
Arm 74 59.5 10 5 30 80
Arm (2-Piece Boom) 79 64.5 10 5 30 85
Bucket 59 49.5 10 5 30 70
Dozer Blade 74 59.5 10 5 30 80
Swing 89 74.5 10 5 30 95
Sliding Jig (C) Fitting Jig (D)
MATERIAL: STKM13C MATERIAL: NYLON

Unit: mm
Sliding Jig (C) Fitting Jig (D)
A B C D E F A B C D E F
Boom 80.7 79.7 65 70.7 19.5 72 10 52 72 75 79 82
Boom (2-Piece Boom) 121.0 119.7 101 107.3 23.5 97 13 71 97 110 117 120
Arm 96 94.7 79 85.7 22.5 77 10 57 77 90 94 97
Arm (2-Piece Boom) 101.0 99.7 84 90.7 22.5 77 10 57 77 95 99 102
Bucket 85.7 84.7 70 75.7 19.5 75 10 55 75 80 84 87
Dozer Blade 101.0 99.7 84 90.7 22.5 77 10 57 77 95 99 102
Swing 121.0 119.7 101 107.3 23.5 97 13 71 97 110 117 120
TB175 IV-122
Corrective Jig (E)
MATERIAL: STKM13C
Unit: mm
A B
Boom 93 80
Boom (2-Piece Boom) 133 120
Arm 108 95
Arm (2-Piece Boom) 113 100
Bucket 98 85
Dozer Blade 113 100
Swing 133 120
IV-123 TB175
TB175 IV-124
TENSIONING CYLINDER HYDRAULIC UNITS
TENSIONING CYLINDER
CONSTRUCTION
SECTION “X-X”
L1-D405E
1. Tube 11. Backup Ring 21. Check Valve 31. Bolt

2. Piston Rod 12. O-ring 22. O-ring 32. Plug
3. Rod Cover 13. Backup Ring 23. Backup Ring 33. O-ring
4. Bushing 14. O-ring 24. Plug 34. Valve Seat
5. Dust Seal 15. Ball 25. Needle 35. O-ring
6. Snap Ring 16. Set Screw 26. Seal Washer 36. Check Valve
7. O-ring 17. Valve Seat 27. O-ring 37. Spring
8. Piston 18. O-ring 28. Plate
9. Wear Ring 19. O-ring 29. Handle
10. Rod Packing 20. Backup Ring 30. Spring Washer
IV-125 TB175
HYDRAULIC UNITS TENSIONING CYLINDER
Table of Special Tool

Unit: mm
Names, Dimensions
Installation Jig (A)
ø59.7 -0.3
0
ø64
0
5 -0.25 ø80
30 30
65
L1-D430
MATERIAL; S41
General Cautions
“IV-113”
Following is an explanation of the tensioning cylinder

disassembly procedure. Follow the procedure used to
disassemble the tensioning cylinder in reverse order
when assembling it.
Disassembly
Cylinder Assembly
1. Fasten the tube so that it is flat.
2. Drain out hydraulic oil remaining in the cylinder.

• Move the piston rod gently to prevent the
hydraulic oil from spraying out and scattering
all over.
3. Free the locked portion of the rod cover.

• Since the lock is integrated with the cylinder
tube, be careful not to bend it or to scratch it
when the lock is being freed.
4. Loosen the rod cover.

• Measures should be taken to prevent the piston
rod from being hit.
Rod cover: 431 N·m
5. Take the piston rod assembly out of the tube.

• Pull it out straight to prevent the sliding sur-
faces from being scratched.
TB175 IV-126
TENSIONING CYLINDER HYDRAULIC UNITS
Piston Rod Assembly
1. Fasten the piston rod assembly securely in a level
position.

a. Take out the set screw (1) and remove the ball
(2).
• The set screw is staked at 2 places with a
punch, so grind off the staked portions using
a hand drill.
• When assembling, caulk the set screw at
two places with a punch.
Set screw: 16.7 N·m
b. Loosen piston (3) and remove it.
Piston: 1912 N·m
c. Remove the O-ring (4) from the piston rod.
3. Remove the rod cover (5).
Piston
1. Remove the wear ring (6) from the piston.
• Spread the wear ring the minimum amount
necessary and remove it in the axial direction.
2. Remove the O-ring (7) and backup ring (8).

• When assembling, be careful to install in the
proper position.
3. Remove the rod packing (9) and backup ring (10).

• When assembling, be careful to install the rod
packing in the proper position.
IV-127 TB175
HYDRAULIC UNITS TENSIONING CYLINDER
Rod Cover
1. Remove the O-ring (11).
2. Remove the Snap ring (12) and the dust seal (13).
3. Remove the bushing.

• Since the bushing has been pressure fitted
tightly in the rod cover, it is impossible to take
it out. First use a lathe to grind down the inside
portion until only a thin piece remains, then
insert a copper spatula strongly and pry it out
to removed it.
• When assembling, use installation jig (A) and
pressure fit the bushing with a press.
• When assembling, apply hydraulic oil to the
inside surface of the rod cover before installing
it.
• After installation, make sure there are no level
differences with the bushing.
“IV-119~120”
TROUBLESHOOTING
“IV-121”
TB175 IV-128
TRAVEL MOTOR HYDRAULIC UNITS
TRAVEL MOTOR
CONSTRUCTION
Hydraulic Motor
1 5 11 16 17 6 4 8 10
19
14
18
15 23 22 21 20 13 24 12 7
L3D500
1. Spring Pin 9. Guide 17. Brake Piston

2. Ball 10. Swash Plate 18. 2-Speed Piston
3. Shaft 11. O-ring 19. Oil Seal
4. Cylinder Block 12. Spring 20. O-ring
5. Valve Plate 13. Center Disc 21. O-ring
6. Piston 14. Bearing 22. O-ring
7. Shoe 15. Bearing 23. O-ring
8. Shoe Holder 16. Disk Spring 24. Friction Disc
IV-129 TB175
HYDRAULIC UNITS TRAVEL MOTOR
Reduction Gears
8 15 16 13 1 17 20 3
2
22
11
5
14
19
21
18 4 12 9 10
L3D501
1. Housing 7. Gear S2 13. Snap Ring 19. Inner Race

2. Cover 8. Flange Holder 14. Needle 20. Ring Nut
3. Carrier 2 9. Thrust Plate 15. Floating Seal 21. Plug
4. Gear B1 10. Screw 16. Collar 22. Thrust Plate
5. Gear B2 11. Snap Ring 17. Bearing
6. Gear S1 12. Inner Race 18. Thrust Washer
TB175 IV-130
Counterbalance Valve, 2-speed Control Valve
1 2 4 6 15 9
16
B 5
12
23
18 20 11 22 21 13 24 19 14 17 10 7 3
A: 2-Speed Control Valve

B: Counterbalance Valve
L3D502
1. Body 13. Poppet

2. Spool 14. Plug
3. Check Valve 15. O-ring
4. Stopper 16. O-ring
5. Spool 17. O-ring
6. Spring 18. Plug
7. Spring 19. Plug
8. Spring 20. Spring
9. Plug 21. Cartridge
10. Plug 22. O-ring
12. Needle 24. O-ring
IV-131 TB175
OPERATION

Hydraulic Motor
9 pistons (2) are fitted in the cylinder block (1) and
there is a valve plate (3) with two half moon ports, B
and C in the end. Also, the cylinder block (1) rotates
freely and is joined to the shaft (4) via the spline. On
the other band, the swash plate (5) is fastened to the

housing.
When high pressure oil is introduced into port B, one
piston (2) makes contact and force F bears on the
swash plate (5).
F = P × A P: Pressure A: Piston Sectional Area
The force F which the piston (2) applies to the swash
plate (5) is divided into force F1, which pushes the
plate, and force F2, which rotates the cylinder block
(1). The total sum of the components in the direction
of rotation of the high pressure side piston generates
a rotational force in the cylinder block (1) and via the
spline, torque is transmitted to the shaft (4), turning it.

Conversely, if high pressure oil is introduced to port
C, rotation is the reverse of the above.

Counterbalance Valve
If high pressure oil is introduced to port P1, the oil
pushes the check valve (6) up. This causes oil to flow 6
through the motor port M1 and to flow into chamber M2
B of the pilot portion and fill it. When hydraulic oil
flows the motor from port M1 and acts to turn the M1
motor, even if oil returns from the motor and flows
into port M2, since the flow is cut off by the check
B
valve (6), the pressure at port P1 and in chamber B
7
rises. If the pressure in chamber B becomes higher
than the set valve of the spring (7), the spool (8) moves 8
to the left side and ports M2 and P2 open up, causing P2 P1
the motor to turn. L3D503
If the motor’s turning becomes too fast, and the

amount of oil flowing out of port M2 is greater than
the amount of oil flowing into port M1, the pressure
in port P1 and chamber B drops. When the pressure in M2
chamber B drops below the set valve of the spring (7),
the spool (8) attempts to return to the right side. As a M1
result, since the resuming oil is constricted at portion
D, back pressure is generated at port M2 and the
B
motor’s turning is slowed.
7
D 8
P2 P1
L3D504
TB175 IV-132
When the motor is slowed, the pressure in port P1 and
chamber B rises again and the spool (8) moves to the
left aide, eliminating the back pressure generated at
port M2. In this way, the motor is controlled so that it
rotates at a speed appropriate for the amount of oil
flowing into it.
If the high pressure hydraulic oil introduced into port

P1 is cut off, the pressure at ports P1 and P2 becomes
the same and the spool (8) returns to the neutral
position by spring force. For this reason, the oil in M2
chamber B is pushed out at port P1. At this time, the
flow of oil is restricted by the orifice (9) as it is M1
returning to port P1, so the spool (8) returns to the
neutral position slowly. In this way, the motor is
B
stopped while the shock during stopping is absorbed.
8
9
P2 P1
L3D505
Relief Valve
Operation 1 M2 M1
When the Motor is Started
When the motor is started, since the inertial load is
great, the pressure of the oil required to accelerate it
rises. If this pressure reaches the relief valve set
pressure, the relief valve operates and oil returns to
port M2.
In this way, the motor begins to turn as it relieves the
relief valve, and as the rotational speed increases, the
amount of relief decreases until it stops.
In this way, the shock during starting is absorbed.
P2 P1 G4D503
When the Motor is Stopped

When the motor is stopped, the return circuit is closed M2 M1
off.
However, since the motor tends to want to continue
rotating due to inertial energy, the pressure in port M2
rises. When this pressure reaches the relief valve’s set
pressure, the relief valve operates and oil flows to port
M1. In this way, the flow of oil to port M1 prevents
cavitation from occurring as it absorbs the shock
during stopping.
P2 P1
G4D504
IV-133 TB175
Operation 2
Since this relief valve has a shockless mechanism, it SECTIONÒA1Ó SECTIONÒAÓ
operates in 2 steps. C
11 10
1st Step
When relief valve operation starts, the pressure in
chamber B (P1) is kept at a pressure which is lower
than that in chamber C while the pressure in chamber
A (P) becomes higher than the pressure of the oil P1 P
flowing in.
At this time, there are two forces acting on the poppet
(10), force (F), which attempts to move the poppet
(10) to the left and force (F1) which pushes against the A
B
seat on the right side. Since F = P × A, F1 = P1 × A1,
P > P1 and A > A1, the poppet (10) is moved to the left L3D506E
by this force “F – F1”.

This opens a supply side circuit from chamber A and SECTIONÒA1Ó SECTIONÒAÓ
lets the pressure escape. That is, during the time piston
(11) is moving to its stroke end, the relief valve 11 10
operates at low pressure (about 1/3 the set pressure).
2nd Step
When the piston (11) reaches the stroke end, the
P1 P
pressure in chamber B rises and the pressures in
chamber A and chamber B equalize. At this time, the
force moving the poppet (10) to the left side becomes
“P = P1”, so this becomes “A – A1” and the relief
B A
valve operates at the specified set pressure.
L3D507E
2-Speed Mechanism
2-speed control valve
When high-pressure oil led to the port M1 and the 5
travel 2-speed solenoid valve (1) is set to speed 1, the
chamber C is connected to the tank via the travel 2-
speed solenoid (1), so that a low pressure is obtained.
For this reason, the spool (2) is pushed to the left by
the spring (4), the control chamber (3) and the tank
1 T
port (T) are connected, and there is no force pushing
the swash plate (5) in upward direction. M1
C 2 4 L3D508
When the travel 2-speed solenoid valve (1) is switched 3

to speed 2, the pressure oil from the travel 2-speed 11
solenoid valve (1) flows to the chamber C, the spool 5
(2) is moved to the right, and the port M1 is connected
with the port A, while the port M2 is connected with
the port B. Then the pressure oil from the port P1
moves the shuttle spool (12) to the right and flows to
the control chamber (3). This causes operation of the
control piston (11), and the swash plate (5) is pushed T
up. M1
At the time of engine stop, no pressure oil is supplied
any longer, and the spring (4) returns the spool (2) to
1 4
the speed 1 position. C 2 12 L3D509
TB175 IV-134
Swash Plate
8
β B
5 A
9
C α
11
3
10
E5D512
The swash plate (5) has 3 planes, A, B and C, as shown connected to the motor drive pressure port and the
in the figure, and it is assembled in such a way that its swash plate (5) stabilizes at plane B due to the equi-
angle of inclination in the flange holder (6) can varied librium between the force of the springs (9), (10) and
by two balls (7). When the 2-speed control valve is the force of the control piston (11), thus, assuming
switched to the 1st speed side, the swash plate control swash plate angle ß. In this way, 2nd speed (high
piston chamber is connected to tank port and the speed) motor rotation is achieved.
swash plate (5) is stabilized at plane A, forming swash When the engine is stopped, the pilot pressure of the
plate angle a, by the piston assembly (8) and the force 2-speed control valve is cut off, so the swash plate (5)
of the springs (9), (10), achieving 1st speed (low is stabilized at the swash plate a plane A by the force
speed) motor rotation. of the springs (9), (10), changing to the 1st speed side.
When the 2-speed control valve is switched to 2nd For this reason, when starting, the motor also is in 1st
speed, the swash plate control piston chamber (3) is speed.
Automatic second speed switching

If the motor load becomes too large while operating at
the second speed, the pressure of oil that flows from 11
the counter balance valve through the passage (13)
and acts on cross sections A and B of the spool (2)
becomes high. The pressure receiving surfaces of
cross sections A and B differ in size. If the pressure
difference between cross sections A and B, plus the
pressure of the spring (4) are larger than the pressure
from the pilot port, the spool (2) moves to the left.
At this time, the pressure oil acting on the piston (11)
from the shuttle valve (12) through the slow return
valve (14) flows into the tank passage through the
orifice (15) of the slow return valve (14).
As the return oil passes through the orifice (15), the
piston (11) returns slowly to switch to the first speed 14
position.
13 15
12 2 4
A B
L3D510
IV-135 TB175
Parking brake
The center discs (1) are connected to the flange holder 2 5
and the friction discs (2) are connected to the cylinder
block (3) via the spline, respectively. The center discs
(1) and friction discs (2) are pressed against the flange
holder (6) by the spring (4) via the brake piston (5).
The friction force between these discs generates the 4
brake torque to prevent the cylinder block (3) from
rotating.
When the pressure oil is introduced into the motor, the 1 3

spool of the counterbalance valve moves and the oil
6 7
flows from the parking brake release port (7) into the
brake piston chamber (8). The oil pressure overpow- L3D511
ers the spring force and moves the brake piston (5) to
the right. This generates a clearance between the 5
2
center discs (1) and friction discs (2) to release the
parking brake. When the motor stops, the spool re-
turns to the neutral position to close the parking brake
release port (7). The pressure oil in the brake piston
chamber (8) is introduced into the motor case and the 4
spring (4) operates the parking brake.
1 8
7
L3D512
Reduction Gears
The reduction gear has a simple planetary two-stage a1,a2
configuration. It decelerates the high speed rotary
motions of the hydraulic motor, converts them into B1 B2
low speed high torque, and rotates the case. The
output shaft of the hydraulic motor is connected to the
gear S2 via the spline. The rotation of the gear S2 is S1 1
decelerated by one stage among the gears S2, B2 and S2
a2. This one-stage decelerated rotation is further
decelerated by two stages among the gears S1, B1 and
a1 that are connected to the carrier 2 (1) via the spline.
This rotation is conveyed to the rotary main body via
the inner gears a1 and a2 as the driving force of the
motor. C4D560
TB175 IV-136

Unit: mm
NAME, DIMENSIONS NAME, DIMENSIONS
JIG (A) JIG (C)
¿55 ¿150
¿40 ¿80
1 3
15
10
L3D513 L3D515
JIG (B) JIG (D)
67

63

13.9
17.4
60
10

M10
2 4

¿60
¿63
¿67
¿78
3.5
R3

C3
10 25 7 3
45

L3D514
General Cautions
• Carry out disassembly and assembly operations in • Replace all seals with new ones each time the unit
brush.
• Wash the disassembled parts and dry them with
compressed air. Do not use a rag, as this could
cause clogging of dirt.
assembled in the same positions when reassembled.
Disassembly
Counterbalance Valve and Hydraulic Motor
1. Take out the cartridge (1).
• Do not disassemble the cartridge any further.
2 1 3
2. Remove the spring (2) and poppet (3). L3D517
IV-137 TB175
3. Take out the plug (4) and remove the plug (5).
4
L3D518
4. Remove the spring (6) and spring seat (7). 6

8 7
5. Remove the spool assembly (8).
• Remove the spool assembly while turning it
gently.
• Be careful not to scratch or bruise the outside
surface.
L3D519
6. Remove the plug (9), then remove the spring (10)

and poppet (11).
11
10
9 L3D520
7. Remove the plug (12), then remove the spring

(13) and spindle (14).
8. Remove the adapter, then remove the spool (15). 15

• Do not scratch or bruise the outside surface of
the spool.
14
13
12 L3D521
TB175 IV-138
9. Take out the cap screws.
10. Remove the valve body.

• Be careful not to let cylinder block come out.
• If it is difficult to remove, tap on it gently in the
removal direction using a plastic hammer or
pry it gently with a screw driver.
11. Remove the valve plate (16), O-ring and disc

spring (17). 16 17 18 19
12. Remove the brake piston (18).

• Blow compressed air into the parking brake
release port of the flange holder and remove
the brake piston.
13. Remove the cylinder block (19), friction discs

(20) and center discs (21).
21 20
L3D522
14. Remove the shoe holder (22) and piston assembly

(23) from the cylinder block. 24
15. Remove the guide (24) and springs (25) from the
cylinder block. 22
25 23 24 22
L3D523
IV-139 TB175
16. Remove the swash plate (26), ball (27), and piston
assembly (28) from the flange holder.
27
26 28
L3D524
17. Remove the shaft, then remove the oil seal.

• Bring a round bar in contact with the round
hole of the shaft and tap lightly with a hammer.
• Use a (–) screw driver to remove the oil seal.
Reduction Gears
1. Loosen the drain plug (1) and drain out the oil. 1 1

• Remove the cover in horizontal condition.
L3D527
3. Remove the carrier assembly (2) and gear S1 (3).
4. Disassemble the carrier assembly (2). 4

a. Remove the thrust plate (4), then remove the 5
carrier. 6
2
b. Remove gear B2 (6) and inner race, needle (7).
7
3
L3D528
TB175 IV-140
5. Remove the screw, then remove the thrust plate
(8).
8
6. Remove the gear B1 (9).
9
L3D529
7. Remove inner race (10) and thrust washer (11).

• Do not scratch the gear tooth surfaces or the
rotating surface of the inner race (10). B
• Use the jig (B). 10
11
L3D530
8. Remove the plugs, then remove the ring nut.
9. Disassemble the flange holder and housing.
L3D531
10. Remove the angular bearing (12), snap ring (13), C

collar (14) and floating seal (15).
• Use the press and jig (C). 12
13
14
15
L3D532
IV-141 TB175
Assembly
Reduction Gears
1. Install the floating seal (15) in the flange holder. 12
• Apply grease to the O-ring of the floating seal.
Be careful not to twist the O-ring. 13
14
2. Install the snap ring (13), collar (14), angular
bearing (12) and floating seal (15).
• Apply grease to the O-ring of the floating seal. 15
Be careful not to twist the O-ring.
L3D533
3. Tighten the ring nut to secure the angular bearing. D

• Use tightening jig (D).
• Apply gear oil to the screws of the ring nut, and
turn the housing to the right and left to apply
the oil evenly. Repeat the tightening of the ring
nut two or three times before tightening it to the
stipulated torque.
Ring nut: 196 N·m
4. Install the plugs.

Plug: 34.3 N·m
5. Stake the plug at 2 points with a punch. L3D534
6. Install the thrast washer (11) and inner race (10).

• Use the press and jig (A).
• Take care not to damage the perimeter of the
A
inner race.
10
11
L3D535
7. Install the gear B1 (9).

8
8. Install the thrust plate (8), then install the screw.
• Apply Loctite #242 to the screw. 9
• When applying Loctite, degrease all the sur-
faces thoroughly and use a hardening accelera-
tor.
Screw: 6.9 N·m
L3D529
TB175 IV-142
9. Install the snap ring on the gear S1 (3), then install
the gears S1.
10. Install the carrier assembly. 4

a. Install the inner race, the needle (7) and gear 5
B2 (6) in the carrier. 6
2
b. Install the carrier in the housing.
7
c. Install the gear S2 (5). 3
L3D528
d. Install the thrust plate (4).

• Measure the dimensions of A and B, and
select the thrust plate thickness so that the
value of A minus B becomes 0.2 mm to 0.4 B
mm.
4
A
L3D536
11. Set the cover, then tighten the cap screw.

Cap screw: 11.8 N·m 1 1
• Remove the grease on the matching surface
between the housing and cover and apply
Loctite #515.
12. Pour gear oil in through the plug hole, then install
the plug (1).
• Wind seal tape around the plug.
• Quantity of oil: Approx. 1.5 L
Plug: 11.8 N·m
L3D527
Counterbalance Valve and Hydraulic Motor

1. Press fit the oil seal into the flange holder.
• Make sure to apply ThreeBond #1104 over the
perimeter of the oil seal.
• Fill between the lips of the oil seal with grease.
L3D537
IV-143 TB175
2. Mount the shaft on the flange holder.

• The bearing has been inserted and cannot be
disassembled.
• Be careful not to damage the oil seal by the
shaft.
C4D567
3. Install the 2-speed piston (28).

27
4. Install the balls (27) and swash plate (26).
• Apply hydraulic oil to the sliding surfaces of
the swash plate.
26 28
L3D524
5. Mount the springs (25) on the cylinder block

assembly. 24
6. Mount the piston (23) and guide (24) on to the

shoe holder (22) to assemble the shoe holder 22
assembly.
7. Mount the shoe holder assembly on the cylinder

block to assemble the cylinder block assembly.
25 23 24 22
L3D523
8. Mount the cylinder block assembly on the flange

holder.
• Mount the cylinder block assembly in such a
manner that the shoe will touch the swash
plate.
C4D575
TB175 IV-144
9. Install the center discs (21) in the groove of the
flange holder and then install the friction discs
(20) in the groove of the cylinder block, alter-
nately one by one.
• Total number of center discs: 3
• Total number of friction disc: 3
21 20
L3D538
10. Fit the O-rings on the brake piston (18).

B A 18
11. Install the brake piston (18) on the flange holder.
• Align the notch (A) of the brake piston with the
pilot passage (B).
• Push the brake piston by hand force evenly on
the piston.
L3D539
12. Install the disc spring (17) in the flange holder.

• Install the disk spring so that its perimeter 16 17 18 19
contacts the brake piston.
21 20
L3D522
13. Mount the O-rings on the flange holder.
14. Supply 0.5 L of hydraulic oil into the flange

holder and mount the valve body on the flange
holder.
15. Mount the valve plate (16).

• Face the brass thrust surface of the valve plate
toward you and apply grease on its back to
prevent the valve plate from dropping off.
• Align the pin of the brake valve with the valve
plate and install them. 16
L3D540
IV-145 TB175
16. Set the valve body, then tighten the cap screw.
Cap screw: 140 N·m
17. Attach the end of the spool (15) to the spindle (14)
and install them on the body.
• Insert the spool from the adapter side.
15
18. Fit the O-ring, spring (13) to the adapter and
thighten the adapter to the body.
Adapter: 30 N·m 14
19. Fit the O-ring to the plug (12) and tighten the plug
to the body. 13
Plug: 35 N·m
12 L3D521
20. Install the poppet (11) and spring (10).
to the body.
Plug: 35 N·m
11
10
9 L3D520
22. Install the spool assembly in the valve body.

7 5 6
23. Fit the O-ring, spring (6) and stopper (7) on the
plug (5).
L3D541
TB175 IV-146
24. Install the plug (5).
Plug: 270 N·m
5
to the body.
Plug: 35 N·m
4
L3D518
26. Install the poppet (3) and spring (2).
27. Fit the O-ring to the cartridge (1) and tighten the
cartridge to the dody.
Cartridge: 120 N·m
2 1 3 L3D517
IV-147 TB175
Checking the Parts

Parts Area Checked Judgement Criteria Treatment
Floating Seal Sliding Surface There should be no abnormal scratches, Replace
wear or seizing.
Angular Bearing Sliding Surface There should be no abnormal scratches, Replace
wear, flaking, etc. in the ball or race.
Planetary Gears Surface of Gear Teeth There should be no abnormal scratches, Replace
wear or flaking of the tooth surfaces (if
there has been pitting which covers 5%
or more of the engagement portion of
the tooth surface).
Front of cage and roller ro- There should be no abnormal scratches,
tating surface. wear or flaking of the rotating surface.
Inner Race Surface condition of inner There should be no abnormal scratches, Replace
race rotating surface. wear or flaking of the rotating surface.
Needle Surface of needle. There should be no abnormal scratches, Replace
wear or flaking.
Thrust Washer Front of sliding surface There should be no abnormal scratches, Replace
wear or seizing.
Housing, Sun Gear, Front of Gear Tooth Sur- There should be no abnormal scratches, Replace
Drive Gear faces wear or flaking in the tooth surfaces (if
there has been pitting which covers 5%
or more of the engagement portion of
the tooth surface).
Thrust Plate Front of sliding surface. There should be no abnormal scratches Replace
(0.02 mm or greater), wear or seizing,
etc.
O-ring   Replace
Shaft Surface of oil seal. There should be no scratches or abnor- Replace
mal wear.
Ball Bearing Front of sliding surface. There should be no abnormal scratches, Replace
wear or flaking in the ball and race.
Oil Seal   Replace
Swash Plate Front of the surface which There should be no abnormal scratches Repair by lapping
slides with the sliding sur- (0.02 mm or greater), wear or seizing. (#1000) or replace.
face of the piston assembly.
Cylinder Block Clearance with the piston 0.04 mm or greater Repair with wrap
assembly. (#1000) or replace
Front of the surface which There should be no abnormal scratches the cylinder block
slides with the valve plate. (0.02 mm or greater), wear or seizing. and piston assem-
bly at the same
Piston Assembly Clearance with cylinder 0.04 mm or greater
time.
block
Front of the surface which There should be no abnormal scratches
slides with the swash plate. (0.02 mm or greater), wear or seizing.
Clearance between piston 0.4 mm or greater Replace
and shoe.
TB175 IV-148
Parts Area Checked Judgement Criteria Treatment

Valve Plate Front of the surface which There should be no abnormal scratches Repair by lapping
slides with the spool. (0.02 mm or greater), wear or seizing. (#1000) or replace.
Base Plate Front of the surface which There should be no abnormal scratches, Replace the base
slides with the spool. wear or seizing. plate and the spool
Spool Front of the surface which There should be no abnormal scratches, at the same time.
slides with the base plate. wear or seizing.
Front of the surface which There should be no abnormal scratches, Replace the spool
slides with the check valve. wear or seizing. and the check
Check Valve Front of the surface which There should be no abnormal scratches, valve at the same
slides with the spool. wear or seizing. time.
Surface of spool and seat. There should be contact with the seat
around the entire circumference.
IV-149 TB175
TROUBLESHOOTING
Hydraulic Motor
Does not move. • Equipment other than the motor, coun- • Check if the proper pressure is reached
terbalance valve or speed reducer is on the motor inlet port side, then check
malfunctioning. each device and repair if necessary.
• Hydraulic oil is escaping due to ab- • Replace the abnormally worn parts.
normal wear of motor sliding parts.
• Principal motor parts are malfunc- • Replace the damaged parts.
tioning due to damage.
Motor won’t speed up. • The proper volume of hydraulic oil is • Check if the proper pressure is reached
not being supplied to the motor due to on the motor inlet port side, then check
the hydraulic pump, control valve, each device and repair if necessary.
etc.
• The motor’s volumetric efficiency is
• Check if the sliding parts are abnor-
dropping. mally worn, then repair or replace the
worn parts.
Changes in rotational speed • High pressure hydraulic oil is leaking • Replace the abnormally worn parts.
are great. and flowing out of the drain port due
to wear of the motor's sliding parts.
• Bearings are worn. • Replace the bearings if they are abnor-
mally worn.
Oil is leaking. • Oil is leaking due damage to oil seals • Replace the oil seals and O-rings.
or O-rings.
Counterbalance Valve
Does not move or rotation is Spool does not switch.
slow. • No hydraulic oil is arriving. • Repair or replace the damaged piping.
• Foreign matter is caught. • Remove the foreign matter and repair
or replace the damaged parts.
• The orifice is clogged up. • Clean it.
Won’t stop or stopping is The spool won’t return.
slow. • Foreign matter gets caught. • Remove the foreign matter and repair
• A spring is missing. • Install the spring.
• A spring is damaged. • Replace the spring.
Shock is great when stopping. Spool return is fast.
• The spring seat is missing. • Install the spring seat.
Valve makes an abnormal The spool does not return.
noise. • Foreign matter gets caught. • Remove the foreign matter and repair
TB175 IV-150
2-speed Control Function
Machine veers during travel. Spool doesn’t switch over.
• Foreign matter is caught. • Remove the foreign matter and repair
• A spring is missing. • Install the spring.
IV-151 TB175
TB175 IV-152
SLEW MOTOR HYDRAULIC UNITS
SLEW MOTOR
CONSTRUCTION
Hydraulic Motor
3 2 1 23 25 9 16
14
26
11
17
10
12
24
20
15
8
29
7
18
28 21 5 22 13 27 19
L3D600
1. O-ring 11. Spring 21. O-ring

2. O-ring 12. Retainer 22. Center Disc
3. O-ring 13. Guide 23. Swash Plate
4. O-ring 14. Pin 24. Bearing
5. Friction Disc 15. Valve Plate 25. Case
6. Cylinder Block 16. Bearing 26. Pin
7. Brake Piston 17. Snap Ring 27. Piston
8. Spring 18. Collar 28. O-ring
9. Shaft 19. Shoe Holder 29. Spring
10. Retainer 20. Pin
IV-153 TB175
HYDRAULIC UNITS SLEW MOTOR
Reduction Gears
26 16 13 14 12 18 10
4
1
8
11
24 23 17 25 9 21 15 19 27 20 22
L3D601
1. Plate 10. Carrier 2 19. Screw

2. Oil Seal 11. Plate 20. Sun Gear
3. Shaft 12. Race 21. Carrier 1
4. Collar 13. Needle 22. Collar
5. Bearing 14. Planetary Gear 23. Race
6. Case 15. Thrust Plate 24. Needle
7. Bearing 16. Drive Gear 25. Planetary Gear A
8. Plate 17. O-ring 26. Thrust Plate
9. Thrust Washer 18. Thrust Washer 27. Snap Ring
TB175 IV-154
Brake Valve
33 32 31
34
2 4
1
C 3
23 22 25 24 21
27 29 17 18 12 14 13 14 11 10 16
15
28 6 5 20 19 8 9
26 30
L3D602
A: Relief Valve
B: Timer Valve
C: Check Valve
D: Anti-rebound Valve
1. Cover 10. Plug 19. O-ring 28. Washer

2. Poppet 11. O-ring 20. Backup ring 29. Orifice
3. O-ring 12. Piston 21. Body 30. O-ring
4. Spring 13. O-ring 22. Check Valve Assembly 31. Body
5. Housing 14. Backup ring 23. Spring 32. Spool
6. Poppet 15. Guide 24. Sleeve 33. Spring
7. Seat 16. O-ring 25. Orifice 34. O-ring
8. Seat 17. O-ring 26. O-ring
9. Spring 18. Backup ring 27. Filter
IV-155 TB175
OPERATION
3 2 1
Hydraulic Motor
9 pistons (2) are fitted in the cylinder block (1) and
there is a valve plate (3) with two half moon ports, B
and C in the end. Also, the cylinder block (1) rotates
freely and is joined to the shaft (4) via the spline. On
the other band, the swash plate (5) is fastened to the
housing. A
When high pressure oil is introduced into port B, one
piston (2) makes contact and force F bears on the
swash plate (5).
F = P × A P: Pressure A: Piston Sectional Area
The force F which the piston (2) applies to the swash
plate (5) is divided into force F1, which pushes the F1
plate, and force F2, which rotates the cylinder block F2 5 4
F
(1). The total sum of the components in the direction
of rotation of the high pressure side piston generates
F
a rotational force in the cylinder block (1) and via the
spline, torque is transmitted to the shaft (4), turning it.
F2
Conversely, if high pressure oil is introduced to port
C, rotation is the reverse of the above.
F
F2
B C
E5D603
Relief Valve M2 M1
Operation 1
When the Motor is Started
When the motor is started, since the inertial load is
great, the pressure of the oil required to accelerate it
rises. If this pressure reaches the relief valve set
pressure, the relief valve operates and oil returns to
port M2.
In this way, the motor begins to turn as it relieves the
relief valve, and as the rotational speed increases, the
amount of relief decreases until it stops.
In this way, the shock during starting is absorbed. T
E5D605
When the Motor is Stopped M2 M1

When the motor is stopped, the return circuit is closed
off.
However, since the motor tends to want to continue
rotating due to inertial energy, the pressure in port M2
rises. When this pressure reaches the relief valve’s set
pressure, the relief valve operates and oil flows to port
M1. In this way, the flow of oil to port M1 prevents
cavitation from occurring as it absorbs the shock
during stopping.
T
E5D606
TB175 IV-156
Operation 2
Since this relief valve has a shockless mechanism, it
operates in 2 steps.

1st Step
When relief valve operation starts, the pressure in

chamber B (P1) is kept at a pressure which is lower
than that in chamber C while the pressure in chamber
A (P) becomes higher than the pressure of the oil
flowing in.
At this time, there are two forces acting on the poppet
(10), force (F), which attempts to move the poppet
(10) to the left and force (F1) which pushes against the
seat on the right side. Since F = P × A, F1 = P1 × A1,
P > P1 and A > A1, the poppet (10) is moved to the left
by this force “F – F1”.
This opens a supply side circuit from chamber A and
lets the pressure escape. That is, during the time piston 10 A
(11) is moving to its stroke end, the relief valve
operates at low pressure (about 1/3 the set pressure).
2nd Step
When the piston (11) reaches the stroke end, the P1 P
pressure in chamber B rises and the pressures in
chamber A and chamber B equalize. At this time, the
force moving the poppet (10) to the left side becomes
“P = P1”, so this becomes “A – A1” and the relief
valve operates at the specified set pressure. B 11
L3D604
Anti-rebound Valve 2 B
When the motor stops, this valve will connect the
motor main circuit to the makeup circuit for a pre-
scribed time to prevent motor rebound due to the
pressure in the main circuit.
When the Brake is Actuated

The braking pressure generated at the port Pv1 will
move the check valve (2) to the right until it is seated
at section B. Pv1 Cv Pv2
G4D604
When the Motor Rebounds

When the motor is stopped by braking operation of the
brake valve, it starts to rebound due to the pressure in
the main circuit. This rebound pressure generated at
the port Pv2 will move the sleeve (3) to the left to open
the passage. This then releases the rebound pressure
to the port Cv.
Pv1 Cv Pv2
B 3
G4D605
IV-157 TB175
The rebound pressure also pushes the check valve (1)

to the left, which is the opposite direction of pushing 2 1
at the time of braking. The flux control valve built in
the check valve (2) (that is now on the lower pressure
side) releases the oil in the damper chamber (4) at a
constant flux. Therefore, the check valve (1) moves at
a constant speed. When the check valve reaches its
stroke end, the passage from the port Pv2 to the port
Cv is closed.
Pv1 Cv Pv2
4
G4D606
Timer Valve 2 1 PG
This function is used to prevent sudden operation of
the parking brake when the motor is stopped.
At the time of parking brake operation, pressure oil
from the port P4 is supplied at all times to the port PG, SH
the valve spool (1) is pushed to the right by the force
of the spring (2), and the port PG is closed. PB
When turning pilot pressure or arm pilot pressure is
led to the port SH, the spool (1) is moved to the left
against the force of the spring (2), and the port PG is
opened. The pressure oil from the port PG passes
through the hole at the center of the spool (1) and is led
to the parking brake release port (PB), so that the L3D605
parking brake is released.

2 1 PG
When the pilot pressure at the port SH disappears, the
spool (1) is moved by the force of the spring (2) to the
right, the port PG is closed, and the oil in the brake
piston chamber (3) is prevented from escaping. The
oil in the chamber flows gradually through the orifice
(4) at the outer circumference of the spool (1) to the
drain port dr, so that the parking brake is not applied
rapidly, but after a certain time, just as if a timer were
used. 4
3 L3D606
Parking brake
The friction discs (2) are connected to the housing and
the center discs (1) are connected to the cylinder block
(3) via the spline, respectively. The center discs (1)
and friction discs (2) are pressed against the housing
(6) by the springs (4) via the brake piston (5). The
friction force between these discs generates the brake
6
torque to prevent the cylinder block (3) from rotating. 5
2
4
When the pressure oil is introduced into the motor, the
oil flows from the parking brake release port (7) into 1 3
the brake piston chamber (8). The oil pressure over-
powers the spring force and moves the brake piston L3D607
TB175 IV-158
(5) to the right. This generates a clearance between the
center discs (1) and friction discs (2) to release the
parking brake. When the motor stops, the spool re-
turns to the neutral position to close the parking brake
release port (7). The pressure oil in the brake piston
chamber (8) is introduced into the motor case and the
spring (4) operates the parking brake.
7 8
2
5
1
4
L3D608
Reduction Gears
The reduction gear is composed of a 2-stage planetary
gear mechanism, and it converts the high-speed op-
eration of the motor to low speed torque for operation
of the pinion shaft (1).
In the figure on the right, the drive force transmitted
from the motor output shaft is transmitted to the
second stage sun gear (5) via the first stage drive gear
(2), the planetary gear (3) and the carrier 1 (4). Drive
force is transmitted in the same way to the pinion shaft
(1) via the second stage sun gear (5), the planetary
gear (6), and the carrier 2 (7), and this becomes the
slewing drive force.
IV-159 TB175

Unit: mm
NAME, DIMENSIONS NAME, DIMENSIONS
JIG (A) JIG (C)
70 150
1 3
¿95 -0.1
-0.2
¿30
¿45
L3D609 L3D611
JIG (B) JIG (D)
50
100
40
2 4 ¿63.2 +0.2
0
100
10
¿35
¿47
63
L3D610
¿78.2 +0.2
0
L3D612
General Cautions
• Carry out disassembly and assembly operations in • Replace all seals with new ones each time the unit
brush.
• Wash the disassembled parts and dry them with
compressed air. Do not use a rag, as this could
cause clogging of dirt.
assembled in the same positions when reassembled.
Disassembly
Slew Motor
1. Remove the cap screws and then the anti-rebound
valve.
K3D626
TB175 IV-160
2. Remove the cap screws to disassemble the motor
into the hydraulic motor (1) and the reduction
gear (2).
• Mark the mating position on both the hydraulic 1
motor and the reduction gear so that they can
be mated correctly when reassembling.
• Fix the hydraulic motor with a vise.
2
K3D627
Brake Valve and Hydraulic Motor

1. Remove the cap screws and then the timer valve
(1).
• Be careful not to miss the O-ring.
L3D613
2. Remove the cap screws and then the cover (2).

• Fix the hydraulic motor with a vise. 2
• Be careful not to let the valve plate drop off.
K3D629
3. Remove the valve plate (3) from the cover.
L3D614
IV-161 TB175
4. Remove the bearing (4).
L3D615
5. Remove the orifice (5).

• The orifice is caulked. Do not remove it unless
necessary.
L3D616
6. Remove the check valve.

9
a. Remove the plug (9). 10
b. Remove the spring (10) and check valve (11). 11
11
10
9
L3D617
7. Remove the relief valve (12).

• Do not loosen the set screw nut (13).
• Do not disassemble the relief valve.
13
12
L3D618
TB175 IV-162
8. Remove the brake piston (15).
• Blow the air from the brake release port PB
with care such that the brake piston does not PB
protrude.
15
PB
L3D619
9. Remove the collar (17).

17
L3D620
10. Remove the cylinder block (18), friction discs

(19) and center discs (20). 18
19
20
L3D621
11. Remove the shoe holder (14) and piston assembly 14 21 22 23

(21) from the cylinder block.
12. Remove the guide (22) and pins (23) from the
cylinder block.
L3D622
IV-163 TB175
13. Remove the snap ring (24), retainer (25), spring

(26) and retainer (27) from the cylinder block 24
(18). 25
• Do not disassemble these parts unless neces- 26
sary. 27
These parts should be replaced as one assem- 18
bly.
A
E5D622
14. Remove the swash plate (28).
28
L3D623
15. Remove the shaft (29).

• Lightly tap the end face with a plastic hammer.
29
L3D624
16. Remove the bearing (30) from the shaft (29).

• Do not disassemble these parts unless neces- 29
sary. The removed bearing cannot be used
again.
30
K3D643
TB175 IV-164
17. Disassemble the timer valve.
• Be careful not to damage or deform the contact 31
surface. 32
a. Remove the plug (31). 33
b. Remove the spring (32) and spool (33).
• Use a pair of tweezers.
K3D644
Reduction Gears 7 4 6 5 3 2 1
1. Remove the O-ring (1).
2. Remove the thrust plate (2).
3. Remove the drive gear (3). 8
4. Remove the planetary gear A (4), needles (5) and

inner race (6).
5. Remove the thrust washer (7).
6. Remove the carrier 1 (8). L3D625
7. Remove the sun gear (9).

10 9
8. Remove the carrier 2 assembly (10).
L3D626
9. Loosen the screw and remove the thrust plate

(11).
• Loctite has been applied to the screw. Warm- 11
ing the screw screws (for example, using a 14 13 12
portable drier) will make its removal much
easier.
10. Remove the planetary gear B (12), needle (13),

inner race (14) and the thrust washer (15).
15
L3D627
IV-165 TB175
11. Remove the collar (9) and plate (10).

• Do not disassemble these parts unless neces-
10 9
sary.
These parts should be replaced as one assem-
bly.
11
L3D628
12. Remove the shaft (11) from the case.

• Be careful not to miss the shaft.
• If the shaft will not come out easily, lightly tap
it with a plastic hammer.
• To replace the taper roller bearing or collar, the
case assembly should be replaced.
25
11
L3D629
13. Remove the inner race (24) of the taper roller

bearing.
24
L3D630
14. Remove the oil seal (23).

• Use a flat blade screwdriver.
• The oil seal should be replaced with a new one
every time it is disassembled.
• Be careful not to damage the outer race of the
taper roller bearing.
23 L3D631
TB175 IV-166
15. Remove the plug (25) from the case.
25
L3D632
Anti-rebound Valve 1
1. Remove the plug (1) and then the spring (2). 2
3
2. Remove the check valve assembly (3).
3. Remove the sleeve (4).
4
3
2
1 G4D613
4. Remove the plug (5) and then the orifice (6). 5
G4D614
5. Remove the orifice (7), washer (8) and filter (9). 7

• The filter should be replaced with a new one 8
every time the anti-rebound valve is disas- 9
sembled.
G4D615
IV-167 TB175
Assembly
Anti-rebound Valve 7
1. Mount the filter (9), washer (8) and orifice (7) on 8
the body. 9
• Use a new filter.
Orifice: 4.9 N·m
G4D615
2. Mount the orifice (6) on the body. 5

Orifice: 2.45 N·m
6
3. Fit the O-ring to the plug (5), and mount them on
the body.
Plug: 61.8 N·m
G4D614
4. Mount the sleeve (4) on the body. 1

2
5. Mount the check valve assembly (3) and the 3
spring (2) on the body.
6. Fit the O-ring to the plug (1), and mount them on

the body.
Plug: 61.8 N·m
4
3
2
1 G4D613
Brake Valve and Hydraulic Motor 31

1. Assemble the timer valve. 32
• Be careful not to damage the rotation section of 33
the valve.
a. Mount the spool (33) and spring (32) on the
body.
b. Fit the O-ring to the plug (31) and mount them
on the body.
Plug: 39.2 ±2.0 N·m
K3D644
TB175 IV-168
2. Mount the retainer (27), spring (26), retainer (25)
and snap ring (24) on the cylinder block (18). 24
• To mount the snap ring, push the retainer (25) 25
by using the press and jig (C). 26
• Position the retainer (27) so that its tapered 27
side (A) faces the cylinder block. 18
A
E5D622
3. Fit the pins (23) to the cylinder block. 14 21 22 23

• Apply grease to the pins.
4. Mount the guide (22).
5. Fit the shoe holder (14) to the piston assembly

(21) and mount them on the cylinder block.
• Apply the hydraulic oil to the rotation section.
L3D622
6. Insert the bearing (30) into the shaft (29).

• Insert the bearing by using the press and jig 29
(A).
30
K3D643
7. Install the shaft (29) in the housing.

• Lightly tap with a plastic hammer to install. 29
L3D633
IV-169 TB175
8. Install the switch plate (28) in the housing.

• Apply grease to the side (A) of the swash plate.
28
L3D623
9. Install the cylinder block (18) in the housing.

• Be careful not to let the shoe holder or other 18
parts drop off.
19
• Use the press to insert.
10. Mount the center discs (20) and the friction discs
(19).
• Total number of friction discs: 2
• Total number of center discs: 3
• Be careful of the mounting order.
20
L3D621
11. Fit the O-ring to the collar (17) and insert them in
the housing.
17
L3D620
12. Fit the O-ring to the brake piston (15) and insert 22.5¡
them in the housing. 15
• Use the press to insert.
• Make sure that the pin hole (A) of 8.5 mm in
diameter is positioned as shown in this figure.
A
L3D634
TB175 IV-170
13. Install twelve large springs (16), eight small
springs (17), and the O-ring.
• Make sure that the eight small springs (17) are
positioned as shown in this figure.
17 16
17
L3D635
14. Fit the O-rings and backup rings to the relief valve
(12).
15. Mount the relief valve assembly on the cover.

• Be careful not to let the spring jump out.
Plug: 37 ±20 N·m
• Do not loosen the lock nut (13). 13
12
L3D618
16. Mount the check valve.

9
a. Mount the spring (10) and poppet (11) on the 10
cover. 11
b. Fit the O-ring to the plug (9) and mount them
on the cover.
Plug: 157 ±10 N·m
11
10
9
L3D617
17. Insert the bearing (4) into the cover.

• Use the jig (B) and the press to insert.
L3D615
IV-171 TB175
18. Fit the pin to the cover.
19. Mount the orifice (5) on the cover.

• Caulk the circumference of the orifice female 4 5
screw by using a punch.
L3D636
20. Mount the pin and valve plate (3) on the cover.
A 6mm
• Apply grease on the back of the valve plate (the
side facing the cover) in advance to prevent the
plate from dropping off. 3
• Upon mounting the pin, caulk the position (A)
using the punch as shown in this figure.
L3D637
21. Mount the cover (2) on the case and fix them with
the cap screws. 2
• Be careful not to let the valve plate drop off.
Cap screw: 127 ±10 N·m
K3D629
22. Mount the timer valve (1).

a. Fit the O-ring to the case.
b. Mount the timer valve and fix it with the screw.
Screw: 39.2 ±2.0 N·m
L3D613
TB175 IV-172
Reduction Gears
1. Insert the oil seal (23) into the case.
• Use the jig (C) and the press to insert. 23
• The oil seal diameter (A) after insertion should
be 4.25 mm.
A
L3D638
2. Put grease into the inner race of the taper roller

bearing.
• Grease type: Shell ALVANIA Grease
• Grease volume: 80~90 mL
E5D629
3. Mount the shaft (11) and plug (25) on the case.

• The shaft (11) should be mounted before mount-
ing the plug (25).
Plug: 15.7 ±0.8 N·m
25
11
L3D629
4. Mount the plate (10) and collar (9).

10 9
• Mount the collar while loading the 11770 N on
the inner race using the jig (D).
11
L3D628
IV-173 TB175
5. Mount the thrust washer (15), inner race (14),

needles (13) and planetary gear B (12) on the
carrier 2 (10). 14 13 12
15
10
L3D639
6. Mount the thrust plate (11) on the carrier 2 (10)

and fix them with the cap screws.
• Apply Loctite #242 to the cap screws. 11
Cap screw: 24.5 ±4.9 N·m 14 13 12
15
L3D627
7. Mount the carrier 2 (10) on the case.
10
L3D640
8. Fit the snap ring on the sun gear (9).
L3D641
TB175 IV-174
9. Mount the sun gear (9).
10 9
L3D626
10. Mount the carrier 1 (8). 7 4 6 5 3 2 1
11. Mount the thrust washer (7), inner race (6), needles
(5), planetary gear A (4), drive gear (3) and thrust
plate (2) on the carrier 1 (8).
• Measure the depth (A) from the case end to the 8
carrier 1 and select a proper thickness for the
thrust plate by referring to the table.
• The largely-rounded side of the thrust plate
circumference should face the planetary gear.
From 5.3 to less From 5.8 to less

Depth (A) From 6.5 to 7.0 L3D625
than 5.8 mm than 6.5 mm
Thrust plate
2.8 ±0.14 mm 2.3 ±0.12 mm 1.8 ±0.10 mm
thickness
12. Fit the O-ring (1) to the case. A
L3D642
Slew Motor
1. Unite the hydraulic motor (1) and the reduction
gear (2) and fix them with the cap screws. 1
Cap screw: 177 ±10 N·m
K3D627
IV-175 TB175
2. Fit the O-ring to the cover.
3. Fit the anti-rebound valve to the cover and mount

the washer, seal and screws.
Screw: 32.4 ±2.0 N·m
K3D626
TB175 IV-176
Checking the Parts

Brake Valve
Parts Judgement Criteria Treatment
Check Valve, • Scratches in sliding portions are deep or roughness is severe. • Replace
Piston • The clearance with the body is large. • Replace
• Scratches in sliding portions are deep or seating is uneven. • Replace
Housing • Scratches in sliding portions are deep or roughness is severe. • Replace
• There are scratches where oil leakage occurs. • Replace
Relief Valve • The set pressure drops abnormally low. • Replace
Assembly • The set pressure is unstable and vibration occurs. • Replace
• There is a lot of leakage due to faulty seating, etc. • Replace
Spring • Damaged or severely deformed. • Replace
Hydraulic Motor
Recommended
Standard
Parts Replacement Treatment
Dimension
Value
Clearance (S) be- Replace cylinder
tween piston and block, swash plate
D
d
cylinder bore assembly.

0.02 mm 0.04 mm
S=D-d
E5D632
Clearance (S) be- Replace cylinder

tween piston and block, swash plate
shoe assembly.
0.15 mm 0.4 mm
S
E5D633
Shaft and needle Flaking or pitting Replace shaft, port

bearing rolling sur- in the rolling sur- block assembly.
face face.
E5D634
Cylinder block Sliding surface is Carry out lap re-

sliding surface (1) 1 rough. pairs (#1000 Pow-
der) or replace.
Valve plate sliding Replace
surface (2) 2
E5D635
IV-177 TB175
Reduction Gears
Drive Gear • Gear tooth surfaces are pitted or separating, etc. • Replace
• Clearance with motor joint is large due to spline wear. • Replace
Housing, • Gear tooth surfaces are pitted or separating, etc. • Replace
Internal Gear
Planetary Gear • Gear tooth surfaces are pitted or separating, etc. • Replace
• Needle rolling surfaces are pitted or separating, etc. • Replace
Needle Bearing, • Needle and shaft rolling surfaces are pitted or separating, etc. • Replace
Planetary Shaft • Pressure marks, etc. on needle and shaft rolling surfaces. • Replace
• Bearing rotation is abnormal (abnormal noise, rotation not smooth, • Replace
etc.).
Carrier, Shaft • Clearance with planetary shaft is large. • Replace
Shaft • Clearance with pinion is large due to spline wear. • Replace
Thrust Wasyer • Amount of wear is great. • Replace
Ball Bearing, • Rotation is abnormal (abnormal noise, rotation not smooth, etc.). • Replace
Roller Bearing • Flaking, separation, etc. on rolling surfaces. • Replace
• Pressure marks, etc. on rolling surfaces. • Replace
Collar, Oil Seal, • Scratches, etc. exist which cause leaks. • Replace
O-ring
Anti-rebound Valve
Check Valve • Scratches in sliding portions are deep or roughness is severe. • Replace
• The clearance with the body is large. • Replace
• Scratches in sliding portions are deep or seating is uneven. • Replace
Body • Scratches in sliding portions are deep or roughness is severe. • Replace
• There are scratches where oil leakage occurs. • Replace
Spring, Sleeve • Damaged or severely deformed. • Replace
TB175 IV-178
TROUBLESHOOTING
If there is an abnormal increase in noise or heat, this The following table shows a number of causes of
is an indication that trouble has occurred. When this general breakdowns that can be seen in the hydraulic
type of condition is manifested, stop the machine circuits and indicates coutermeasures to take in each
immediately and search out the source of the trouble. case.
Symptom How/Where? Probable Causes Remedy

Motor does not start. Pressure doesn’t rise at the • Relief valve’s set pressure • Set the pressure at the cor-
motor’s inlet port. is low. rect level.
• Pump is broken down. • Repair or replace the
pump.
• Control valve is broken • Repair or replace the con-
down. trol valve.
Pressure rises at the motor’s • The load is excessive. • Lighten the load.
inlet port. • Hydraulic motor is broken • Repair or replace the hy-
down. draulic motor.
• Reduction gears are bro- • Repair or replace the re-
ken down. duction gears.
Motor’s speed won’t • Pump’s discharge vol- • Pump’s drain amount is • Repair or replace the
increase. ume is insufficient. large. pump.
• Depends on the motor’s • The motor’s volumetric ca- • Replace the motor.
function. pacity is dropping.
Oil is leaking. • Oil is leaking from oil • Lip is cut or damaged. • Replace the oil seal.
seals.
• Oil is leaking from mat- • Bolts are loose. • Tighten the bolts.
ing surfaces. • O-ring is cut or damaged. • Replace the O-ring.
• Mating surface is scratched. • Repair the surface with a
grind stone or sand paper.
Motor makes abnor- • Noise in piping. • Piping support is faulty. • Clamp the piping.
mal noise.
(The surface tempera- • Lubricating oil • Oil level is low. • Replenish the oil.
ture of the reduction • Hydraulic oil is getting in. • Replace the reduction gears.
gears case becomes • Gear unit • Bearings are damaged. • Replace the reduction gears.
high.) • Gear surfaces are damaged. • Replace the reduction gears.
IV-179 TB175
Anit-rebound Valve
The motor does not Something other than the piston motor, valve Inspect the pressure at the entrance of the
rotate or its rota- unit or anti-rebound valve is malfunctioning. valve. Or, inspect individual units and ser-
tion speed is slow. vice as necessary.
The check valve assembly is not seated prop-
erly.
• Foreign matter is trapped. • Remove the foreign matter. Repair or
replace the faulty parts.
• The tightening torque of the anti-rebound • Use the prescribed tightening torque.
valve mounting bolt exceeds the prescribed
value.
The sleeve is malfunctioning.
The motor does not The check valve assembly is not seated prop-
stop or its stopping erly.
speed is slow. • Foreign matter is trapped. • Remove the foreign matter. Repair or
• The tightening torque of the anti-rebound • Use the prescribed tightening torque.
valve mounting bolt exceeds the prescribed
value.
The valve within the check valve assembly is
malfunctioning.
• Foreign matter is in the orifice of the valve. • Remove the foreign matter.
The sleeve is malfunctioning.
Slewing stops with The valve within the check valve assembly is
a great shock. malfunctioning.
• Foreign matter is in the orifice of the valve. • Remove the foreign matter.
The orifice is choked.
• Foreign matter is in the orifice of the anti- • Remove the foreign matter.
rebound valve body.
• Foreign matter is in the orifice of the valve • Remove the foreign matter.
unit.
TB175 IV-180
SWIVEL JOINT HYDRAULIC UNITS
SWIVEL JOINT
CONSTRUCTION
1. Seal Kit
2. Slipper Seal
3. O-ring
4. O-ring
5. Backup Ring
6. Dust Seal
7. Dust Seal
8. Shaft
9. Hub
10. Flange
11. Thrust Ring
12. Pin
13. Snap Ring
14. Bolt
15. Plug
16. Spring Washer
OPERATION
The swivel joint is mounted in the center of the

machine’s slew axis. It serves the role of maintaining
continuous connections in the hydraulic circuit re-
gardless of the upper frame’s slew angle.
Above the hub (1) and shaft (2), which are capable of
rotating together, ports (3) are included for oil for the
necessary number of circuits only. The inner circum-
ference surface of the hub and the outer circumfer-
ence surface of the shaft, grooves are cut which serve
as passages for hydraulic oil. Seals (4) are placed
above and below these circumferential grooves.
Oil flowing in from a port flows constantly through
this hydraulic passage (5) between the hub and shaft
and the circuits can be connected without a break
when the upper frame is slewing.
IV-181 TB175
HYDRAULIC UNITS SWIVEL JOINT
General Cautions
• Carry out disassembly and assembly in a clean • Replace the seals with new ones each time the
work area and provide clean containers to hold the swivel joint is disassembled, applying a thin coat-
disassembled parts. ing of grease to them.
• Clean thoroughly around the ports and remove the • Check each part for abnormal wear or seizing. Also
paint on the joints of each part with a wire brush. remove any burrs or sharp edges, etc. with sandpa-
• Clean the disassembled parts with a cleaning fluid per or by a similar method.
such as diesel fuel. • Check for foreign matter or dirt, etc. in the seal
grooves.

For assembly, follow the disassembly procedure in
the reverse order.
Disassembly
1. Take out the bolts and remove the spring washers,
then remove the flange (1) from the hub.
Bolt: 24.5~39.2 N·m
• During assembly, place a pipe on the stopper
pin of the shaft and check if the shaft rotates.
2. Remove the O-ring (2), snap ring (3) and thrust

ring (4).
• During assembly, make sure the snap ring fist
securely in the groove.
3. Remove the shaft (5) from the hub.

• Place a knock pin (6) against the shaft end and
tap with a hammer. Select a knock pin (6) made
of copper or plastic, etc.
• Apply a thin coating of hydraulic oil or grease
to the outer circumference of the shaft.
TB175 IV-182
4. Remove the dust seal from the shaft.
5. Remove the seals from the inside diameter of the

hub.
• Check the positions of the seals in the struc-
tural drawing.
• Use an O-ring tooth or eyeleteer with a sharp
point on the end, etc.
• Do not deform or bend the slipper seal strongly
in any one place.
• During assembly, O-rings should not be twisted
when they are fitted in place.
IV-183 TB175
Inspection Procedure and Treatment
Inspection Interval Place Inspected Inspection Procedure Treatment

2,000 hrs. Seals which prevent ex- Check if oil is leaking out Replace the O-rings if there
ternal leakage of hy- is leakage
draulic oil
4,000 hrs. All seal parts  Replace all seal parts
Disassemble and check All sliding parts Check for abnormal wear, Treat in accordance with the
whether there is leak- scratches, corrosion, etc., due use limit
age or not to seizing, biting of foreign mat-
ter, etc.
When disassembling All parts Check for abnormal wear, Treat in accordance with the
due to breakdown scratches, corrosion, etc., due use limit. However, replace
to seizing, biting of foreign mat- the seal kit
ter, etc.
Checking the Parts

Hub, Shaft
Parts Judgment Standard Treatment
Seal parts and sliding • Parts which wear away due to wearing of surfaces Replace with new parts
parts which have undergone ultrasonic tempering, and
parts which come off due to seizing, biting in of
foreign matter, etc.
Hub and shaft sliding • Parts with abnormal wear or with scratches 0.1 mm Replace with new parts
parts other than seals deep or deeper due to seizing or biting in of foreign
matter, etc.
• Parts with scratches less than 0.1 mm deep Repair with an oil stone
Portions which slide • Parts which are worn 0.5 mm or more, or abnormally Replace with new parts
against the thrust ring worn parts
• Parts with less than 0.5 mm of wear Repair so that it is smooth
• Parts with scratches due to seizing, biting in or Repair so that it is smooth
foreign matter, etc., which are within the wear limit
of 0.5 mm and which can be repaired
Flange
Parts Judgment Standard Treatment
Portions which slide • Parts which are worn 0.5 mm or more, or abnormally Replace with new parts
against the shaft end worn parts
• Parts with scratches due to seizing, biting in or Repair so that it is smooth
foreign matter, etc., which are within the wear limit
of 0.5 mm and which can be repaired
TB175 IV-184
Thrust Ring
Judgment Standard Treatment
• Parts which are worn 0.5 mm or more, or abnormally worn parts Replace with new parts
• Parts with scratches due to seizing, biting in or foreign matter, etc., which are Repair so that it is smooth
within the wear limit of 0.5 mm and which can be repaired
Inspection after Assembly

After assembly is completed, carry out a leak check of
each circuit using the apparatus shown in the figure.
1. Connect a pipe (3) from the hydraulic pump (2) to

the shaft (1) side port.
2. Connect a pressure gauge (5) to the hub (4) side.
3. Increase the pressure gradually to 20.6 MPa while
adjusting the relief valve (6), then perform a 1
minute leak test.
• Release the neighboring ports on both sides
and check visually for leakage from the ports.
• Check for external leakage, etc., by a color
check.
IV-185 TB175
TROUBLESHOOTING

External oil leakage • O-ring is defective •
Replace all the seal parts
Internal oil leakage • Thrust ring is defective •
Replace all the seal parts
• Great wear on sliding surfaces •
Replace the assembly
Shaft sticks • Shaft and hub are stuck together •
Carry out polishing and honing. If looseness
and oil leakage are great, replace the assem-
bly
Flange looseness • Socket bolt tightening is insuffi- • Retighten to the specified torque
cient
TB175 IV-186
V . TROUBLESHOOTING
V-1 TB175
TROUBLESHOOTINTG
CAUTIONS IN TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIRS
(1) Do not begin disassembling the equipment immediately just because it has broken down.
Conduct a thorough preliminary check before attempting disassembly.
a. Ask the user the following questions.
• What were the conditions when the machine broke down?
• Did anything abnormal happen before breakdown occurred?
• Are there any other places which were functioning poorly other than the part that broke
down?
• Are there any parts which have been repaired previous to the breakdown? What were
they?
• Has the same thing happened before?
b. Run the machine yourself and confirm the breakdown conditions.
• Judge whether the machine is really broken down or not following the judgment
standards.
The judgment on whether the machine has broken down may differ between individu-
als.
IMPORTANT: When running the machine, it is possible that moving the machine could
make the breakdown worse than it already is, so do not forget to ask the user if there is
anything to prevent your operating the machine.
c. Based on the information that you have gathered from the user and the information
obtained from running the machine yourself, judge the cause of the trouble. Also keep in
mind that it is difficult to reproduce the conditions of the breakdown again once the
machine has been disassembled, and early disassembly may make it impossible to
determine the true cause of the trouble. Therefore be sure to find the true cause of the
trouble before attempting disassembly.
(2) When it is thought that the trouble has more than one cause, begin investigating from the
simplest cause.
(3) Think over why the trouble could have occurred and try to correct the root cause of that
problem.
TB175 V-2
TROUBLESHOOTINTG
CONTENTS
OVERALL MACHINE
No operations can be done. ................................................................................................................................... 4
All operations can be done, but there is no power. ............................................................................................... 5
The boom, bucket, slew and arm do not move at all, or the speed is low. ............................................................ 7
MACHINE TRAVEL
Right or left travel is impossible. .......................................................................................................................... 9
Speed drops in the left or right travel, causing the machine to travel in a curve. ............................................... 11
Machine won’t accelerate during travel. ............................................................................................................. 13
During travel, the hoe attachment cannot be operated. ....................................................................................... 15
SLEWING
No slewing can be done. ...................................................................................................................................... 16
Right or left slewing cannot be done. .................................................................................................................. 19
Slewing speed is low, or there is no power. ........................................................................................................ 21
The machine slews, but overrun when slewing stops is great, or it cannot be stopped. ..................................... 23
Slewing in slow gear is not possible .................................................................................................................... 25
BOOM
The boom cylinder doesn’t move. ....................................................................................................................... 27
Boom cylinder operation is slow, or there is no power. ...................................................................................... 29
When the boom operation lever is pulled gently, the boom drops temporarily. ................................................. 32
The amount of boom natural drop is great. ......................................................................................................... 33
ARM
The arm cylinder doesn’t move. .......................................................................................................................... 34
Arm cylinder operation is slow, or there is no power. ........................................................................................ 36
The amount of arm natural drop is great. ............................................................................................................ 38
BUCKET
The bucket cylinder doesn’t move, or there is no power. ................................................................................... 39
The amount of bucket natural drop is great. ........................................................................................................ 41
BOOM SWING
The swing cylinder doesn’t move. ....................................................................................................................... 42
DOZER BLADE
The dozer blade cylinder doesn’t move, or there is no power. ............................................................................ 44
The amount of dozer blade natural drop is great or the dozer blade won’t hold the machine up. ...................... 46
AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS
The proportional control is impossible. ............................................................................................................... 48
The flow in the auxiliary hydraulic circuit cannot be controlled. ....................................................................... 50
V-3 TB175
TROUBLESHOOTINTG OVERALL MACHINE
NO OPERATIONS CAN BE DONE.
Inspect the hydraulic oil Insufficient Replenish the hydraulic

1 2
level. oil.
Proper Amount
• Repair the pump or replace

Pump or coupling is
3 the pump.
faulty.
• Replace the coupling.
1. Inspect the hydraulic oil level.

“III. Machine Configuration, Hydraulic
Tank”
2. Replenish the hydraulic oil.

Take out the plug and replenish the hydraulic oil.
• The hydraulic oil supplied should be the same
brand as the oil currently in the tank.
“II. Specifications, Fluid Capacities”
3. Pump or coupling is faulty.

a. Disconnect the discharge hose from the pump
side.
Also fit a plug in the disconnected hose to keep
the hydraulic oil from pouring out.
b. With the engine emergency stop knob pulled
out all the way, turn the start switch to the
“START” position to cause the engine to begin
cranking. Check that the hydraulic oil is dis-
charged from the pump at this time.
If the pump is normal, hydraulic oil will be
discharged from it. If hydraulic oil is not dis-
charged, the pump or the coupling is faulty.
TB175 V-4
OVERALL MACHINE TROUBLESHOOTINTG
ALL OPERATIONS CAN BE DONE, BUT THERE IS NO POWER.
Inspect the hydraulic oil Insufficient Replenish the hydraulic

1 2
level. oil.
Proper Amount
Noise generated by the Noise Replace the seal tape, O-rings,

3 Suction line is faulty.
pump. hose.
No Noise
Bubbles from inside Treat beginning at the source

the tank. of the bubbling.
Inspect the main relief Faulty Repair or replace the main

4
valve. relief valve.
Normal
• Repair or replace the pump.

5 Pump is faulty.
• Flush with hydraulic oil.
1. Inspect the hydraulic oil level.

Tank”
2. Replenish the hydraulic oil.

“V-4”
3. Noise generated by the pump.

A faulty suction line can make it easy for cavita-
tion to occur in the pump and for noise to be
generated. Carry out the following inspect.
a. Inspect the piping used for suction of hydraulic
oil.
• Apply grease or oil to the part which appears
to be making the noise and inspect if there is
any change. (Inspect if it is sucking in air or
not.)
b. Inspect for clogging of the suction filter.
V-5 TB175
4. Inspect the main relief valve.

Measure the relief pressure of the main relief
valve.
• The valve is normal if the pressure gauge 1 2
reading is the standard value.
“ II. Specifications, Standards for Judging
Performance”
If the main relief valve’s set pressure is too low,

adjust it by tightening the valve set screw gradu-
ally.
• If the pressure doesn’t rise after 1/4 turn of the
screw, the main relief valve is faulty.
A
L3E001
Cautions During Disassembly and Assembly

• The dimension A of the set screw (1) should be
measured and recorded when the cap nut (2) is
removed.
• Inspect for biting of foreign matter and for scratches
in the poppet seat surface.
• During assembly, the set screw should be set so that
dimension A, measured before disassembly, is a
little longer than previously. Then the screw should
be tightened gradually to adjust the pressure.
5. Pump is faulty.
If the pump is abnormally worn internally, or if it
is damaged, it is possible that pieces of metal are
mixed into the hydraulic oil. Therefore, carry out
the following treatment.
• Replace the spin filter cartridge.
• Replace the hydraulic oil or flush out the
hydraulic circuit.
(Up to NAS Class 9)
Caution : When replacing the hydraulic oil, be

sure to clean the inside of the Hydraulic Tank and
the suction strainer.
Tank”
If the pump seal is damaged, replace the seal.

“IV. Hydraulic Units, Hydraulic Pump”
TB175 V-6
OVERALL MACHINE TROUBLESHOOTINTG
THE BOOM, BUCKET, SLEW AND ARM DO NOT MOVE AT ALL, OR THE SPEED IS LOW.
Inspect the hydraulic Faulty Repair or replace the hydrau-

1
pump P4. lic pump P4.
Normal
Faulty
2 Inspect the fuse. Replace the fuse.
Normal
Faulty Adjust or replace the limit

3 Inspect the limit switch.
switch.
Normal
Inspect the lever lock so- Faulty Repair or replace the lever lock
4
lenoid valve. solenoid valve.
Normal
Inspect the pilot relief Faulty Adjust, repair or replace the

5
valve. pilot relief valve.
Normal
Faulty Repair or replace the pilot

6 Inspect the pilot valve.
valve.
1. Inspect the hydraulic pump P4.

Inspect the hydraulic pump P4 which is the source
of the hydraulic pressure for the pilot valve.
“V-4”
Since clogging of the line filter can also be con-
sidered, inspect and clean the filter.
V-7 TB175
2. Inspect the fuse.

Inspect the fuse for the electric power circuit that
operates the pilot solenoid valve.
3. Inspect the limit switch.

Set the lever stand to the operation position to turn
on the limit switch. Check the voltage at the lever
lock solenoid valve by using a tester.
• The limit switch is normal if the voltage is
being applied.
Reference: If the limit switch is found to be faulty
and the attachment must be moved, connect the
lever lock release connectors (male) and (female)
for emergency use.
“III-82”
4. Inspect the lever lock solenoid valve.

Inspect by the following procedure.
a. Turn the starter switch to the “ON” position.
b. Push lightly on the projection on the front end
of the solenoid valve.
c. Move the lever stand and change the limit
switch from “OFF” to “ON”.
d. If the spool moves and vibration can be felt
with the fingertip when the circuit changes,
then it is normal.
5. Inspect the pilot relief valve.

Measure the relief pressure of the pilot relief
valve.
• If the pressure is the standard value, the valve
is normal.
“II. Specifications, Standards for Judging
Performance”
6. Inspect the pilot valve.

“IV. Hydraulic Units, Pilot Valve”
TB175 V-8
MACHINE TRAVEL TROUBLESHOOTINTG
RIGHT OR LEFT TRAVEL IS IMPOSSIBLE.
Inspect the operation of

1 actuators other than the
travel motor.
Normal
Inspect the piolt valve Faulty Repair or replace the pilot

2
(travel). valve (travel).
Normal
Inspect the operation of Faulty Repair or replace the housing

3
the spool. block.
Normal
Faulty Repair or replace the swivel

4 Inspect the swivel joint.
joint.
Normal
Inspect the counterbal- Faulty Repair or replace the counter-

5
ance valve. balance valve.
Normal
Faulty Repair or replace the travel

6 Inspect the travel motor.
motor.
1. Inspect the operation of actuators other than Lever

the travel motor. Place Inspected
Operated
If operation of the right or left travel motor is
If right travel
impossible, operate each respective actuator in Boom Pump P1
is impossible Main Relief
accordance with the table at right. If operation is
faulty, inspect the main relief valve and pump. If left travel is valve R1
Arm Pump P2
impossible
2. Inspect the pilot valve (travel).

Disconnect the hose between the pilot valve
(travel) and control valve (travel section) at the
control valve side, then set a pressure gauge in the
disconnected hose.
• A plug should be inserted in the control valve
port.
• Operate the lever (travel) and measure the
pressure.
• Depending on the operating angle, a pressure
in the 0~3.4 MPa range is normal.
L3E002
V-9 TB175
TROUBLESHOOTINTG MACHINE TRAVEL
3. Inspect the operation of the spool.

Disconnect the hose that goes between the control
valve (travel section) and the travel motor at the
valve side and set a pressure gauge to the dis-
charge port of the valve.
• Operate the lever (travel) and measure the
pressure.
• The operation of the spool is normal if it agrees
with the following value of supply pressure:
27.5 MPa
L3E003
4. Inspect the swivel joint.

• Disconnect the hose between the swivel joint
and the counterbalance valve from the coun-
terbalance valve side and set a pressure gauge
in the hose.
• Operate the travel lever and measure the pres-
sure.
• The swivel joint is normal if the pressure gauge
reading indicates the standard value.
Standard value: Approx. 27.5 MPa
5. Inspect the counterbalance valve.

• If neither forward nor reverse travel is pos-
sible, the spool (1) of the counterbalance valve
could be sticking in the neutral position.
• If either forward or reverse travel is possible,
the spool (1) of the counterbalance valve could
be sticking in a position other than the neutral
position.
• Disconnect the counterbalance valve plug (2)
and try pushing the spool (1) with a finger. It is
normal if it moves smoothly about 6 mm.
6. Inspect the travel motor.

“IV. Hydraulic Units, Travel Motor”
TB175 V-10
SPEED DROPS IN THE LEFT OR RIGHT TRAVEL, CAUSING THE MACHINE TO TRAVEL IN A CURVE.
Within
Is the amount of travel standard Depends on the com-
1 Normal
curve within standard? bination of equipment.
Not within Standard
Adjust to the proper dimen-

Inspect the crawler ten- Faulty Inspect the tensioning
2 3 sions or remove the foreign
sion. cylinder.
matter.
Not abnormal

4
the spool. block.
Normal
The direction of travel curve
• Repair the pump or replace it.
Switch the left and right changes to the opposite side.
5 • Replace the hydraulic oil
pump discharge hoses.
and filter.
No change

joint.
Normal
Inspect the counterbal- Faulty Repair or replace the counter-

7
ance valve. balance valve.
Normal
The travel motor’s speed Repair or replace the travel

8
reducer unit is faulty. motor.
1. Is the amount of travel curve within stan-

dard?
If the amount of travel curve is within standards,
then operation is normal and the variation de-
pends on the combination of equipment.
Performance”
2. Inspect the crawler tension.

Performance”
V-11 TB175
3. Inspect the tensioning cylinder.

Disconnect the hose that is connected to the head
side of the tensioning cylinder.
• Press the travel speed switch and set to the 2nd
speed side, then measure the pressure.
• If 3.4 MPa, the tensioning cylinder is faulty.

“V-10”
5. Switch the left and right pump discharge

hoses.
Switch the discharge hoses for Pump P1 and
Pump P2. The pump is faulty if the direction in
which the machine curves during travel is in the
opposite direction.
• Disassemble and inspect the pump.
“IV. Hydraulic Units, Hydraulic Pump”

“V-10”
7. Inspect the counterbalance valve.

Inspect if the counterbalance valve’s plunger
moves smoothly.
“V-10”
8. The travel motor’s speed reducer unit is

faulty.
TB175 V-12
MACHINE WON’T ACCELERATE DURING TRAVEL.

1
Normal

2
Normal
Inspect the travel speed Faulty Replace the travel speed

3
switch. switch.
Normal
Inspect the 2nd speed Faulty Repair or replace the 2nd

4
solenoid valve. speed solenoid valve.
Normal

joint.
Normal
The 2nd speed control Faulty Repair or replace the 2nd

6
valve is faulty. speed control valve.

of the hydraulic pressure for switching to second
gear.
“V-4”

valve.
is normal.
Performance”
V-13 TB175
3. Inspect the travel speed switch.

Press the switch to turn it “ON”. While it is in this
condition, check if there is continuity with a
tester.
4. Inspect the 2nd speed solenoid valve.

a. Turn the start switch “ON”.
b. Press the protruding portion of the solenoid
valve lightly.
c. Turn the travel speed switch “ON”.
then it is normal.

Disconnect the hose between the swivel joint and
the 2nd speed control valve at the 2nd speed
control valve side. Set a pressure gauge in the
disconnected end of the hose and turn on the 2nd
speed switch.
• A pressure of 3.4 MPa is normal.
6. The 2nd speed control valve is faulty.

Check if the plunger of the 2nd speed control
valve is sticking or if foreign matter is caught in
it.
TB175 V-14
DURING TRAVEL, THE HOE ATTACHMENT CANNOT BE OPERATED.
Inspect the individual

1
operation.
Normal
Inspect the switching Faulty

Repair or replace the control
2 pressure for the straight
valve.
travel.
Normal
Inspect the straight travel Faulty Repair or replace the straight

3
valve. travel valve.
1. Inspect the individual operation.

Confirm that travel, boom, arm, bucket, and swing
operation is normal with individual operation.
2. Inspect the switching pressure for the straight

travel.
a. Set a pressure gauge to the PH port of the
control valve (mono-block).
b. Lift the body with the hoe attachment and
dozer blade.
c. With the left and right crawlers idling, operate
the auxiliary hydraulics control and measure
the pressure.
• The pressure is normal if the value is
1.06 MPa or greater.
3. Inspect the straight travel valve.

Inspect if the spool of the straight travel valve
moves smoothly.
• Remove the spool cover on the straight travel
valve and try pushing the plunger with a finger.
It is normal if it moves smoothly.
L2E019
V-15 TB175
TROUBLESHOOTINTG SLEWING
NO SLEWING CAN BE DONE.

slew motor.
Normal

valve.
Normal
Faulty Repair or replace the shuttle

3 Inspect the shuttle valve.
valve.
Normal

4
the spool. block.
Normal
Inspect the slew hydrau- Pressure is low. Adjust the slew relief
5 Adjust the set pressure.
lic pressure. valve pressure.
Normal
Pressure does not rise Repair or replace the slew re-

lief valve.
Faulty Repair or replace the slew

6 Inspect the slew motor.
motor.
Normal
The slew bearing is faulty. Replace the slew bearing.
1. Inspect the operation of actuators other than

the slew motor.
Inspect if the operation of the slew motor only is Lever Operated Places inspected
faulty by the table at right. If its operation is
Dozer Blade Relief Valve R3 Pump P3
faulty, inspect the main relief valve and the hy-
draulic pump.
“V-6”
TB175 V-16
SLEWING TROUBLESHOOTINTG
Disconnect the hose between the pilot valve and
control valve (slew section) at the control valve
side, then set a pressure gauge in the disconnected
hose.
• A plug should be inserted in the control valve
port.
• Operate the lever (slew) and measure the pres-
sure.
• Depending on the operating angle, a pressure
in the 0~3.4 MPa range is normal.
3. Inspect the shuttle valve.

Disconnect the hose that goes between the shuttle
valve and the slew motor at the slew motor side
and set a pressure gauge to the disconnected hose.
sure.
• The shuttle valve is normal if between 0 and
3.4 MPa corresponding to the operation angle.
L3E004

Disconnect the hose that goes between the control
valve (slew section) and the slew motor at the
valve side and set a pressure gauge to the dis-
charge port of the valve.
sure.
• The operation of the spool is normal if it agrees
with the following value of supply pressure:
23.5 MPa
5. Inspect the slew hydraulic pressure.

Measure the pressure at the left and right slew
relief valves.
• The pressure is normal if it is the standard
value.
Performance”
If adjustment of the pressure is possible, the slew
relief valve’s adjustment is faulty. Also, if the
pressure adjustment is impossible, the slew relief
valve is faulty.
V-17 TB175
6. Inspect the slew motor.

Separate the slew motor (1) and the turntable (2),
then try turning the turntable (2).
• Turntable doesn’t turn .... Faulty slew bearing (3).
• Turntable turns................ Faulty slew motor (1).
“IV. Hydraulic Units, Slew Motor”
TB175 V-18
RIGHT OR LEFT SLEWING CANNOT BE DONE.

valve.
Normal

2
the spool. block.
Normal
Inspect the slew relief Faulty Repair or replace the slew re-
3
valve. lief valve.
Normal
Inspect the check valve Faulty Repair or replace the slew

4
of the slew brake valve. brake valve.
Normal
Repair or replace the slew

5 The slew motor is faulty.
motor.

It could be that the spool for only the side of the
pilot valve for which slewing is impossible will
not operate.
“V-17”

It could be that the spool will not move only in the
direction in which slewing is impossible.
“V-17”
V-19 TB175
3. Inspect the slew relief valve.

Try switching the left and right slew relief valves.
If slewing becomes possible, the relief valve is
faulty.
4. Inspect the check valve of the slew brake

valve.
If foreign matter is caught in one end of the check
valve (1), or if the valve is sticking, right or left
slewing will be impossible.
• If foreign matter is caught in one of the check
valves, the hydraulic oil returns to the tank
from the check valve.
1 L3E005
5. The slew motor is faulty.

TB175 V-20
SLEWING SPEED IS LOW, OR THERE IS NO POWER.
Is the time needed for Within the standard.

1 slewing within the stan- Normal
dard?
Not within the standard

valve.
Normal

3
the spool. block.
Normal
Inspect the slew hydrau- Pressure is low. Adjust the pressure of

lic pressure. the slew relief valve.
Normal
Pressure does not rise. Repair or replace the slew re-

lief valve.
Inspect the check valve Faulty Repair or replace the slew

5
of the slew brake valve. brake valve.
Normal
Faulty Repair or replace the slew

6 Inspect the slew motor.
motor.
Normal
The slew bearing is faulty. Replace.
V-21 TB175
1. Is the time needed for slewing within the

standard?
Performance”

“V-17”

“V-17”

“V-17”
5. Inspect the check valve of the slew brake

valve.
6. Inspect the slew motor.

TB175 V-22
THE MACHINE SLEWS, BUT OVERRUN WHEN SLEWING STOPS IS GREAT, OR IT CANNOT BE STOPPED.
Is the amount of overrun Within the standard.

1 when slewing stops Normal.
within the standard?
Not within the standard.

valve.
Normal

3
the spool. block.
Normal
Inspect the slew hydrau- Pressure is low. Adjust the pressure of

lic pressure. the slew relief valve.
Normal
Pressure doesn’t rise Repair or replace the slew re-

lief valve.
Inspect the slew brake Repair replace the slew brake

5
valve. valve.
1. Is the amount of overrun when slewing stops

within the standard?
Performance”

Inspect if the spool of the pilot valve returns to the
neutral position when the operation lever (slew)
is released after operation. Disconnect the hose
between the pilot valve and the control valve
(slew section) on the control valve side, then set
a pressure gauge in the disconnected hose.
• Read the pressure gauge after operating the
lever (slew), then releasing it.
• If the pressure is zero, the pilot valve is normal.
V-23 TB175

Inspect if the spool of the control valve (slew
section) returns to the neutral position when the
operation lever (slew) is released after operation.
Disconnect the line from the slew section of the
control valve, then set a pressure gauge in its
supply port.
• Read the pressure gauge after operating the
lever (slew), then releasing it.
• If the pressure is zero, the pilot valve is normal.

“V-17”
5. Inspect the slew brake valve.

TB175 V-24
SLEWING TROUBLESHOOTING
SLEWING IN SLOW GEAR IS NOT POSSIBLE.

1
Normal

2
Normal
Inspect the slow slew Faulty Replace the slow slew switch.
3
switch
Normal
Inspect the slow slew Faulty Repair or replace the slow slew
4
solenoid valve. solenoid valve.
Normal
Inspect the slew flow Faulty Repair or replace the slew flow
5
control valve. control valve.

of the hydraulic pressure for switching to slow
gear.
“V-4”

valve.
is normal.
“II. Specifications Standards for Judging
Performance”
3. Inspect the slow slew switch.

Press the switch to obtain “ON” condition. The
switch is normal when the lamp lights in this
condition.
V-25 TB175
TROUBLESHOOTING SLEWING
4. Inspect the slow slew solenoid valve.

valve lightly.
c. Turn the slow slew switch “ON”.
then it is normal.
5. Inspect the slew flow control valve.

Inspect if the spool of the slew flow control valve
moves smoothly.
• Remove the spool cover at the FC port and try
pushing the spool with a finger. It is normal if
it moves smoothly about 9 mm.
TB175 V-26
BOOM TROUBLESHOOTING
THE BOOM CYLINDER DOESN’T MOVE.

boom cylinder.
Normal

valve.
Normal

3
the spool. block.
Normal
Operation
Perform a port relief became normal. The port relief valve is Repair or replace the port re-
4
valve switching test. faulty. lief valve.
Does not change.
Inspect the boom cylin- Faulty Repair or replace the boom

5
der. cylinder.

the boom cylinder.
Inspect if the operation of the boom cylinder only Lever Operated Places inspected
is faulty by the table at right. If its operation is
faulty, inspect the main relief valve and the hy- Right Travel Relief Valve R1 Pump P1
draulic pump.
“V-6”
V-27 TB175
TROUBLESHOOTING BOOM

Disconnect the hose between the pilot valve and
control valve (boom section) on the control valve
hose.
• Operate the (boom) lever and measure the
pressure.
• Depending the operation angle, if the pressure
is normal, it will range between 0~3.4 MPa.

Disconnect the hose between the control valve
(boom section) and the cylinder on the cylinder
hose.
• Operate the (boom) lever and measure the
pressure.
4. Perform a port relief valve switching test.

Switch the port relief valve for the port relief
valve of the normal arm. If the boom cylinder
operates, the boom side port relief valve is faulty.
L3E006
5. Inspect the boom cylinder.

a. Disconnect the hose between the control valve
and the boom cylinder on the control valve
side.
b. Connect the disconnected hose to the arm
section or the bucket section.
c. Try operating the boom cylinder. If the cylin-
der doesn’t operate, the cylinder is faulty.
When performing the operation in “a~c”
above, the bucket cylinder should be fully
extended, the arm cylinder should be fully
retracted and the bucket should be lowered
to the ground.
TB175 V-28
BOOM CYLINDER OPERATION IS SLOW, OR THERE IS NO POWER.
Is the boom cylinder’s Within the standard.

1 speed within the stan- Normal
dard?

valve.
Normal

3
the spool. block.
Normal
Operation
4
Does not change
Inspect the boom cylin- Faulty Repair or replace the boom

5
der. cylinder.
1. Is the boom cylinder’s speed within the stan-

dard?
Performance”

“V-28”

Stroke the spools of the boom [1] and boom [2]
sections and inspect whether they move smoothly,
or remove the spools and check whether there is
any foreign matter engaged in them.

“V-28”
L3E007
V-29 TB175
5. Inspect the boom cylinder.

Boom Cylinder internal Leakage Inspect (1)
a. With the bucket cylinder fully retracted and
with the rod of the arm cylinder a little ex- SLIGHTLY EXTEND THE ROD
tended from the fully retracted position, lower
the bucket front end to the ground.
b. Disconnect the rod side hose (A) only and let

the oil in the piping run out.
Insert a plug (1) in the disconnected hose.
• Test the left and right cylinders one at a
time. Remove both hoses from the cylinder
that is not being inspected at this time and
plug the disconnected hoses.
1
A
L3E008
c. Retract the arm cylinder and lift the bucket so

it is floating above the ground.
At this time, if there is oil leaking from the
piping of the cylinder where the hose was
disconnected, and if the boom cylinder’s rod is
retracted, the cylinder is leaking internally.
Also, if there is no leakage of oil from the
cylinder’s piping, if the boom cylinder’s rod is
retracted, the control valve is leaking inter-
nally.
Boom Cylinder Internal Leakage Inspect (2)

a. Place the machine in the posture shown in the
figure.
TB175 V-30
b. Disconnect the head side hose (B) and let the
hydraulic oil out of the cylinder’s piping.
plug the disconnected hoses.
L3E009
c. Operate the bucket and raise the machine’s

body.
At this time, if there is oil leaking from the
piping of the cylinder where the hose was
disconnected, and if the boom cylinder’s rod is
extended, the cylinder is leaking internally.
Also, if there is no leakage of oil from the
cylinder’s piping, if the boom cylinder’s rod is
extended, the control valve is leaking inter-
nally.
If the cylinder is damaged internally, the

system should be flushed out to remove any
broken pieces (NAS Class 9).
V-31 TB175
WHEN THE BOOM OPERATION LEVER IS PULLED GENTLY, THE BOOM DROPS TEMPORARILY.
Inspect the load check Faulty Repair or replace the housing

1
valve of the control valve. block.
Normal
Inspect for internal leak- Faulty Repair or replace the boom

2
age in the boom cylinder. cylinder.
1. Inspect the load check valve of the control

valve.
a. Disconnect the hose between the control valve
and boom cylinder at the control valve side.
b. Connect the disconnected hose to the arm or
bucket section.
c. Try operating the boom cylinder.
If operation is normal, the load check valve is
faulty.
Place the machine in the following posture

when performing the operation in “a~c” above.
• The bucket cylinder should be fully ex-
tended, the arm cylinder should be fully
retracted and the bucket should be low-
ered to the ground.
Reference: When the spool first starts to pull, the

oil’s pressure and flow are small, so if the load
check valve is faulty, it causes a load to bear on the
boom cylinder, which causes the oil to flow
backwards for a time. For this reason, the boom
will drop temporarily.
2. Inspect for internal leakage in the boom

cylinder.
When the boom cylinder’s piston or tube is faulty,
if oil is leaking from the head side (A) to the rod
side (B), since the oil’s pressure and flow are low
when the spool first starts pulling, the boom
cylinder will drop temporarily. Also, the cylinder
will have inadequate driving force. However, in
this case as well, the amount of natural drop will
be great.
• Cylinder Inspect
“V-30~31”
TB175 V-32
THE AMOUNT OF BOOM NATURAL DROP IS GREAT.
Is the amount of natural Within the standard.

1 Normal
fall within the standard?
Inspect for internal leak- Faulty Repair or replace the boom

2
age in the boom cylinder. cylinder.
Normal
Operation
3
Does not change.
The control valve is leaking

Replace the housing block.
internally.
1. Is the amount of natural drop within the

standard?
“ II. Specifications, Standards for Judging
Performance”
2. Inspect for internal leakage in the boom

cylinder.
“V-30~31”

“V-28”
V-33 TB175
TROUBLESHOOTING ARM
THE ARM CYLINDER DOESN’T MOVE.

arm cylinder.
Normal

valve.
Normal

3
the spool. block.
Normal
Operation
4
Does not change.
Faulty Repair or replace the arm cyl-

5 Inspect the arm cylinder.
inder.

the arm cylinder.
Inspect if the operation of the arm only is faulty by Lever Operated Places inspected
the table at right. If operation is faulty, inspect the
main relief valve and the hydraulic pump. Left Travel Relief Valve R1 Pump P2
“V-6”

“V-28”
TB175 V-34
ARM TROUBLESHOOTING
Disconnect the arm hose connected to the pipe at
BUCKET
BUCKET
the boom foot, then set a pressure gauge in the
ARM
ARM
disconnected hose.
• Operate the (arm) lever and measure the pres-
sure.
• If the pressure is 27.5 MPa, it is normal.
L3E010E

Switch the port relief valve with that of the
normal boom. If the arm cylinder then operates,
the port relief valve is faulty.
L3E006
5. Inspect the arm cylinder.

BUCKET
BUCKET
Switch the arm hoses and bucket hoses connected

ARM
ARM
to the pipes at the boom foot.

• Try operating the (bucket) operation lever to
operate the arm cylinder.
• If the cylinder doesn’t operate, the cylinder is
faulty.
When performing the operation above, the
bucket cylinder should be fully extended, the
arm cylinder should be fully retracted, and
the bucket should be lowered to the ground.
L3E011E
V-35 TB175
TROUBLESHOOTING ARM
ARM CYLINDER OPERATION IS SLOW, OR THERE IS NO POWER.
Is the arm cylinder’s Within the standard.

1 speed within the stan- Normal
dard?

valve.
Normal

3
the spool. block.
Normal
Operation
4
Does not change

inder.
1. Is the arm cylinder’s speed within the stan-

dard?
Performance”

“V-28”

Stroke the spools of the boom [1] and boom [2]
sections and inspect whether they move smoothly,
or remove the spools and check whether there is
any foreign matter engaged in them.

“V-35”
L3E012
TB175 V-36
ARM TROUBLESHOOTING
a. Fully retract the bucket cylinder, fully retract
the arm cylinder and lower the bucket to the
ground.
b. Disconnect the two hoses connected to the

cylinder. Insert plugs (1) in the disconnected
hoses and the cylinder piping.
c. Raise the boom and raise the hoe attachment so

it floats above the ground. If the arm dorps, the
cylinder is faulty. If the arm does not drop,
there is leakage inside the control valve.
V-37 TB175
TROUBLESHOOTING ARM
THE AMOUNT OF ARM NATURAL DROP IS GREAT.

1 Normal

inder.
Normal
There is leakage inside

3 Replace the housing block.
the control valve.
1. Is the amount of natural fall within the stan-

dard?
Performance”

“V-37”
TB175 V-38
BUCKET TROUBLESHOOTING
THE BUCKET CYLINDER DOESN’T MOVE, OR THERE IS NO POWER.

bucket cylinder.
Normal

valve.
Normal

3
the spool. block.
Normal
Operation
4
Does not change.
Inspect the bucket cylin- Faulty Repair or replace the bucket

5
der. cylinder.

the bucket cylinder.
Inspect if the operation of the bucket only is faulty Lever Operated Places inspected
by the table at right. If operation is faulty, inspect
the main relief valve and the hydraulic pump. Right Travel Relief Valve R1 Pump P1
“V-6”

“V-28”

“V-35”
V-39 TB175
TROUBLESHOOTING BUCKET

When only “bucket load” side is inoperable:
Replace the port relief valve with that of the
normal boom, and test. If the bucket cylinder
operates, the replaced old port relief valve was
faulty.
L3E013
5. Inspect the bucket cylinder.
BUCKET
BUCKET
At the boom foot, exchange the arm hose with the
ARM
ARM
bucket hose that is connected to the pipe.
• Move the lever (arm) and check whether the
bucket cylinder operates.
• If the bucket cylinder does not operate, the
bucket cylinder is faulty.
This inspection should be done with the

bucket cylinder fully extended and the arm
cylinder fully retracted. Also, the bucket must
be lowered to the ground.
L3E011E
TB175 V-40
BUCKET TROUBLESHOOTING
THE AMOUNT OF BUCKET NATURAL DROP IS GREAT.

1 Normal
Inspect the bucket cylin- Faulty Repair or replace the bucket

2
der. cylinder.
Normal
There is leakage inside

3 Replace the housing block.
the control valve.
1. Is the amount of natural drop within the

standard?
“II, Specifications, Standards for Judging
Performance”
2. Inspect the bucket cylinder.

a. Fully extend the bucket cylinder, fully retract
the arm cylinder and lower the bucket to the
ground,
b. Disconnect the 2 hoses connected to the cylin-
der.
Insert the plugs (1) in the disconnected hoses
and the piping.
c. Raise the boom and raise the hoe attachment so

that it floats above the ground, If the bucket
drops, the cylinder is faulty, If the bucket does
not drop, there is leakage inside the control
valve.
V-41 TB175
TROUBLESHOOTING BOOM SWING
THE SWING CYLINDER DOESN’T MOVE.

swing cylinder.
Normal
Inspect the pilot valve Faulty Repair or replace the pilot

2
(swing). valve.
Normal
Inspect the solenoid valve Faulty Repair or replace the solenoid

3
(2-section). valve (2-section).
Normal

4
the spool. block.
Normal
Faulty Repair or replace the check

5 Inspect the check valve.
valve.
Normal
Inspect the swing cylin- Faulty Repair or replace the swing

6
der. cylinder.

the swing cylinder.
Inspect if the operation of the boom swing only is Lever Operated Places inspected
faulty by the table at right. If operation is faulty,
inspect the main relief valve and the hydraulic Left Travel Relief Valve R1 Pump P2
pump.
“V-6”
TB175 V-42
BOOM SWING TROUBLESHOOTING
2. Inspect the pilot valve (swing).
(swing) and solenoid valve (2-section) on the
solenoid valve (2-section) side, then set a pres-
sure gauge in the disconnected hose.
• Operate the boom swing pedal and measure the
pressure.
L3E014
3. Inspect the solenoid valve (2-section).

Disconnect the hose between the solenoid valve
(2-section) and control valve (swing section) on
the control valve side, then set a pressure gauge in
the disconnected hose.
pressure.
L3E015

Disconnect the hose between the control valve
(swing section) and the cylinder on the cylinder
hose.
pressure.
L3E016
5. Inspect the check valve.

If right swing cannot be done, then foreign matter
is caught in the check valve or the valve is
sticking.
6. Inspect the swing cylinder.

“IV. Hydraulic Units, Cylinders”
L3E017
V-43 TB175
TROUBLESHOOTING DOZER BLADE
THE DOZER BLADE CYLINDER DOESN’T MOVE, OR THERE IS NO POWER.

dozer blade cylinder.
Normal

2
the spool. block.
Normal
Faulty Adjust, repair or replace the

3 Inspect the linkage.
parts.
Normal
Inspect the control valve Faulty Repair or replace the housing

4
supply pressure. block.
Normal

joint.
Normal
The dozer blade cylinder is Faulty Repair or replace the dozer

faulty. blade cylinder.

the dozer blade cylinder.
Inspect if the operation of the dozer blade only is Lever Operated Places inspected
faulty by the table at right. If operation is faulty,
inspect the main relief valve and the hydraulic Slew Relief Valve R3 Pump P3
pump.
“V-6”
2. Inspect spool operation.

• Spool Stroke : 6.0 mm
• If the spool is sticking, take it out and inspect
it. If it can’t be taken out, or if it is scratched,
replace the housing block.
Another cause of the spool not operating prop-
erly could be that the return spring installation
bolt is loose.
TB175 V-44
DOZER BLADE TROUBLESHOOTING
3. Inspect the linkage.
The inspection of the linkage is done by inspect-
ing the movement of the yoke (1) without the R
pin (2) and the pin (3) which connect the yoke (1)
and the spool.
4. Inspect the control valve supply pressure.

Disconnect one of the hoses connected to the
dozer blade section of the control valve. Set a
pressure gauge in its section, operate the dozer
blade operation lever and inspect the supply pres-
sure.
If the pressure indicated is not the value below,
the housing block is faulty.
• Supply Pressure: 19.6 MPa
When “dozer blade lower” side does not

operate properly:
• Replace the port relief valve with a new one
having a normal arm, and test. If the dozer
blade cylinder operates, the port relief valve on
the dozer blade side is faulty.

the dozer blade cylinder on the cylinder side.
Connect a pressure gauge to the disconnected
hose and operate the lever (blade).
• If the measured pressure is not the following
value, the swivel joint is faulty.
Supply Pressure: 19.6 MPa
V-45 TB175
TROUBLESHOOTING DOZER BLADE
THE AMOUNT OF DOZER BLADE NATURAL DROP IS GREAT OR THE DOZER BLADE WON’T
HOLD THE MACHINE UP.

1 Normal
drop within the standard?
Inspect for internal leak- Faulty Repair or replace the housing

2
age in the blade cylinder. block.
Normal
Repair or replace the swivel

Inspect the swivel joint Faulty
3 joint, or replace the control
and control valve.
valve.
1. Is the dozer blade’s natural drop within the

standard?
Performance”
2. Inspect for internal leakage in the dozer

blade cylinder.
a. Using the hoe attachment, raise the machine’s
body, then lower the dozer blade fully.
b. Disconnect the dozer blade cylinder’s rod side

hose and drain out the oil in the piping.
plug the disconnected hoses. 1
1
1
L3E018
TB175 V-46
DOZER BLADE TROUBLESHOOTING
c. Raise the boom and apply a load on the dozer
blade.
• If the machine’s body drops while oil drains
out of the cylinder’s piping, the cylinder is
faulty.
If the body drops even though no oil drains out,
the control valve or the swivel joint is faulty.
If the machine cannot be supported by the

dozer blade, try replacing the port relief valve
with a normal one.
If the dozer blade can support the machine’s
body after this, then the port relief valve is
faulty.
3. Inspect the swivel joint and control valve.

control valve at the control valve side, then insert
a plug in the disconnected hose.
Apply a load to the dozer blade by the procedure
in the previous item 2, a~c.
If the machine’s body drops, the swivel joint is
faulty.
If the machine’s body does not drop, there is
internal leakage in the control valve.
V-47 TB175
TROUBLESHOOTING AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS
THE PROPORTIONAL CONTROL IS IMPOSSIBLE.

auxiliary line.
Normal
Inspect the proportional Faulty

2 Repair or replace.
controller.
Inspect the proportional Faulty Repair or replace the propor-

3
control solenoid valve. tional control solenoid valve.
Inspect movement of the Faulty Repair or replace the control

4
spool. valve.
1. Inspect the operation of actuators other than Lever operated Places to be checked
the auxiliary line.
Check the table at right to see if the problem lies Left Travel Relief valve R1 Pump P2
with the auxiliary line alone. If the problem does
lie with the auxiliary line, then check the main
relief valve and the hydraulic pump (P2).
“V-6”
2. Inspect the proportional controller.

“III-85~87”
TB175 V-48
AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS TROUBLESHOOTING
3. Inspect the proportional control solenoid
valve.
a. Disconnect the hose running from the propor-
tional control solenoid valve to the control
valve (auxiliary section) at the control valve.
b. Fit a pressure gauge to the hose.
c. Operate the proportional control lever on the
left pilot valve to position it at various angles.
If the pressure level falls between 0 and 3.4
MPa for each angle, it is normal.
“IV. Hydraulic Units, Proportional Con-
trol Solenoid Valve”
4. Inspect movement of the spool.

“IV. Hydraulic Units, Control Valve”
V-49 TB175
THE FLOW IN THE AUXILIARY HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT CANNOT BE CONTROLLED.
Inspect the supply pres-

1 sure to the solenoid valve
(auxiliary).
Normal
Faulty
2 Inspect the fuse. Replace the fuse.
Normal
Inspect the auxiliary hy- Faulty Replace the auxiliary hydrau-

3
draulics switch. lics switch.
Normal
Faulty
4 Inspect the relay. Replace the relay.
Normal
Inspect the solenoid valve Faulty Repair or replace the solenoid

5
(auxiliary). valve (auxiliary).
Normal

6
the spool. block.
1. Inspect the supply pressure to the solenoid

valve (auxiliary).
(travel) and the solenoid valve (auxiliary) on the
solenoid valve (auxiliary) side. Connect a pres-
sure gauge to the disconnected hose and measure
the pilot pressure.
• Keep the plug assembles on the port of the
disconnected solenoid valve.
• Standard value: Approx. 3.4 MPa
L3E023
TB175 V-50
AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS TROUBLESHOOTING
2. Inspect the fuse.
Operate the solenoid valve and check the fuse for
the power supply circuit.
10
10
20
10
10
20
10
20
10
5
10
5
20
20
10
20
L3E024
3. Inspect the auxiliary hydraulics switch.

Press the auxiliary hydraulics switch to turn it L R
“ON”. While it is this condition, check if there is
continuity with a tester.
L
BLACK
RED
GRAY
R BLUE
L3E025E
4. Inspect the relay.

Press the auxiliary hydraulics switch to turn the
relay to “ON”. Check whether the voltage is
applied to the solenoid valve by using a tester. Be
sure to stop the engine before starting the inspec-
tion.
L3E026
5. Inspect the solenoid valve (auxiliary).

valve lightly.
c. Turn the auxiliary hydraulics switch “ON”.
then it is normal.

“V-43”
L3E027
V-51 TB175
TB175 V-52
VI . ENGINE
Machine Model Machine Serial No. Mounted Engine

17510003~17512104 4TNE98
TB175
17512105~21301932 4TNV98∗
∗ Fuel Injection Equipment Model YPD-MP2/YPD-MP4
III – 1 TB175
/'
series
(Direct Injection System)
Publication No. M9961-02E050
History of Revision
Manual Name Service Manual for Industrial Diesel Engine
Engine Model: 3TNV, 4TNV series (Direct Injection System)
Number
Date of Reason for Correction item Corrected
of Outline of correction
revision correction No (page) by
revision
New edition Oct 2003
R.1 June, Revision, 1) Revision of the fuel injection 1) P46,47,48-1,48-2 Quality
2004 addition & timing adjustment Assurance
correction 2) Addition of the compression 2) P64 Dept.
gauge adopter Small
3) Addition of C.S.D. 3) P117 Engine
4) Addition of copy right 4) (Preface) Factory
5) Revision of the long storage 5) P52
6) Addition of tip clearance 6) P110
7) Revision of cover page 7) Cover page
8) Revision of FO,LO & coolant 8) P14,15-1,15-2
9) Addition of starting moter. 9) 175-1,175-2,
10) Other corrections 175-3
10) P5,20,50,57,61,
41,79,84,92,94,
81,102,103,108,
109-1,109-2,
111-1,111-2,109,
185-1,185-2,188,
193,195,196
Printed in Japan
M9961-02E050
PREFACE
This manual describes the service procedures for the TNV series engines of indirect injection system that
have been certified by the US EPA, California ARB and/or the 97/68/EC Directive for industrial use.
Please use this manual for accurate, quick and safe servicing of the said engine. Since the explanation in this
manual assumes the standard type engine, the specifications and components may partially be different from
the engine installed on individual work equipment (power generator, pump, compressor, etc.). Please also
refer to the service manual for each work equipment for details.
The specifications and components may be subject to change for improvement of the engine quality without
notice. If any modification of the contents described herein becomes necessary, it will be notified in the form of
correction information each time.
&DOLIRUQLD &DOLIRUQLD
3URSRVLWLRQ:DUQLQJ 3URSRVLWLRQ:DUQLQJ
'LHVHO HQJLQH H[KDXVW DQG VRPH
PH RII LWV %DWWHU\ SRVWV
RVWV WHUPLQDOV DQG UHODWHG
FRQVW
RQVWLWXHQWV
WXHQWV DUH
UH NQRZQ
QRZQ WR
R WKH 6W
6WDWH
DWH RI DFFHVVRULHV
DFFHV RULHV FRQWDLQ OHDG DQG OHDG
&DOLIRUQLDWRFDXVHFDQFHUELUWKGHIHFWV FRPSRXQGV
PSRXQGV FKHPLFDOV NQRZQ Q WR WKH
KH
DQGRWKHUUHSURGXFWLYHKDUP 6WDWH
6W DWH RI &DOLIRUQLD
DOLIRUQLD WR FDXVH
DXVH FDQF
DQFHUU DQG
UHSURGXFWLYHKDUP
:DVKKDQGVDIWHUKDQGOLQJ
c 2003 YANMAR CO., LTD

All rights reserved. This manual may not be
reproduced or copied, in whole or in part,
without the written permission of YANMAR
CO., LTD.
(R.1)
SAFETY LABELS
• Most accidents are caused by negligence of basic safety rules and precautions. For accident prevention, it
is important to avoid such causes before development to accidents.
Please read this manual carefully before starting repair or maintenance to fully under-
stand safety precautions and appropriate inspection and maintenance procedures.
Attempting at a repair or maintenance job without sufficient knowledge may cause an unexpected accident.
• It is impossible to cover every possible danger in repair or maintenance in the manual. Sufficient consider-
ation for safety is required in addition to the matters marked . Especially for safety precautions
in a repair or maintenance job not described in this manual, receive instructions from a knowledgeable
leader.
• Safety marks used in this manual and their meanings are as follows:
DANGER-indicates an imminently hazardous situation which,

if not avoided, WILL result in death or serious injury.
WARNING-indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

avoided, COULD result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION-indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

avoided, MAY result in minor or moderate injury.
• NOTICE-indicates that if not observed, the product performance or quality may not be guaranteed.
Safety Precautions
(1) SERVICE AREA
•Sufficient Ventilation
Inhalation of exhaust fumes and dust particles may be hazardous to ones
health. Running engines welding, sanding, painting, and polishing tasks
should be only done in well ventilated areas.
•Safe / Adequate Work Area

The service area should be clean, spacious, level and free from holes in the
floor, to prevent “slip” or “trip and fall” type accidents.
•Bright, Safely Illuminated Area

The work area should be well lit or illuminated in a safe manner. For work in
enclosed or dark areas, a “drop cord” should be utilized. The drop cord must
have a wire cage to prevent bulb breakage and possible ignition of flammable
substances.
•Safety Equipment
Fire extinguisher(s), first aid kit and eye wash / shower station should be
close at hand (or easily accessible) in case of an emergency.
(2) WORK – WEAR (GARMENTS
•Safe Work Clothing

Appropriate safety wear (gloves, special shoes/boots, eye/ear protection,
head gear, harness’, clothing, etc.) should be used/worn to match the task at
hand. Avoid wearing jewelry, unbuttoned cuffs, ties or loose fitting clothes
around moving machinery. A serious accident may occur if caught in moving/
rotating machinery.
(3) TOOLS
•Appropriate Lifting / Holding

When lifting an engine, use only a lifting device (crane, jack, etc.) with
sufficient lifting capacity. Do not overload the device. Use only a chain, cable,
or lifting strap as an attaching device. Do not use rope, serious injury may
result.
To hold or support an engine, secure the engine to a support stand, test bed
or test cart designed to carry the weight of the engine. Do not overload this
device, serious injury may result.
Never run an engine without being properly secured to an engine support
stand, test bed or test cart, serious injury may result.
•Appropriate Tools
Always use tools that are designed for the task at hand. Incorrect usage of
tools may result in damage to the engine and or serious personal injury.
(4) GENUINE PARTS and MATERIALS
•Genuine Parts
Always use genuine YANMAR parts or YANMAR recommended parts and
goods. Damage to the engine, shortened engine life and or personal injury
may result.
(5) FASTENER TORQUE
•Torquing Fasteners
Always follow the torque values and procedures as designated in the service
manual. Incorrect values, procedures and or tools may cause damage to the
engine and or personal injury.
(6) ELECTRICAL
•Short Circuits
Always disconnect the (-) Negative battery cable before working on the
electrical system. An accidental “short circuit” may cause damage, fire and or
personal injury. Remember to connect the (-) Negative battery cable (back
onto the battery) last.
Fasten the terminals tightly.
•Charging Batteries
Charging wet celled batteries produces hydrogen gas. Hydrogen gas is
extremely explosive. Keep sparks, open flame and any other form of ignition
away. Explosion may occur causing severe personal injury.
•Battery Electrolyte
Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Do NOT allow it to come in contact with
clothing, skin and or eyes, severe burns will result.
(7) WASTE MANAGEMENT
Observe the following instructions with regard to hazardous waste disposal.

Negligence of these will have a serious impact on environmental pollution
concerns.
1)Waste fluids such as lube oil, fuel and coolant shall be carefully put into sep-
arate sealed containers and disposed of properly.
2)Do NOT dispose of waste materials irresponsibly by dumping them into the
sewer, overland or into natural waterways.
3)Waste materials such as oil, fuel, coolant, solvents, filter elements and bat-
teries, must be disposed of properly according to local ordinances. Consult
the local authorities or reclamation facility.
(8) FURTHER PRECAUTIONS
•Fueling / Refueling
Keep sparks, open flames or any other form of ignition (match, cigarette, etc.)
away when fueling/refueling the unit. Fire and or an explosion may result.
•Hot Surfaces.
Do NOT touch the engine (or any of its components) during running or shortly
after shutting it down. Scalding / serious burns may result. Allow the engine to
cool down before attempting to approach the unit.
•Rotating Parts
Be careful around moving/rotating parts. Loose clothing, jewelry, ties or tools
may become entangled causing damage to the engine and or severe
personal injury.
•Preventing burns from scalding

1)Never open the radiator filler cap shortly after shutting the engine down.
Steam and hot water will spurt out and seriously burn you. Allow the engine
to cool down before attempt to open the filler cap.
2)Securely tighten the filler cap after checking the radiator.
Steam can spurt out during engine running, if tightening loose.
Precautions for Service Work
(1) Precautions for Safety
Read the safety precautions given at the beginning of this manual carefully and always mind safety in work.
(2) Preparation for Service Work

Preparation is necessary for accurate, efficient service work. Check the customer ledger file for the history of
the engine.
• Preceding service date
• Period/operation hours after preceding service
• Problems and actions in preceding service
• Replacement parts expected to be required for service
• Recording form/check sheet required for service
(3) Preparation before Disassembly

• Prepare general tools, special service tools, measuring instruments, oil, grease, nonreusable parts, and
parts expected to be required for replacement.
• When disassembling complicated portions, put match-marks and other marks at places not adversely
affecting the function for easy reassembly.
(4) Precautions in Disassembly

• Each time a parts is removed, check the part installed state, deformation, damage, roughening, surface
defect, etc.
• Arrange the removed parts orderly with clear distinction between those to be replaced and those to be
used again.
• Parts to be used again shall be washed and cleaned sufficiently.
• Select especially clean locations and use clean tools for disassembly of hydraulic units such as the fuel
injection pump.
(5) Precautions for Inspection and Measurement

Inspect and measure parts to be used again as required to determine whether they are reusable or not.
(6) Precautions for Reassembly

• Reassemble correct parts in correct order according to the specified standards (tightening torques, and
adjustment standards). Apply oil important bolts and nuts before tightening when specified.
• Always use genuine parts for replacement.
• Always use new oil seals, O-rings, packing and cotter pins.
• Apply sealant to packing depending on the place where they are used. Apply of grease to sliding contact
portions, and apply grease to oil seal lips.
(7) Precautions for Adjustment and Check

Use measuring instruments for adjustment to the specified service standards.
How to Read this Manual

(1) Range of Operation Explanation
This manual explains the troubleshooting, installation/removal, replacement, disassemble/reassembly,
inspection, adjustment and adjusting operation procedures for the TNV series engines with direct injection
system.
Refer to the manufacturer’s manual for each of the fuel injection pump, governor, starting motor and alternator
except for their installation.
(2) How to Read the Explanations
• An exploded view, sectional views, a system diagram, etc. are shown at the beginning of each section as
required for easy understanding of the mounted states of the components.
• For the removal/installation of each part, the procedure is shown with the procedural step No. in the illus-
tration.
• Precautions and key points for disassembly and reassembly of parts are described as points. In the expla-
nation for each point, detailed operation method, information, standard and precautions are described.
Description Example
ԠFlywheel
Flywheel housing
ԟStarter ԢGear case flange

ԡCamshaft
ԙCooling water pump
Fuel pump spacer ԝ Camshaft driving gear

Idle gear
ԜFuel injection pump
Pump flange
Don't disassemble! Fuel pump drive gear Crankshaft
gear
Flange bolt
ԛGear case
ԣOil seal
ԚCrankshaft pulley
Note) This figure shows the 3TNV84.
The job contents are described in the disassembly procedure for Nos. not shown in the illustration.
• Disassembly procedure
1)Follow steps (1) to (15) of the cylinder head disassembly procedure.
2)Remove the cooling water pump.
3)Remove the crankshaft pulley. (Point 1) I Operation point to be explained on a later page.
• Operation points
Disassemble: Service point for removal
Reassemble: Service point for installation
Disassemble-Reassemble: Service point required in both removal and installation.
• Contents omitted in this manual
Though the following jobs are omitted in the explanation in this manual, they should be conducted in actual
work:
3)Jacking up and lifting
4)Cleaning and washing of removed parts as required
5)Visual inspection
(3) Definition of Terms

[NOTICE]: Instruction whose negligence is very likely to cause an accident. Always observe it.
Standard: Allowable range for inspection and adjustment.
Limit: The maximum or minimum value that must be satisfied during inspection or adjustment.
(4) Abbreviations
Abbreviation Meaning Abbreviation Meaning

Assy assembly T.D.C. top dead center
Sub-Assy sub-assembly B.D.C. bottom dead center
a.T.D.C after top dead center OS oversize
b.T.D.C before top dead center US undersize
STD Standard Min-1 revolutions per minute
IN Intake PS Output (metric horsepower)
EX Exhaust T Bolt/nut tightening torque
CONTENTS
1. General ............................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 Engine nomenclature ...............................................................................................................1
1.2 Specifications ...........................................................................................................................1
1.3 Fuel oil, lubricating oil and cooling water ...............................................................................14
1.3.1 Fuel oil ............................................................................................................................................ 14
1.3.2 Lubricating oil.................................................................................................................................... 1
1.3.3 Cooling water .................................................................................................................................... 2
1.4 Engine external views ...........................................................................................................16
1.5 Structural description ............................................................................................................17
1.6 Exhaust gas emission regulation ...........................................................................................18
1.6.1 The emission standard in USA ...................................................................................................... 18
1.6.2 Engine identification........................................................................................................................ 19
1.6.3 Guarantee conditions for the EPA emission standard .................................................................... 20
2. Inspection and adjustment ............................................................................................. 22

2.1 Periodic maintenance schedule .............................................................................................22
2.2 Periodic inspection and maintenance procedure ...................................................................23
2.2.1 Check before daily operation .......................................................................................................... 23
2.2.2 inspection after initial 50 hours operation ....................................................................................... 25
2.2.3 Inspection every 50 hours............................................................................................................... 28
2.2.4 Inspection every 250 hours or 3 months......................................................................................... 32
2.2.5 Inspection every 500 hours or 6 months......................................................................................... 35
2.2.6 Inspection every 1,000 hours or one year....................................................................................... 37
2.2.7 Inspection every 2000 hours or 2 years.......................................................................................... 46
2.3 Adjusting the no-load maximum or minimum speed ..............................................................49
2.4 Sensor inspection ...................................................................................................................50
2.4.1 Oil pressure switch.......................................................................................................................... 50
2.4.2 Thermo switch................................................................................................................................. 50
2.5 Water leak check in cooling water system .............................................................................50
2.6 Radiator cap inspection ..........................................................................................................51
2.7 Thermostat Inspection ............................................................................................................51
2.8 Adjusting operation ................................................................................................................52
2.9 Long storage ..........................................................................................................................52
3. Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................. 53
3.1 Preparation before troubleshooting ........................................................................................53
3.2 Quick reference table for troubleshooting ..............................................................................54
3.3 Troubleshooting by measuring compression pressure ..........................................................57
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines .................................................... 59
4.1 Complete disassembly and reassembly .................................................................................59
4.1.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 59
4.1.2 Special service tools ....................................................................................................................... 60
4.1.3 Complete disassembly.................................................................................................................... 65
4.1.4 Precautions before and during reassembly .................................................................................... 69
4.1.5 Adjusting operation ......................................................................................................................... 69
4.2 Cylinder head: Disassembly, inspection and reassembly ......................................................70
4.2.1 Components (2-valve cylinder head) .............................................................................................. 70
4.2.2 Disassembly procedure: ................................................................................................................. 70
4.2.3 Reassembly procedure: .................................................................................................................. 71
4.2.4 Servicing points............................................................................................................................... 72
4.2.5 Parts Inspection and measurement ................................................................................................ 76
4.2.6 Valve seat correction ...................................................................................................................... 80
4.2.7 Valve guide replacement ................................................................................................................ 81
4.2.8 Valve stem seal replacement.......................................................................................................... 82
4.3 Gear train and camshaft .........................................................................................................83
4.3.1 Components.................................................................................................................................... 83
4.3.5 Parts inspection and measurement ................................................................................................ 87
4.3.6 Oil seal replacement (Gear case side)............................................................................................ 89
4.3.7 Camshaft bushing replacement ...................................................................................................... 89
4.4 Cylinder block .........................................................................................................................90
4.4.1 Components.................................................................................................................................... 90
4.4.5 Parts inspection and measurement ................................................................................................ 95
4.4.6 Cylinder bore correction................................................................................................................ 106
4.4.7 Piston pin bushing replacement.................................................................................................... 107
4.4.8 Oil seal replacement (Flywheel housing side) .............................................................................. 107
5. Lubrication system ....................................................................................................... 108

5.1 Lubrication system diagram .................................................................................................108
5.2 Trochoid pump components .....................................................................................................1
5.3 Disassembly (Reverse the procedure below for assembly) .....................................................1
5.4 Servicing points ........................................................................................................................1
5.5 Parts Inspection and measurement .....................................................................................110
5.5.1 Trochoid pump inspection and measurement............................................................................... 110
5.6 Lube oil filter .............................................................................................................................2
5.6.1 Lube oil filter construction ................................................................................................................. 2
5.6.2 Lube oil filter replacement................................................................................................................. 2
6. Cooling system ............................................................................................................ 112

6.1 Cooling water system ...........................................................................................................112
6.2 Cooling water pump components .........................................................................................112
6.3 Disassembly (Reverse the procedure below for assembly) .................................................113
6.4 Servicing points ....................................................................................................................113
7. Fuel injection pump / Governor ................................................................................... 114

7.1 Introduction ..........................................................................................................................114
7.2 Fuel injection pump ..............................................................................................................114
7.2.1 Fuel system diagram..................................................................................................................... 114
7.2.2 External view and components ..................................................................................................... 115
7.2.3 Disassembly procedure: ............................................................................................................... 115
7.2.4 Assembly procedure ..................................................................................................................... 116
7.2.5 Servicing points............................................................................................................................. 116
7.2.6 C.S.D. (Cold Start Device) ............................................................................................................ 117
8. Turbocharger: Disassembly, inspection and reassembly ............................................ 118

8.1 Structure and functions ........................................................................................................118
8.1.1 Main specifications........................................................................................................................ 118
8.1.2 Construction.................................................................................................................................. 118
8.1.3 Structural and functional outline.................................................................................................... 119
8.1.4 Components.................................................................................................................................. 120
8.2 Service standards and tightening torque ..............................................................................121
8.2.1 Service standards ......................................................................................................................... 121
8.2.2 Tightening torque .......................................................................................................................... 122
8.3 Periodic inspection procedure ..............................................................................................123
8.3.1 Periodic inspection intervals ......................................................................................................... 123
8.3.2 Inspection procedure .................................................................................................................... 124
8.3.3 Waste gate valve adjustment procedure....................................................................................... 125
8.4 Disassembly procedure ........................................................................................................127
8.4.1 Preparation for disassembly ......................................................................................................... 127
8.4.2 Inspection before disassembly...................................................................................................... 128
8.4.3 Disassembly.................................................................................................................................. 128
8.5 Washing and inspection procedure ......................................................................................130
8.5.1 Washing ........................................................................................................................................ 130
8.5.2 Inspection procedure .................................................................................................................... 131
8.6 Reassembly procedure ........................................................................................................134
8.6.1 Preparation for reassembly........................................................................................................... 134
8.6.2 Reassembly .................................................................................................................................. 134
8.7 Handling after disassembly and reassembly ........................................................................137
8.7.1 Instructions for turbocharger installation ....................................................................................... 137
8.8 Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................................138
8.8.1 Excessively exhaust smoke .......................................................................................................... 138
8.8.2 White smoke generation ............................................................................................................... 138
8.8.3 Sudden oil decrease ..................................................................................................................... 139
8.8.4 Decrease in output........................................................................................................................ 139
8.8.5 Poor (slow) response (starting) of turbocharger ........................................................................... 139
8.8.6 Abnormal sound or vibration ......................................................................................................... 139
9. Starting motror ............................................................................................................. 140

9.1 For 4TNV94L/ 98 ..................................................................................................................140
9.1.1 Specifications................................................................................................................................ 140
9.1.2 Components.................................................................................................................................. 141
9.1.3 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................ 142
9.1.4 Names of parts and disassembly procedure................................................................................. 143
9.1.5 Inspection and maintenance ......................................................................................................... 147
9.1.6 Service standards ......................................................................................................................... 152
9.1.7 Assembly ...................................................................................................................................... 153
9.1.8 Characteristic test ......................................................................................................................... 155
9.2 For 4TNV106 (T) ..................................................................................................................156
9.2.1 Specifications................................................................................................................................ 156
9.2.2 Congiguration drawing .................................................................................................................. 156
9.2.3 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................ 157
9.2.4 Component names and disassembly procedure........................................................................... 158
9.2.5 Disassembly procedure ................................................................................................................ 159
9.2.6 Inspection and maintenance ......................................................................................................... 167
9.2.7 Assembly ...................................................................................................................................... 173
9.2.8 Adjustment .................................................................................................................................... 174
9.2.9 Service standards ............................................................................................................................. 1
9.3 For 3TNV82A to 3/4TNV88 ......................................................................................................2
9.3.1 Specifications.................................................................................................................................... 2
9.3.2 Characteristics .................................................................................................................................. 2
9.3.3 Disassembly drawing ........................................................................................................................ 3
9.3.4 Connecting diagram of a starting motor............................................................................................ 3
10. Alternator ................................................................................................................... 176
10.1 The 40A alternator for 3TNV84 and other models .............................................................176
10.1.1 Components................................................................................................................................ 176
10.1.2 Specifications.............................................................................................................................. 177
10.1.3 Wiring diagram............................................................................................................................ 177
10.1.4 Standard output characteristics .................................................................................................. 178
10.1.5 Inspection.................................................................................................................................... 178
10.1.6 Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................................... 179
11. Electric wiring ............................................................................................................ 180

11.1 Electric wiring diagram .......................................................................................................180
11.2 Precaution on electric wiring ..............................................................................................181
11.2.1 Alternator .................................................................................................................................... 181
11.2.2 Starter ......................................................................................................................................... 182
11.2.3 Current limiter ............................................................................................................................. 183
11.2.4 Section area and resistance of electric wire ............................................................................... 184
13. Tightening torque for bolts and nuts .......................................................................... 196

13.1 Tightening torques for main bolts and nuts ........................................................................196
13.2 Tightening torques for standard bolts and nuts ..................................................................197
12. Service standards .......................................................................................................... 1

12.1 Engine tuning .........................................................................................................................1
12.2 Engine body .......................................................................................................................186
12.2.1 Cylinder head.............................................................................................................................. 186
12.2.2 Gear train and camshaft ............................................................................................................. 189
12.2.3 Cylinder block ............................................................................................................................. 190
12.3 Lubricating oil system (Trochoid pump) .............................................................................195

1. General
1. General
1.1 Engine nomenclature
4 TNV ٤٤ (A) (T) - ٤٤ ٤

Destination code
Nominal engine speed or output code
T: With turbocharger
None: Natural aspirated engine
The subdivision code of the model name
Cylinder bore (in mm)
Model series
Number of cylinders
The engine specification class
Classification Load Engine speed Available engine speed (min-1)

CL Constant load Constant speed 1500/1800
VM Variable load Variable speed 2000-3000
Ú The engine specification class (CL or VM) is described in the specifications table.
1.2 Specifications
NOTE:
1)The information described in the engine specifications tables (the next page and after) is for "standard"
engine. To obtain the information for the engine installed in each machine unit, refer to the manual pro-
vided by the equipment manufacturer.
2)Engine rating conditions are as follows (SAE J1349, ISO 3046/1)
• Atmospheric condition: Room temp. 25 °C, Atmospheric press. 100 kPa (750 mm Hg), Relative humidity
30 %
• Fuel temp: 25 °C (Fuel injection pump inlet)
• With cooling fan, air cleaner, exhaust silencer (Yanmar standard parts)
• After running-in hours. Output allowable deviation: ± 3 %
1
1. General
(1) 3TNV82A
Engine name Unit 3TNV82A
Engine specification class - CL VM
Type - Vertical, in-line, 4-cycle, water-cooled diesel engine
Combustion chamber - Direct injection
Number of cylinders - 3
Cylinder bore × stroke mm × mm 82 × 84
Displacement L 1.331
Revolving
speed Min-1 1500 1800 -
Continuous
rating kW 9.9 12.0
Output -
(ps) (13.5) (16.3)
Revolving
speed Min-1 1500 1800 2000 2200 2400 2500 2600 2800 3000
Rated output
kW 11.0 13.2 14.6 16.0 17.5 18.2 19.0 20.4 21.9
Output
(ps) (14.9) (17.9) (19.9) (21.8) (23.8) (24.8) (25.8) (27.8) (29.8)
Max. no-load speed (± 25) min-1 1600 1895 2180 2375 2570 2675 2780 2995 3180
Ignition order - 1-3-2-1 (No.1 cylinder on flywheel side)
Power take off - Flywheel
Direction of rotation - Counterclockwise (viewed from flywheel)
Cooling system - Radiator
Lubrication system - Forced lubrication with trochoid pump
Starting system - Electric
Diesel oil-ISO 8217 DMA, BS 2869 A1 or A2
Applicable fuel -
(Cetane No.45 min.)
Applicable lubricant - API grade class CD or CF
Lubricant capacity Total L 5.5
(oil pan) * Effective L 1.9
Cooling water capacity
L 1.8
(engine only)
Overall
mm 553 528
Engine Dimensions ** length
(with flyw Crankshaft Overall
mm 489
V pulley diameter & width
heel housing) *
Overall
mm 565
height
Engine mass (dry) *,**
kg 138 128
(with flywheel housing)
Cooling fan (std.) * mm 335 mm O/D, 6 blades pusher type F
Fun V pulley diameter (std.) * mm 120 × 90 110 × 110
* Items marked * may differ from the above depending on an engine installed on a machine unit.
** Engine mass and dimensions without radiator
2
1. General
(2) 3TNV84
Engine name Unit 3TNV84
Revolving
speed Min-1 1500 1800 -
Continuous
rating kW 11.3 13.5
Output -
(ps) (15.3) (18.3)
Revolving
speed Min-1 1500 1800 2000 2200 2400 2500 2600 2800 3000
Rated output
kW 12.4 14.8 16.4 18.1 19.7 20.5 21.3 23.0 24.6
Output
(ps) (16.8) (20.1) (22.3) (24.6) (26.8) (27.9) (29.0) (31.3) (33.5)
Applicable fuel -
(Cetane No.45 min.)
Applicable lubricant - API grade class CD
L 2.0
(engine only)
Overall
mm 589 564
length
*
Overall
Engine dimensions ** mm 486
width
Overall
mm 622
height
kg 161 155
Crankshaft V pulley diameter &
mm 120 × 90 110 × 110
Fun V pulley diameter (std.) *
3
1. General
(3) 3TNV84T
Engine name Unit 3TNV84T
Revolving
speed Min-1 1500 1800 -
Continuous
rating kW 14.0 16.5
Output -
(ps) (19.0) (22.5)
Revolving
speed Min-1 1500 1800 2000 2200 2400 2500 2600 2800 3000
Rated output
kW 15.8 18.8 25.0 26.0 26.8 29.1 30.9
Output
(ps) (21.5) (25.5) (34.0) (35.3) (36.5) (39.5) (42.0)
Max. no-load speed (± 25) min-1 1600 1895 2590 2700 2810 2995 3210
Applicable fuel -
(cetane No.45 min.)
L 2.0
(engine only)
Overall
mm 589 564
length
*
Overall
width
Overall
mm 622
height
kg 161 155
mm 120 × 90 110 × 110
4
1. General
(4) 3TNV88
Revolving
speed Min-1 1500 1800 -
Continuous
rating kW 12.3 14.8
Output -
(ps) (16.7) (20.1)
Revolving
speed Min-1 1500 1800 2000 2200 2400 2500 2600 2800 3000
Rated output
kW 13.5 16.3 18.0 19.9 21.6 22.6 23.5 25.2 27.1
Output
(ps) (18.4) (22.1) 24.5) (27.0) (29.4) (30.7) (31.9) (34.2) (36.8)
Applicable fuel -
(Cetane No.45 min.)
L 2.0
(engine only)
Overall
mm 589 564
length
*
Overall
width
Overall
mm 622
height
kg 155
Cooling fan (std.) * Mm 335 mm O/D, 6 blades pusher type F
Mm 120 × 90 110 × 110
(R.1)
5
1. General
(5) 4TNV84
Revolving
speed Min-1 1500 1800 -
Continuous
Rating kW 14.9 17.7
Output -
(ps) (20.3) (24.1)
Revolving
speed Min-1 1500 1800 2000 2200 2400 2500 2600 2800 3000
Rated output
kW 16.4 19.5 21.9 24.1 26.3 27.4 28.5 30.7 32.9
Output
(ps) (22.3) (26.5) (29.8) (32.8) (35.8) (37.3) (38.7) 41.7) (44.7)
Ignition order - 1-3-4-2-1 (No.1 cylinder on flywheel side)
Applicable fuel -
(cetane No.45 min.)
L 2.7
(engine only)
Overall
mm 683 658
length
*
Overall
Engine dimensions ** mm 498.5
width
Overall
mm 617
height
kg 183 170
mm 120 × 90 110 × 110
6
1. General
(6) 4TNV84T
Revolving
speed Min-1 1500 1800 -
Continuous
rating KW 19.1 24.3
Output -
(ps) (26.0) (33.0)
Revolving
speed Min-1 1500 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 2800 3000
Rated output
KW 21.3 26.9 27.9 30.5 33.5 35.7 38.6 41.2
Output
(ps) (29.0) (36.5) (38.0) (41.5) (45.5) (48.5) (52.5) (56.0)
Max. no-load speed (± 25) min-1 1600 1895 2180 2400 2590 2810 2995 3210
Applicable fuel -
(Cetane No.45 min.)
L 3.2
(engine only)
Overall
mm 683 649
length
Engine Overall
mm 498.5
dimensions *,** width
Overall
mm 713
height
kg 183 170
mm 120 × 90 110 × 110
7
1. General
(7) 4TNV88
Revolving
speed Min-1 1500 1800 -
Continuous
rating kW 16.4 19.6
Output -
(ps) (22.3) (26.7)
Revolving
speed Min-1 1500 1800 2000 2200 2400 2500 2600 2800 3000
Rated output
kW 18.0 21.6 24.1 26.5 28.8 30.1 31.3 33.7 35.4
Output
(ps) (24.5) (29.4) (32.7) (36.0) (39.2) (40.9) (42.5) (45.8) (48.1)
Applicable fuel -
(cetane No.45 min.)
L 2.7
(engine only)
Overall
mm 683 658
length
*
Overall
Engine dimensions ** mm 498.5
width
(with wheel housing)
Overall
mm 618
height
kg 183 170
mm 120 × 90 110 × 110
8
1. General
(8) 4TNV94L
Engine name Unit 4TNV94L
Revolving
speed Min-1 1500 1800 -
Continuous
rating kW 26.1 31.3
Output -
(ps) (35.5) (42.5)
Revolving
speed Min-1 1500 1800 2000 2200 2400 2500
Rated output
kW 29.1 34.6 35.3 38.2 41.6 43.0
Output
(ps) (39.5) (47.0) (48.0) (52.0) (56.5) (58.5)
Max. no-load speed (± 25) min-1 1600 1895 2180 2400 2590 2700
Applicable fuel -
(Cetane No.45 min.)
L 4.2
(engine only)
Overall
mm 719
length
*
Overall
width
Overall
mm 742
height
Engine mass (dry) *,** 245 235
kg
(with flywheel housing) (equivalent to SAE # 3) (equivalent to SAE # 4)
mm 130 × 130
9
1. General
(9) 4TNV98
Revolving
speed Min-1 1500 1800 -
Continuous
rating kW 30.9 36.8
Output -
(ps) (42.0) (50.0)
Revolving
speed Min-1 1500 1800 2000 2200 2400 2500
Rated output
kW 34.6 41.2 41.9 45.6 49.3 51.1
Output
(ps) (47.0 (56.0) (57.0) (62.0) (67.0) (69.5)
Applicable fuel -
(Cetane No.45 min.)
L 4.2
(engine only)
Overall
mm 719
length
*
Overall
width
Overall
mm 742
height
kg
mm 130 × 130
* Engine oil capacity may differ from the above depending on an engine installed on a machine unit.
10
1. General
(10)4TNV98T
Revolving
speed Min-1 1500 1800 -
Continuous
rating kW 37.9 45.6
Output -
(ps) (51.5) (62.0)
Revolving
speed Min-1 1500 1800 2000 2200 2400 2500 2600
Rated output
kW 41.9 50.4 50.7 55.5 60.3 62.5 64.0
Output
(ps) (57.0) (68.5) (69.0) (75.5) (82.0) (85.0) (87.0)
Max. no-load speed (± 25) min-1 1600 1895 2180 2400 2590 2700 2810
Applicable fuel -
(cetane No.45 min.)
L 4.2
(engine only)
Overall
mm 715
length
*
Overall
width
Overall
mm 804
height
kg
Cooling fan (std.) mm 430 mm O/D, 8 blades suction type
mm 130 × 130
11
1. General
(11)4TNV106
Revolving
speed Min-1 1500 1800 -
Continuous
rating kW 41.2 49.3
Output -
(ps) (56.0) (67.0)
Revolving
speed Min-1 1500 1800 2000 2200 2400 2500
Rated output
kW 45.6 54.4 56.6 61.4 65.5 67.7
Output
(ps) (62.0 (74.0) (77.0) (83.5) (89.0) (92.0)
Applicable fuel -
(Cetane No.45 min.)
(oil pan) * Effective L 9.0 7.5
L 6.0
(engine only)
Overall
mm 808 776
length
*
Overall
Engine dimensions ** mm 629 629
width
Overall
mm 803 803
height
Engine mass (dry) *, ** 345 330
kg
500 mm O/D, 500 mm O/D,
Cooling fan (std.) * mm
7 blades pusher type 7 blades suction type
mm 150 × 150
12
1. General
(12)4TNV106T
Revolving
speed Min-1 1500 1800 -
Continuous
rating kW 51.5 61.8
Output -
(ps) (70.0) (84.0)
Revolving
speed Min-1 1500 1800 2000 2200
Rated output
kW 56.8 68.0 69.9 72.0
Output
(ps) (77.2 (92.5) (95.0) (97.9)
Max. no-load speed (± 25) min-1 1600 1895 2180 2400
Ignition order - 1-3-4-2-1(No.1 cylinder on flywheel side)
Applicable fuel -
(Cetane No.45 min.)
(oil pan) * Effective L 9.0 7.5
L 6.0
(engine only)
Overall
mm 808 776
length
*
Engine dimensions ** Overall
mm 629 629
(with flywheel width
housing) Overall
mm 866 866
height
Engine mass (dry) *, ** 355 340
kg
500 mm O/D, 500 mm O/D,
Cooling fan (std.) * mm
7 blades pusher type 7 blades suction type
mm 150 × 150
13
1. General
1.3 Fuel oil, lubricating oil and cooling water

1.3.1 Fuel oil
IMPORTANT:
Only use the recommended fuel to obtain the best engine performance and to keep the durability of the
engine, also to comply with the emission regulations.
(1) Selection of fuel oil

Diesel fuel oil should comply with the following specifications.
• The fuel specifications need to comply with each national standard or international standards.
• ASTM D975 No.1-D, No.2-D ------------- for USA
• EN590:96-------------------------------------- for EU
• ISO 8217 DMX -------------------------------------- International
• BS 2869-A1 or A2 ---------------------------------- for UK
• JIS K2204 ---------------------------------------- for JAPAN
The following requirements also need to be fulfilled.
• Cetane number should be equal to 45 or higher.
• Sulphur content of the fuel
It should not exceed 0.5%by volume. (Preferably it should be below 0.05 %)
• For alternative fuel (Bio fuel such as FAME, JP-8), please contact YANMAR.
• Water and sediment in the fuel oil should not exceed 0.05% by volume.
• Ash should not exceed 0.01%by mass.
• 10% Carbon residue content of the fuel
It should not exceed 0.35%by volume. (Preferably it should be below 0.1 %)
• Aromatics(total) content of the fuel
It should not exceed 35% by volume. (Preferably it should be below 30%
and aromatics(PAH*) content of the fuel preferably it should be below 10%)
PAH*:polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons
• DO NOT use Biocide.
• DO NOT use Kerosene, residual fuels.
• DO NOT mix winter fuel and summer fuel.
Note : Engine breakdown can be attributed to insufficient quality of fuel oil.
(2) Fuel handling

• Water and dust in the fuel oil can cause operation
failure. Use containers which are clean inside to store Pump up only the fuel
fuel oil. Store the containers away from rain water in the upper half to
leave dregs near the bottom
and dust.
• Before supplying fuel, let the fuel container rest for
several hours so that water and dust in the fuel are
deposited on the bottom. Pump up only the clean
fuel.
(3) Fuel tank
Fuel tank inside should be always clean enough and dry Filler port
it inside for the first use.
Fuel return
Drain the water according to the maintenance (section 5) connection
with a drain valve. Primary
strainer
Outlet
(to engine)
Drain cock
(R.1))
14
1. General
1.3.2 Lubricating oil

IMPORTANT:
Only use the recommended engine oil to keep the durability of the engine.
(1) Selection of lube oil
Engine oil shoud comply with the following specifications.
1)Classification
• API classification CD, CF, CF-4, CI-4
TBN value : º9(CD), º9(CF), º7(CF-4), º7(CI-4)
• ACEA classification E-3, E-4, E-5
TBN value : º10(E-3), º10(E-4), º10(E-5)
• JASO classification DH-1
TBN value : º10(DH-1)
The oil must be changed when the Total Base Number (TBN) has been reduced to 2.0.
*TBN(mgKOH/g) test method; JIS K-2501-5.2-2(HCI), ASTM D4739(HCI)
DO NOT use The following engine oils.

• API : CG-4 , CH-4
• ACEA : E-1, E-2 , B grade
• JASO : DH-2 , DL-1
Reason
API CG-4, CH-4
In case CG-4, CH-4 is to be used for YANMAR TNV diesel engine series, there is a possibility that
excessive wears occur on the valve train system due to the content of oil.
ACEA E-1,E-2, B
These fuels are developed for the different type of diesel engines.
JASO DH-2, DL-1

These fuels are developed for the different type of diesel engines.
2)Viscosity Selection of viscosity

Selection of viscosity will be determined depending (SAE Service grade)
on the ambient temperature.
9
(Refer to the chart on the right.) 9
9
The following requirements are also need to be 9
fulfilled.
• Standard engine oil service interval is 250 hrs or
every 12 months.
• DO NOT add any additives to the engine oil. ‫ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ‬
• DO NOT mix the different types (brand) of engine Atmospheric temperature ( C)
oil.
• DO NOT use synthetic oil.
15W-40/10W-30 can be used
almost throughout the year.
(R.1)
15-1
1. General
(2) Handling of lube oil

• Keep the engine oil carefully in store in order to prevent any dust or dirt entrance.
• When filling the engine oil to the engine, avoid the spillage and pay attention to be clean around the filler
port.
Contact with engine oil may result in the roughened skin. Care should be taken
so as not to contact with engine oil wearing protective gloves and clothing.
If contact, wash with soap and water thoroughly.
When handling the engine oil, make sure to use the protective gloves at any
time.
In case of contact, wash your hand or body with soap and water thoroughly.
1.3.3 Cooling water

Use clean soft water and always be sure to add LLC (Long Life Coolant) in order to prevent rust built up and
freezing. (Do not use water only.)
The recommended LLC conform to the following specifications.
• JIS K-2234
• SAEbJ814C, J1941, J1034, J2036
• ASTM D4985
IMPORTANT:
• Always be sure to add LLC to soft water. In particular, in cold season, to add LLC is important.
• Without LLC,
• Cooling performance will decrease due to scale and rust in the cooling water system.
• Cooling water may freeze to form ice; it expands approx. 9% in volume.
• This causes serious damage in the cooling system.
• Be sure to use the proper amount of coolant concentrate specified by the LLC manufacturer depending
on the ambient temperature.
• LLC concentration should be 30%as a minimum and 60%as a maximum.
• DO NOT mix the different types of brand of LLC, otherwise harmful sludge may yield.
• DO NOT use hard water.
• Water should be free from sludge and/or particles.
• Replace the coolant every once a year.
When handling LLC, use protective gloves to avoid skin contact.

In case you have a contact with your skin or eyes, wash out it with clean
water.
(R.1)
15-2
1. General
1.4 Engine external views
Filler port (engine oil)

Turbocharger*
Lifting eye Air intake port [from air cleaner(optional)]
Lifting eye
Fuel filter mounting Cooling water pump
Fuel oil inlet

Fuel filter
Intake manifold
Governor lever
Fuel injection pump
Cooling fan
Crank shaft V-pulley

V-belt
Dipstick (engine oil) Filler port (engine oil)
Engine oil filter Drain plug (engine oil)
Engine oil cooler (4TNV98T, 4TNV106, 4TNV106T)
Engine name plate
Rocker arm cover
Flywheel
Alternator
Exhaust manifold
Starter motor
Note) ࡮This illustration shows the 4TNV98T engine (with turbocharger).

࡮The drain plug (engine oil) location depends on the engine installed
on the machine unit to be on the fuel injection pump side (above illustration)
or starter motor side.
16
1. General
1.5 Structural description
2-valve cylinder head

Noise Reduction Emission Reduction
New Lub. Oil Pump Injection Nozzle
࡮Change Rotor Shape for Low Pulsation ࡮Low Suck Volume
࡮Driven by Crankshaft Directly ࡮Multi Injection Holes
Emission Reduction
Emission Reduction
New fuel injection pump
Cylinder Head
࡮Mono Plunger
࡮Optimal Nozzle Angle
࡮Higher Injection Pressure
࡮Optimal Swirl Ratio
࡮Injection Timing Control
࡮Optimal Valve Timing
Speed Timer, _oad Timer,
Cold Start timer
Emission Reduction
Noise Reduction Piston
Higher Stiffness Cylinder Block ࡮New Combustion
Chamber
Noise Reduction
Higher Stiffness Gear-Case
4-valve cylinder head

Emission Reduction
Cylinder Head
Noise Reduction (only applied for 4TNV84T) ࡮4Valve / Cylinder
New Lub. Oil Pump (intake-2, exhaust-2)
࡮Change Rotor Shape for Low Pulsation ࡮Optimal Installation
࡮Driven by Crankshaft Directly of the Injection Nozzle
Vertical Installation and
Location of the Center
Emission Reduction of Cylinder
New Fuel Inj. Nozzle ࡮Optimal Valve Timing
࡮Low Suck Volume
࡮Multi Injection Holes Emission Reduction
Piston
࡮New Combustion Chamber
Emission Reduction
New Fuel Injection Pump
࡮Mono Plunger
࡮Higher Injection Pressure
࡮Mechanical Control of Injection 4TNV84T/4TNV94L/4TNV98(T)
Timing
Speed Timer, Load Timer,
Cold Start Timer
17
1. General
1.6 Exhaust gas emission regulation

The engines in this manual have been certified by the US EPA, California ARB and/or the 97/68/EC Directive.
California
Proposition 65 Warning
Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constitutions are known to the State of California to cause cancer,
birth defects, and other reproductive harm.
California
Proposition 65 Warning
Battery posts，terminals，and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds，chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm．
1.6.1 The emission standard in USA
(1) EPA Nonroad Diesel Engine Emission Standards

g/kW•hr (g/bhp•hr)
Engine Power Tier Model Year NOx HC NMHC + NOx CO PM
kW < 8 Tier 1 2000 - - 10.5 (7.8) 8.0 (6.0) 1.0 (0.75)
(hp < 11) Tier 2 2005 - - 7.5 (5.6) 8.0 (6.0) 0.80 (0.60)
8 <= kW < 19 Tier 1 2000 - - 9.5 (7.1) 6.6 (4.9) 0.80 (0.60)
(11 <= hp < 25) Tier 2 2005 - - 7.5 (5.6) 6.6 (4.9) 0.80 (0.60)
19<= kW < 37 Tier 1 1999 - - 9.5 (7.1) 5.5 (4.1) 0.80 (0.60)
(25 <= hp < 50) Tier 2 2004 - - 7.5 (5.6) 5.5 (4.1) 0.60 (0.45)
Tier 1 1998 9.2 (6.9) - - - -
37 <= kW < 75
Tier 2 2004 - - 7.5 (5.6) 5.0 (3.7) 0.40 (0.30)
(50 <= hp < 100)
Tier 3 2008 - - 4.7 (3.5) 5.0 (3.7)
Tier 1 1997 9.2 (6.9) - - - -
75 <= kW < 130
Tier 2 2003 - - 6.6 (4.9) 5.0 (3.7) 0.30 (0.22)
(100 <= hp < 175)
Tier 3 2007 - - 4.0 (3.0) 5.0 (3.7)
Note1) The EPA emission regulation under 130 kW is mentioned below.

Note2) As for Model year, the year which a regulation is applicable to is shown.
Transient smoke standards % opacity

Engine classification
(acceleration/lug/peak modes)
Constant speed engine Not regulated
Variable speed engine 20/15/50 or less
(2) California ARB Emission Regulation

The ARB emission standard is based on that of the EPA.
18
1. General
1.6.2 Engine identification
(1) Emission control labels of US EPA
# /1&'.;'#475'2#4')7.#6+105 # /1&'.;'#475'2#4')7.#6+105
01041#&%+'0)+0'5%1056#0652''&10.; 01041#&%1/24'55+10+)0+6+10'0)+0'5
"75&"(7'. "75&"(7'.
% & % &
' ( ' (
) * + ) * +
EPA label for constant speed engines EPA label for variable speed engines
(2) Emission control label for both EPA and ARB
$ %
&
' ( )
(3) 97/68EC Directive label
'%&+4'%6+8'
#
$
%
19
1. General
1.6.3 Guarantee conditions for the EPA emission standard

The following guarantee conditions are set down in the operation manual. In addition to making sure that
these conditions are met, check for any deterioration that may occur before the required periodic maintenance
times.
(1) Requirement on engine installation condition

(a)Intake air depression
kPa (mmAq)
Initial Permissible
<= 2.94 (300) <= 6.23 (635)
(b)Exhaust gas back pressure

kPa (mmAq)
Engine type Initial Permissible
Naturally aspirated engines <= 12.75 (1300) <= 15.30 (1560)
4TNV98T, 4TNV106T <= 9.81 (1000) <= 11.77 (1200)
3,4TNV84T <= 4.90 (500) <= 5.88 (600)
(2) Fuel oil and lubricating oil

(a)Fuel: The diesel fuel oil US No.2 diesel fuel oil.
(b)Lube oil: API grade, class CD or CF
(3) Do not remove the seals restricting injection

Sealing cap
quantity and engine speed. Gasket
Cap nut
Plate
Copper gasket
Nut Injection quant
limit bc
Tamper Seal washer

resistance Assy
Tamper resistance device
for engines certified by ARB/EPA
(R.1)
20
1. General
(4) Perform maintenance without fail.

Note: Inspections to be carried out by the user and by the maker are divided and set down in the "List of
Periodic Inspections" and should be checked carefully.
(5) Maintenance period and quality guarantee period for exhaust emission related parts
The maintenance of the parts related to the exhaust emission must be carried out in the maintenance period
as shown in the below table.
A guarantee period is that either the operation hours or years shown in the table come first in the condition
that the maintenance inspection was carried out based on the "List of Periodic Inspections".
Maintenance period Quality Guarantee Period

Parts •Fuel nozzle cleaning Adjustment, cleaning, For nozzle, fuel pump,
repairs for fuel nozzle, fuel turbocharger
pump, turbocharger,
Power Rating electronic control unit etc.
37 <= kW < 130 Every 1500 hours Every 3000 hours 3000 hours / 5 years
(applied from Tier 2) (applied from Tier 2)
19 <= kW < 37 Every 1500 hours Every 3000 hours 3000 hours / 5 years
except constant
speed engines >=
3000 min-1
KW < 19 Every 1500 hours Every 3000 hours 1500 hours / 2 years
And constant speed
engines beyond
3000 min-1 under
37 kW
21
2. Inspection and adjustment

2.1 Periodic maintenance schedule
The engine periodic inspection timing is hard to determine as it varies with the application, load status,
qualities of the fuel and lubricating oils used and handling status. General rules are described here.
c: User-maintenance : Parts replacement z: Shop-inspection

Maintenance period
Every Every Every Every
Every 250 500 1000 2000
Classification Item Daily
50 hours or hours hours hours
hours 3 or 6 or one or two
months months year years
Whole Visual check around engine c
Fuel tank level check and fuel supply c
Fuel tank draining c
Fuel oil Water separator (Option) draining c
system Bleeding the fuel system c
Water separator cleaning c
Fuel filter element replacement
Lube oil level check and replenishment c
Lubricating Lube oil replacement
oil system 2nd time
1st time and
Lube oil filter replacement thereafter
Coolant water level check and
c
replenishment
Radiator fin cleaning c
Cooling c
c
water V-belt tension check 2nd time
st and
1 time
system thereafter
Coolant water replacement

Coolant water path flushing and
maintenance
Rubber Fuel pipe and coolant water pipe
c z
house inspection and maintenance
Inspection and adjustment of governor
Governor c c z
lever and accelerator
Air cleaner cleaning and element
c
replacement
Air intake
system Diaphragm assy inspection z
(2 years)
Turbocharger blower cleaning* z*
Warning lamp & instruments function
c
Electrical check
system Battery electrolyte level check and battery
c
recharging
Intake/exhaust valve head clearance
Cylinder z
adjustment
head
Intake/exhaust valve seat lapping z
Fuel Fuel injection nozzle pressure inspection z*
injection pump Fuel injection timing adjustment
and Fuel injection pump inspection and z*
nozzle adjustment
*) EPA allows to maintain the emission related parts every 1,500 or 3,000 hours as shown in 1.6.3 of chapter1.
22
2.2 Periodic inspection and maintenance procedure

2.2.1 Check before daily operation
Be sure to check the following points before starting an engine every day.
No. Inspection Item

(1) Visual check around engine
(2) Fuel tank level check and fuel supply
(3) Lube oil level check and replenishment
(4) Coolant water level check and replenishment
(5) Fuel pipe and coolant water pipe inspection and maintenance
(6) Inspection and adjustment of governor lever and accelerator
(7) Warning lamp & instruments function check
(1) Visual check around engine

If any problem is found, do not use before the engine repairs have been completed.
• Oil leak from the lubrication system
• Fuel leak from the fuel system
• Coolant water leak from the cooling water system
• Damaged parts
• Loosened or lost bolts
• Fuel, radiator rubber hoses, V belt cracked, loosened clamp
(2) Fuel tank level check and fuel supply

Check the remaining fuel oil level in the fuel tank and refuel the recommended fuel if necessary. (Refer to
1.3.(1))
(3) Lube oil level check and replenishment

(a)Checking oil level Filler cap
Check the lube oil level with the dipstick, after
adjusting the posture of the machine unit so that an
engine may become a horizontality. Insert the dipstick Filler port
(engine oil)
fully and check the oil level. The oil shall not be
contaminated heavily and have appropriate viscosity.
No coolant water or diesel fuel shall be mixed.
When lube oil is supplied after the engine running,
check the lube oil level after about 10 minutes pass
after the engine shutdown so that the lube oil inside
may be retuned the oil pan.
Dipstick Dipstick
Standard
The level shall be between the upper and lower
limit lines on the dipstick. φ Upper limit
φ Lower limit
23
(Unit: liter)
Model Total volume (L) Effective volume (L)
3TNV82A 5.5 1.9
3TNV84 (T)•88 6.7 2.8
4TNV84 (T)•88 7.4 3.4
4TNV94L98•(T) 10.5 4.5
4TNV106 (T) (CL class) 14.0 9.0
4TNV106 (T) (VM class) 14.0 7.5
Lube oil capacity may differ from the above volume depending on an engine installed on a machine unit.
(b)Replenishing oil pan with lube oil

If the remaining engine oil level is low, fill the oil pan with the specified engine oil to the specified level through
the filler port.
[NOTICE]
The oil should not be overfilled to exceed the upper limit line. Otherwise a naturally-aspirated engine may
intake lube oil in the combustion chamber during the operation, then white smoke, oil hummer or urgent
rotation may occur, because the blowby gas is reduced in the suction air flow.
In case of turbo-charged engine oil may jet out from the breather or the engine may become faulty.
(4) Coolant water inspection

Daily inspection of coolant water should be done only by Coolant recovery tank.
•Never open the radiator filler cap while the engine and radiator are still hot.
Steam and hot water will spurt out and seriously burn you. Wait until the
radiator is cooled down after the engine has stopped, wrap the filler cap with
a rag piece and turn the cap slowly to gently release the pressure inside the
radiator.
•Securely tighten the filler cap after checking the radiator. Steam can spurt
out during operation, if the cap is tightened loosely.
(a)Checking coolant water volume
Check the coolant water level in the Coolant recovery tank. If the water level is close to the LOW mark, open
the Coolant recovery tank cap and replenish the Coolant recovery tank with clean soft water to the FULL
mark.
Standard
The water level of the Coolant recovery tank shall be between the upper and lower limit lines.
(b)Replenishing engine with water

If the Coolant recovery tank water level is lower than the LOW mark, open the radiator cap and check the
coolant water level in the radiator. Replenish the radiator with the coolant water, if the level is low.
• Check the coolant water level while the engine is
cool.
Checking when the engine is hot is dangerous.
And the water volume is expanded due to the Loosen
Tighten
heat.
• Daily coolant water level check and replenishing
shall be done only at the Coolant recovery tank.
Radiator cap
Usually do not open the radiator cap to check or
replenish.
24
IMPORTANT:
If the coolant water runs short quickly or when the radiator runs short of water with the Coolant recovery
tank level unchanged, water may be leaking or the air tightness may be lost. Increase in the Coolant
recovery tank water level during operation is not abnormal.
The increased water in the Coolant recovery tank returns to the radiator when the engine is cooled down.
If the water level is normal in the Coolant recovery tank but low in the radiator, check loosened clamping of
the rubber hose between the radiator and Coolant recovery tank or tear in the hose.
Standard
Engine: The radiator shall be filled up.
(Unit: liter)
Model Coolant water volume In an engine
3TNV82A 1.8
3TNV84 (T)
2.0
3TNV88
4TNV84 (T)
2.7
4TNV88
4TNV94L
4.2
4TNV98 (T)
4TNV106 (T) 6.0
Engine coolant water capacity may differ from the above
volume depending on an engine installed on a machine unit.
Check the rubber hoses for fuel and coolant water pipes cracked. If the cracked hose is found, replace it with
new one. Check the loosened clamp. If found, tighten it.

Make sure the accelerator of the machine unit can be operated smoothly before starting the engine. If it feels
heavy to manipulate, lubricate the accelerator cable joints and pivots. Adjust the accelerator cable if there is a
dislocation or excessive play between the accelerator and the governor lever. Refer to 3.2.3.
(7) Warning lamp & instruments function check

Before and after starting the engine, check to see that the alarm function normally. Failure of alarm cannot
warn the lack of the engine oil or the coolant water. Make it a rule to check the alarm operation before and
after starting engine every day. Refer to each manual for machine units in details.
2.2.2 inspection after initial 50 hours operation

Be sure to check the following points after initial 50 hours operation, thereafter every 250 hours or 3 months
operation.
No. Inspection Item

(1) Lube oil and filter replacement
(2) V-belt tension check
(1) Lube oil and filter replacement (1st time)
When an engine is still hot, be careful with a splash of engine oil which may
cause burns. Replace engine oil after the engine oil becomes warm. It is
most effective to drain the engine oil while the engine is still warm.
25
In early period of use, the engine oil gets dirty rapidly

because of the initial wear of internal parts. Replace the
engine oil earlier.
Lube oil filter should also be replaced when the engine
oil is replaced.
The procedure of lube oil and lube oil filter replacement
is as follows.
(a)Drain engine oil

• Prepare a waste oil container collecting waste oil. Dipstick
• Remove the oil filler cap to drain easily while draining
the lube oil.
• Loosen the drain plug using a wrench (customer pro- Oil pan
cured) to drain the lube oil.

• Securely tighten the drain plug after draining the lube Drain plug
oil.
The location depends on the engine
installed on the machine unit
[NOTICE]
Use a socket wrench or a closed wrench when
removing or tightening a drain plug.
Don’t use a spanner because it has the possibility
that the spanner will slip and it will get hurt.
(b)Replacing oil filter

• Turn the lube oil filter counter-clockwise using a filter
wrench (customer procured) to remove it.
• Clean the mounting face of the oil filter.
• Moisten the new oil filter gasket with the engine oil
n
and install the new engine oil filter manually turning it gh
te
Ti
clockwise until it comes into contact with the mount-
Loosen
Engine oil filter

ing surface, and tighten it further to 3/4 of a turn with
the filter wrench.
Tightening torque: 20 to 24 N•m (2.0 to 2.4 kgf•m)
Model Applicable oil filter Part No.

3TNV82A to 4TNV98 (T) 129150-35151
4TNV106 (T) 119005-35100
(c)Filling oil and inspection

• Fill with new engine oil until it reaches the specified
level.
IMPORTANT:
Do not overfill the oil pan with engine oil.
Be sure to keep the specified level between upper
and lower limit on the dipstick.
• Warm up the engine by running for 5 minutes while

checking any oil leakage
• Stop the engine after warming up and leave it stop-
ping for about 10 minute to recheck the engine oil
level with dipstick and replenish the engine oil. If any
oil is spilled, wipe it away with a clean cloth.
26

When there is not enough tension in the V-belt, the V-
Radiator fan Set bolt
belt will slip making it impossible for the alternator to $
generate power and cooling water pump and cooling
fan will not work causing the engine to overheat. Alternator
Check and adjust the V-belt tension (deflection) in

Deflection
the following manner.
% #
[NOTICE] V-belt
Be especially careful not to splash engine oil on
Crankshaft
the V-belt, because it will cause slipping, V-pulley Press with thumb
stretching and aging of the belt.
1)Press the V-belt with your thumb [approx.

98N (10 kgf)] at the middle of the V-belt span to
check the tension (deflection).
Available positions to check and adjust the V-belt
tension (deflection) are at the A, B or C direction
as shown in the illustration right.
You may choose a position whichever you can
easily carry out the check and adjustment on the
machine unit.
• "New V-belt" refers to a V-belt which has been
used less than 5 minutes on a running engine.
• "Used V-belt" refers to a V-belt, which has been
used on a running engine for 5 minutes or more.
The specified deflection to be measured at each
position should be as follows.
(Unit: mm)
Direction A B C
For used V-belt 10 to 14 7 to 10 9 to 13
For new V-belt 8 to 12 5 to 8 7 to 11
2)If necessary, adjust the V-belt tension (deflection).

Adjust the V-belt tension
To adjust the V-belt tension, loosen the set bolt and inserting a bar
move the alternator to tighten the V-belt.
After replacing with a new V-belt and adjusting it,
Adjuster
run the engine for 5 minutes and readjust the deflec-
tion to the value in the table above.
3)After replacing with a new V-belt and adjusting it,

run the engine for 5 minutes and readjust the deflec-
tion to the value in the table above. Alternator
Tension adjustment
4)Visually check the V-belt for cracks, oiliness or wear.
If any, replace the V-belt with new one.
27
2.2.3 Inspection every 50 hours

Be sure to check the following points every 50 hours operation.
No. Inspection Item
(1) Fuel tank draining
(2) Water separator draining
(3) Bleeding the fuel system
(4) Battery electrolyte level check and battery recharging
(1) Fuel tank draining

1)Prepare a waste oil container.
2)Remove the drain plug of the fuel tank to drain
Fuel tank
(water, dust, etc.) from the fuel tank bottom.
3)Drain until fuel with no water and dust flow out.
Then tighten the drain plug firmly.
Drain plug
OPTION
(2) Water separator draining

Drain off the water separator whenever there is a lot of Air bleeding bolt
Outlet
Inlet
drain collected in the water separator at the bottom of
the cup even if not the time for periodic inspection hour. Close
The cup of the water separator is made from semi- Fuel cock
transparency material and in the cup, the red colored
float ring which rises on the surface of the drain is Open
installed to visualize the amount of drain. Also, the Cup

water separator with sensor to detect the drain for Float ring
warning device on a control panel is provided as the
Drain cock
optional.
Water separator
Drain off the water separator in the following manner.
2)Close the fuel cock.
3)Loosen the drain cock at the bottom of the water
separator, and drain off any water collected inside.
4)Tighten the drain cock with hand.
5)Be sure to bleed air in the fuel system.
NOTE:
If no drain drips when the drain cock is opened, loosen the air bleeding bolt on the top of the water separator
by turning counter-clockwise 2 to 3 times using screw driver.
(This may occur in case of the water separator position is higher than the fuel oil level in the fuel tank). After
draining, be sure to tighten the air bleeding bolt.
28
(3) Bleeding the fuel system

Bleed the fuel system according to the following Fuel filter Fuel return hose
procedures. When there is air in the fuel system, the
fuel injection pump will not be able to function.
1)Check the fuel oil level in the fuel tank. Refuel if
insufficient.
2)Open the cock of the water separator.
3)Loosen the air bleeding bolt on the water separator
by turning 2 to 3 times to the counter-clockwise Fuel injection
pump
using screw driver or spanner.
4)When the fuel coming out is clear and not mixed
with any bubble, tighten the air bleeding bolt. Air bleeding bolt
Outlet
5)Feed the fuel with the fuel priming pump or electro- Inlet
magnetic fuel feed pump. Close
• In case of the engine using the electro-magnetic fuel

feed pump. Fuel cock
Fuel priming
Turn the starter switch to the ON position and hold it pump Open
in the position for 10 to 5 seconds to operate the fuel Air bleeding
bolt
feed pump.
• In case of the engine installed the fuel filter mounting
Drain cock
with the fuel priming pump.
Water separator
The priming pump is on the top of the fuel filter (installed on the pipe line)
mounting. Move the priming pump up and down to Fuel filter
Fuel filter mounting with
feed fuel until feel your hand slightly heavy. fuel priming pump (option)
(4) Battery electrolyte level check and battery recharging
Fire due to electric short-circuit

•Make sure to turn off the battery switch or disconnect the negative cable (-)
before inspecting the electrical system. Failure to do so could cause short-
circuiting and fires.
•Always disconnect the (-) Negative battery cable first before disconnecting
the battery cables from battery. An accidental "Short circuit" may cause
damage, fire and or personal injury.
And remember to connect the (-) Negative battery cable (back onto the bat-
tery) LAST.
Proper ventilation of the battery area

Keep the area around the battery well ventilated, paying attention to keep
away any fire source. During operation or charging, hydrogen gas is
generated from the battery and can be easily ignited.
Do not come in contact with battery electrolyte

Pay sufficient attention to avoid your eyes or skin from being in contact with
the fluid. The battery electrolyte is dilute sulfuric acid and causes burns.
Wash it off immediately with a large amount of fresh water if you get any on
you.
29
Battery structure
Terminal Cap
Cover
Cathode
plate
Separator
Glass mat
Battery
case
Anode plate
(1) Electrolyte level

• Check the level of fluid in the battery.
When the amount of fluid nears the lower limit, fill GREASE
with battery fluid (available in the market) to the

upper limit. If operation continues with insufficient
battery fluid, the battery life is shortened, and the
battery may overheat and explode. Upper limit UPPER LEVEL
• Battery fluid tends to evaporate more quickly in the LOWER LEVEL Lower limit
summer, and the fluid level should be checked ear-

lier than the specified times. OK Too low Excessive
• If the engine cranking speed is so slow that the
engine does not start up, recharge the battery.
• If the engine still will not start after charging, replace
the battery. Electrolyte level
• Remove the battery from the battery mounting of the
machine unit after daily use if letting the machine unit
leave in the place that the ambient temperature
could drop at -15 °C or less. And store the battery in
a warm place until the next use the unit to start the
engine easily at low ambient temperature.
(2) Battery charge

Use a battery tester or hydrometer and check the
battery condition. If the battery is discharged, recharge
it.
(a)Measurement with a battery tester
When checking the battery with the batter tester,
connect the red clip of the tester to the battery positive
(+) terminal and black clip to the battery negative (-)
terminal by pinching them securely, and judge the
battery charge level from the indicator position.
Green zone: Normal

Yellow zone: Slightly discharged Battery tester
Red zone: Defective or much discharged
Battery charge measurement
with battery tester
30
(b)Measurement with hydrometer

When using a hydrometer, the measured specific gravity
must be corrected according to the temperature at the
time of measurement. The specific gravity of battery
electrolyte is defined with 20 °C as the standard. Since
Float
the specific gravity increases or decreases by 0.0007
when the temperature varies by 1 °C, correct the value
according to the equation below.
S20 = St + 0.007(t-20)
Electrolyte temperature
at measurement
Specific gravity at measurement
Converted specific gravity at 20͠
Battery charge measurement
with a hydrometer
(c)Specific gravity and remaining battery charge

Rubber bulb
Specific Discharged Remaining
gravity quantity charge
of electricity Glass tube
(20 °C) (%) (%)
1.28 0 100
1.26 10 90 Float
1.24 20 80
1.23 25 75
Hydrometer structure
(3) Terminals
Clean if corroded or soiled.
(4) Mounting bracket

Repair or replace it if corroded.
Retighten if loosened.
(5) Battery appearance

Replace the battery if cracked or deformed. How to read hydrometer
Clean with fresh water if contaminated.
31
2.2.4 Inspection every 250 hours or 3 months

Be sure to check the following points every 250 hours or 3 months operation, whichever comes first.
No. Inspection Item
(1) Lube oil and filter replacement
(2) Radiator fin cleaning
(5) Air cleaner cleaning and element replacement
(1) Lube oil and filter replacement (The second replacement and after)
Replace the engine oil every 250 hours operation from 2nd time and on. Replace the engine oil filter at the
same time. Refer to 2.2.1.(1).
(2) Radiator fin cleaning
Beware of dirt from air blowing

Wear protective equipment such as goggles to protect your eyes when
blowing compressed air. Dust or flying debris can hurt eyes.
Dirt and dust adhering on the radiator fins reduce the

cooling performance, causing overheating. Make it a
Dust, dirt
rule to check the radiator fins daily and clean as Radiator fins
needed.
• Blow off dirt and dust from fins and periphery with
Air blow
compressed air [0.19MPa (2 kgf/cm2) or less] not to
damage the fins with compressed air.
• If contaminated heavily, apply detergent, thoroughly
clean and rinse with tap water shower.
IMPORTANT:
Never use high pressure water or air from close by
fins or never attempt to clean using a wire brush.
Radiator fins can be damaged.
(3) V-belt tension check (The second time and after)

Check and adjust the V-belt tension. Refer to 2.2.2(2)
32

The governor lever and accelerating devices
(accelerating lever, pedal, etc.) of the machine unit are
connected by an accelerating wire or rod. If the wire
becomes stretched or the connections loose, the
deviation in the position may result and make operation
unsafe. Check the wire periodically and adjust if
Low idle
necessary. limiting bolt
High Low Govenor lever
Do not strongly move the accelerating wire or
accelerating pedal. It may deform the governor lever or Accelerating
stretch the wire to cause irregular engine speed control. wire bracket
Checking and adjusting procedure are as follows.

1)Check that the governor lever of the engine makes
uniform contact with the high idling and low idling High idle
limiting bolt Accelerating wire fixing nut
limiting bolt when the accelerating devices is in the
high idling speed or low idling speed position. Accelerating wire bracket
2)If either the high or the low idling speed side does MP2 Fuel Injection pump
not make contact with the limiting bolt, adjust the
accelerating wire.
Loosen the accelerating wire fixing nut and adjust
the wire to contact with the limiting bolt.
Never release the limiting bolts. It will impair the safety and performance of the product and functions and
result in shorter engine life.
Beware of dirt from air blowing

Wear protective equipment such as goggles to protect your eyes when
blowing compressed air. Dust or flying debris can hurt eyes.
The engine performance is adversely affected when the

air cleaner element is clogged by dust. So periodical Air cleaner case
Arrow mark
cleaning after disassembly is needed. Arrow
Element mark
1)Undo the clamps on the dust pan and remove the
dust pan.
2)Loosen the wing bolt on the element and pull out the
element.
Air blow
Dust pan
latch
OPTION
33
3)Blow air [0.29 to 0.49 MPa (3.0 to 5.0 kgf/cm2)] from

Dust indicator (optional)
inside the element to blow dust off as shown in the Air cleaner case
illustration right. Arrow mark
Inner element
Apply the air blowing pressure as low as possible so Outer element
as not to damage the element. Arrow
mark
If having the air cleaner with double elements, never
Dust pan
remove and clean the inner element.
The aim of installing the inner element is for back up
protecting from intaking dust during engine running
when leaving the outer element to reinstall after latch
Double elements type air cleaner
removing it or when damaging the outer element OPTION with inner and outer element
unexpectedly during engine running.
4)Replace the element with new one, If the element is
damaged, excessively dirty or oily.
5)Remove the inside dust cover of the dust pan, and
clean inside of the dust pan.
6)Reinstall the element with the wing bolt. (do not
leave the gasket.) Reattach the inside dust cover to
the dust pan and install the dust pan to the air
cleaner case placing the TOP mark upward.
IMPORTANT:
• When the engine is operated in dusty conditions,
clean the element more frequently.
• Do not run the engine with removed air cleaner or
element, as this may cause foreign material to enter
and damage the engine.
34
2.2.5 Inspection every 500 hours or 6 months

Be sure to check the following points every 500 hours or 6 months operation, whichever comes first.
No. Inspection Item

(1) Water separator cleaning
(2) Fuel filter element replacement
(1) Water separator cleaning

Periodically wash the water separator element and
Air bleeding bolt
inside cup with clean fuel oil. Outlet
Inlet
2)Close the fuel cock. Close
3)Loosen the drain cock and drain. Fuel cock

Refer to 2.2.3.(2)
Open
4)Turn the retaining ring counter-clockwise and
remove the cup. Cup
(Disconnect the coupler of the lead wire for drain Float ring
sensor before removing the cup if it is with drain
Drain cock
sensor). Water separator
5)Wash the element and inside cup with clean fuel oil.
Replace the element with new one if any damaged.
Model Applicable element Part No.

3TNV82A to
119802-55710
4TNV106 (T)
6)Insert the element to the bracket (O-ring) and after

putting the float ring in the cup, install it to the
bracket by tightening the retaining ring clockwise.
Tightening torque: 15 to 20 N•m (1.5 to 2.0 kgf•m)
7)Close the drain cock (connect the coupler if with
drain sensor).
8)Bleed the fuel system. Refer to 2.2.3.(3)
35
(2) Fuel filter element replacement

Replace the fuel filter at specified intervals, before it is
clogged with dust to adversely affect the fuel flow. Also,
replace the fuel filter after the engine has fully been
cooled.
1)Close the fuel cock of the water separator.
ߪࠆ
Tighten
2)Remove the fuel filter using a filter wrench (customer Loosen ψ
ψ
procured). When removing the fuel filter, hold the φ
bottom of the fuel filter with a piece of rag to prevent
the fuel oil from dropping. If you spill fuel, wipe such
spillage carefully.
3)Clean the filter mounting surface and slightly apply
fuel oil to the gasket of the new fuel filter.
4)Install the new fuel filter manually turning until it
comes into contact with the mounting surface, and
tighten it further to 1/2 of a turn using a filter wrench.
Tightening torque for 3TNV82A to 4TNV106 (T):
20 to 24 N•m (2.0 to 2.4 kgf•m)
Model Applicable fuel filter Part No.

3TNV82A to
119802-55800
4TNV88
4TNV98 (T) to
123907-55800
4TNV106 (T)
5)Bleed the fuel system. Refer to 2.2.3.(3)
IMPORTANT:
Be sure to use genuine Yanmar part (super fine mesh
filter). Otherwise, it results in engine damage, uneven
engine performance and shorten engine life.

Replace the air cleaner element periodically even if it is not damaged or dirty.
When replacing the element, clean inside of the dust pan at the time.
If having the air cleaner with double elements, do not remove the inner element. If the engine output is still not
recover (or the dust indicator still actuates if having the air cleaner with a dust indicator) even though the outer
element has replaced with new one, replace the inner element with new one.
36
2.2.6 Inspection every 1,000 hours or one year

Be sure to check the following points every 1,000 hours or one year operation, whichever comes first.
No. Inspection Item

(1) Cooling water replacement
(2) Diaphragm assy inspection
(3) Turbocharger blower cleaning*
(4) Intake/exhaust valve clearance adjustment
(5) Fuel injection nozzle pressure inspection
(1) Cooling water replacement

Cooling water contaminated with rust or water scale OPTION
reduces the cooling effect. Even when antifreeze agent Radiator cap
(LLC) is mixed, the cooling water gets contaminated due
to deteriorated ingredients. Replace the cooling water at
least once a year.
Rubber hose
Beware of scalding
by hot water FULL
Coolant (Max.limit)
Wait until the temperature recovery tank
goes down before draining
the coolant water. Otherwise,
hot water may splash to
cause scalding. LOW
(Min.limit)
Drain plug
(Drain plug location depends on the machine unit)
1)Remove the radiator cap.
2)Loosen the drain plug at the lower portion of the radi-
ator and drain the cooling water.
3)After draining the cooling water, tighten the drain
plug.
4)Fill radiator and engine with cooling water.
a)Before filling, check to be sure the drain plug is closed.
b)Remove the radiator cap of the radiator by turning the radiator cap counter-clockwise about 1/3 of a
turn.
c)Pour the cooling water slowly into the radiator up to the lip of the filler port so that air bubbles do not
develop.
d)After supplying the cooling water, surely tighten the radiator cap. To fasten the radiator cap, align the
detents on the back face of the radiator cap with the slot of the filler port and turn clockwise pushing it
downward approx. 1/3 of a turn until contact with each other.
e)Remove the cap of the coolant recovery tank, supply the cooling water to the FULL mark and fasten the
cap.
f)Check the rubber hose connecting the coolant recovery tank to the radiator. Be sure the rubber is
securely connected and there is no looseness or damage. When the rubber hose is not water tight, an
excessive amount of cooling water will be consumed.
37
g)When filling with the cooling water for the first time or replacing, the air contains in the cooling water
system. So, as the air in the cooling water system is self-bleeded during engine operation, the cooling
water level in the radiator and coolant recovery tank will be lowered. Replenish the cooling water into the
radiator and coolant recovery tank until it reaches the FULL mark of the coolant recovery tank.
Daily check of the cooling water level and refilling can be done by observing the coolant recovery
tank.
The cooling water capacity of the radiator depends on the machine unit. Refer to the operation
manual provided by the equipment manufacturer.
Check the cooling water level when the engine is cold. Cooling water flows to the coolant
recovery tank when the radiator is still hot and makes accurate checks impossible.
Check the radiator and hoses for leakage.
(2) Diaphragm assy inspection

Inspect the diaphragm assy on the rocker arm cover
every 1000 hours or 2 years. Refer to 4.2.4 point 6 for
Spring Diaphragm
the function of the diaphragm. Center plate cover
Diaphragm
1)Loosen screws, and remove a diaphragm assy, and Rocker arm
cover
check whether oil and so on doesn’t enter between
the diaphragm and the cover. If oil and so on enters
into the diaphragm assy, the diaphragm doesn’t work
well. Breather pipe
2)Check the damages of the diaphragm rubber and

Breather
the spring. If necessary, replace with new ones. baffle
Intake
[NOTICE] maniforld Baffle plate
• When a diaphragm is damaged, pressure control
inside the crankcase becomes insufficient, and trou-
Breather system componert
bles such as combustion defect and so on occur.
• At lubricating oil replacement or lubricating oil supply,
the amount of lubricating oil isn’t to be beyond the
standard upper limit. If the lubricating oil quantity is
beyond the upper limit or an engine is operated
beyond the allowable maximum angle of an engine,
the amount of oil mist may be inducted in the com-
bustion chamber and the oil hammer sometimes may
occur.
38
(3) Turbocharger blower cleaning*

When engine speed seems sluggish or the exhaust color looks poor, the blades of the turbocharger-blower
may be dirty.
Wash the turbine blower in such a case.
(a)General items
1)As for washing, use washing liquid and clear water.
2)Washing time is the time when about 10% of the boost pressure decreases more than that of usual oper-
ation state as a standard.
3)Disassemble and clean a turbocharger periodically because the whole of the turbocharger can’t be
cleaned in this method.
(b)Washing point
1)A specified quantity of washing liquid/water is poured with a filler (ex. Oil sprayer) from the air inlet of the
blower gradually (about ten seconds) at the normal load (3/4-4/4) of an engine.
And, perform this work at no-load after load running of the engine, if it is difficult to pour the liquid into the
blower at load running.
Specified quantity of washing liquid/water

Turbocharger model RHB31, RHB51
Injection amount, one time 20 cc
It causes an accident when large quantity of washing liquid is poured rapidly into a turbocharger.
2)Pour the same amount of clear water as washing liquid/water into the blower about 3-5 minutes later after
the washing liquid/water injection and wash it.
It causes an accident when large quantity of water is poured rapidly into a turbocharger.
3)Repeat the washing after then minutes when there is no change with the boost pressure or the exhaust
gas temperature after washing.
When there is no change at all even if it repeats 3-4 times, disassemble and maintain the turbocharger
because of the cruel dirt of the blower or other causes.
4)Operate the engine at load for at least 15 minutes after washing, and dry.
39
(4) Intake/exhaust valve clearance adjustment

Make measurement and adjustment while the engine is
No.1 cylinder
cold.
(a)Valve clearance measurement
1)Remove the rocker arm cover above cylinder head.
2)Set the No.1 cylinder in the compression TDC
Turn the crankshaft to bring the piston of the No.1 cyl-
Crankshaft
inder to its compression top dead center while watch- 4TNV94L pulley
ing the rocker arm motion, timing scale and the top
mark position of the crankshaft pulley.
Top mark
(Position where both the intake and exhaust valves
Rotational direction
are closed.)
Top mark
Notes:
• The crankshaft shall be turned clockwise as seen from
the radiator side.
• The No.1 cylinder position is on the opposite side of
the radiator and the ignition order shall be 1-3-4-2-1 at
180° intervals. Rocker arm Adjusting screw
• Since the intake and exhaust valve rocker arms are Valve
clearance Lock nut
operated the same and there is a clearance between
the arm and valve generally at the top dead center, the
position can be checked by means of the play when
the arm head is held with a hand. Also see that the
crankshaft pulley top mark is positioned at zero on the
Valve clearance (2-valve head)
timing scale. If there is no valve clearance, inspection
in the disassembled state is necessary since the valve
seat may be worn abnormally.
3)Valve clearance measurement
In case of 2-valve cylinder head insert a thickness
Valve clearance Rocker arm
gage between the rocker arm and valve cap, and
record the measured valve clearance. Valve bridge
In case of 4-valve head insert a thickness gage

between the rocker arm and the valve bridge, and
record the measured valve clearance.
(Use it as the data for estimating the wear state.)
4)Adjusting other cylinders
In case of 4-cylinder engines, turn the crankshaft
180° and make adjustment for the No.3 cylinder. Valve clearance (4-valve head)
Then adjust the No.4 and No.2 cylinders in this order.
The cylinder to be adjusted first does not have to be
the No.1 cylinder. Select and adjust the cylinder
where the piston is the nearest to the top dead center
after turning, and make adjustment for other cylinders
in the order of ignition by turning the crankshaft 180°
each time.
In case of 3-cylinder engines, turn the crankshaft
240° and make adjustment for the No.3 cylinder.
Then adjust the No.2 cylinder in this order.
40
The cylinder to be adjusted first does not have to be the No.1 cylinder. Select and adjust the cylinder
where the piston is the nearest to the top dead center after turning, and make adjustment for other cylin-
ders in the order of ignition by turning the crankshaft 240° each time.
The adjustment method of reducing the flywheel turning numbers (for reference):
For 3 cylinder engines
Set No.1 cylinder to the compression T.D.C.and adjust the clearance of the z mark of the below table.
Next, turn the flywheel once (the suction / exhaust valve of No.1 cylinder is in the position of the overlap
T.D.C. at this time), and adjust the clearance of the c mark.
Ignition order of 3 cylinder engines: 1J3J2
Cylinder No. 1 2 3
Valve Suction Exhaust Suction Exhaust Suction Exhaust
No.1
compression z z z z The first time
T.D.C
No.1
overlap c c The second time
T.D.C
For 4 cylinder engines

Set No.1 cylinder to the compression T.D.C. and adjust the clearance of the z mark of the bottom table.
Next, turn the flywheel once, and adjust the clearance of the c mark.
Ignition order of 4 cylinder engines: 1J3J4J2

Cylinder No. 1 2 3 4
Valve Suction Exhaust Suction Exhaust Suction Exhaust Suction Exhaust
No.1
The first
compression z z z z
time
T.D.C
No.4 The
compression c c c c second
T.D.C time
(b)Valve clearance inspection and adjustment

1) Loosen adjusting bolts
In case of 2-valve cylinder head loosen the lock
nut and adjusting screw, and check the valve for
any inclination of valve cap, entrance of dirt or Valve cap
wear.
Normal Abnormal
In case of 4-valve cylinder head loosen the lock

nut and adjusting screw of rocker arm. Be careful Loosen
Adjusting
that excessive tension isn't applied to the valve bolt
bridge, and loosen a locknut of valve bridge. Loosen
[NOTICE]
Valve
When loosening a locknut of a valve bridge, loosen bridge
the locknut while fixing the valve bridge with a Wrench
wrench so that the valve may not lean. 4 Valve cylinder head
(R.1)
41
Push the bridge head so that a valve bridge and two

valve stem heads may contact each other uniformly, Hold
Adjusting bolt
and adjust an adjusting bolt so that a gap of the valve
stem head may become 0. Tighten a locknut after a Rock nut Valve bridge
valve bridge is fixed with a wrench. Clearance 0
Adjust
clearance
to 0
4-Valve cylinder head
2)Measuring valve clearance

Insert a 0.2 or 0.3 mm thickness gage between the
rocker arm and valve cap / valve bridge, and adjust
the valve clearance. Tighten the adjusting screw.
mm
Model Standard valve clearance
3TNV82A to 98 0.15 to 0.25
4TNV106 (T) 0.25 to 0.35
[NOTICE] Valve clearance adjustment

When tightening a valve bridge locknut of 4-valve head,
tighten a locknut after fixing a valve bridge with a wrench
so that a bridge may not rotate and a valve may not lean.
3)Apply oil to the contact surface between adjusting
Tighten
screw and push rod. Adjusting
bolt
4)Adjusting other cylinders Tighten
In case of 4-cylinder engines turn the crankshaft 180°
then and make adjustment for the No.3 cylinder. Valve
Then adjust the No.4 and No.2 cylinders in this order. bridge
Wrench
4 Valve cylinder head
each time.
In case of 3-cylinder engines turn the crankshaft 240°
then and make adjustment for the No.3 cylinder.
Then adjust the No.2 cylinder in this order.
each time.
42
(5) Fuel injection nozzle pressure inspection
Wear protective glasses when testing injection from the fuel injection valve. Never approach the injection
nozzle portion with a hand. The oil jetting out from the nozzle is at a high pressure to cause loss of sight or
injury if coming into careless contact with it.
(a)Injection pressure measurement
Standard
Model
MPa (kgf/cm2)
19.6-20.6
3TNV82A to TNV88 (CL)
(200-210)
Nozzle tester
3TNV82A to TNV88 (VM) 21.6-22.6
4TNV94L4 to TNV106(T) (220-230)
[NOTICE]
As for the opening pressure of the brand-new fuel Injection nozzle
nozzle, about 0.5 Mpa (5 kgf/cm) declines by the

engine operation for about 5 hours because of the
Injection pressure measurement
initial wear-out of a spring etc. Therefore, adjust with nozzle tester
0.5 MPa (5 kgf/cm) higher than the standard value of
the above table when adjusting a new fuel nozzle of a
spare part.
Remove carbon deposit at the nozzle hole thoroughly
before measurement.
1)Connect the fuel injection valve to the high pressure

pipe of the nozzle tester.
2)Operate the nozzle tester lever slowly and read the
pressure at the moment when the fuel injection from
the nozzle starts.
3)If the measured injection pressure is lower than the
standard level, replace the pressure adjusting shim
with a thicker one.
Thickness of pressure adjusting shims

Injection pressure adjustment
mm
0.13, 0.15, 0.18, 0.4, 0.5, 0.8 The injection pressure is increased by approx. l.9 MPa (l9 kgf/cm2),
when the adjusting shim thickness is increased by 0.l mm.
43
[Informative: Fuel injection valve structure]
F.O. return pipe joint
Nozzle holder Nozzle holder
Pressure adjusting shim Pressure adjusting shim
Nozzle spring Nozzle spring
Nozzle spring seat Nozzle spring seat

Valve stop spacer Valve stop spacer
Nozzle valve Nozzle valve

Nozzle Nozzle
Nozzle body Nozzle body
Nozzle case nut Nozzle case nut

Tightening torque: Tightening torque:
39.2 to 44.1 Nm (4 to 4.5 kgf࡮m) 39.2 to 44.1 Nm (4 to 4.5 kgf࡮m)
2-valve head 4-valve head
(b)Spray pattern inspection

After adjustment to the specified valve opening
pressure, use a nozzle tester and check the spray Normal
pattern and seat oil-tightness.
Seat oil tightness check
• After injecting a few times, increase the pressure
ǰ ǰ
gradually. Hold the pressure for about 5 seconds at a
little before the valve opening pressure of
1.96 MPa (20 kgf/cm2), and check to see that oil
does not drip from the tip end of the nozzle.
• If extreme oil leak from the overflow joint exists dur- Uniform spray pattern from each nozzle
ing injection by the nozzle tester, check after retight-
ening. If much oil is leaking, replace the nozzle
assembly.
44
Spray and injection states

• Operate the nozzle tester lever at a rate of once or
twice a second and check no abnormal injection.
• If normal injection as shown below cannot be
obtained, replace the fuel injection valve.
• No extreme difference in angle (θ)
• No extreme injection angle difference (α)
• Finely atomized spray
• Excellent spray departure
(c)Nozzle valve sliding test

Wash the nozzle valve in clean fuel oil. Place the nozzle
body vertically and insert the nozzle into the body to
about 1/3 of its length. The valve is normal if it smoothly
falls by its own weight into the body. In case of a new
nozzle, remove the seal peel, and immerse it in clean
diesel oil or the like to clean the inner and outer surfaces
and to thoroughly remove rust-preventive oil before
using the nozzle. Note that a new nozzle is coated with
rust-preventive oil and is pasted with the seal peel to Nozzle valve sliding check by gravity
shut off outer air.
(d)Nozzle punch mark

A ࡯ 150 P 24 4 JO
Design code
Number of hole
(4 holes)
Diameter of hole
(Ǟ0.24)
Size: sizeP
Injection angle sizeS
Nozzle insertion angle
CodeA: angled
No code: no angle
YANMAR
Punch mark
45
2.2.7 Inspection every 2000 hours or 2 years

Be sure to check the following points every 2,000 hours or two years operation, whichever comes first.
No. Inspection Item
(1) Coolant water path flushing and maintenance
(3) Intake/exhaust valve seat lapping
Fuel injection timing adjustment
(4)
Fuel injection pump inspection and adjustment
(1) Coolant water path flushing and maintenance

Rust and water scale will accumulate in the cooling system through many hours of operation. This lowers the
engine cooling effect. Oil coolers (attached to turbocharged engines and some of naturally aspirated engines)
quickly deteriorate the lube oil. The cleaning and maintenance of the following parts are necessary in
accordance with the coolant water replacement.
Cooling system parts: radiator, cooling water pump, thermostat, cylinder block, cylinder head, oil cooler.
Regularly check the rubber hoses of the fuel system and cooling water system. If cracked or degraded,
replace them with new one. Replace the rubber hoses at least every 2 years even if 2,000 hours doesn’t
come.
(3) Intake/exhaust valve seat lapping
The adjustment is necessary to maintain proper contact of the valves and seats. Refer to 4.2.6 in Chapter 4.
(4) Fuel injection timing adjustment / Fuel injection pump inspection and adjustment
The fuel injection timing and the fuel injection pump are adjusted so that engine performance may become the
best condition. As for the inspection and adjustment of the fuel pump, it is based on the service manual of the
MP pump of the separate volume. The fuel injection timing is adjusted by the following procedure.
As for the engine, which adopts a MP type fuel injection
Fuel injection angle
pump, the fuel injection angle θi (note) is adjusted for the i T.D.C
Nozzle lift
fuel injection timing adjustment.
Note) The fuel injection angle θi (cam angle) is the
0
difference from the injection valve opening Cam angle
angle(FIR) while the fuel injection pump being Valve opening angle (FIR)
driven by a motor and the angle(FIR) at the Angle (FIT) at plunger lift 2.5 mm
plunger lift 2.5mm of the fuel pump. Fuel injection angle

And, as for the actual fuel injection angle θi , the
measured value is recorded on the pump body by
each every fuel pump as shown in the right figure.
The engraved mark is shown by the value that 10
is mulitiplied by the injection angle θi as shown in
Engraved mark
the below table. position
(Examle)
Non operation side
Fuel injection angle θi (Engine side)
Mark
(degree, cam angle)
8.5 85
7.7 77
Operation side
(R.1)
46
The adjustment of fuel injection angle θi

In case that the fuel pump are removed, and
Fuel injection pump
reassembled, the procedure of fuel injection angle
adjustment is as follows. (As for the disassembly of a I.D.mark
fuel injection pump, refer to 7.2.3 in chapter 7.)
[NOTICE] Flange bolt
Never loosen four flange bolts, which fasten a pump Don't loosen!
flange and a fuel pump drive gear at the time of the
removal of the fuel pump. When it is loosened, the
Gear
adjustment of the fuel injection timing becomes very installation nut
difficult.
1)Before removing a fuel pump drive gear, make ID Fuel pump Idle gear
drive gear
marks on the gearing part of the pump drive gear and
the idle gear with paint and so on.
Fuel pump installation angle
2)Make the mark-off line to the gear case precisely in
accordance with the position of mark-off line of the Fuel pump side Gear case side
fuel pump. Mark-off line
Mark-off line on gear case
on fuel pump
Marking
Marking on gear case
3)Before removing a fuel pump, put the standard mark

1 cam
of a sticker for fuel injection angle adjustment in Standard mark 2 cam
accordance with the mark-off line of the fuel pump
and paste it on the gear case.
0.5 cam
Sticker for adjusting injection angle
Mark sticker
Fuel injection pump

Gear case
Mark-off line
(R.1)
47
2. Inspection and Adjustment
4)Remove a fuel pump, and read the fuel injection angle recorded in that fuel pump.
5)Read the injection angle recorded on a newly assembled fuel pump and calculate the difference from the
injection angle of the disassembled fuel pump. (When re-installation does the same fuel pump, the angu-
lar difference is zero.)
Fuel injection angle difference ∆ θi (cam angle) = (the fuel injection angle θi2 of a new fuel pump)
- (the fuel injection angle θi1 of a disassembled previous fuel pump)
Calculation example
Fuel injection angleFuel injection angle Fuel injection angle
difference of a new fuel pump of a disassembled
Fuel pump installation method
θi2 fuel pump θi1
(degree, cam angle) (degree, cam angle) (degree, cam angle)
Turn the fuel pump body in the outside
directon of the cylinder block at 0.5
+0.5 8.5 8.0
degree(cam angle).
[Advanced injection timing]
Turn the fuel pump body in the inside
direction of the cylinder block at 0.3
-0.3 7.7 8.0
degree(cam angle).
[Delayed injection timing]
[NOTICE]
Tell the fuel pump number to Yanmar, and inquire the injection angle of the pump when it is hard to find out.
6)Put the fuel pump on the gear case temporarily and install the drive gear on the cam shaft with checking
the ID marks, which were put on the fuel pump drive gear and the idle gear at the time of the disassem-
bling.
Tighten the installation nut of a pump drive gear.

Tightening torque Lubricating oil application
Model Fuel pump model
N•m (kgf•m) (thread portion, and seat surface)
3TNV82A to TNV88 MP2 78 to 88 (8 to 9)
Not applied
4TNV94L/98/106 (T) MP4 113 to 123 (11.5 to 12.5)
7)Adjust the installation angle of the fuel pump while

Mark-off ling on fuel pump
reading the injection angle difference, calculated in Mark sticker
the above 5), withe the mark (minimum 0.5°, cam
angle) of the adjustment mark sticker.. 1 cam
Standard
0.5 cam
[NOTICE] mark
Push down the fuel pump in the outside direction of the 0.5 cam
1 cam
cylinder block at +0.5 degree(cam) when a injection
angle difference ∆ θi is +0.5 degree(cam). In case of + 0.5 cam Incase of -0.3 cam
And, push it down to the cylinder block side at 0.3 Injection angle adjustment
degree(cam) when a difference is -0.3 degree(cam).
8)Tighten the fuel pump installation nuts.
(R.1)
48-1
(Supplementary explanation 1)
ǰ
The installation angle of the fuel pump is as follows.
Installation angle
Model
θ (deg.)
3TNV82A to TNV88 25 Cylinder block side
4TNV94L/98/106 (T) 13
4TNV106 (T) 11.5
Fuel pump installation angle
(Supplementary explanation 2)
When fuel injection timing is advanced or delayed, the Delayed
installation angle of the fuel pump is adjusted. Advanced
When fuel injection timing is advanced for example at
0.5 degrees(cam), loosen the nuts, which fix the fuel
Cylinder block side
pump on the gear case, and turn the fuel pump body in
the inside direction of the cylinder block at 0.5
degree(cam), and tighten the pump installation nuts.
And, when fuel injection timing is delayed, a pump is
turned in that reverse direction.
Pump installation bolts

Injection timing adjustment
(R.1)
48-2
2.3 Adjusting the no-load maximum or minimum speed

1)After warming the engine up, gradually raise the speed and set it at the no-load maximum revolution.
2)If the no-load maximum speed is out of the stan-
dard, adjust it by turning the high idle limiting bolt.
The no-load maximum speed standard is shown in
the specification tables in 1.2 of the chapter 1.
3)Then set the no-load minimum speed by adjusting
the low idle limiting bolt.
Low idle
limiting bolt
High Low Govenor lever
No-load minimum speed standards (Unit: min-1) Accelerating

wire bracket
Engine application No-load minimum speed
class (± 25)
CL 1200
High idle
800 limiting bolt Accelerating wire fixing nut
VM
(1100 for 4TNV106 (T))
Accelerating wire bracket
Note) The engine speed may differ from the above
MP2 Fuel Injection pump
standard depending on an engine installed on a
machine unit.
49
2.4 Sensor inspection

2.4.1 Oil pressure switch
Disconnect the connector from the oil pressure switch. Oil pressure switch Cylinder block
Keep the voltameter probes in contact with the switch (flywheel side)
terminal and cylinder block while operating the engine. It
is abnormal if circuit is closed.
Tester probes
Continuity test
2.4.2 Thermo switch

Place the thermo switch in a container filled with
antifreeze or oil. Heat it while measuring the fluid Thermometer
temperature. The switch is normal if the voltameter
shows continuity when the fluid temperature is
Tester probes
107 to 113 deg C.
Thermo switch
Hot water
2.5 Water leak check in cooling water system

Check coolant water leakage from the cooling water
system visually. If any problem is found, Inspect as
follows.
1)Fill coolant water to the normal level in the radiator,
and install the cap tester on the radiator.
2)Operate the manual pump to set the pressure to
0.09 ± 0.015 MPa (0.9 ± 0.15 kgf/cm2). If the cap
tester pressure gage reading drops then, water is Cap tester
leaking from the cooling water system. Check the
water leaking point. Water leak check in cooling water system
(R.1)
50
2.6 Radiator cap inspection

Install the radiator cap on the cap tester. Set the tester
pressure to 0.09 ± 0.015 MPa (0.9 ± 0.15 kgf/cm2) and
see that the cap is opened. If the cap does not open,
replace the cap since it is abnormal.
Radiator cap
Radiator cap inspection
2.7 Thermostat Inspection

Place the thermostat in a container filled with water.
Heat it while measuring the water temperature, and see To radiator
that the thermostat is actuated at temperature of

following table. Cover
Valve opening Full open lift

Model Temperature (Temperature)
(deg C)* (mm) Thermostat
All models 69.5 to 72.5 8 or more (85 deg C)

* Valve opening temperature is carved on the flange.
Thermo switch
Thermometer
Thermostat
51
2.8 Adjusting operation

Perform the adjusting operation of a engine as follows after the maintenance job:
1)Supply the fuel oil, lubricating oil and coolant water.
Note:
Check the levels of the lubricating oil and coolant water again after test running (for about 5 minutes) and add
as required.
2)Start the engine, and carry out idling at a low revolution (700 to 900 rpm) for a few minutes.
3)Run in the engine for about five minutes at the rated revolution (no-load). Check any water, fuel or oil leak
and existence of abnormal vibration or noise. Also check the oil pressure, coolant water temperature and
exhaust gas color.
4)Adjust the no-load minimum and maximum revolutions according to the specifications.
5)Perform loaded operation as required.
2.9 Long storage

Observe the following instructions when the engine is to be stored for a long period without operation:
1)Be sure to use clean soft water added Long Life Coolant Antifreeze (LLC) in the cooling water system and
do not drain the coolant before long-term storage.
If drain the cooling water, it will cause to built up rust due to the residual water in the cooling water system.
2)Remove the mud, dust and oil deposit and clean the outside.
3)Perform the nearest periodic inspection before the storage.
4)Drain or fill the fuel oil fully to prevent condensation in the fuel tank.
5)Disconnect the battery cable from the battery negative (-) terminal.
6)Cover the silencer, air cleaner and electric parts with PVC (Poly Vinyl Chloride) cover to prevent water and
dust from depositing or entrance.
7)Select a well-ventilated location without moisture and dust for storage.
8)Perform recharging once a month during storage to compensate for self-discharge.
9)When storing an engine for long time, run the engine or do motoring periodically according to the following
procedure. Because the rust occurrence inside the engine, the rack agglutination of the fuel pump, and so
on are likely to occur. (In case that the engine is equipped with a machine unit,)
a)Replace the lube oil and the filter before the engine running.
b)Supply fuel if the fuel in the fuel tank was removed, and bleed the fuel system.
c)Confirm that there is the coolant in the engine.
d)Operate the engine at the low idling speed for about five minutes. (If it can be done, one a month)
52
3. Troubleshooting
3. Troubleshooting
3.1 Preparation before troubleshooting

If the signs of a trouble appear, it is important to lecture on the countermeasure and treatment before
becoming a big accident not to shorten the engine life.
When the signs of a trouble appear in the engine or a trouble occurs, grasp the trouble conditions fully by the
next point and find out the cause of sincerity according to the troubleshooting. Then repair the trouble, and
prevent the recurrence of the trouble.
1)What’s the occurrence phenomenon or the trouble situation? ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ (e.g. Poor exhaust color)
2)Investigation of the past records of the engine
Check a client control ledger, and examine the history of the engine.
• lInvestigate the engine model name and the engine number. (Mentioned in the engine label.)
Examine the machine unit name and its number in the same way.
• lWhen was the engine maintained last time?
• lHow much period and/or time has it been used after it was maintained last time?
• lWhat kind of problem was there on the engine last time, and what kind of maintenance was dane?
3)Hear the occurrence phenomenon from the operator of the engine in detail.
5W1H of the occurrence phenomenon : the investigation of when (when), where (where), who (who), what
(what), why (why) and how (how)
• lWhen did the trouble happen at what kind of time?
• lWas there anything changed before the trouble?
• lDid the trouble occur suddenly, or was there what or a sign?
• lWas there any related phenomenon.
⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅. (e.g. Poor exhaust color and starting failure at the same time)
4)After presuming a probable cause based on the above investigation, investigate a cause systematically by
the next troubleshooting guide, and find out the cause of sincerity.
53
3. TROUBLESHOOTING
3.2 Quick reference table for troubleshooting

The following table summarizes the general trouble symptoms and their causes. If any trouble symptom occurs, take corrective action before it becomes a serious problem so as not to shorten the engine service life.
Poor
High knocking sound during combustion

Insufficient Cooling Air
Trouble symptom Starting failure exhaust Hunting Lubricating oil
engine output water intake
color
Difficulty in returning to low speed

Engine starts
Exhaust During
but stops
Excessive fuel consumption

color work
Uneven combustion sound

soon.
Exhaust temperature rise

Abnormal engine sound
Excessive consumption
Low water temperature

Large engine vibration
Engine does not start.
Exhaust Corrective action
smoke
Low L.O. pressure

Mixture with water
Much blow-by gas

Dilution by fuel oil
Pressure drop
Pressure rise
During idling
During work
Overheat
Ordinary
Cause
White
White
Black
Black
Much
None
Little
Improper clearance of intake/exhaust valve c c c c c c Adjust the valve clearance. (See 2.2.6 (4) in Chapter2.)
Compression leakage from valve seat c c c c c c c c Lap the valve seat. (See 4.2.6 in Chapter4.)
Seizure of intake/exhaust valve c c c c c c c c c c c Correct or replace.
Blowout from cylinder head gasket c c c Replace the gasket. (See 4.2.2-12) in Chapter4.)
Seized or broken piston ring c c c c c c c c c c c c Replace the piston ring. (See 4.4.2-5) & 10) in Chapter4.)
Perform honing and use oversize parts.
Worn piston ring, piston or cylinder c c c c c c c
(See 4.4.5-1)4) and 4.4.6 in Chapter4.)
Seized crankpin metal or bearing c c c c c c c Repair or replace.
Improper arrangement of piston ring joints c c c c Correct the ring joint positions. (See 4.4.4-point 6 in Chapter4.)
Engine system
Reverse assembly of piston rings c c c c Reassemble correctly. (See 4.4.4-point 6 in Chapter4.)

Worn crankpin and journal bearing c c c c c c Measure and replace. (See 4.4.5-(2) in Chapter4.)
Loosened connecting rod bolt c c c Tighten to the specified torque. (See 4.4.4-point 2 in Chapter4.)
Foreign matter trapped in combustion chamber c c c c Disassemble and repair.
Excessive gear backlash c Adjust gear meshing. (See 4.3.4-point 2 in Chapter4.)
Worn intake/exhaust valve guide c c c Measure and replace. (See 4.2.5-(2) and 4.2.7 in Chapter4.)
Defective governor c c c c c Make adjustment.
Improper open/close timing of intake/exhaust valves c c c c c c Adjust the valve clearance. (See 2.2.6-(4) in Chapter2.)
Fouled blower c c Wash the blower.

Waste gate malfunction c c Disassemble and inspect.
Turbocharger
Worn floating bearing c c Disassemble and inspect.
54
3. TROUBLESHOOTING
Poor

color

Engine starts
Exhaust During
but stops

color work

soon.


smoke
Low L.O. pressure

Mixture with water
Much blow-by gas

Pressure drop
Pressure rise
During idling
During work
Overheat
Ordinary
Cause
White
White
Much
Black
Black
None
Little
Excessive cooling effect of radiator c c c Defective thermostat (kept closed) (See 2.2.7 in Chapter2.)
Defective thermostat (kept opened) (See 2.2.7 in Chapter2.)
Cooling Water System
Insufficient cooling effect of radiator c c c

or slipping fan belt (See 2.2.2-2) in Chapter2.)
Check water leakage from cooling water system.
Insufficient coolant water level c c c
(See 2.2.1-4) in Chapter2.)
Cracked water jacket c c c Repair or replace.
Slackened fan belt c c c Adjust the belt tension. (See 2.2.2-2) in Chapter2.)
Defective thermostat c c c c Check or replace. (See 2.2.7 in Chapter2.)
Improper properties of lubricating oil c c c c c c Use proper lubricating oil. (See 1.3.2 in Chapter1.)
Lubricating System
Leakage from lubricating oil piping system c c Repair.

Insufficient delivery capacity of trochoid pump c Check and repair. (See 5.5 in Chapter5.)
Clogged lubricating oil filter c c Clean or replace.
Defective pressure regulating valve c Clean, adjust or replace.
Insufficient lubricating oil level c c Add proper lubricating oil. (See 2.2.1-3) in Chapter2.)
Too early timing of fuel injection pump c c c c Check and adjust. (See 2.2.7-4) in Chapter2.)
Too late timing of fuel injection pump c c c c c c Check and adjust. (See 2.2.7-4) in Chapter2.)
Improper properties of fuel oil c c c c c c Use proper fuel oil. (See 1.3.1 in Chapter1.)
Water entrance in fuel system c c c c c c c Perform draining from the fuel filter. (See 2.2.3 and 2.2.5 in Chapter2.)
Clogged fuel filter c c c Clean or replace. (See 2.2.5 in Chapter2.)
Air entrance in fuel system c c c Perform air bleeding. (See 2.2.3 in Chapter2.)
Fuel system
Clogged or cracked fuel pipe c c c Clean or replace.

Insufficient fuel supply to fuel injection pump c c c Check the fuel tank cock, fuel filter, fuel pipe, and fuel feed pump.
Uneven injection volume of fuel injection pump c c c c c c c c c Check and adjust.
Excessive fuel injection volume c c c c c c c Check and adjust.
Poor spray pattern from fuel injection nozzle c c c c c c c c c Check and adjust. (See 2.2.6 in Chapter2.)
Foreign matter trapped in the valve inside the priming pump.
Priming failure c
(Disassemble and clean.)
Clogged strainer at feed pump inlet c Clean the strainer.
55
3. TROUBLESHOOTING
Poor

color

Engine starts
Exhaust During
but stops

color work

soon.


smoke
Low L.O. pressure

Mixture with water
Much blow-by gas

Pressure drop
Pressure rise
During idling
During work
Overheat
Ordinary
Cause
White
White
Much
Black
Black
None
Little
Clogged air filter c c c c c Clean. (See 2.2.4 in Chapter2.)
Air/Exhaust Gas System
Engine used at high temperatures or at high altitude c c c c c Study output drop and load matching.
Clogged exhaust pipe c c c c Clean.
Starting motor defect c Repair or replace. (See Chapter8.)

Alternator defect c Repair or replace. (See Chapter9.)
Open-circuit in wiring c Repair. (See Chapter10.)
Electrical System
Battery voltage drop c Inspect and change the battery. (See 2.2.3 in Chapter2.)
56
3. TROUBLESHOOTING
3.3 Troubleshooting by measuring compression pressure

Compression pressure drop is one of major causes of increasing blowby gas (lubricating oil contamination or
increased lubricating oil consumption as a resultant phenomenon) or starting failure. The compression
pressure is affected by the following factors:
1)Degree of clearance between piston and cylinder
2)Degree of clearance at intake/exhaust valve seat
3)Gas leak from nozzle gasket or cylinder head gasket
In other words, the pressure drops due to increased parts wear and reduced durability resulting from long use
of the engine.
A pressure drop may also be caused by scratched cylinder or piston by dust entrance from the dirty air
cleaner element or worn or broken piston ring. Measure the compression pressure to diagnose presence of
any abnormality in the engine.
(1) Compression pressure measurement method

1)After warming up the engine, remove the fuel
injection pipe and valves from the cylinder to be
measured.
2)Crank the engine before installing the compres-
Compression
sion gage adapter. gage
*1) Perform cranking with the stop handle at the
stop position (no injection state).
*2) See 12.2-18 in Chapter 12 for the compression
gage and compression gage adapter.
3)Install the compression gage and compression
gage adapter at the cylinder to be measured. Measurement of the compression pressure
*1) Never forget to install a gasket at the tip end of
the adapter.
4)With the engine set to the same state as in 2)*1),
crank the engine by the starter motor until the
compression gage reading is stabilized.
(2) Standard compression pressure

Engine compression pressure list (reference value)
Compression pressure
at 250 min-1 Deviation among cylinders
Engine mode
MPa (kgf/cm2)
MPa (kgf/cm2)
Standard Limit
3TNV82A 3.04 ± 0.1 (31 ± 1) 2.45 ± 0.1 (25 ± 1)
3/4TNV84 3.24 ± 0.1 (33 ± 1) 2.55 ± 0.1 (26 ± 1)
0.2 to 0.3 (2 to 3)
3/4TNV84T 2.94 ± 0.1 (30 ± 1) 2.45 ± 0.1 (25 ± 1)
TNV88 to 106 (T) 3.43 ± 0.1 (35 ± 1) 2.75 ± 0.1 (28 ± 1)
(R.1)
57
3. TROUBLESHOOTING
(3) Engine speed and compression pressure (for reference)
3/4TNV88㨪4TNV106(T)
Compression pressure (kgf/cm2)
40 4
Compression pressure (MPa)

3/4TNV84
35
30 3
3TNV82A
25
3/4TNV84T
20 2
200 250 300 350 400

Engine speed (min-1)
(4) Measured value and troubleshooting

When the measured compression pressure is below the limit value, inspect each part by referring to the table
below.
No. Item Cause Corrective action

• Air cleaner element • Clogged element • Clean the element.
• Broken element • Replace the element.
1
• Defect at element seal
portion
• Valve clearance • Excessive or no clear- • Adjust the valve clearance.
2
ance (See 3.5 in Chapter 3.)
• valve timing • Incorrect valve clearance • Adjust the valve clearance.
3
(See 3.5 in Chapter 3.)
• Cylinder head gasket • Gas leak from gasket • Replace the gasket.
• Retighten the cylinder head bolts to the spec-
4
ified torque.
(See 4.2 (2) 12) in Chapter 4.)
• Intake/exhaust vale • Gas leak due to worn • Lap the valve seat.
• Valve seat valve seat or foreign mat- (See 4.2 (6) in Chapter 4.)
5
ter trapping • Replace the intake/exhaust valve.
• Sticking valve
• Piston • Gas leak due to scratch- • Perform honing and use an oversized part.
6 • Piston ring ing or wear (See 4.4 (5)-(5-1), (5-4) and (6) in Chapter 4.)
• Cylinder
58
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
4.1 Complete disassembly and reassembly

4.1.1 Introduction
Make preparation as follows before starting engine inspection and service:
1)Fix the engine on a horizontal base.
Be sure to fix the engine securely to prevent injury or damage to parts due to falling during the work.
2)Remove the coolant water hose, fuel oil pipe, wire harness, control wires etc. connecting the driven
machine and engine, and drain coolant water, lubricating oil and fuel.
3)Clean soil, oil, dust, etc. from the engine by washing with solvent, air, steam, etc. Carefully operate so as
to prevent any foreign matter from entering the engine.
Always wear glasses or other protectors when using compressed air or steam to prevent any foreign matter
from getting in the eyes.
[NOTICE]
• Any part which is found defective as a result of inspection or any part whose measured value does not sat-
isfy the standard or limit shall be replaced.
• Any part predicted to dissatisfy the standard or limit before the next service as estimated from the state of
use should be replaced even when the measured value then satisfies the standard or limit.
59
4.1.2 Special service tools
(1) Special Tools
No. Tool name Applicable model and tool size Illustration

Valve guide tool
(for extracting valve চ
guide) Model L1 L2 d1 d2
3TNV82A
4TNV94L 98(T) 20 75 6.5 10
4TNV106(T)
1 4TNV84
3TNV84(T) 20 75 7.5 11
3/4TNV88
4TNV84T 20 75 5.5 9
̪Locally manufactured
Valve guide tool
(for inserting valve চ
guide) Model L1 L2 d1 d2
3TNV82A 12 60 13 19
4TNV84
3TNV84(T) 15 65 14 20
3/4TNV88
2
4TNV84T 8.5 60 11 17
4TNV94L 98(T) 7 60 13 16
4TNV106(T) 13.6 65 13 16
Connecting rod
bushing replacer চ
(for removal / Model L1 L2 d1 d2
installation of 3TNV82A 25 85 23 26
connecting rod
bushing) TNV84 88 20 100 26 29
3 4TNV94L 98 20 100 30 33
4TNV106(T) 20 100 37 40
Allowance: d1-- 00..36 d2 -- 00..36
Valve spring
compressor
(for removal /
installation of valve
spring) yanmar code No.
4
129100-92630
60
No. Tool name Applicable model and tool size Illustration

Stem seal insertion চ
(for inserting stem Model d1 d2 d3 L1 L2 L3
seal)
3TNV82A 15.2 21 12 15.8 65 4
4TNV84
3TNV84(T) 16.2 22 13.5 18.8 65 4
4TNV88
5 4TNV84T 12.9 19 11.5 10.0 65 4
4TNE94L 98 15.2 21 12 11.8 65 4
4TNE106(T) 15.2 21 12 15.5 65 4

̪ Locally manufactured
Filter wrench
(for removal /
6 Available on the market
installation of L.O.
filter)
Camshaft bushing
tool চ
(for extracting Model L1 L2 d1 d2
camshaft bushing) TNV82A 88 18 70 45 48
7 4TNV94L 98 18 70 50 53
4TNV106(T) 18 70 58 61

Allowance: d1 -- 00..36 d2 -- 00..36

Flex-Hone
(For re-honing of Cylinder
cylinder liner) Model Parts No. bore
(চ)
TNV82A 129400-92420 78 84
8
TNV88 4TNV94L 129400-92430 83 95
4TNV98 129400-92440 89 101
4TNV106(T) 129400-92450 95 108
Piston insertion
tool Yanmar code No. 95550-002476
9 (for inserting ̪The above piston insertion tool is applicable
piston) to 60-125 mm diameter pistons.
Piston ring replacer

(for removal /
10 installation of Available on the market
piston ring)
Crankshaft pulley
installing tool Locally manufactured
11 (for 4TNV94L)
(Refer to 4.3.6 in detail)
(R.1)
61
(2) Measuring instruments
No. Instrument name Application Illustration

Measurements of shaft bending, and strain
and gap of surfaces
1 Dial gage
Measurements of narrow or deep portions

that cannot be measured by dial gage
2 Test indicator
For holding the dial gage when measuring

using a dial gage, standing angles adjustable
3 Magnetic stand
For measuring the outside diameters of

crankshaft, pistons, piston pins, etc.
4 Micrometer
For measuring the inside diameters of

cylinder liners, rod metal, etc.
5 Cylinder gage
For measuring outside diameters, depth,

thickness and width
6 Calipers
For measuring of valve sink
7 Depth micrometer
For measuring valve spring inclination and

straightness of parts
8 Square
62

For measuring shaft bend
9 V-block
For tightening nuts and bolts to the

specified torque
10 Torque wrench
For measuring gaps between ring and ring

groove, and shaft joints during assembly
11 Thickness gage
For checking water leakage
12 Cap tester
For checking concentration of antifreeze

and the battery electrolyte charge status
13 Battery coolant tester
For measuring injection spray pattern of

fuel injection nozzle and injection pressure
14 Nozzle tester
For measuring temperatures

abcdefghijklmn
abcd efghijk
abcdefghijklmn
abcdefghijklmn
abcdefghijklmn
15 Digital thermometer
abcdefghijklmnabcdefghijklmn
abcdefghijklmnabcdefghijklmn
Float
63

For measuring revolution by contacting
the mortise in the revolving shaft
Contact type
16 Speedometer
For measuring revolution by sensing
Revolving shaft
the reflecting mark on the outer
periphery of the revolving shaft
Photoelectric type
Reflection mark
For measuring resistance, voltage and

continuity of electrical circuits
17 Circuit tester
For measuring compression pressure
Gauge set code NO. TOL-97190080
Adapter for direct injection 2-valve head
Adapter code No. 119802-92950
130
18 Compression gage kit

for 4TNV94L/98/98T

165

for 4TNV106/106T

179
(R.1)
64
4.1.3 Complete disassembly

Peripheral parts such as air cleaner, muffler and radiator differ in installation and types for each application.
Therefore, description in this Chapter is started with the steps to be taken just after the peripheral parts have
been removed.
Step Removal Parts Remarks

1)Thoroughly remove sand, dust, dirt and soil
from the surface of the engine.
1
2)Drain coolant water and lubricating oil from the
engine.
1)Remove turbocharger and exhaust manifold.
2
2)Remove intake manifold and surge tank.
1)Close the fuel cock valve of the fuel tank. 1)If nozzle seat is left on the cylinder head,
2)Remove high-pressure fuel pipe. remove the cylinder head before extracting noz-
3)Remove fuel return pipe. zle seat.
4)Loosen the tightening nut on fuel injection noz- 2)To prevent dust from entering fuel injection noz-
3 zle retainer and extract the retainer and fuel zle, fuel injection pump and high-pressure fuel
injection nozzle. pipe, seal their respective threads with a tape or
*) Fuel injection nozzle for Indirect injection the like.
system is screwed type. 3)Whenever extracting fuel injection nozzle,
replace nozzle protector with a new one.
1)Remove rocker arm cover assembly.
4
1)Remove valve rocker arm shaft assembly. 1)Attach a tag to push rod for each cylinder No. to
2)Remove push rod. put the push rod in order.
2)Remove valve cap from the intake/exhaust
valve head.
5 3)Note that tappet of the indirect injection system
can be removed at the same time when push
rod is extracted.
4)Attach a tag to tappet for each cylinder No. to
put the tappet in order.
1)Remove fan mounting bolt, and then remove 1)Never turn down alternator vigorously toward
fan. the cylinder block. Otherwise, your finger may
2)Loosen adjusting bolt for the V-belt adjuster, and be nipped and alternator broken.
6
then remove V-belt.
3)Remove alternator.
4)Remove the spacer for cooling fan and V-pulley.
1)Remove lubricating oil filter assembly.
7 2)Extract dipstick form the oil dip-stick hole.
1)Disconnect fuel return pipes to.

8 2)Remove fuel filter.
65

1)Disconnect coolant water pipe from the cooling
water pump.
9
2)Remove thermostat assembly.
3)Remove cooling water pump.
1)Remove cylinder head tightening bolt. 1)Lay a cardboard or the like on the floor and
2)Remove cylinder head assembly. place cylinder head assembly on it so as not to
3)Remove cylinder head gasket. damage the combustion surface.
2)Order of loosening the cylinder head tightening
bolts.
Disassembly
Camshaft side
8 14 5
Fan side
2 12 9 3
4 10 11 1
6 13 7
Head bolt disassembly order
3 cylinder head
Disassembly
10 Camshaft side
Fan side
7 16 14 6
1 9 18 12 4
3 11 17 10 2
5 13 15 8

4 cylinder head
3)To remove the intake/exhaust valves from cylin-

der head assembly, take the following steps.
a)Using a valve spring compressor (see Chapter
5, 5-1), compress valve spring and remove
valve cotter.
b)Remove valve retainer and valve spring.
c)Remove intake valve and exhaust valve.
1)Remove crankshaft V-pulley clamping bolt. 1)Extract crankshaft V-pulley by hitting the bolt of
11 2)Using a puller, extract crankshaft V-pulley. the puller using a plastic hammer or the like.
1)Remove oil pan mounting bolt under gear case. 1)Never fail to removes stiffener bolt at the center
2)Remove gear case mounting bolt. of the gear case.
12
3)Remove gear case. 2)When removing the gear case, carefully protect
oil seal from damage.
1)Remove the nut from fuel injection pump drive 1)Before removing fuel injection pump, make sure
gear. Extract fuel injection pump drive gear of the position of the arrow of the pump body for
13 using a puller. adjusting fuel injection timing as well as the posi-
tion of the scribed line of the gear case flange.
(Applies only to direct injection system.)
66

1)Remove lubricating oil pump.
14
1)Remove starting motor from flywheel housing

15 sing.
1)Remove flywheel mounting bolt. 1)Carefully protect the ring gear from damage
16 2)Remove flywheel. mage.
1)Remove flywheel housing. 1)Carefully protect the oil seal from damage.
2)Remove oil seal case with a screwdriver or the
17
like by utilizing grooves on both sides of oil seal
case.
1)Remove oil pan and spacer. 1)Put the cylinder block with the attaching surface
of the cylinder head facing down.
2)Carefully protect the combustion surface of the
cylinder block from damage.
18
3)For indirect injection system, be careful to the
possibility of the tapped to drop off when the cyl-
inder block is turned upside down, because the
tappet is cylindrical in shape.
1)Remove idle gear shaft, and then remove idle 1)Turn the cylinder block aside and carefully pre-
gear. vent tappet from jamming on the cam.
19 2)Remove mounting bolt of thrust bearing through 2)Preheat camshaft gear and camshaft assembly
the hole of the camshaft gear. Remove cam- to 180° to 200° which are shrink fitted, before
shaft assembly. removing them.
1)Remove gear case flange.
20
1)Remove lubricating oil strainer.

21
1)Remove crankpin side cap of the connecting 1)Before extracting piston, remove carbon depos-
rod. its from the upper wall of the cylinder using fine
While turning crankshaft, place piston in the sandpaper, while taking care not to damage the
bottom dead center (BDC). inner surface of the cylinder.
22
2)Make sure than cap No. of connecting rod
agrees with cylinder No.
3)Take care not to let crankpin metal fall when
removing connecting rod crankpin side cap.
67

1)Remove main bearing cap bolt. While shaking 1)Before extracting crankshaft, measure the side
main bearing cap, remove main bearing cap gap around it.
together with lower main bearing metal.
2)Extract crankshaft, taking care not to damage it.
3)Remove upper main bearing metal.
Dial gauge
23 Crankshaft
Apply a dial gauge to the end of crankshaft.

Force the crankshaft on both sides in the axial
direction to measure the thrust gap.
Alternatively, insert a thickness gauge directly
between the base thrust metal and the thrust
surface of the crankshaft to measure the gap.
If the limit size is exceeded, replace the thrust
metal with a new one.
Thrust gap (All models)

2)Notice on the removal of thrust metal.
a)When removing thrust metal, ascertain the
position and direction where thrust metal is
installed in relation to the cap.
b)Make sure that the thrust metal groove is
outward in relation to the cap.
1)Remove piston and connecting rod assembly. 1)To selectively remove a desired piston and con-
necting rod assembly without extracting crank-
shaft, take the steps itemized below:
a)Remove carbon deposits from the upper wall of
the cylinder using fine sandpaper, taking care
not to damage the inner surface of the cylinder.
24 b)While turning the crankshaft, with the
connecting rod cap removed, raise the piston up
to the top dead center (TDC).
c)Extract the piston/connecting rod assembly
while tapping the connecting rod at the large end
with the handle of a plastic hammer or the like.
2)Remove tappet.
25
68
4.1.4 Precautions before and during reassembly

To reassemble engine components, reverse the procedure of disassembly. However, follow the precautions
below and the precautions from in chapter 4 to in chapter 7 particularly before and during reassembly.
(1) Cleaning the component

Use particular care to clean the cylinder block, cylinder head, crankshaft, and camshaft. Ensure that they are
free from chips, dust, sand, and other foreign matter.
(2) Parts to be replaced during reassembly

Be sure to replace the following parts with new ones during assembly.
• Valve stem seal
• Head gasket packing
• Nozzle protector and nozzle seat of the fuel injection valve
• Various copper packing, O-rings and gasket packing.
4.1.5 Adjusting operation

Make sure to perform adjusting operation after completing reassembly. Refer to section 2.5 in chapter 2 for
the operation procedure.
69
4.2 Cylinder head: Disassembly, inspection and reassembly

4.2.1 Components (2-valve cylinder head)
ԡRocker arm cover

ԞFuel injection pipe ԠExhaust manifold
Cylinder head
ԛFuel filter ԘOil cooler
Joint
ԚThermostat
ԟIntake maniforld
Head gasket
Thermo switch Cooling water pump
Oil/water separator
ԙV-pulley
Cylinder block
Spacer
ԙFan
ԝOil filter Gear case

4.2.2 Disassembly procedure:

Disassemble in the order of the numbers shown in the illustration.
1)Remove the alternator assy. (Point1)
2)Remove the fan, pulley and V belt.
3)Remove the thermostat case. (Point2)
4)Remove the fuel filter and fuel oil piping. (Point3)
5)Remove the oil level gage assy.
6)Remove the oil filter. (Point4)
7)Remove the fuel injection pipes. (Point5)
8)Remove the intake manifold assy.
9)Remove the exhaust manifold assy.
10)Remove the rocker arm cover assy.
11)Remove the rocker shaft assy, push rods and valve caps. (Point6)
12)Remove the cylinder head assy and head gasket. (Point7)
13)Remove the fuel injection valves and fuel return pipe. (Point8)
14)Remove the intake/exhaust valves, stem seals and valve springs. (Point9)
15)Remove the rocker arms from the rocker shaft.
70
Rocker arm
cover
Rocker arm suport
Rocker arm
cover
Rocker arm shaft

Rocker arm Rocker arm shaft
Adjusting bolt Rocker arm
Valve bridge
Valve cap
Cotter Cotter
Spring holder Spring holder
Valve spring Rocker arm Valve spring
Stem seal suport Stem seal
Valve guide Valve guide
Cylinder head
Cylinder head
Exhaust valve
Suction valve Exhaust vlave Suction valve
4-Valve cylinder head 2-Valve cylinder head
4.2.3 Reassembly procedure:

Reverse order of the disassembly procedure.
71
4.2.4 Servicing points

Point1
Adjust the V-belt tension
[Disassemble] inserting a bar
• Loosen the mounting bolt while supporting the alter-
nator.
Adjuster
Do not tilt the alternator toward the cylinder block in

haste since it may damage the alternator or pinch a
finger.
[Reassemble] Alternator
• The belt deflection shall be checked according to Tension adjustment
2.2.2. in Chapter2.
[Reassemble]
• Replace the belt with a new one if cracked, worn or 98N (10kgf)
Set bolt
damaged.
• Carefully prevent the belt from being smeared with oil
Deflection
or grease.
Alternator
C.W. pump
V belt
Crank pulley
V-belt tention
Point2
[Reassemble]
• Check the thermostat function. (See3.9 in Chapter 3
for the check procedure.)
Pont3
[Reassemble]
• Replace the fuel filter element with a new one.
[Disassemble]
• Cover the fuel pipe opening with tape to prevent
intrusion of foreign matters.
Point4
[Reassemble]
• Replace the oil filter with a new one.
• After fully tightening the filter manually, retighten it
with a filter wrench (see 11.1-6 in Chapter 11) by 3/4
turn.
Point5
[Disassemble]
• Cover the fuel injection pipe and pump inlets and out-
lets with tape or the like to prevent intrusion of foreign
matters.
72
Point6
Pipe seal
1)Removing pipe seals of 4 valve head.
[Disassemble]
• Take off a rocker arm cover in case of 4 valve head
after removing fuel injection pipes and pipe seals.
[NOTICE] Fuel injection pipe
Attention is necessary because a fuel nozzle is caught Fuel nozzle
in a pipe seal and the pipe seal is damaged when a
rocker arm cover is lifted with a pipe seal sticking to
the rocker arm cover. Slit of bonnet
Pipe seal
• Insert a minus driver in the slit part of the rocker arm
cover, and remove it when removing a pipe seal.
Minus driver
[Reassemble]
• Replace the used pipe seal with a new one when
removing a pipe seal.
Cap nut of fuel injection pipe
Pipe seal replacement
2)Breather system (A redactor to intake air system of

blowby gas) Spring
Center plate
Emitting blowby gas is harmful to natural environ- Diaphragm Diaphragm cover
ment. Therefore blowby gas redactor is adopted to Rocker arm cover
TNV series naturally- aspirated engines as breather
system (Turbocharged engines emitblowby gas).
The system of model 3/4TNV84 is shown as a repre- Breather pipe
sentative of that breather system in the right figure.
Breather
Some of the combustion gas passes through the baffle
clearance between the cylinder and the piston, pis- Intake
maniforld Baffle plate
ton ring, and flows to the crankcase. This is said as
blowby gas. While it passes into the cylinder head
and the rocker arm cover, the blowby gas mixes with Breather system componert
splash oil, and becomes oil mist-blowby gas mixes

with splash oil, and becomes oil mist-blowby gas it
passing through the baffle plate inside a rocker arm
cover. And it passes through a diaphragm assy, and
a intake manifold, and is reduced in the combustion
chamber. Pressure inside a crankcase is controlled Diaphragm Spring Cover
Center plate
by the function of the diaphragm assy, and suitable Blowby gas flow Rocker arm
amount of blowby gas is reduced in intake air sys- Blowby gas flow cover
to diaphragm
tem. space Baffle plate
Diaphragm part
[Disassemble]
When a rocker arm cover is taken off, check whether
oil or the like enter the diaphragm space from a small
hole on the side of a diaphragm cover or not without
Blowby gas flow
disassembling the diaphragm.
73
[NOTICE]
1)When a diaphragm is damaged, pressure control inside the crankcase becomes insufficient, and troubles
occur. When the internal pressure of the crankcase decreases too much due to the damage of a spring,
much blowby gas containing oil is reduced in intake air system, and it may cause the combustion defect
by the early dirt of the intake valve or the urgent rotation of the engine by the oil burning.
When pressure progresses in the crank case too much due to the wrong operation of the diaphragm and
so on, it is considered that oil leakage from the joint of a oil pan, a oil seal and so on will occur. When a
diaphragm is damaged, blowby is discharged from the breathing hole on the side of diaphragm cover, and
not reduced in the intake manifold. Therefore, be careful of the diaphragm trouble.
2)At lubricating oil replacement or lube oil supply
The amount of lubricating oil isn't to be beyond the standard upper limit (in the engine horizontally, the
upper limit mark of the dip stick). Since the blowby gas redactor is adopted, be careful that the amount of
oil mist may be inducted in the combustion chamber and the oil hammer sometimes may occur, when the
lubricating oil quantity is beyond the upper limit or an engine is operated beyond the allowable maximum
angle of an engine.
[Reassembly]
Replace the diaphragm with new one, when it is damaged.
Point7
Disassembly
[Disassemble] Camshaft side
• Keep the removed push rods by attaching tags show-
8 14 5
Fan side
ing corresponding cylinder Nos. 2 12 9 3
[Reassemble]
4 10 11 1
• Always apply oil to the contact portions of the push 6 13 7
rods and clearance adjusting screws.
Point8
3 cylinder head
[Disassemble] Assembly
Camshaft side
• Loosen the cylinder head bolts in two steps in the
illustrated order. 7 1 10
Fan side
13 3 6 12
• Place the cylinder head assy on a paper board to pre-
vent the combustion face from any damage. 11 5 4 14
9 2 8
[Reassemble]
• Remove the head gasket with a new one. Head bolt tightning order
• Uniformly install the head bolts manually after apply- 3 cylinder head
Disassembly
ing oil on the threaded and seat portions. Camshaft side
• They shall be tightened in two steps in the reverse of
Fan side
7 16 14 6
1 9 18 12 4
the order for disassembly.
• Tightening torque 3 11 17 10 2
5 13 15 8
N•m (kgf•m)
TNV82A TNV84-88
4 cylinder head
30.0 to 34.0 41.1 to 46.9
First step Assembly
(3.1 to 3.5) (4.2 to 4.8) Camshaft side
61.7 to 65.7 85.3 to 91.1
Fan side
12 3 5 13
Second step
(6.3 to 6.7) (8.7 to 9.3) 18 10 1 7 15
16 8 2 9 17
14 6 4 11
4TNV94L/98 4TNV106 (T)
49.0 to 58.8 88.3 to 98.1 Head bolt tightning order
First step
(5.0 to 6.0) (9.0 to 10.0) 4 cylinder head
103.1 to 112.9 188.0 to 197.8
Second step
(10.5 to 11.5) (19.0 to 20.0)
74
Point9
[Disassemble]
• Carefully remove the fuel injection valve so as not to
leave the top end protector from being left inside the
cylinder.
[Reassemble]
• Replace the fuel injection valve protector with a new
one.
Point10
[Disassemble]
• When removing each intake/exhaust valve from the
cylinder head, use a valve spring compressor (see
11.1-4 in Chapter 11) and compress the valve spring
and remove the valve cotter.)
• Keep each removed intake/exhaust valve after
Valve spring compressor
attaching a tag showing the corresponding cylinder
No.
• If cotter burr is seen at the shaft of each intake/
exhaust valve stem, remove it with an oilstone and
extract the valve from the cylinder head.
[Reassemble]
• Replace the stem seal with a new one when an
intake/exhaust valve is disassembled.
• Carefully install each valve after oil application so as
not to damage the stem seal.
• Different stem seals are provided for the intake and
exhaust valves. Do not confuse them since those for
exhaust valves are marked with yellow paint.
• After assembling the intake/exhaust valve, stem seal,
valve spring, seat, and cotter, tap the head of the
valve stem lightly for settling.
• Do not forget to install the valve cap.
75
4.2.5 Parts Inspection and measurement

(1) Cylinder head
Clean the cylinder head, mainly the combustion surface,
valve seats and intake/exhaust ports, remove carbon
Straight-edge
deposit and bonding agent, and check the surface state.
(a)Appearance check
Check mainly discoloration and crack. If crack is
suspected, perform color check.
(b)Combustion surface distortion
Apply a strait-edge in two diagonal directions and on
four sides of the cylinder head, and measure distortion
with a thickness gage.
Thickness gage
mm
Distortion at combustion surface
Standard Limit
Distortion 0.05 or less 0.15
(c)Valve sink
Measure with the valve inserted to the cylinder head. Depth micrometer
mm
Standard Limit
3TNV82A Intake 0.35 to 0.55 0.8
(2-valve head) Exhaust 0.30 to 0.50 0.8
4TNV84 Intake 0.30 to 0.50 0.8
3TNV84 (T)
3/4TNV88 Exhaust 0.30 to 0.50 0.8 Valve sink
(2-valve head)
4TNV84T Intake 0.36 to 0.56 0.8
4TNV94/98 (T) Valve sinking depth
4TNV106 (T) Intake 0.5 to 0.7 1.0

Valve sink depth
(d)Seat contact
Apply a thin coat of minimum on the valve seat. Insert
the valve in the cylinder and push it against the seat to
check seat contact.
Standard: Continuous contact all around
Seat
Valve seat contact
76
(2) Valve guide

Mainly check damage and wear on the inside wall.
Measuring positions
Apply the service part code when replacing a part.
Model Service part code
a b c
3TNV82A Suction 124060-11800 A B
(2-valve) Exhaust 119802-11810
4TNV84 Suction 120130-11860
3TNV84(T) Valve guide inside diameter
3/4TNV88
Measuring positions
4TNV84T
Suc./Exh. 119717-11800
(4-valve)
4TNV94L
4TNV98(T) Suc./Exh. 129907-11800
(4-valve)
Suction 123907-11800 Valve stem outside diameter
4TNV106(T)
Valve stem clearance

Model Part name Place Standard Limit
Guide I.D. 7.000 to 7.015 7.08
Intake value Stem O.D. 6.945 to 6.960 6.90
3TNV82A Clearance 0.040 to 0.070 0.18
(2-valve head) Guide I.D. 7.000 to 7.015 7.08
Exhaust value Stem O.D. 6.940 to 6.955 6.90
Clearance 0.045 to 0.075 0.18
Guide I.D. 8.010 to 8.025 8.10
4TNV84 Intake value Stem O.D. 7.955 to 7.975 7.90
3TNV84 (T) Clearance 0.035 to 0.070 0.18
3/4TNV88 Guide I.D. 8.015 to 8.030 8.10
(2-valve head) Exhaust value Stem O.D. 7.955 to 7.970 7.90
Clearance 0.045 to 0.075 0.18
Guide I.D. 6.000 to 6.015 6.08
4TNV84T Clearance 0.025 to 0.055 0.15
Clearance 0.040 to 0.070 0.17
Guide I.D. 7.000 to 7.015 7.08
4TNV94L Clearance 0.040 to 0.070 0.17
4TNV98 (T)
Guide I.D. 7.000 to 7.015 7.08
(4-valve head)
Clearance 0.045 to 0.075 0.17
Guide I.D. 7.008 to 7.020 7.08
4TNV106(T) Clearance 0.033 to 0.060 0.16
Clearance 0.048 to 0.075 0.18
77
(3) Intake/exhaust valve

Mainly clean and check damage and wear at the valve stem and seat.
(a)Seat contact: See (1)-(d) above.
(b)Stem outside diameter: See (2) above.
(c)Valve head thickness
mm
Model Part Standard Limit
3TNV82A to 88 Intake 1.24-1.44 0.8
4TNV84
(2-valve head) Exhaust 1.35-1.55 0.8 Thickness
4TNV84T Intake 1.00-1.20 0.6

(4-valve head) Exhaust 1.00-1.20 0.6 Valve head thickness
4TNV94L•98 (T) Intake 1.44-1.84 1.0

(4-valve head) Exhaust 1.70-2.10 1.0
Length
4TNV106(T) Intake 1.60-2.00 1.2
(4-valve head) Exhaust 1.80-2.20 1.2
(d)Valve stem bend

Stool
mm
Limit 0.01
(e)Overall length Valve bend and length
mm
Standard Limit
3TNV82A Intake/Exhaust 97.2-97.8 97.0
3/4TNV84 to 88 Intake/Exhaust 108.7-109.3 108.5
4TNV84T Intake/Exhaust 100.0-100.6 99.8
4TNV94L Intake 102.3-103.1 102.1 Free length
4TNV98(T) Exhaust 102.4-103.2 102.2
Intake 117.3-118.1 117.1
4TNV106(T)
Exhaust 117.1-117.9 116.9
Valve spring
(4) Valve spring

Mainly inspect damage and corrosion. Inclination
mm
Free length Inclination
Standard Limit limit
3TNV82A 44.4 43.9
1.4
3/4TNV84 to 88 42.0 41.5
4TNV84T 37.4 36.9 1.3 Valve spring
4TNV94L•98(T) 39.7 39.2 1.4
4TNV106(T) 50.6 50.1 1.5
78
(5) Valve rocker arm

Mainly inspect valve head cap contact surface, inside
surface defects and wear.
Slight surface defects shall be corrected with an
oilstone.
mm
Model Items Standard Limit
Arm hole
16.00 to 16.02 16.07
3TNV82A diameter
3/4TNV84(T)
Shaft O.D. 15.97 to 15.98 15.94
3/4TNV88
Clearance 0.016 to 0.054 0.13 Rocker arm hole diameter
Arm hole
18.50 to 18.52 18.57
diameter
4TNV94L/98(T)
4TNV106(T) Shaft O.D. 18.47 to 18.49 18.44
Clearance 0.01 to 0.05 0.13
(6) Rocker arm shaft

Mainly inspect seizure and wear at the surface in sliding
contact with the arm. The rocker shaft diameter shall be
as specified in (5) above.
Rocker shaft outside diameter
(7) Push rod

Mainly inspect the surface in contact with the tappet and
adjusting screw. Slight defects shall be corrected with an
oilstone.
Bend limit 0.03 mm
(8) Valve clearance adjusting screw Thickness gage
Mainly inspect the surface in contact with the push rod.

Slight defects shall be corrected with an oilstone.
Push rod bend
(9) Rocker arm spring
Mainly inspect surface defects and corrosion.
(R.1)
79
4.2.6 Valve seat correction

[NOTICE]
Always check the oil clearance between the valve and valve guide before correcting the valve seat. If it
exceeds the limit, replace the valve or valve guide first to make the clearance satisfy the standard. After
correction, wash the valve and the cylinder head sufficiently with diesel oil to remove all grinding powder or
compound.
1)If the seat surface is slightly roughened: perform

[A] and [B] below.
[A]: Lap the valve and seat with a mixture of valve
compound and engine oil.
[B]: Lap with engine oil only.
2)If the seat is heavily roughened but the width is

almost normal, correct with a seat grinder or seat Seat angle
150q
cutter first. Then perform lapping [A] and [B]. 40q
Seat width
intake Exhaust
Seat cutter angle 120 90
Seat cutter
Cylinder head correction angle
3)If the seat is heavily roughened and the width is

much enlarged, grind the seat inner surface with a
Grinder
seat grinder whose center angle is 40°, then grind
the seat outer surface with a grinder whose center
angle is 150° to make the seat width match the stan-
dard. Then perform seat correction as described in
2), and then carry out lapping [A] and [B].
θ1 θ2
Grinding wheel angle Grindstone
40 150
Seat grinder
80
4.2.7 Valve guide replacement

1)Use a valve guide extraction tool (12.1-1 in Chapter 12) and extract the valve guide from the cylinder
head.
2)Put liquid nitrogen or ether (or alcohol) with dry ice added in a container and put the valve guide for
replacement in it for cooling. Then insert it in with a valve guide inserting tool (Refer to No.2 of 4.1.2 in
Chapter 4).
Do not touch the cooled valve guide with bare hands to avoid skin damage.
3)Check the inside diameter and finish to the standard

inside diameter as required with a reamer.
4)Check the projection from the cylinder head.
Valve guide extracting
& inserting tool
mm
Model Number of valves Projection Projection
3TNV82A 11.7 to 12.0
Cylinder head
4TNV84 2 valves
3TNV84 (T) 14.7 to 15.0
4TNV88
4TNV84T 8.2 to 8.5 Valve guide
4TNV94L
4 valves 9.7 to 10.
4TNV98(T) Valve guide replacement
4TNE106(T) 13.4 to 13.6
(R.1)
81
4.2.8 Valve stem seal replacement

Always use a new seal after the intake/exhaust valve is
disassembled. Since the one for the exhaust valve is Valve stem seal inserting tool
marked with yellow paint, do not confuse the intake and
exhaust valves.
1)Apply engine oil to the lip.
2)Push with the inserting tool (Refer to No.5 of 4.1.2 in
Chapter 4) for installation.
Stem seal
Valve guide
Cylinder head
Stem seal insertion
3)Measure and check the projection of valve stem seal

to keep proper clearance between valve guide and
stem seal.
mm Stem seal
Model Number of valves Projection
3TNV82A 15.7 to 16.0
Clearance
4TNV84 2 valves
3TNV84 (T) 18.7 to 19.0
4TNV88
Valve guide
4TNV84T 9.9 to 10.2
4TNV94L
4 valves 11.7 to 12.0
4TNV98 (T)
4TNE106 (T) 15.4 to 15.6
Valve guide projection

Stem seal projection
82
4.3 Gear train and camshaft
4.3.1 Components
ԠFlywheel
Flywheel housing
ԟStarter ԢGear case flange

ԡCamshaft
ԙCooling water pump
Fuel pump spacer ԝ Camshaft driving gear

Idle gear
ԜFuel injection pump
Pump flange
Don't disassemble! Fuel pump drive gear Crankshaft
gear
Flange bolt
ԛGear case
ԣOil seal
ԚCrankshaft pulley

Disassemble in the order of the numbers in the illustration.
1)Perform steps 1) to 12) of the cylinder head disassembly procedure.
2)Remove the cooling water pump.
3)Remove the crankshaft pulley. (See Point 1 of 4.3.4)
4)Remove the gear case cover. (See Point 2 of 4.3.4)
5)Remove the fuel injection pump. (See Point 3 of 4.3.4)
6)Remove the idle gear assy. (See Point 4 of 4.3.4)
7)Remove the PTO drive gear. (See Point 5 of 4.3.4)
8)Remove the starting motor.
9)Remove the flywheel. (See Point 6 of 4.3.4)
10) Remove the camshaft assy. (See Point 7 of 4.3.4)
11) Remove the gear case. (See Point 8 of 4.3.4)
12) Remove the oil seal from the gear case cover. (See 4.3.6)

Reverse of the disassembly procedure.
83

Point1
[Disassemble]
• Remove the crankshaft pulley using a gear puller
after removing the crankshaft pulley set bolt. When
removing the pulley using the gear puller, use a pad
and carefully operate so as not to damage the thread.
Set the gear puller securely to prevent the pulley from
being damaged.
[Reassemble]
• Apply lithium grease to the oil seal lips. For the oil
seal with double lips dust seal, further slightly apply
engine oil on the lips so as not to damage them.
• Clean by wiping off any oil on both taper surfaces
using detergent.
• Be sure to use the crankshaft pulley installing tool so
as not to damage the oil seal lips. (See 4.3(6) Oil seal
replacement)
• When installing the crankshaft pulley, apply lube oil to
the set bolt to tighten and carefully assemble so as
not to damage the oil seal.
N•m (kgf•m)
Model Tightening torque
3TNV82A to TNV88 112.7 to 122.7 (11.5 to 12.5)
4TNV94L/98/106(T) 107.9 to 127.5 (11.0 to 3.0)
Fuel injection pump
drive gear
Point2 Camshaft gear
[Reassemble]
• When installing the gear case, do not forget to install
B
the two reinforcing bolts at the center. B C C
A
• Measure the backlash of each gear. Idle gear
A
mm PTO gear
3TNV82A to 88 Standard Limit Crankshaft gear
Crankshaft gear, Lubricating oil
Direction of rotation
Camshaft gear, pump gear
0.07 to 0.15 0.17
Fuel injection pump gear, Gear train (4TNV94L to 106)
Idle gear, PTO gear,
Fuel injection pump
drive gear
4TNV94L-106(T) Standard Limit Camshaft gear
Crankshaft gear,
Camshaft gear,
0.08 to 0.14 0.16
Fuel injection pump gear,
B
Idle gear, PTO gear, B C C
Balancer gear
0.12 to 0.18 0.20 A
(only 4TNV106(T)) Idle gear
Lubricating oil pump gear 0.09 to 0.15 0.17 PTO gear
• Apply sealant and install the gear case by correctly
positioning the two dowel pins. Crankshaft gear
Direction of rotation
(R.1)
Gear train (3TNV82A to 4TNV88)
84
Point3: (Refer to 7.2.5 in chapter 7)

[Disassemble]
• Remove the mounting nut of the fuel injection pump
drive gear, remove the gear using the gear puller, and
remove the fuel injection pump. Do not forget to
remove the stay on the rear side. When extracting
the gear using the gear puller, use a pad at the shaft
and carefully operate so as not to damage the thread.
[Reassemble]
• Tightening torque for fuel pump drive gear nut (with-
out lube. Oil)
N•m (kgf•m)
TNV82A to 88 78 to 88 (8.0 to 9.0)
4TNV94L/98/106 (T) 113 to 123 (11.5 to 12.5)
Point4
[Reassemble]
• Assemble crankshaft gear A, fuel injection pump
drive gear B and camshaft gear C at the same time
by aligning with idle gear A, B and C marks.
• Install the idle gear shaft with the oil hole facing
upward.
Point5
[Reassemble]
• Install the PTO drive gear with its inner spline side
facing the flywheel.
Point6
[Disassemble]
• Install a bolt as a handle in the hole at the end face of
the flywheel and remove carefully so as not to dam-
age the ring gear.
[Reassemble]
Flywheel mounting bolt : apply lube oil
N•m (kgf•m)
3TNV82A to 88 83.3 to 88.2 (8.5 to 9.0) Fuel injection pump
drive gear
4TNV94L/98/106 (T) 186.2 to 205.8 (19.0 to 21.0) Camshaft gear
Point7
[Disassemble]
B
• Measure the camshaft side gap. B C C
mm A
Idle gear
Item Standard Limit PTO gear
Side gap 0.05 to 0.20 0.30
Crankshaft gear
• If the measured side gap exceeds the limit, replace Direction of rotation
the thrust metal.
Gear train (3TNV82A to 4TNV88)
85
[Disassemble]
• Since the camshaft gear is shrink-fit, heat it to
180°C to 200°C for extraction.
• For camshaft removal, raise the engine with its mount-
ing flange at the bottom. After removing the thrust
metal mounting bolt from the camshaft gear hole,
extract the camshaft carefully so as not to damage the
bearing bushing.
• Rotate the camshaft a few turns before extracting it to
prevent the tappet from being caught by the cam.
• After removing the camshaft, set the engine horizontal
and fix it on the base.
Unforeseen injury may arise due to falling of slipping

when raising the engine vertically or returning it to the
horizontal position. Proceed carefully so as not to lose
balance.
Point8: Gear case

[Reassemble]
• Do not forget to install the oil pan mounting bolts on the
bottom side when installing the gear case.
• Apply sealant (code No.977770-01212) and install the
gear case by matching the two dowel pints.
86
4.3.5 Parts inspection and measurement

(1) Camshaft
Mainly check the contact between the tappet and cam contact surface, bearing seizure and wear, and gear
damage.
(a)Shaft bend measurement
Support the camshaft with V blocks. Rotate the camshaft
and measure the runout at the center of the camshaft
and at each journal with a dial gage. Half of the runout is
the bend.
mm
Item Standard Limit
Bend 0 to 0.02 0.05 Cap tester
Water leak check in cooling water system
(b)Intake/exhaust cam height measurement

mm
Model Standard Limit
3TNV82A to 88 38.600 to 38.800 38.350
4TNV94L•98 43.400 to 43.600 43.150
4TNV106 (T) 50.900 to 51.100 50.650
(c)Camshaft and bearing hole measurement

Measure the camshaft outside diameter with a
micrometer. The oil clearance shall be calculated by Flywheel side
subtracting the measured camshaft outside diameter Micrometer
from the inside diameter of the camshaft bearing or
bushing. The camshaft bushing at gear case side is
measured with a cylinder gage after insertion to the
cylinder.
Camshaft outside diameter
87
mm
Model Place Item Standard Limit
Bushing I.D. 44.990 to 45.055 45.130
Gear side Camshaft O.D. 44.925 to 44.950 44.890
Oil clearance 0.040 to 0.130 0.240
Bushing I.D. 45.000 to 45.025 45.100
3TNV82A to TNV88 Intermediate position Camshaft O.D. 44.910 to 44.935 44.875
Bushing I.D. 45.000 to 45.025 45.100
Wheel side Camshaft O.D. 44.925 to 44.950 44.890
Oil clearance 0.0500.100 0.210
Bushing I.D. 49.990 to 50.055 50.130
Bushing I.D. 50.000 to 50.025 50.100
TNV94L/98 (T) Intermediate position Camshaft O.D. 49.910 to 49.935 49.875
Bushing I.D. 50.000 to 50.025 50.100
Bushing I.D. 57.980 to 58.050 58.105
Bushing I.D. 58.000 to 58.030 58.105
4TNV106(T) Intermediate position Camshaft O.D. 57.895 to 57.925 57.860
Bushing I.D. 58.000 to 58.030 58.105
(2) Idle gear

Mainly check the bushing seizure and wear, and gear
damage. Idle gear
Shaft
Shaft outside diameter and bushing inside diameter
Inside diameter
Shaft diameter
measurement
mm
Item Standard Limit
Shaft outside diameter 45.950 to 49.975 45.900
Bushing inside diameter 46.000 to 46.025 46.075
Clearance 0.025 to 0.075 0.175 Idle gear
(3) PTO drive gear

Mainly check sticking of bearings on both sides, gear
damage and looseness, and gear shaft damage and
wear.
88
4.3.6 Oil seal replacement (Gear case side)

1)Replace the oil seal with a new one when the gear case is disassembled.
Extract the used oil seal.
2)Insert a new oil seal. Fit the position of the oil seal insertion to the end face of the gear case. (Refer to the
below figure.)
3)Apply lithium grease to the oil seal tips. For the oil seal with double lips dust seal, further,
slightly apply engine oil on the oil seal lip so as not to damage them, when installing the
pulley.
[NOTICE]
Pay attention not to drop any oil on the taper surface of the crankshaft. If dropped, clean by wiping off using
detergent.
4)Carefully install the crankshaft pulley so as not to damage the oil seal lips. Especially for the engine
installed the oil seal with double lips dust seal, be sure to use the crankshaft pulley-installing tool.
Crankshaft pulley
25
Oil seal with doule lips dust seal
0.2 A
46
Guiding
26 20 M141.5
Knurled head
(Rollet) 1.6
1 A
Ǟ39

Ǟ35
C1
.5
C0
C0
C0
.5
.5
Ǟ # 16 17
Crankshaft pulley installing tool

Detail of crankshaft pulley
installing tool (Scale: free)
(Local supply)
For 4TNV94L engine installed
the oil seal with double lips
dust seal
Oil seal with double lips dust seal
4.3.7 Camshaft bushing replacement

Replace the bushing using the special service tool (Refer to No.7 of 4.1.2 in Chapter 4).
89
4.4 Cylinder block
4.4.1 Components
ԡPiston ring
Flywheel ԜPiston & Connecting rod
ԝFlywheel hausing
Gear case flange
ԠTappet
Oil seal
ԢOil seal case
Oil filter
ԛOil suction pipe
ԞBearing cap
ԚOil pan spacer

ԟCrankshaft
ԚOil pan

Disassemble in the order of the numbers in the illustration.
1)Perform steps 1) to 12) in the cylinder head disassembly procedure.
2)Perform steps 1) to 12) in the gear train disassembly procedure.
3)Remove the oil pan. (See Point 1 of 4.4.4)
4)Remove the lubricating oil suction pipe.
5)Remove the piston w/rod. (See Point 2 of 4.4.4)
6)Remove the mounting flange. (See Point 3 of 4.4.4)
7)Remove the bearing metal caps. (See Point 4 of 4.4.4)
8)Remove the crankshaft. (See Point 5 of 4.4.4)
9)Remove the tappets.
10)Remove the pistons and rings. (See Point 6 of 4.4.4)
11)Remove the oil seal from the mounting flange. (See 4.4.8 of 4.4.4)

Reverse of the disassembly procedure.
90

Point1: Oil pan
[Disassemble]
• Sealant is applied to the oil pan mounting surface on
the block. Carefully operate soas not to damage or
distort the bonding surface.
[Reassemble]
• Apply sealant (code No.977770-01212) before reas-
sembly.
Point2: Piston w/rod Crankshaft
[Disassemble] Thickness gage
• Measure the connecting rod side gap.
mm
Standard 0.20 to 0.40 Connecting rod side gap
• Carefully remove the carbon deposit on top of the cyl-

inder so as not to damage the inner side of the cylin-
der.
• Set the piston at the BDC position and remove the
connecting rod cap. Then set the piston at the TDC
position, and push the connecting rod big end with
the wooden shaft of a hammer. Proceed carefully so
as not to cause the cylinder block catch the rod big
end. Set the rod caps and crankpin metals in their
correct combinations.
[Reassemble]
• Apply oil especially carefully to the sliding contact
surfaces of the pistons, rods and rings.
• Use the piston insertion tool (see 12.1-9 in Chapter
12) to insert each piston w/rod in the cylinder block
and install the bearing metal cap.
Rod bolt tightening torque N•m (kgf•m)

Model Standard (apply lube oil)
3TNV82A 37.2 to 41.2 (3.8 to 4.2)
TNV84 to 88 44.1 to 49.0 (4.5 to 5.0)
4TNV94L•98 53.9 to 58.8 (5.5 to 6.0)
4TNV106(T) 78.5 to 83.4 (8.0 to 8.5)
Point3: mounting flange

[Disassemble]
Place the engine on a stable base with the cylinder
block upper surface facing down, and remove the
mounting flange carefully so as not to damage the
combustion surface.
91
[Reassemble]
Apply sealant (code No.977770-01212) and install the
mounting flange by matching the two dowel pins. After
assembly, raise the engine with its mounting flange on
the bottom side.
Unforeseen injury may arise due to falling of slipping

when raising or reversing the engine. Carefully
operate so as not to lose balance.
Point4: Journal bearing cap
[Disassemble]
• Before removing the journal bearing, measure the
crankshaft side gap. Measure it in either method
because there are the next two methods.
1)Install a dial gage on the cylinder block, and move a
crankshaft in front and back, and measure the side
gap as shown in the right figure.
Side gap measurement 1
2)Put a thickness gauge in the clearance between

thrust metal and crankshaft directly, and measure it. Cylinder block
Side gap standard

mm
Crankshaft
Model Standard Limit Standard
3TNV82A to 88 0.140 to 0.220 0.28 width
Thrust metal
4TNV94L to 106 0.130 to 0.230 0.28 Thrust
face
[Reassemble] Bearing cap
• If the side gap exceeds the standard, replace the
thrust metal with an oversize one.
Machine the standard width of the crankshaft thrust Thickness gauge
part into the dimension of the below table at the same
time.
Refer to a parts catalog when ordering the part.
Side gap measurement 2
The surface finishing precision (refer to 4.4.5(2) in
Chapter4): 1.6
0.25 mm Oversized thrust metal (0.25 DS) mm

0.25DS Thrust metal assy code Standard thickness
3TNV82A 119810-02940 2.055 to 2.105
TNV84 to 88 129150-02940 2.055 to 2.105
4TNV94L•98 129900-02940 2.055 to 2.105
4TNV106(T)
The standard width 123900-02940
of the crankshaft thrust2.555
part to 2.605
mm
Model Standard thickness
3TNV82A 25.250 to 25.271
TNV84 to 88 28.250 to 28.271
4TNV94L•98 32.250 to 32.275
4TNV106(T) 36.250 to 36.275
(R.1)
92
[Disassemble]
• Remove the bearing caps, cap side bearings, and
Wheel side
Block side main
thrust metals. Place each thrust metal with identifica- bearing metals
Cap side main
tion of the position and direction. bearing metals
The position number of reassembling is punched on
a metal cap (except for both ends) and a cylinder
block.
Gear side
Thrust metals
Main bearing
[Reassemble]
Upper main bearing metal
• Carefully install each thrust metal so that the grooved
Oil hole
one is positioned away from the cap.
Lower
• Do not confuse the upper and lower main bearing Thrust metal
metals. The upper main bearing metal (block side)
has an oil hole, and the lower one does not. The
“arrow” marks on the cap shall face the flywheel.
Tighten main bearing cap bolts. Groove
Main bearing cap
Main bearing cap bolt tightening torque

(apply lube oil)
N•m (kgf•m)
Model Standard
3TNV82A 76.4 to 80.4 (7.8 to 8.2)
(9
Mark
TNV848 to 8 93.2 to 98.1 (9.5 to 10.5)
Position number
4TNV94L•98 108.1 to 117.9 (11.0 to 12.0) ࡎࠗ࡞
of reassembling
4TNV106(T) 186.2 to 205.8 (19.0 to 21.0)
Point5: Crankshaft
[Disassemble]
Journal bearing cap
• Remove the crankshaft. Remove each main bearing
metal upper (block side) and pair it with the metal cap
side lower metal.
Carefully prevent damage to the bearing or finger

injury when removing the crankshaft because it is
heavy.
93
Point6: Piston pin and rings

[Disassemble]
• Using the piston ring replacer (see 4.1.2 in Chapter Make the punched manufacturer's
mark face upward.
4), remove the piston rings.
• Remove the circlip and remove the piston pin by
Piston ring
pushing it out.
[Reassemble]
• Install each piston ring on the piston, with the Oil ring joint
punched manufacturer’s mark facing upward.
[Reassemble]
• The piston ring joints shall be staggered at by 120° Second
intervals. Do not position the top ring joint vertical to ring joint
Top ring joint
the piston pin. The coil expander joint shall be oppo-
site to the oil ring joint.
Expander joint
[Reassemble]
Ring joints
• When installing the piston pin to the rod and piston,
the punched match mark on the big end of the con-
necting rod shall be opposite to the size mark on the Piston ID mark
Camshaft side
piston top.
Nozzle side
[Reassemble]
• Install the piston in the cylinder clock with the
punched mark on the big end of the rod on the nozzle
side. (The embossed mark at the connecting rod I-
(Flywheel side)
beam section shall be on the flywheel side.)
Cylinder size mark
Engraved mark Piston ID mark

Camshaft side
Embossed mark
(Flywheel side)
Match mark
Flywheel side
( Assembly direction of connecting

rod and piston )
( Assembly direction of connecting
)
4TNV106(T)
rod and piston
(R.1)
94
4.4.5 Parts inspection and measurement
(1) Cylinder block

Especially clean head surface, cylinder bores and oil
holes, and check after removing any carbon deposit and
bonding agent.
(a)Appearance inspection
Check if there is any discoloration or crack. If crack is
suspected, perform color check. Sufficiently clean the oil
holes and check they are not clogged.
(b)Cylinder bore and distortion

Measure at 20 mm below the crest of the liner, at 20 mm
from the bottom end and at the center.
Roundness:
Roundness is found as follows though it is the simple
method. Measure cylinder diameters of the A direction
Cylinder bore
and the B direction on each section of a, b and c.
Roundness is the maximum value among those
difference values.
Cylindricity:
a 20mm
Cylindricity is found as follows though it is the simple A
method.
Measure cylinder diameters of a, b and c sections in b
B
the A direction, and calculate the difference in
Measure in two directions
maximum value and minimum value of the measured c A and B at points a,b and c.
20mm
diameters.
In the same way measure and calculate the difference Cylinder bore measurement positions
in the B direction.
Cylindricity is the maximum value between those
difference values.
mm
Item Model Standard Limit
3TNV82A 82.000 to 82.030 82.200
TNV84 84.000 to 84.030 84.200
TNV88 88.000 to 88.030 88.200
Cylinder inside diameter
4TNV94L 94.000 to 94.030 94.130
4TNV98 98.000 to 98.030 98.130
4TNV106(T) 106.000 to 106.030 106.130
Roundness
Cylinder bore all TNV 0.01 or less 0.03
Cylindricity
95
(c)If the limit is exceeded or any surface defect is

found, repair by boring and honing. Use an
oversized piston (and new piston rings) as
required.
Oversized piston (0.25 mm, with piston rings)

Model Code No. Standard (mm)
3TNV82A 719802-22900 82.250
3TNV84 (T)
129004-22900 84.250
4TNV84
4TNV84T 129508-22900 84.250
3/4TNV88 129005-22900 88.250
4TNV94L 729906-22900 94.250
4TNV98 129902-22700 98.250
4TNV106 729907-22900 106.250
4TNV106T 723907-22910 106.250
Piston ring assy for oversized (0.25 mm)

Model Piston ring code No.
3TNV82A 719802-22950
3TNV84 (T)
129004-22950
4TNV84
4TNV84T 129004-22950
3/4TNV88 129005-22950
4TNV94L 729906-22950
4TNV98 729907-22950
4TNV106 (T) 723907-22950
Cylinder dimension after boring and honing

Cylinder dimension Honing angle Roundness/Cylindricity
Model Surface roughness
(mm) (deg.) (mm)
3TNV82A 82.250 to 82.280
3TNV84 (T)
84.250 to 84.280
4TNV84
3/4TNV88 88.250 to 88.280 Rmax
30 to 40 deg. 0.01 or less
1.0 to 3.5S
4TNV94L 94.250 to 94.280
4TNV98 98.250 to 98.280
4TNV106 (T) 106.250 to 106.280
96
(2) Crankshaft
Mainly check seizure and wear of the crankpins and
journals. Since the crankshaft gear is shrink-fitted, heat
to 180 to 200°C when extraction is necessary.
(a)Shaft portion color check
After washing the crankshaft, inspect it by means of
color check or a magnaflux inspector. Replace it if
cracked or heavily damaged. Slight defects shall be
corrected by grinding.
Inspection by color check
(b)Crankshaft bend
Support the crankshaft journals at both ends with V-
blocks. Use a dial gage and measure the runout at the Bend
center journal while rotating the shaft to inspect the
bend.
Limit 0.02 mm or less

Deflection
Dial gage
V-block V-block
Crankshaft bend measurement
(c)Crankpin and journal measurement

Measure the outside diameter, roundness and taper at
each crankpin and journal.
Correct by grinding if unevenly wear, roundness
exceeding the limit or insufficient outside diameter is
found. Replace if the defect is excessive.
Limit (Diameter)
Item
(mm)
Roundness
0.01
Taper
To look for the oil clearance of crank pin, measure the

inside diameter of crank pin metal according to (5) (d)
described later and calculate.
Crankshaft
journal
Crankpin
Measuring position of the crankpin
and crank journal
97
Crankpin mm
Model & Item Standard Limit
Pin outside diameter 42.952 to 42.962 42.902
3TNV82A Metal thickness 1.487 to 1.500 -
TNV84 to 88 Metal thickness 1.492 to 1.500 -
4TNV94L•98 Metal thickness 1.492 to 1.500 -
4TNV106(T) Metal thickness 1.984 to 1.992 -
If the oil clearance exceeds the limit, use an undersized bearing.
Undersized crankpin bearing (0.25 mm)

Model Code No. Standard thickness (mm)
3TNV82A 119810-23610 1.612 to 1.625
TNV84 to 88 129150-23610 1.617 to 1.625
4TNV94L•98 129900-23610 1.617 to 1.625
4TNV106(T) 123900-23610 2.109 to 2.117
Pin machining dimension

Model Pin machining dimension (mm)
3TNV82A ø 42.702 to 42.712
TNV84 to 88 ø 47.702 to 47.712
4TNV94L•98 ø 57.702 to 57.712
4TNV106 (T) ø 63.702 to 63.712
98
Crank journal mm
Model Item Standard Limit
Journal O.D. 46.952 to 46.962 46.902
3TNV82A Metal thickness 1.987 to 2.000 -
Journal O.D. 53.952 to 53.962 53.902
TNV84 to 88
Metal thickness 1.995 to 1.990 -
(Selective assembly)
Journal O.D. 64.952 to 64.962 64.902
4TNV94•98
Journal O.D. 75.952 to 75.962 75.902
4TNV106(T)
If the clearance limit is exceeded, use an undersized bearing.
Undersized bearing (0.25 mm)

Model Code No. Standard thickness (mm)
3TNV82A 119810-02870 2.112 to 2.125
TNV84 to 88 129150-02870 2.112 to 2.125
4TNV94L•98 129900-02340 2.112 to 2.125
4TNV106 (T) 12900-02340 2.605 to 2.618
Crankshaft Journal machining dimension

Model Journal machining dimension (mm)
3TNV82A ø 46.702 to 46.712
TNV84 to 88 ø 53.702 to 53.712
4TNV94/98 ø 64.702 to 64.712
4TNV106 (T) ø 75.702 to 75.712
99
• Dimension R and finishing precision of crankshaft

journal and pin
As for grinding processing of journal and pin, Super
polishing
machine it by using the grinding wheel of the dimen- Ry=0.8S
sion R of below table. Super

polishing
Thrust
face
Surface finishing precision standard on journal and Ry=0.8S
pin: R
R
R
Ry=0.8S super polishing R
R
Surface finishing precision standard on the thrust
Crank Pin Crank Journal
side of crankshaft arm: 1.6
Crankshaft R machining
mm
Finishing precision standard
Model
of dimension R
3TNV82A
3.5 +0.3/ 0
3/4TNV84(T) to 88
4TNV94L/98(T)
4.0 +0.3/ 0
4TNV106(T)
[NOTICE]
1)If the oil clearance is excessive though the thicknesses of the journal and crankpin metals are normal or if
partial uneven wear is observed, re-grind the crankshaft and use an oversized metals.
2)If rust or surface roughening exists on the rear side of the metals, coat it with blue or minimum. Then
assemble the crankpin metal to the connecting rod, and tighten the rod bolt to the specified torque to
check the metal for contact. If the contact surface occupies 75% or more, the metal is normal. If the con-
tact surface is insufficient, the metal interference is insufficient. Replace the metal with a new one.
(3) Thrust metal inspection

(a)Inspect any damage or wear.
(b)Measure side gap and thrust metal thickness
Side gap and thrust metal thickness mm

Side gap Thrust metal thickness
Model
Standard Limit Standard Limit
3TNV82A
0.14 to 0.22 1.930 to 1.980 1.850
3/4TNV84 (T) to 88
0.28
4TNV94L•98 0.13 to 0.23 1.930 to 1.980 1.850
4TNV106 (T) 0.13 to 0.23 2.430 to 2.480 2.35
If the side gap is exceeded, use an oversized thrust metal. (Refer to point 4 of 4.4.4.)
Oversized metal (0.25 mm)

Model Code No. (Up-down combination)
3TNV82A 119810-02940
3/4TNV84(T) to 88 129150-02940
4TNV94L to 4TNV106 (T) 129900-02940
100
(4) Piston
Especially clean the combustion surface, circumference,
ring grooves and piston pin bosses, and check after
removing any carbon deposit. Any burr at a ring groove
or snap ring groove shall be removed. If crack is
suspected, inspect by color check.
(a)Piston outside diameter measurement
Measure the long diameter at H mm from the bottom end
of the piston of the oval hole in the vertical direction to Measurement
position
the piston pin hole.
H mm
Piston outside diameter
Piston outside diameter
mm
Outside diameter Clearance between Measurement
Model Limit
Standard piston and cylinder position (H)
3TNV82A 81.950 to 81.980 81.905 0.040 to 0.060 16
3,4TNV84(T) 83.940 to 83.970 83.895 24
0.050 to 0.070
3,4TNV88 87.940 to 87.970 87.895 24
4TNV94L 93.935 to 93.965 93.900 0.055 to 0.075 22
4TNV98 (T) 97.930 to 97.960 97.895 22
0.060 to 0.080
4TNV106 (T) 105.930 to 105.960 105.880 30
If the piston outside diameter exceed the limit, replace the piston with new one.
If the clearance between piston and cylinder exceeds the limit, use an oversized piston. (Refer to the tables of
oversized pistons, oversized piston rings and cylinder boring dimension in (1) (c) above.)
Selective pairing of cylinder and piston
Piston must be paired with cylinder according to the below table. The size mark of a piston is shown on
the top surface of the piston and the size mark of a cylinder block is shown on the non-operating side of
the cylinder block. The service parts of pistons are provided.
Piston outside diameter. D2

+0.015 max. below +0.005 below 0 below -0.005
Tolerance
+0.005 min. 0 min. -0.005 min. -0.015 min.
Size mark L ML MS S
+0.030 max.
L c c ° °
Cylinder +0.020 min.
inside below +0.020
M ° c c °
diameter +0.010 min.
D1 below +0.010
S ° ° c c
0 min.
Cylinder inside diameter Piston outside diameter.

Model
D1 D2
3TNV82A 82 81.965
3,4TNV84 (T) 84 83.955
3,4TNV88 88 87.955
4TNV94L 94 93.950
4TNV98 (T) 98 97.945
4TNV106 (T) 106 105.945
101
(b)Piston pin hole measurement

Measure the outside diameter of piston pin and the Measure at positions a,b and c
in directions A and B.
inside diameter of piston pin hole. Calculate the
a b c
clearance between piston pin and piston pin hole. If any A
data exceeds the limit, replace the part with a new one.
mm
B
Pin I.D. 23.000 to 23.009 23.039
Piston pin outside diameter
3TNV82A Pin O.D. 22.995 to 23.000 22.965
Clearance 0.000 to 0.014 0.074
Pin I.D. 26.000 to 26.009 26.039
TNV84 to 88 Pin O.D. 25.995 to 26.000 25.965
Clearance 0.000 to 0.014 0.074
Pin I.D. 30.000 to 30.009 30.039
4TNV94L•
Pin O.D. 29.989 to 30.000 29.959
4TNV98 (T)
Clearance 0.000 to 0.020 0.080
Pin I.D. 37.000 to 37.011 37.039
4TNV106 (T) Pin O.D. 36.989 to 37.000 36.959
Clearance 0.000 to 0.022 0.080
(c)Piston ring, ring groove and end clearance

measurement
• Except for the top ring, to measure the piston ring
Top ring Top ring
groove width, first measure the width of the piston
ring. Then insert the piston ring into the ring. Then Second ring Second ring
insert the piston ring into the ring groove. Insert a
thickness gage in between the piston ring and groove Oil ring Oil ring
to measure the gap between them. Obtain the ring
groove width by adding ring width to the measured
4TNV94L㨪 3TNV82A㨪
side clearance. 4TNV106(T) 3/4TNV88
• To measure the end clearance, push the piston ring
into the sleeve using the piston head, insert a thick- Ring components
ness gage in end clearance to measure. The ring

shall be pushed in to approx. 30 mm above the bot-
tom end of the cylinder. For the top ring, measure
only the piston ring joint end clearance in normal Head surface
state.
Cylinder block
Pistonring
Approx.
Width 30mm
Thickness Joint end clearance

Measuring side clearance
Ring joint end clearance
measurement
(R.1)
102
Piston ring dimension

mm
Model Part Item Standard Limit
Ring groove width 2.065 to 2.080 2.170
Ring width 1.970 to 1.990 1.950
Top ring
Side clearance 0.075 to 0.110 0.200
End clearance 0.200 to 0.400 0.490
Ring width 1.970 to 1.990 1.950
TNV82A/84 Second ring
Ring width 3.970 to 3.990 3.950
Oil ring
Ring width 1.970 to 1.990 1.950
Top ring
Ring width 1.970 to 1.990 1.950
TNV88 Second ring
Ring width 3.970 to 3.990 3.950
Oil ring
Ring groove width 2.040 to 2.060 -
Ring width 1.940 to 1.960 1.920
Top ring
Side clearance 0.080 to 0.120 -
Ring width 1.970 to 1.990 1.950
4TNV94L•98 Second ring
Ring width 2.970 to 2.990 2.950
Oil ring
Ring width 2.440 to 2.460 2.420
Top ring
Ring width 1.970 to 1.990 1.950
4TNV106 (T) Second ring
Ring width 2.970 to 2.990 2.950
Oil ring
(R.1)
103
(5) Connecting rod

(a)Appearance inspection
Inspect the portion near the boundary of the chamfered
m
portion and I-beam section of the big and small ends of 0m
10
the connecting rod as well as the portion near the oil hole m
0m Parallelism
of the bushing at the small end for cracks, deformation, 10
and discoloration.
(b)Twist and parallelism measurement Use a
connecting rod aligner and measure the twist and
bend. Twist
mm
Item Standard dimension Limit dimension Mandrel
Twist and 0.03 or less
0.08
parallelism per 100 mm
Twist and parallelism measurement
(c)Rod small end measurement
Measure the pin outside diameter according to
4.4.5.(4) (a) described above.
mm
Piston pin
23.025 to 23.038 23.068
I.D. bushing
3TNV82A
Pin O.D. 22.995 to 23.000 22.967
Clearance 0.025 to 0.043 0.101
Piston pin Connecting rod
26.025 to 26.038 26.068 aligner
I.D. bushing
TNV84 to 88
Pin O.D. 25.995 to 26.000 25.967
Clearance 0.025 to 0.043 0.101
Piston pin
30.025 to 30.038 30.068
I.D. bushing
4TNV94L•98
Pin O.D. 29.987 to 30.000 29.959
Clearance 0.025 to 0.051 0.109 Twist measurement using
a connecting rod aligner
Piston pin
37.025 to 37.038 37.068
I.D. bushing
4TNV106 (T)
Pin O.D. 36.989 to 37.000 36.961
Clearance 0.025 to 0.049 0.107
If the bushing is to be replaced because the oil clearance

exceeds the limit, use spare part.
Model Service part code

3TNV82A 119810-23910
TNV84 to 88 129100-23910
4TNV94L•98 (T) 129900-23910
4TNV106 (T) 123900-23910
Cylinder gage
Connecting rod small end
104
(d)Rod big end measurement

Measure the crankpin and bushing according to
4.4.5.(2) (c) described above.
Calculate the oil clearance of a crank pin metal and a
crank pin from the measured values of the crank pin metal
inner diameter and the crank pin outside diameter.
Replace a crank pin metal if the oil clearance becomes
about the limit dimension of the below table.
Correct by grinding if unevenly wear, roundness
exceeding the limit or insufficient outside diameter is Cylinder gage
found. Also use an undersized metal. (Refer to the above
(2) c.)
[NOTICE]
When measuring the inside diameter of the rod big end,
install the crankpin metals in the rod big end not to
mistake the top and bottom of the metals and tighten
the rod bolts by the standard torque. Rod bushing I.D. measurement
Tightening torque of rod bolt

Tightening torque Lubricating oil application
Model
N•m (kgf•m) (threaded portion, and bearing seat surface)
37.2 to 41.2
3TNV82A
(3.8 to 4.2)
44.1 to 49.0
TNV84/88
(4.5 to 5.0)
Lube. oil applied
53.9 to 58.8
4TNV94L/98
(5.5 to 6.0)
78.5 to 83.4
4TNV106 (T)
(8.0 to 8.5)
Standard of rod big end mm

Rod I.D. bushing 42.952 to 42.962 42.902
Crankpin O.D. 43.000 to 43.042 -
3TNV82A
Clearance 0.038 to 0.090 0.150
Rod I.D. bushing 47.952 to 47.962 47.902
Crankpin O.D. 48.000 to 48.026 -
TNV84/88
Clearance 0.038 to 0.074 0.150
Rod I.D. bushing 57.952 to 57.962 57.902
Crankpin O.D. 58.000 to 58.026 -
4TNV94L/98
Clearance 0.038 to 0.074 0.150
Rod I.D. bushing 63.952 to 63.962 63.902
Crankpin O.D. 64.016 to 64.042 -
4TNV106 (T)
Clearance 0.054 to 0.090 0.150
105
(6) Tappet
Mainly check the tappet contact surface with the cam and
push rod. Slight surface defects shall be corrected with an
oilstone.
(a)Tappet stem outside diameter measurement
mm
Tappet
12.000 to 12.025 12.045 Abnormal contact Normal contact
hole I.D.
surface surface
TNV82A to 88
Stem O.D. 11.975 to 11.990 11.955
Tappet
Clearance 0.010 to 0.050 0.090
Tappet
12.000 to 12.018 12.038
hole I.D.
4TNV94L•98
Stem O.D. 11.975 to 11.990 11.955
Clearance 0.010 to 0.043 0.083
Tappet
14.000 to 14.018 14.038
hole I.D.
4TNV106 (T)
Stem O.D. 13.966 to 13.984 13.946
Clearance 0.015 to 0.052 0.092
Tappet stem outside diameter measuremen
4.4.6 Cylinder bore correction

1)Slight uneven worn, flawed, etc. shall be corrected by
Flex-Hone
honing only. If the cylinder is unevenly worn partially,
flawed or otherwise damaged and cannot be repaired
simply by honing, rebore the cylinder first and then
Electric drill
hone. See 4.4.5.(1) (c) for the boring dimension.
Lube oil Diesel oil
2)Items to be prepared for honing 50% 50%
• Flex-Hone
(see No.8 of 4.1.2 in Chapter 4)
Flex-Hone Honing fluid
• Electric drill
Items to be prepared for honing
• Honing fluid
(50:50 mixture of lube oil and diesel oil)
106
3)Apply the honing fluid to the Flex-Hone and turn the

electric drill at 300 to 1200 rpm. Then insert the Flex-
Hone into the cylinder bore while turning it, and move
it up and down for about 30 sec. to obtain a honing
mark with a cross hatch angle of 30 to 40°.
㨪40q
30q
[NOTICE]
1)Avoid faster revolution than 1200 rpm since it may
cause breakdown.
2)Do not insert or extract the Flex-Hone in stopped state
because the cylinder will be damaged.
Honing cross hatch
Service life of cylinder block (H3)

(H3=3H1)
Boring and honing interval (H2)
(H2=1.5H1)
Time for honing (H1)
Increase in L.O.C. Increase in L.O.C. Increase in L.O.C. Increase in L.O.C.

or blow-by or blow-by or blow-by or blow-by
Honing Boring Honing
Study if an oversized piston or piston ring is usable
4.4.7 Piston pin bushing replacement

Replace bushing by using the special service tool (see 4.1.2 No.3 in Chapter 4).
4.4.8 Oil seal replacement (Flywheel housing side)

1)Replace oil seal, when a flywheel housing is removed. Extract the used oil seal.
2)Insert a new oil seal with the oil seal insertion tool.
3)Apply lithium grease.
107
5. Lubrication system
5. Lubrication system
5.1 Lubrication system diagram
̪
Turbo charger
̪Oil cooler
Bypass valve Fuel injection

pump
Oil pressure
swich
Cylinder body࡮Main gallery

Regulator
valve
Intermediate Camshaft Crank
Oil pump gear shaft bearing journal
̪Piston Rocker arm Crank pin

Oil suction pipe bearing
(strainer)
Rocker arm
Tappet࡮
Cam face
Oil pan
Note: It varies in the specifications of each model whether Oil cooler, Piston and Turbo charger of the * mark
are attached.
(R.1)
108
5. Lubrication System
5.2 Trochoid pump components

Trochoid pump (3TNV82A to TNV88) Trochoid pump (4TNV94L/98/106)
Outer rotor Gear case
Crankshaft Inner rotor
Pump cover Outer rotor

Control valve
Control valve
Plug
Gear case Punch mark Crankshaft
5.3 Disassembly (Reverse the procedure below for assembly)

1)Loosen the belt, and remove the radiator pulley, fan and V-belt. See 4.2.2. 2) in Chapter 4.
2)Remove the crankshaft pulley. See 4.3.2.3) in Chapter 4.
3)Remove the gear case cover. See 4.3.2. 4) in Chapter 4.
4)Remove the lubricating oil pump assy from the gear case for 4TNV94/98/106. (5.4 Point 1)
Remove the lube oil cover from gear case cover for 3TNV82A-88. (5.4 Point 1)
5)Remove the pressure regulating valve from the lubricating oil pump body. (5.4 Point 2)
5.4 Servicing points

Point 1
[Disassemble]
• Check if the pump rotates smoothly and see that there is no play between the shaft and gear, and inner
rotor.
[Reassemble]
[NOTICE]
Always check if the pump rotates smoothly after installation on the gear case.
Running the engine when the pump rotation is heavy may cause the pump to be burnt.
1)3TNV82A-88
• Apply lube oil to rotor (outer/inner) insertion part.
• Assemble the outer rotor so that the mark of the end face may become a cover side when inserting it in the
gear case.
• Fasten a lube oil pump cover by the standard torque.
• Tightening torque: 6.9 ± 1.5 N•m (0.7 ± 0.15 kgf•m)
• When replacing the lube oil pump, replace the whole assy.
2)4TNV94L/98/106
• Apply lube oil to lube oil pump insertion part of gear case.
• Install the outer rotor in the gear case so that the punch mark on the end face is seen.
• When replacing the lube oil pump, replace the whole assy.
109-1
Point 2
[Disassemble-Reassemble]
• Only wash the pressure regulating valve. Disassembly is unnecessary unless any abnormality in operation
is detected.
• Lube oil pressure

Refer to the table of 12.1 in chapter 12 for lube oil pressure.
• Structure of pressure regulating valve
33
M141.5
(3TNV82A㨪4TNV88)
(R.1)
109-2
5.5 Parts Inspection and measurement

5.5.1 Trochoid pump inspection and measurement
(1) Outside clearance and side clearance of
outer rotor Outer rotor
Insert a gap gage between a outer rotor and a pump Gear case
body, and measure the clearance.
Outside clearance mm
3TNV82A to 88 0.12 to 0.21 0.30 Outer diameter clearance
4TNV94L/98 0.100 to 0.155 0.25
4TNV106(T) 0.100 to 0.165 0.25
(2) Tip clearance between outer rotor and

inner rotor
Insert a gap gage between an outer rotor and an inner
rotor, and measure the tip clearance.
Tip clearance mm
Standard Limit
- 0.16
Side clearance
(3) Side clearance of outer rotor

When measuring a side clearance, put a right-angle gage to the pump body, insert a gap gage and measure
the clearance.
Side clearance mm
3TNV82A to 88 0.02 to 0.07 0.12
4TNV94L/98 0.05 to 0.10 0.15
4TNV106(T) 0.03 to 0.12 0.17
(R.1)
110
(4) Inner rotor and gear boss clearance (3TNV82A-4TNV88)
Standard Standard Standard

Item Part dimension clearance clearance limit
(mm) (mm) (mm)
Inside clearance Gear boss diameter 53.05 to 53.15
0.3 to 0.5 0.6
of inner rotor Rotor inner diameter 53.45 to 53.55
Width across flat Width across flat of gear boss 49.45 to 49.75
0.2 to 0.6 0.7
clearance of inner rotor Width across flat of rotor 49.95 to 50.05
Width across
flat of rotor
Crank gear
Rotor inner
diameter
Inner rotor
(5) Rotor shaft clearance (4TNV94L/98/106)

Rotor shaft
Measure the outside diameter of rotor shaft and the shaft
hole diameter of gear case. Calculate the clearance from Shaft
that difference. O.D.
Bearing
I.D.
Gear case
Lube oil pump bearing
mm
Model Inspection item Standard Limit
Gear case bearing I.D. 12.980 to 13.020 13.05
4TNV94L/98 Rotor shaft O.D. 12.955 to 12.970 12.945
Rotor clearance 0.035 to 0.065 0.105
4TNV106(T) Rotor shaft O.D. 12.955 to 12.965 12.945
111-1
5.6 Lube oil filter

5.6.1 Lube oil filter construction
The lube oil filter is a full-flow paper element type.
Cylinder block
mounted to the side of the cylinder body with the filter
bracket. The cartridge type filter is easy to remove.
To prevent seizure in the event of the filter clogging up, a
bypass circuit is provided in the oil filter. The bypass
Filter bracket
valve in the filter element opens when the difference in Gasket
the pressure in front and behind the paper element
reaches 0.8-1.2 kg/cm2.
Bolt
Lube oil filter

Lube oil filter
Unit
Part No. - 129150-35152
Type - Full flow, paper element
Filtration area m2 0.12
Discharge volume l/min 30
MPa 0.02-0.04
Pressure loss (0.2-0.4)
(kgf/cm2)
By-pass valve MPa 0.08-0.12
regulating pressure (kgf/cm2) (0.8-1.2)
5.6.2 Lube oil filter replacement

Refer to 2.2.2(1).
(R.1)
111-2
6. Cooling system
6. Cooling system
6.1 Cooling water system
Thermostat
Cylinder head
Bypass
Radiator
Coolant recovery tank
Cylinder block
Cooling water pump
L.O. cooler
6.2 Cooling water pump components
Cylinder head
Thermostat cover
Joint
Thermostat
Cooling water pump
Thermo switch
V-pulley
Spacer
Note) This figure shows the 4TNV84

Fan
112
6. Cooling system
6.3 Disassembly (Reverse the procedure below for assembly)

1)Remove the alternator. See 4.2.2. 1) in Chapter 4.
2)Remove the fan, V-belt and pulley. See 4.2.2. 2) in Chapter 4.
3)Remove the cooling water pump. (Point 1, in below 6.4)
4)Remove the thermostat. (Point 2 in below 6.4)
6.4 Servicing points

Point 1
Disassemble-Reassemble:
• Check to see that the cooling water pump bearing is free from abnormal noise, sticking or play and water
leakage from the bearing. If replacement is necessary, replace the whole cooling water pump assy.
[NOTICE]
Replace the O-ring of the cooling water pump with
new one when disassembling. And, be sure to use the O-Ring
special O-ring for each engine model, because the
material is different, although the dimension is the
Joint
same as a commercial part. (Refer to the right figure.)
Point 2 Cooling water pump

Disassemble:
• Check the thermostat function. See 2.7 in Chapter 2
for the inspection method.
113
7. Fuel injection pump / Governor

Only the outline of the MP fuel pump is explained in this chapter. Refer to the MP pump service manual of the
separate volume for the disassembly and assembly.
7.1 Introduction
It is described about the features of the fuel injection
pump, YDP-MP, manufactured by Yanmar, disassembly,
assembly and adjustment procedure.
Fuel injection pump is the most important equipment,

which is enable to make the sensitive adjustment
according to the variable load of the engine.
Therefore all of the parts are required not only very

precise machining but also finest, assembling with top
level.
The careful arrangement of keeping off the dust and the
rust when disassemble, adjustment and reassemble of
the fuel injection pump is made in the market.
Yanmar YDP-MP Pump is a distributor type pump which is unified of Mono-plunger, a distributing shaft, a
hydraulic head which equipped the delivery valve for each cylinder, pump housing which has a cam shaft
internally and governor.
The fuel, which is pressurized by the up and down movement of the plunger driven by the cam-rotation, is
supplied through the distributor shaft, which is rotating accordingly.
There are a model YDP-MP2 and a model YDP-MP4, and plunger diameter and fuel cam speed are different.
7.2 Fuel injection pump

7.2.1 Fuel system diagram
114
7.2.2 External view and components
ԙFuel injection pipe
Cylinder head
Fuel
filter
Fuel injection valve
Cooling water pump

ԘV-belt/V-pulley
ԘCooling fan
Intake maniforld
Water separator
ԜFuel pump spacer
Camshaft driving gear
ԟFuel injection pump
Crankshaft gear
Pump flange
Don't disassemble!
ԛFuel pump drive gear
ԜDrive gear nut
Gear case
Oil seal
Note) This figure shows the 3TNV84 Crankshaft pulley

Disassembly from the engine body
1)Remove the cooling fan, pulley and V-belt.
2)Remove the fuel injection pipe, fuel oil piping, fuel return pipe and rear stay. See point 1 of 7.2.5.
3)Remove the fuel injection pump cover (the cover of the drive gear).
4)Make ID marks on the gearing part of the pump drive gear and the idle gear with paint and so on.
See Point 2 of 7.2.5.
5)Loosen a fuel pump drive gear nut, and remove a pump drive gear from the fuel pump by using a gear
puller. See Point 3 of 4.3.4.
6)Remove a drive gear nut carefully not to drop it to the inside of the gear case.
7)Record the installation angle of the fuel pump precisely by using a mark-off line and a sticker.
See (4) of 2.2.7.
8)Remove the fuel injection pump. See Point 3 of 7.2.5.
115
Fuel Cylinder No.

injection Cylinder No.
pipe 1 Injection 1
Governor side pipe
B
Engine
2 2
Engine
Governor
side
3 3
B C
Fuel 4 Fuel pump C

pump A
Drive side
A D
Drive side
Fuel pump (3 cylinder)
Fuel pump (4 cylinder)
7.2.4 Assembly procedure

Reverse the disassembly procedure and adjust the fuel injection timing finally. See (4) of 2.2.7.

Fuel injection pump
Point 1
[Disassemble]
I.D. mark
• Block an entrance with the tape so that trash may not
enter the fuel injection pipe and the fuel injection Flange
pump. bolt
Point 2
[Disassemble]
Gear
• After putting the I.D. marks on the gearing part of the installation nut
pump drive gear and the idle gear with paint and so Idle gear
on, remove the gear installation nut. Fuel pump driving gear
Fuel pump driving gear
[NOTICE]
Don't remove four flange bolts.
[Reassemble]
• Reassemble the pump driving gear while checking the I.D. marks on the driving gear and idle gear.
Tightening torque of the gear installation nut
Lubricating oil application
Model N•m (kgf•m)
(thread portion, and seat surface)
TNV82A to 88 78 to 88 (8 to 9)
Not applied
4TNV94 to 106 (T) 113 to 123 (11.5 to 12.5)
116
Point 3
[Disassemble]
There is an acoustic material part to name as fuel pump spacer between the fuel pump and the cylinder
block. Loosen fuel pump installation bolts with a closed wrench when disassembling a fuel pump.
[NOTICE]
An intake manifold may obstruct the disassembly of the fuel pump by the engine model. Remove the fuel
pump after removing the intake manifold first.
Cylinder block Fuel pump spacer Cylinder head Suction manifold
Closed wren
Fuel pump
Fuel pump Disassembling a fuel pump
[Reassemble]
When installing a fuel pump on the gear case, put a fuel pump spacer between the cylinder blocks, and
install it.
7.2.6 C.S.D. (Cold Start Device)

In order to facilitate easy engine starting under cold temperature, the cold starting advancer senses the
cooling water temperature and advances the fuel injection timing.
[NOTICE]
When engine starts under cold temperature, the minimum engine speed is automatically about 100-300
min-1 higher than the normal low speed by the function of C.S.D.. A few minutes later the engine speed will
reduce gradually to the normal minimum speed. Therefore it has the possibility that the machine unit begins
to work because of the higher engine speed right after the engine start, and very dangerous.
Attention is especially necessary when the throttle lever of the governor is put in half-throttle position to
hasten the warming up of the engine.
(R.1)
117
8. TURBOCHARGER
8. Turbocharger: Disassembly, inspection and reassembly

8.1 Structure and functions
8.1.1 Main specifications
3TNV84T (CL, VM)
Applicable engine model (application) 3TNV84T (VM) 4TNV106T (CL, VM)
4TNV84T (CL)
Turbocharger model RHB31 RHB51 RHF5
Turbocharger specification Standard (w/waste gate)
Turbine type Radial flow
Blower (compressor) type Centrifugal
Lubrication method External lubrication
Max．continuous allowable speed 250,000 180,000
Max．continuous allowable gas inlet
750
temperature
Dry weight
24 (2.4) 41 (4.2) 46 (4.7)
N (kgf)
Note) VM application is provided with the waste gate.
8.1.2 Construction
13 14 12 15 8 9 10 17
Air outlet
Oil inlet
Air inlet
Gas outlet
19
18
Oil outlet
2
Gas inlet 11 1 20 3 5 16 6 4 7
118
8. TURBOCHARGER
8.1.3 Structural and functional outline
No. Part name

1 Turbine shaft
2 OiN thrower
3 Turbine side seal ring
4 Seal plate
5 Journal bearing
6 Thrust bearing
7 Compressor housing
8 M5 hexagon bolt
9 M5 spring washer
10 Compressor side clamp
11 Turbine housing
12 M6 hexagon bolt
13 Turbine side clamp
14 Lock washer
15 Bearing housing
16 Retaining ring
17 M3 countersunk flat head screw
18 Compressor wheel
19 Shaft end nut
20 Heat protector
(1) Turbine
The exhaust gas from the engine is accelerated at the nozzle portion in the turbine housing and blown onto
the turbine impeller to rotate the turbine shaft.
This is called the turbine. A seal ring and heat insulating plate are installed to prevent the bearing from
adverse influence of the gas.
(2) Compressor
The compressor impeller installed on the turbine shaft rotates with the shaft to suck and compress air for
feeding into the intake manifold.
This is called the blower or compressor.
(3) Bearings
Thrust bearing
As the turbine shaft is constantly applied with a thrust force, this bearing prevents the shaft from being
moved by the thrust force.
Radial bearing
A floating bearing is adopted. Since the bearing moves with the turbine shaft as the oil films are formed
both inside and outside the bearing, the bearing sliding speed is slower than the turbine shaft speed,
resulting in higher dynamic stability.
(4) Compressor side sealing mechanism
To prevent the intake air and oil form leaking, a seal ring and a seal plate are provided to form a double wall
structure on the rear side of the compressor impeller.
(5) Waste gate
When the blower side pressure (intake air pressure) exceeds the specified level, the exhaust gas at the
turbine inlet is partially bypassed to the exhaust discharge side to control the turbine rpm so as to maintain the
intake pressure at the specified level for improving the response to load variation in the low to medium speed
range and to minimize black smoke generation. It consists of a control assembly separated from the
turbocharger and a valve assembly installed in the turbine impeller chamber.
119
8. TURBOCHARGER
8.1.4 Components
12
15 8 7
14
13 9
45
11 3
2 23 22
20
21
28
10 29
24
27
6
19
1 29
14
13
17
18 26
16 32
25 31 30
No. Part name No. Part name

1 Turbine shaft 17 Bolt
2 Thrust bushing 18 Lock plate
3 Oil thrower 19 Bearing housing
4 Seal ring 20 Retaining ring
5 Seal ring 21 Screw
6 Seal ring (turbine side) 22 Screw
7 Lock nut 23 Lock washer
8 Impeller 24 Heat protector
9 Seal plate 25 Liquid gasket
10 Journal bearing 26 Waste gate actuator
11 Thrust bearing 27 Hose
12 Compressor housing 28 Adapter
13 Flanged bolt 29 Clip
14 Spring washer 30 Retaining ring
15 Clamp 31 Waste gate valve
16 Turbine housing 32 Link plate
120
8. TURBOCHARGER
8.2 Service standards and tightening torque
8.2.1 Service standards
F
B D C A H2 H1
K
Turbine side Compresson side
E G1 G2
(1) RHF5 type

Unit: mm
Standard dimension Wear limit
Turbine shaft journal outside diameter (A) 7.99 to 8.00 7.98
Turbine shaft seal ring groove width (E) 1.25 to 1.28 1.29
Turbine
Compressor side seal ring groove width (G1) 1.22 to 1.23 1.31
shaft
Compressor side seal ring groove width (G2) 1.02 to 1.03 1.11
Turbine shaft run-out 0.002 0.011
Journal bearing inside diameter (C) 8.01 to 8.03 8.04
Bearing Journal bearing outside diameter (D) 12.32 to 12.33 12.31
Bearing housing inside diameter (B) 12.40 to 12.41 12.42
Thrust Thrust bearing width (J) 3.99 to 4.01 3.98
bearing Thrust bushing groove dimension (K) 4.04 to 4.05 4.07
Turbine side (bearing housing) (F) 15.00 to 15.02 15.05
Seal ring
fixing Compressor side (seal ring) (H1) 12.40 to 12.42 12.45
area
Compressor side (seal ring) (H2) 10.00 to 10.02 10.05
Rotor play in axial direction 0.03 to 0.06 0.09
Rotor play in radial direction 0.08 to 0.13 0.17
121
8. TURBOCHARGER
(2) RHB31/RHB51 type

Unit: mm
Standard dimension Wear limit
RHB31 RHB51 RHB31 RHB51
Turbine shaft journal outside diameter (A) 6.257 to 6.263 7.99 to 8.00 6.25 7.98
Turbine shaft seal ring groove width (E) 1.038 to 1.062 1.25 to 1.28 1.07 1.29
Turbine
Compressor side seal ring groove width (G1) 1.02 to 1.03 1.22 to 1.23 1.04 1.31
shaft
Compressor side seal ring groove width (G2) 0.82 to 0.83 1.02 to 1.03 0.84 1.11
Turbine shaft run-out 0.002 0.002 0.005 0.011
Journal bearing inside diameter (C) 6.275 to 6.285 8.01 to 8.03 6.29 8.04
Bearing Journal bearing outside diameter (D) 9.940 to 9.946 12.32 to 12.33 9.93 12.31
Bearing housing inside diameter (B) 9.995 to 10.005 12.40 to 12.41 10.01 12.42
Thrust Thrust bearing width (J) 3.59 to 3.61 3.99 to 4.01 3.58 3.98
bearing Thrust bushing groove dimension (K) 3.632 to 3.642 4.04 to 4.05 3.65 4.07
Turbine side (bearing housing) (F) 11.00 to 11.018 15.00 to 15.02 11.03 15.05
Seal ring
fixing Compressor side (seal ring) (H1) 9.987 to 10.025 12.40 to 12.42 10.04 12.45
area Compressor side (seal ring) (H2) 7.968 to 8.00 10.00 to 10.02 8.01 10.05
Rotor play in axial direction 0.022 to 0.053 0.03 to 0.06 0.07 0.09
Rotor play in radial direction 0.061 to 0.093 0.08 to 0.13 0.12 0.17
8.2.2 Tightening torque
(1) RHF5 type

N•m (kgf•cm)
Part Thread diameter Tightening torque
Turbine housing set bolt M8 27 to 29 (275 to 295)
Compressor housing set bolt M5 4.2 to 5.2 (43 to 53)
Thrust bearing set screw M3 1.2 to 1.4 (12 to 14)
Seal plate set screw M3 1.2 to 1.4 (12 to 14)
Blower impeller set nut
M5 1.8 to 2.2 (18 to 22)
(left-handed screw)
(2) RHB31/ RHB51 type

N•m (kgf•cm)
Tightening torque
Part Thread diameter
RHB31 RHB51
Waste gate actuator set bolt M5 3.9 to 4.9 (40 to 50) 3.9 to 4.9 (40 to 50)
M6 11.8 to 12.8 (120 to 130) 11.8 to 12.8 (120 to 130)
Lock plate set bolt
M8 11.8 to 12.8 (120 to 130) 27.0 to 28.9 (275 to 295)
Thrust bearing set screw M3 1.2 to 1.4 (12 to 14) 1.2 to 1.4 (12 to 14)
Seal plate set screw M3 1.2 to 1.4 (12 to 14) 1.2 to 1.4 (12 to 14)
Blower impeller set nut
M5 0.9 to 1.1 (9 to 10) 1.8 to 2.2 (18 to 22)
(left-handed screw)
122
8. TURBOCHARGER
8.3 Periodic inspection procedure
8.3.1 Periodic inspection intervals

Periodically inspect the turbocharger for the overall conditions and fouling.
The inspection interval varies with the operating conditions, but refer to the table below for the guideline for
each application.
Application Inspection interval

Every 6 months Every 12 months Every 24 months
For vehicles (automobiles)
or 60,000km or 150,000km or 300,000km
For construction machinery
or 500hrs or 1,000hrs or 2,000hrs
For faming machinery
or 200hrs or 400hrs or 800hrs
For marine use
or 1,500hrs or 3,000hrs or 6,000hrs
Rotor rotation c
Rotor play c
Overhaul and overall
c
inspection
Oil filter cleaning and
inspection Based on engine operation manual
Engine oil replacement
123
8. TURBOCHARGER
8.3.2 Inspection procedure
(1) Rotor rotation inspection

Inspect the rotor rotation by listening to any abnormal sound generation during rotation.
For inspection with a sound detecting bar, bring the tip end of the bar into strong contact with the turbocharger
case and raise the engine speed gradually.
If any high pitch sound is generated at intervals of 2 to 3 seconds, the rotation is abnormal. Since the bearing
or rotor may be defective in this state, either replace or overhaul the turbocharger.
(2) Rotor play inspection

Remove the turbocharger from the engine and inspect the rotor play in the axial and radial directions
according to the procedure below.
After removing the turbocharger from the engine, always bind the oil inlet and outlet holes with adhesive tape.
Rotor play in axial direction
Turbine wheel chamber
Magnet base
Move the turbine shaft

in the axial direction.
Dial gage
Axial play Service standard: 0.03 to 0.06 mm

Wear limit : 0.09 mm
124
8. TURBOCHARGER
8.3.3 Waste gate valve adjustment procedure
Rotor play in radial direction
Dial gage
Magnet base
Oil outlet
Move the turbine shaft in the radial

Radial play direction at the same time on the
left and right sides.
Oil inlet
Service standard: 0.08 to 0.13 mm

Wear limit : 0.17 mm
It is indispensable to adjust the waste gate valve opening pressure and lift after its overhaul or inner parts
replacement.
Negligence of this adjustment will adversely affect the engine performance.
[NOTICE]
If the adjustment is impossible, give up overhaul but replace the whole turbocharger assembly.
(1) Method for checking the waste gate valve opening pressure and lift
(a)Equipment
Prepare the equipment shown in the figure below.
125
8. TURBOCHARGER
(b)Measuring instruments and devices

Dial gage Capable of measuring 0 to 10 mm (A flat head type is recommendable.)
Manometer Mercury column or electrical type (capable of measuring 0 to 1500 mmHg)
Pressure regulating valve Allowing gradual adjustment in a range between 0 and 2 kgf/cm2 (0.196 Mpa)
Pressure reducing valve Used for suppressing the air supply pressure at 5 kgf/cm2 (0.49 Mpa) or less.
Pressure gage Bourdon tube pressure gage (0 to 10 kgf/cm2 (0.98 Mpa))
Waste gate actuator

Rod
Pressure gage
Clip
Dial gage
Hose
Compressed air
Adapter <5 kg/cm2

(0.49 Mpa)
Waste gate valve Pc Pressure regulating valve
Pressure reducing valve
Manometer
[Note] Pc (controller pressure) varies with the set

output in a range between 600 and 750 mmHg.
(c)Check method
1)Set the manometer control pressure (Pc) applied to the waste gate actuator to 0 and set the dial gage to
the zero point.
2)Gradually open the pressure regulating valve and measure the Pc value when the actuator rod is oper-
ated by 2 mm.
3)For the hysteresis, let the rod move to 3 mm first. The gradually close the pressure regulating valve, mea-
sure the pressure when the rod is moved to 2mm and obtain the difference from the pressure measured in
b. above.
4)Precautions
• Set the dial gage on the extension line of the actuator rod.
• The piping and joints shall completely be free from leak.
• Fix the turbocharger and dial gage securely.
• If an electric manometer is used, it shall have sufficient precision.
• Even when an electric manometer is used, use of a mercury column type manometer in combination is
recommended for calibration and daily check.
• The speed for increasing/decreasing Pc by means of the pressure regulating valve shall be very slow near
the measuring point. If the mm position is exceeded, restart from the beginning.
• Do not apply over 0.49 MPa (5 kgf/cm2) to the actuator.
(2) Waste gate actuator leak test

Apply 0.12 Mpa (1.2 kgf/cm2) to the actuator and hold the state for minute. The actuator is good if the
pressure then is 0.11 Mpa (1.1 kgf/cm2) or above.
126
8. TURBOCHARGER
8.4 Disassembly procedure

8.4.1 Preparation for disassembly
In addition to the general tools, the following special tools are required for turbocharger disassembly and reas-
sembly:
Tool name Use Illustration

For removing thrust bearing and
thrust bushing 75
(mm)
Ǟ7.5
Bar
Material: Copper or brass

For removing floating bearing circlip
Pliers
For removing seal ring
Pliers
For thrust bearing installation Item sold on market

(for M3) : 1.3 N•m (13 kgf•cm)
Torque driver for TORX bolt
(multifunctional type) For seal plate installation
0.5 to 4.9 N•m (5 to 50 kgf•cm) (for M3) : 1.3 N•m (13 kgf•cm)
(Type: TORX TT20 or equivalent)

For fixing turbine shaft
(mm × dodecagonal)
Box wrench
Box only may be used.

For following bolts and nuts:
Torque wrench M8 : mm, kgf•cm (N•m)
(single purpose) M5 : mm, kgf•cm (N•m)
M5 : mm, kgf•cm (N•m)
For measuring play in axial and radial directions: To be installed on a dial
gage
R10 Ǟ5(0.1968) mm (in.)

(0.3937)
To be knurled here
Probe
7(0.2755)
R5(0.1968)
M2.6 1(0.0393)
P0.45 8 40 10 15
(1.5748) (0.3937) (0.5905) Mount to dial gauge
(0.3149)
127
8. TURBOCHARGER
8.4.2 Inspection before disassembly

1)Inspect the turbine wheel and compressor impeller for any undesirable contact and the rotor for smooth
rotation.
2)Measure the rotor play as described in section 8.3 (2.2).
• Rotor axial play Wear limit: mm
• Rotor radial play Wear limit : mm
8.4.3 Disassembly
The mounting angles of the turbine housing, bearing housing and compressor housing are determined
according to its mounting state on the engine. Put match marks before starting disassembly.
Note: The number after each part is the one described in the structural drawing in 8.1(2).
(1) Compressor housing removal

1)Remove flanged hexagon bolt 8 and compressor side keep plate 10.
2)Remove compressor housing 7.
Note:
1)Liquid gasket is applied on the surface of compressor housing 7 where bearing housing 15 is mounted.
2)When disassembling compressor housing 7, carefully operate so as not to damage the compressor impel-
ler.
(2) Compressor impeller removal

1)Set a box spanner (10 mm) on the turbine side end of the turbine shaft, and remove shaft end clamp 18.
Note: Pay attention to the loosening direction since the shaft end nut has left-handed screw.
2)Remove compressor impeller 18.
(3) Turbine housing removal

1)Remove hexagon nut 12 and turbine side keep plate 13.
2)Remove turbine housing 11.
(4) Turbine shaft extraction

1)Hold heat insulating plate 20 lightly with a hand, and extract turbine shaft 1.
Note: If the turbine shaft is hard to be extracted, tap the compressor side end of the shaft lightly with a
wooden hammer.
2)Remove heat insulating plate 20.
(5) Seal plate removal

1)Use the Torx driver and loosen M3 Torx T-type machine screw 17 for seal plate mounting.
2)Remove seal plate 4.
Note: Liquid gasket has been applied to the seal plate and bearing housing mounting surface.
3)Remove oil thrower 2 from the seal plate.
(6) Slide bearing and thrust bushing removal

1)Use the Torx driver and loosen the M3 Torx T-type machine screw for thrust bearing installation.
2)Use the bar (copper) and remove thrust bearing 6 and thrust bushing.
128
8. TURBOCHARGER
(7) Floating bearing removal

1)Use the stop ring pliers and remove circlip 16 from bearing housing 15.
2)Remove floating bearing 5 from bearing housing 15.
(8) Seal ring removal

1)Remove turbine side seal ring 3 from turbine shaft 1.
2)Remove compressor side seal ring (small) and compressor side seal ring (large) from oil thrower 2.
129
8. TURBOCHARGER
8.5 Washing and inspection procedure

8.5.1 Washing
(1) Inspection before washing
Visually inspect each part before washing to check trace of seizure, wear, foreign matter or carbon adhesion.
Carefully inspect for identifying the cause of trouble especially when a fault has occurred.
Major inspection items

Check point Checking position
1)Turbine shaft 1, turbine side seal ring and rear side of turbine wheel
Carbon adhesion state 2)Heat insulating plate 20 mounting portion and inside of bearing hous-
ing 15
1)Turbine shaft 1, journal portion and thrust bushing oil thrower 2
Lubrication status
2)Floating bearing 5 and thrust bearing 6
(wear, seizure, discoloration, etc.)
3)Bearing housing 15 and inner wall of bearing fitting ring
1)Inner wall of turbine housing 11
2)Outer surface of bearing housing 11 and heat insulating plate 20
mounting portion
3)Turbine shaft 1 turbine side seal ring portion and rear side of turbine
Oil leak state
wheel
4)Inner wall of compressor housing 7
5)Rear side of compressor impeller 18
6)Surface and seal ring inserting portion of seal plate 4
(2) Washing procedure

Keep the following in mind when washing the parts.
Part Tools and detergent Procedure
a)Turbine s haft •Tools 1)Boil the turbine in the washing bucket.
1)Bucket (500 × 500) Do not strike the blade to remove the carbon.
2)Heat source: 2)Immerse in the detergent until the carbon and other
Steam or gas burner deposits are softened.
3)Brush 3)Use a plastic scraper or hand hair scrubber to remove
•Detergent the softened deposits.
Standard carbon 4)Protect the bearing surface and seal ring groove on
removing agent the turbine shaft so as not to be damaged.
5)Any deposit remaining on the turbine shaft due to
improper washing may cause unbalancing. Be sure to
remove thoroughly. Never use a wire brush.
b)Turbine wheel •Tools 1)Boil the turbine in the washing bucket.
chamber Same as for turbine shaft 2)Immerse in the detergent until the carbon and other
deposits are softened.
•Detergent 3)Use a plastic scraper or hard hair scrubber to remove
Same as for turbine shaft the softened deposits.
c)Blower blade •Tools 1)Immerse in the washing bucket until the deposit is
and chamber 1)Bucket (500 × 500) softened.
2)Brush 2)Use a plastic scraper or hard hair scrubber to remove
the softened deposits.
•Detergent Never use a wire brush.
d)Others 1)Wash all other parts with diesel oil.
2)Clean the lubricating oil path by blowing with compressed air.
3)Be especially careful so as not to damage or corrode the parts.
130
8. TURBOCHARGER
8.5.2 Inspection procedure

(1) Compressor housing 7
Inspect the compressor housing for any contact trace
with the compressor impeller, surface defect, dent or
crack at joint surface, and replace it if defective.
(2) Turbine housing 11

Inspect any trace of contact with the turbine wheel,
exfoliation due to degradation by oxidation of the cast
surface, thermal deformation or crack.
Replace with a new one of defective.
(3) Compressor impeller 18

Inspect any contact trace, chipping, corrosion or
deformation.
Replace with a new one if defective.
(4) Turbine shaft 1

1)Inspect any contact trace, chipping, thermal discolor-
ation or deformation at the turbine wheel. Check the
E
shaft portion for bend, the journal portion for thermal
discoloration or abnormal wear, and the seal ring
groove for surface defect or wear. Replace with a A
new one if defective.
2)Measure the turbine shaft journal outside diameter
(A) and seal ring groove width (E).
V block
Replace with a new turbine shaft if beyond the wear
limit.
Wear limit of journal outside diameter (A)
RHF5 7.98 mm
RHB51 7.98 mm
RHB31 6.25 mm
Wear limit of ring groove width (E)
RHF5 1.29 mm
RHB51 1.29 mm
RHB31 1.07 mm
3)Measure the turbine shaft run-out, and replace with
a new turbine shaft if it exceeds 0.011 mm.
(5) Heat insulating plate 20

Inspect the heat insulating plate for any contact trace,
thermal deformation or corrosion Replace with a new
one if defective.
131
8. TURBOCHARGER
(6) Thrust bushing, oil thrower 2 and thrust

Thrust bushing G1
bearing 6 Inspect each part for wear, sur- G2
face defect and discoloration.
Replace with a new one if defective even within the wear
limit.
(a)Thrust bushing
Measure the distance between grooves (K) of the thrust
bushing, and replace with a new one if the wear limit is K
Oil throwe
exceeded.
Wear limit
RHF5 4.07 mm
RHB51 4.07 mm
RHB31 3.65 mm
(b)Oil thrower 2
Measure the seal ring groove widths (G1) and (G2), and replace with a new one if the wear limit is exceeded.
Wear limits
RHF5--- G1: 1.31 mm, G2: 1.11 mm
RHB51--- G1: 1.31 mm, G2: 1.11 mm
RHB31--- G1: 1.04 mm, G2: 0.84 mm
(c)Thrust bearing 6
Measure the thrust bearing width (J), and replace with
a new one if the wear limit is exceeded.
Wear limit
RHF5 3.98 mm
RHB51 3.98 mm
RHB31 3.58 mm
(7) Floating bearing 5

1)Inspect the floating bearing for abnormal wear,
discoloration or surface defect.
Replace with a new one if defective.
2)Measure the inside diameter (C) and outside diameter (D).
Replace the bearing if either wear limit is exceeded.
Wear limits
RHF5 Outside diameter (D): 12.31 mm,
Inside diameter (C): 8.04 mm
RHB51 Outside diameter (D): 12.31 mm,
RHB31 Outside diameter (D): 9.93 mm,
132
8. TURBOCHARGER
(8) Bearing housing 15

Bearing fitting ring
1)Inspect the housing for cast surface exfoliation due
to oxidation and degradation, dent or crack. Inner plate
2)Inspect circlip 16 for chipping or crack, and replace
with a new one if defective.
3)Measure the (B) and (F) portions of the bearing
housing shown in the figure below.
Replace with a new one if either wear limit is
exceeded. F
Wear limit of bearing housing inside diameter (B)

RHF5 12.42 mm
RHB51 12.42 mm
RHB31 10.01 mm
Compresser
Wear limit of turbine side seal ring inserting Turbine side side
portion (F)
RHF5 15.05 mm
RHB51 15.05 mm
RHB31 11.03 mm
(9) Seal plate 4

1)Inspect the seal plate for any contact trace, joint sur-
face defect, dent or crack.
Replace it if defective.
2)Measure the seal ring inserting dimensions (H1 and
H1 H2
H2) on the compressor side, and replace the seal
ring with a new one if either wear limit is exceeded.
Wear limits
RHF5 H1: 12.45 mm, H2: 10.05 mm
RHB51 H1: 12.45 mm, H2: 10.05 mm
RHB31 H1: 10.04 mm, H2: 8.01 mm
(10)Seal rings
Replace seal rings with new ones.
(11)Inspect keep plates 10, 13 and bolts for

any deformation, and replace defective
parts with new ones. Also replace M3 Torx
machine screws with new ones.
133
8. TURBOCHARGER
8.6 Reassembly procedure

Applicable only to the one
closest to the turbine
8.6.1 Preparation for reassembly Lubricating oil inlet
1)Prepare general tools, special tools, liquid gasket Circlip
(Three Bond No.1207) and Locktite No.242 before
reassembling the turbocharger. Floating metal
2)Always replace the following parts with new ones:

• Turbine side seal ring 1pc.
View from the turbine

• Compressor side seal ring (large) 1pc.
• Compressor side seal ring (small) 1pc. Match up contact surface
• M3 machine screws 3pcs.
Lubricating oil inlet
• M3 machine screws 4pcs.
8.6.2 Reassembly
(1) Floating bearing installation
1)Use the snap ring pliers and install inner circlip 16 on
bearing housing 15.
2)Install floating bearing 5 in bearing housing 15. For all other than above
3)Use the snap ring pliers and install outer circlip 16 on
bearing housing 15.
Note:
1)The circlip joint shall be positioned as shown in the
figure at right above.
The rounded side of the circlip shall face the
bearing.
2)Apply lubricating oil on the floating bearing before
reassembly.
(2) Turbine shaft installation

1)Fit the seal ring onto turbine shaft 1.
2)Install heat insulating plate 20 on the turbine side of
bearing housing 15.
3)Apply lubricating oil on the journal portion of the tur-
bine shaft and insert the shaft from the turbine side
of bearing housing 15.
Note: Carefully operate so as not to damage the floating
bearing by the turbine shaft.
The seal ring joint shall be positioned on the
lubricating oil inlet side after centering with the
turbine shaft.
134
8. TURBOCHARGER
(3) Thrust bearing installation

1)Fit thrust bushing on turbine shaft 1.
2)Apply lubricating oil on the bearing portion of thrust
bearing 6 and install it in bearing housing 15.
3)Apply Locktite on the threaded portion of M3 Torx T
machine screw 17 for thrust bearing installation, and
use Torx torque driver for installation by tightening to
the specified torque.
Tightening torque: 1.3 ± 0.1 N•m (13 ± 1 kgf•cm)
(4) Seal plate installation

L.O. inlet
1)Fit the seal ring on oil thrower 2.
2)Insert oil thrower 2 into seal plate 4.
Note: The seal ring joint portion shall be positioned as
illustrated at right.
3)Apply liquid gasket (Three Bond No.1207) on the
seal plate mounting surface on the compressor side
of bearing housing 15. 45q
Note: See the illustration below for the applying
View from the compressor
position.
Applying thickness: 0.1 to 0.2 mm
4)Install seal plate 4 on bearing housing 15.

5)Apply Locktite on the threaded portion of M3
machine screw for seal plate mounting, and tighten it
with a torque screwdriver.
Tightening torque: 1.3 ± 0.1 N•m (131 kgf•cm)
Liquid gasket Carefully prevent the liquid

applying position gasket from leaking out to
this area
135
8. TURBOCHARGER
(5) Compressor impeller installation

1)Fit compressor impeller 18 onto turbine shaft 1.
2)Set a box spanner (10 mm) on the turbine side end
of turbine shaft 1, and tighten shaft end nut 19.
Note: Since the shaft end nut has left-handed screw,
pay attention to the tightening direction.
Tightening torque: 2.0 ± 0.2 N•m (20 ± 2 kgf•cm)
(6) Turbine housing installation

1)Install bearing housing 15 on turbine housing 11 by
aligning the match marks put before disassembly.
Note: In case of part replacement, check the oil inlet
and outlet positions and the exhaust gas inlet
position before reassembly.
2)Install the turbine side keep plate and tighten M8
hexagon bolt 12.
Tightening torque: 285 ± 10 N•m (28 ± 1 kgf•cm)
(7) Compressor housing installation

1)Apply liquid gasket (Three Bond No.1207) on the
compressor side flange of bearing housing 15.
Note: See section (4)3) for the portion to be applied.
Applying thickness: 0.1 to 0.2 mm
2)Check the mark and install the compressor housing
7 on the bearing housing 15.
Note: When a part is replaced, confirm a position of an
oil entrance and a position of an air exit, and
assemble it.
3)Install the keep plate 10 on compressor side, and
tighten M8 hexagon bolt 8.
Tightening torque: 48 N•m (4.7 ± 0.5 kgf•cm)
(8) Rotor play measurement

See the inspection procedure in section 8.3.2 for the
measurement method.
If the rotor play does not satisfy the standard,
reassembly is necessary since assembly error or use of
a wrong part is conceivable.
Service standard of rotor play in axial direction
RHF5 0.03 to 0.06 mm
RHB51 0.03 to 0.06 mm
RHB31 0.022 to 0.053 mm
Service standard of rotor play in radial direction
RHF5 0.08 to 0.13 mm
RHB51 0.08 to 0.13mm
RHB31 0.061 to 0.093mm
136
8. TURBOCHARGER
8.7 Handling after disassembly and reassembly

When installing the turbocharger on the engine or handling the turbocharger after installation, strictly observe
the instructions given below.
Especially pay careful attention for preventing foreign matter entrance into the turbocharger.
8.7.1 Instructions for turbocharger installation
Lubrication system
1)Pour new lubricating oil through the oil filler port before installation on the engine, and manually turn the
turbine shaft to lubricate the floating and thrust bearings.
2)Flush the oil inlet pipe from the engine and outlet pipe, and check no crushed pipe nor dirt or foreign mat-
ter remaining in the pipes.
3)Connect the pipes securely so as to ensure no oil leak from joints.
Intake system
1)Check no foreign matter or dirt in the intake line.
2)Connect securely to prevent any air leak from joints with the intake duct and air cleaner.
Exhaust system
1)Check no dirt or foreign matter in the exhaust system.
2)Since heat resistant steel is used for the bolts and nuts, do not use general bolts and nuts for installation.
Always apply anti-seizure agent on fastening bolts and nuts to be tightened.
(Use heat-resistant hexagon bolts for the turbine housing.)
3)Connect exhaust pipes securely to prevent gas leak from each pipe joint.
137
8. TURBOCHARGER
8.8 Troubleshooting
Sufficient turbocharger performance and required engine output cannot be obtained if there is any fault. In
such a case, first check each engine part to see there is no engine fault. Then inspect the turbocharger for
troubleshooting according to the procedure shown below.
8.8.1 Excessively exhaust smoke

(1) Insufficient intake air volume
Cause Corrective action
1)Clogged air cleaner element •Replace or wash the element.
2)Blocked air intake port •Correct to the normal state.
3)Leak from a joint in intake line •Inspect and repair.
(2) Turbocharger revolution failure

1)Deposit of impurities in oil sticking on the turbine •Turbocharger overhaul (disassembly and washing)
side seal portion to make turbine revolution heavy with lubricating oil replacement
2)Sticking bearing •Turbocharger overhaul (disassembly and repair)

•Insufficient lubrication or clogged lubrication piping •Lubricating oil line inspection, repair of defective
•Excessively high oil temperature portion and lubricating oil replacement
•Unbalanced rotating part •Rotating part replacement or washing
•Insufficient warming up or sudden stoop from loaded •Strict observance of instructions in operation man-
operation (no-load operation) ual
3)Contact or breakdown of turbine wheel or blower •Inspection and repair of each engine part
vane •Perfect foreign matter elimination in disassembled
•Excessive revolution state, followed by inspection and repair of individual
•Excessive exhaust temperature rise air cleaner and engine components
•Foreign matter invasion •Turbocharger overhaul (disassembly and repair)
•worn bearing •Reassembly
•Assembly defect
(3) Influence of exhaust resistance

1)Exhaust gas leak before the turbocharger to •Joint inspection and correction
decrease its revolutions
2)Deformed or clogged exhaust pipe to decrease tur- •Correct to the normal state.
bocharger revolutions
8.8.2 White smoke generation

1)Clogged or deformed oil return pipe causing oil flow •Repair or pipe replacement
to the blower or turbine side
2)Excessive bearing wear causing abnormal wear or •Turbocharger disassembly and repair
damage of seal ring
138
8. TURBOCHARGER
8.8.3 Sudden oil decrease

1)Excessive bearing wear causing abnormal wear or •Turbocharger disassembly and repair
damage of seal ring
8.8.4 Decrease in output

1) Gas leak from any part in exhaust piping •Inspection and repair of defective portion
2)Air leak from discharge side of blower
3)Clogged air cleaner element •Element cleaning or replacement
4)Fouled or damaged turbocharger •Turbocharger disassembly and repair or replace-
ment
8.8.5 Poor (slow) response (starting) of turbocharger

1)Hard carbon deposit on the turbine side (wheel seal- •Turbocharger disassembly and washing with lubri-
ing portion) to make turbine shaft revolution heavy cating oil replacement
2)Incomplete combustion •Engine combustion state inspection, followed by

improvement of combustion to normal state
8.8.6 Abnormal sound or vibration

(1) Abnormal sound generation
1)Excessively narrowed gas path due to clogged noz- •Turbocharger disassembly and washing
zle in turbine wheel chamber or reverse flow of
blower discharge in acceleration (generally called
surging)
2)Contact rotating part •Turbocharger disassembly and repair or replace-
ment
(2) Vibration
1)Loosened intake, exhaust or oil pipe connection with •Turbocharger installation status check and repair of
the turbocharger defective portion
2) Damaged bearing, contact between rotating part and •Turbocharger disassembly with repair or replace-
adjacent part, or chipping of turbine wheel or blower ment, or perfect removal of foreign matters in case
vane due to foreign matter in version of foreign matter invasion
3) Unbalanced rotating part •Repair or replacement of rotating part
139
9. Starting motror
9. Starting motror
As a representative example of starter, the one for 4TNV94L98 and 4TNV106 (T) is shown in this chapter.
9.1 For 4TNV94L/ 98
9.1.1 Specifications
Manufacturer’s model (Hitachi) - S13-204 S13-205

Yanmar code - 129900-77010 129900-77020
Nominal output kW 2.3 ←
Weight kg 5.5 ←
Revolution direction (as viewed from pinion) - Clockwise ←
Engagement system - Magnetic shift ←
No-load Terminal voltage/current V/A 11/140 or less ←
Revolution rpm 4100 or above ←
Loaded Terminal voltage/current V/A 2.5/1050 or less ←
Torque N•m (kgf•m) 24.5 (2.5) or above ←
Clutch system - Overrunning ←
Pinion projection voltage (at 100 °C) V 8.6 or less ←
Pinion DP or module/number of teeth - M3/9 ←
difference (O-ring, oil seal) - Dry (none) Wet (with)
Application - Standard Option
140
Magnetic switch
9.1.2 Components
Field coil Shift lever

Gear case
Brush
Oil seal
141
Pinion shaft
Through bolt
Rear cover Armature

Clutch Assy Bearing retainer
O-ring
9. Starting motror
NO Set the shift lever at Are the battery charge and NO ٨Charge or replace the battery
Is the shift lever at terminal connection normal ٨Connect the battery terminal and
the neutral position? the neutral position
without any corrosion? repair corrosion.
YES
Engine starting failure? Inspect the wiring up to the magnetic
9. Starting motror
Is the starting motor switch and repair if necessary.

NO ٨Key switch
magnetic switch actuating
YES ٨Safety relay
sound head?
٨Magnetic switch
٨Connection state
Can the engine be NO Is the starting motor NO
cranked? sound heard? YES
9.1.3 Troubleshooting
YES ٨Adjust / dimension.

٨Inspect the shift lever for deformation,
Pinion and ring gear NO the return spring for fatigue and the
meshing normal? pinion for sliding.
YES ٨Repair meshing between pinion and
ring gear or replace as needed..
YES
Connect the M terminal of ٨Inspect the brush and replace if worn.
Pinion roller clutch damage, the individual starting motor NO
٨If
brushes are not worn, replace the
inspection and replacement with the battery. Does the
Reduction gear damage, motor (yoke assy or armature).
motor run?
inspection and replacement
142
YES
Magnetic switch con- ψWhen the starting motor is wetted with water,
tact defect. Replace it. always replace the magnetic switch even if the
function is normal.
NO
(slow revolution) Are the battery charge
and terminal connection NO For an abnormality (Immediately disconnect the
Is the revolution normal? ̪
normal without any battery negative terminal.)
corrosion?
YES YES
Inspect the fuel systems Is the Lube oil NO The motor does not stop
Replace the Lube oil.
viscosity normal? even when the key switch is
turned OFF.
YES
Does the engine run
when the starting motor YES Repair or replace the Repair or replace the key switch, starting
is replaced with a starting motor. motor relay or magnetic switch.
new one?
Slow revolution
Inspection Causes and Inspect the inside of

item remedies the engine.
9. Starting motror
9.1.4 Names of parts and disassembly procedure

(1) Disassembling order
1)Nut M8 (Disconnect the connecting wire.) See the disassembly drawing.
2)Screw M4 (2)
3)Through bolt M5 (2)
4)Rear cover
5)Brush holder
6)Yoke assy.
7)Armature
8)Bolt M6 (2)
9)Magnetic switch
10)Dust cover
11)Shift lever
12)Screw M4 (3)
13)Bearing retainer
14)Gear case
15)Pinion stopper clip
16)Pinion stopper
17)Return spring
18)Pinion shaft
19)Clutch assy.
Disassembly drawing
14 12
8
10
1
11 3
15
16
17
19
13 2
18
4
5
143
9. Starting motror
(2) Disassembly procedure

1)Nut M8
1
Remove the magnetic switch nut M8 (12 mm), and
disconnect the connecting wire.
Connecting wire
Fig. 1
2)Screw M4 (2)
3)Through bolt M5 (2) 3
4)Rear cover
Remove the M4 screw fastening the brush holder
and remove through bolt M5 for rear cover removal.
2
4
Fig. 2
5)Brush holder
Pull the brush spring up with the brush spring puller.
On the negative (-) side, bring the brush spring into
contact with the side of the brush for lifting from the
commutator surface. On the positive (+) side, extract
the brush from the brush holder.
Fig. 3
144
9. Starting motror
6)Yoke Assy.
5
7)Armature
Remove the brush holder. The armature and yoke
assy can now be removed.
7
Fig. 4
8)Bolt M6 (2)
9
9)Magnetic switch 8
Remove bolt M6 (10 mm), and the magnetic switch
can be removed.
Fig. 5
10)Dust cover
11)Shift lever 10
Take the dust cover out from the gear case. The shift
lever can be removed.
11
Fig. 6
145
9. Starting motror
12)Screw M4 (3)
13)Bearing retainer 14
14)Gear case 19
Remove screw M4, and the bearing retainer and
clutch assy can be removed.
12
13
Fig. 7
15)Pinion stopper clip

Pinion stopper clip 15
Remove the bearing retainer at the edge and the
bearing, and shift the pinion stopper toward the pin-
ion. Use a plain screwdriver and pry to remove the
pinion stopper clip. Plain
( straight-edge
screwdriver )
Fig. 8
16)Pinion stopper
15 16 17 19
17)Return spring
18
18)Pinion shaft
19)Clutch Assy
Remove the pinion stopper clip. The pinion stopper, 13
return spring, pinion shaft and bearing retainer can
Fig. 9
be removed.
Disassembly is completed now.
146
9. Starting motror
9.1.5 Inspection and maintenance

(1) Armature
(a)Commutator outside diameter
Measure the commutator outside diameter and replace
the commutator if the measured value is less than the
limit.
mm
Standard Limit
36.5 35.5 Fig. 10
(b)Armature coil continuity test

Multimeter
Check continuity between commutator segments with a
multimeter. Good if continuity exists.
In case of no continuity (coil disconnection), replace the

armature.
Fig. 11
(c)Armature coil insulation test

Multimeter
Inspect the continuity between a commutator segment
and the shaft or core with a multimeter. Good if no
continuity exists.
If continuity exists (coil short circuit), replace the

armature.
Fig. 12
147
9. Starting motror
(d)Armature and commutator run-out

Use a dial gage and measure the armature core run-out Armature
and commutator run-out. Correct or replace if the limit is Commutator
exceeded.
mm
Standard Limit
Armature 0.03 0.2
Commutator 0.03 0.2
Fig. 13
(e)Commutator surface inspection

If the commutator surface is roughened, grind with #500
to #600 emery cloth.
Fig. 14
(f)Commutator insulation depth

Measure the depth of the insulating material between
Hack-saw
commutator segments, and correct it if it is less than the
limit.
Commutator
mm Commutator Insulating Commutator

segment material 0.5㨪0.8mm
Standard Limit
0.5 to 0.8 0.2
Abnormal Normal
Fig. 15
148
9. Starting motror
(2) Field coil

(a)Field coil continuity test
Check continuity between field coil terminals. Good if Multimeter
continuity exists.
If no continuity (coil disconnection), replace the field coil.
Fig. 16
(b)Field coil insulation test

Check continuity between field coil terminal and yoke. Multimeter
Good if no continuity exists.
If continuity exists (coil short circuit), replace the

armature.
Fig. 17
(3) Brush
Measure the length of the brush. Replace with a good
one if the length is less than the limit.
mm
Standard Limit
15 9 Brush
Fig. 18
149
9. Starting motror
(4) Brush holder

(a)Brush holder insulation test
Check the continuity between the brush holder (+ side)
and base (- side) with a multimeter. Good if no continuity
exists.
If continuity exists (insulation defect), replace the brush

holder.
Multimeter
Fig. 19
(b)Brush spring inspection

Inspect the brush spring pressure.
N (kgf)
Standard spring force
31 to 39 (3.1 to 3.9)
Fig. 20
(5) Magnetic switch

When the starting motor is wetted with water, always
replace the magnetic switch with a new even if the
function is normal.
(a)Shunt coil continuity test Multimeter
Check the continuity between the S terminal and the
switch body. Good if continuity exists.
If no continuity (coil disconnection), replace the

magnetic switch.
Fig. 21
150
9. Starting motror
(b)Series coil continuity test

Check continuity between the S and M terminals.
Good if continuity exists.
If no continuity (coil disconnection), replace the

magnetic switch. Multimeter
Fig. 22
(c)Contact continuity test

Depress the magnetic switch with the plunger at the Multimeter
bottom. Check continuity between the B and M terminals
with a multimeter. Good if continuity exists.
If no continuity (coil continuity defect), replace the

magnetic switch.
Fig. 23
(6) Pinion clutch

(a)Pinion inspection
Manually rotate the pinion. Inspect if it is rotated
smoothly in the driving direction, and is locked in the
opposite direction. Replace the pinion clutch if abnormal.
Fig. 24
151
9. Starting motror
(b)Pinion sliding inspection

Check if the pinion slide smoothly in the axial direction.
If damaged, rusted or heavy in sliding, repair it.
If grease is applied too much on the pinion shaft, sliding
becomes heavy.
Fig. 25
(c)Ball bearing inspection

Rotate the ball bearing while holding the outer race with
fingertips. Inspect if it is sticking or it there is play.
Fig. 26
Spring force N (kgf) 35 (3.6)

Brush
Standard height/wear limit mm 15/9
Magnetic switch resistance, series coil/shunt coil (at 20°C) Ω 0.27/0.60
Standard diameter/limit diameter mm 36.5/35.5
Difference between maximum
Commutator Repair limit/repair accuracy mm 0.2/0.03
and minimum diameter
Mica undercut depth chips Repair limit/repair accuracy mm 0.2/0.5 to 0.8
Armature fount - 6903DDU
Armature rear - 608DDU
Bearing type Nominal number
Pinion front - 60004DDU
Pinion rear - 6904DDU
L dimension (pinion projection length) mm 0.3-1.5
152
9. Starting motror
9.1.7 Assembly
The assembly procedure is the reverse of the
disassembly procedure, but pay attention to the
following points:
(1) Grease application points
• Gears in the gear case
• Shift lever operating portion
• Pinion sliding portion
• Magnetic switch plunger sliding portion
Use the specified grease as below table at all points.
Pinion and magnetic switch plunger sliding portions NPCFG-6A
Gears MALTEMP SRL
Shift lever operating portion ALBANIA No.1
(2) Magnetic switch assembly

1)Install the shift lever on the magnetic switch with the
torsion spring in-between.
Fig. 27
2)For installation on the gear case, install the magnetic

switch with the shift lever on the gear case after pull-
ing the pinion out. Fix the magnetic switch by tight-
ening a built-in bolt M6. Do not forget to install the
dust cover (adjusting shim).
Fig. 28
153
9. Starting motror
(3) Pinion projection length

Connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal S
S and negative (-) lead to terminal M. Turn the switch M
ON and measure the pinion moving distance L in the
thrust direction.
Perform this test within 10 seconds.
mm
l
Standard 0.3㨪1.5mm
Fig. 29
L 0.31.5
Note: Before measuring the dimension, pull the

pinion out lightly in the direction of the arrow.
If the measured L dimension is outside the standard

range, either insert or remove the dust cover (adjusting
shim 0.5 mm, 0.8 mm) for adjustment.
Dust cover
(adjusting shim:
0.5mm, 0.8mm)
Fig. 30
154
9. Starting motror
9.1.8 Characteristic test

Since the characteristics can be checked roughly by means of a simple no-load test as explained below.
NOTE: Complete the test quickly since the rating of the starting motor is 30 seconds.
(1) No-load test

Fix the starting motor on a test bench and connect wiring as shown in Fig.31. When the switch is closed, a
current flows in the starting motor, which is rotated at no-load. Measure the current, voltage and number of
revolutions then and check if they satisfy the specified characteristics.
SW
Ammeter
S
Voltmeter
Battery
Fig. 31
155
9. Starting motror
9.2 For 4TNV106 (T)

Manufacturer’s model (Hitachi) - S13-138
Yanmar code - 129953-77010
Nominal voltage V 12
Nominal output kW 3.0
Rating Sec 30
Revolution direction (as viewed from pinion) - Clockwise
Clutch system - Roller clutch
Engagement system - Magnetic shift
Pinion: Module/number of teeth - M3/9
Weight kg 7.3
Pinion projection voltage (at 100) V 8 or less
Terminal voltage/current V/A 12/180 or less
No-load
Revolution rpm 3000 or more
Terminal voltage/current V/A 9/500
Loaded Torque N•m (kgf•m) 16.7 (1.7) or more
Revolution min-1 1270 or more
9.2.2 Congiguration drawing
Magnetic switch
Gear case
Shift lever
Pinion
Brush Gear shaft
O-ring
Ball bearing
Terminal, E Pinion stopper
Through bolt Needle bearing

Oil seal
Rear cover Armature Yoke Ball bearing
156
NO NO Are the battery charge and NO ٨Charge or replace the battery

Can the engine be Does the starting motor terminal connection normal ٨Connect
cranked? the battery terminal or repair
revolve? without any corrosion? corrosion.
YES YES YES

Inspect the starting motor relay wiring
NO system and repair if necessary.
Does the starting motor ٨Key switch
relay operate? ٨Starting motor relay
Inspect pinion
٨Connection state
Does the gear shift YES roller clutch for YES
revolve? damage and
replace if necessary.
Is the starting motor NO ٨Inspect the wiring up to the magnetic
NO magnetic switch actuating switch and repair if necessary.
sound heard?
Inspect the reduction gear
(armature, gear shaft) for YES
damage and replace if ٨Adjust the dimension.
necessary. ٨Inspect the shift lever for deformation,
Are pinion and ring gear NO the return spring for fatigue and the
engaging normally? pinion for sliding.
٨Repair engagement between pinion and
YES ring gear or replace as needed.
157
NO Does the motor ravolve ٨Inspect the brush and replace if worn.
when M terminal of NO
(slow ٨If brushes are not worn, replace the
revolution) starting motor is connected motor (yoke assy or armature).
to the battery?
Are the battery charge
and terminal connection NO
Is the revolution normal? ̪ YES
normal without any
corrosion?
Are pinion and ring gear
YES YES engaging normally?
Inspection Causes and
Inspect the ignition and item remedies
fuel systems. Is the engine oil NO
Replace the engine oil. Upon abnormality:
viscosity normal?
Immediately disconnect the battery negative terminal.
YES The motor does not stop

even when the key switch is
Does the engine run turned OFF.
when the starting motor YES Repair or replace the
is replaced with a starting motor.
new one?
Repair or replace the key switch, starting
NO motor relay or magnetic switch.
Inspect the inside of
the engine.
9. Starting motror
9. Starting motror
9.2.4 Component names and disassembly procedure

(1) Disassembly procedure
1)Disconnect the lead.
2)Remove the magnetic switch.
3)Remove the rear cover.
4)Remove the brush holder.
5)Disassemble the gear case and center bracket.
6)Remove the shift lever pin.
7)Remove the gear case dust cover.
8)Remove the pinion.
(2) Disassembly diagram
ԟ ԝ
Ԟ
Ԙ
Ԛ
158
9. Starting motror
9.2.5 Disassembly procedure

(1) Disconnecting the lead
Loosen the M8 nut (12 mm) of the magnetic switch and disconnect the lead.
159
9. Starting motror
(2) Removal of magnetic switch

Remove the M6 bolts (10 mm × 2).
160
9. Starting motror
(3) Removal of rear cover

Remove the brush holder tightening screws (4 mmø × 2) and the M5 through bolts (× 2).
Next, disconnect the rear cover from the yoke using a – screwdriver.
161
9. Starting motror
(4) Removal of brush holder

For the negative (–) brush, bring the brush spring into contact with the side of the brush for lifting from the
commutator surface.
For the positive (+) brush, extract the pull out the brush from the brush holder.
After the brush holder is removed, the armature and yoke can be disassembled.
162
9. Starting motror
(5) Separating gear case from center bracket

Remove three M6 bolts (10 mm) fastening the gear case to the center bracket.
After removal of the M6 bolts, the center bracket and oil seal can be removed.
163
9. Starting motror
(6) Removal of shift lever pin

Remove the M6 nut (10 mm) and pull out the shift lever pin.
Now. the dustcover, shift lever, gear case and gear shaft can be removed.
164
9. Starting motror
(7) Removal of gear case dust cover

Remove the two M5 bolts (using 4 mm hexagon wrench) to disassemble the dust cover from the gear case.
165
9. Starting motror
(8) Removal of pinion

Slide the pinion stopper towards the pinion and remove the pinion stopper clip using a – screwdriver.
166
9. Starting motror
9.2.6 Inspection and maintenance
(1) Armature
1)Check the commutator for rough surface. If so, smooth the surface using #500 to #600 emery cloth.
If the outside periphery of the commutator has been deflected over 0.2 mm, repair by a lathe.
2)Measure the depth of the insulating material between commutator segments, and correct if it is less than
0.2 mm.
0.5㨪0.8 OO
Undercutmethod
167
9. Starting motror
3)Armature coil continuity and earth tests
Test type Measurement point Normal Abnormal (cause)

Continuity test Across commutator Yes None (open circuit)
Earth test Between commutator and shaft or armature None Yes (short-circuiting)
Replace if needed
.
168
9. Starting motror
(2) Field coil

1)Field coil continuity and earth tests

Continuity test Across commutator Yes None (open circuit)
Earth test Between commutator and shaft or armature None Yes (short-circuiting)
Replace if needed
.
169
9. Starting motror
(3) Brush
1)Check wear of the brush and the brush spring force.
12
18
6 Limit
New Used
3.5 kg
2.9 kg
170
9. Starting motror
2)Check of brush movement

If the brush does not move smoothly, inspect the brush holder for bending and the brush holder sliding
surface for dirt. Repair or clean as needed.
3)Check the continuity between the insulated brush holder (positive (+)) and the brush holder base (nega-
tive (-)).
If they are electrically continuous, replace since the holder is grounded.
171
9. Starting motror
(4) Magnetic switch continuity test

Shunt coil Between C and ground Yes None (open circuit)
Series coil C and M None Yes (short-circuiting)
Replace if needed.
C
S13-138
Resistance (at 20°C)
B
Shunt coil 0.6
Series coil 0.218
M
172
9. Starting motror
(5) Pinion
1)Check the pinion teeth for wear and damage. Replace with a new one, if necessary.
2)Check if the pinion slides smoothly. If it is damaged or rusted or does not slide smoothly, repair.
3)Check springs for damage, and replace if necessary.
(6) Ball bearing

If abnormalities such as irregular noises are detected to the ball bearing, replace with a new one.
9.2.7 Assembly
The assembly procedure is reverse of the disassembly procedure, but pay attention to the following points.
(1) Apply grease as instructed below.

Greasing point Grease type
Sliding portions and head of plunger
Pinion metal and metal portions of gear case
NPC-FC6A Grease
Spline portions of pinion
Sliding portions of shift lever
Deceleration gear MALTEMP SRL Grease
(2) Armature thrust

No adjustments are needed for the thrust.
(3) Gear shaft thrust

Some thrust washers of 1.0 and 0.25 mm thickness are provided between the center bracket and gear shaft
supporting surface. Make sure to check them at reassembly.
If washers are deformed or worn, replace them with new ones.
The appropriate thrust is from 0.05 to 0.3mm. If it is over 0.3mm, and the appropriate thrust washer, but pay
attention so that the thrust is not 0.
173
9. Starting motror
9.2.8 Adjustment
(1) Pinion projection length L by magnetic switch
Switch
Battery
Measure the pinion moving distance L (0.3 to 1.5 mm) in the thrust direction when the pinion is protruded by
the magnetic switch.
If the distance L is outside the standard range, adjust by the dust cover as shown below.
174
9. Starting Motor
Dust cover
Spring force N (kgf) 31.4 (3.2)

Brush
Standard / Limit height 18/6
Standard 37
Outside diameter
Limit 36
Limit 0.2
Commutator Deflection
Correction accuracy 0.05
Limit 0.2
Depth of insulation mica
Correction accuracy 0.5 to 0.8
Front 25
Armature shaft diameter
Rear 12
Standard Gear shaft diameter 13.95 to 13.968
Bearing on gear case side
dimensions Hole diameter 14.00 to 14.018
Shaft diameter 13.95 to 13.968
Sliding portion of pinion
Hole diameter 14.03 to 14.05
Front 6905DDU
Ball bearing Armature
Rear 6001DDU
Length L (pinion projection length) 0.3 to 1.5
175-1
9. Starting Motor
9.3 For 3TNV82A to 3/4TNV88

Manufacturer’s code (Denso) - 228000-0251
Yanmar code - 12912-77010
Nominal voltage V 12
Nominal output kW 1.2
Rating Sec 30
Revolution direction (as viewed from pinion) - Clockwise
Engagement system - Magnetic shift
Pinion: Number - 1.3
Weight kg 3.5
Pinion projection voltage (at 100) V 8 or less
Terminal voltage/current V/A 11.5/90 or less
No-load
Revolution min-1 3000 or more
Terminal voltage/current V/A 8/280 or less
Loaded Torque N•m (kgf•m) 9.81(1.0)
Revolution min-1 900
9.3.2 Characteristics
REVOLUTION (min-1)
m)
࡮ O)
(kW)
(V)
STARTER PERFORMANCE
(kgf
(N
࡮
BATTERY 6V-400A
12V 1.2kW
VOLTAGE
TOROUE
TOROUE
OUTPUT
6000 2.4524.0 1.2 12 TORQUE

VOLTAGE
OUTPUT
5000 2.0520.0 1.0 10
4000 1.6316.0 0.8 8
3000 1.2212.0 0.6 6
2000 0.82 8.0 0.4 4
1000 0.41 4.0 0.2 2

REVOLUTION
00 0 0 0
100 200 300 400 500 600
CURRENT (A)
(R.1)
175-2
9. Starting Motor
9.3.3 Disassembly drawing

Frame
Holder
Yoke
Armature
Switch
Pinion
Housing
Clutch
Pinion
9.3.4 Connecting diagram of a starting motor

1)When a starter switch is turned on, a magnet switch
CONNECTING DIAGRAM
is charged, and a moving core is absorbed, and a
STARTER SWITCH
pinion clutch is moved forward through a lever, and Magnetic switch
the pinion engages with a ring gear.
2)When the pinion engages the ring gear, because a
main contact point is closed and the main electric
current flows and a pull coil is short-circuited by the
main contact point and it stops being charged with
electricity, the pinion is kept at the position by a hold- Battery
ing coil during the start.
3)When the stater switch is turned off, the main con-
tact point becomes open, and the pinion clutch is
Starting motor
returned to the stop position by a return spring.
(R.1)
175-3
10. Alternator
10. Alternator
As a representative example of alternator, the alternator of 40A is shown in this chapter.
10.1 The 40A alternator for 3TNV84 and other models

10.1.1 Components
(1) Parts related to the alternator
(2) Alternator components of the disassembly and assembly
176
10. Alternator
Manufacturer’s model (Hitachi) - ACFA68
Yanmar code - 129423-77200
Rating - Continuous
Battery voltage V 12
Nominal output (13.5 V heat) A 40
Rated revolution min-1 5,000
Operating revolution min-1 1,350 to 18,000
Grounding characteristics - Minus side grounding
Direction of revolution (viewed from pulley) - Clockwise
Integrated regulator IC regulator
Weight kg 2.8
Pulley (outside diameter) mm 69.2
Belt shape - Type A
10.1.3 Wiring diagram
WIRING DIAGRAM
IG Key switch
IG P
B
PI P L
Charge lamp
F (Max. 3.4W)
IC
L
L L
O O
0.5ǴF
A B A
D Battery A D
E T
ALTERNATOR ASSY IC REGURATOR
[NOTICE]
1)Don't do miss-wiring and short-circuit of each terminal.
2)Don’t short-circuit between IG and L. (Connect it through the charge lamp.)
3)Don’t connect a load between L and E.
4)Don't remove a battery terminal and a B terminal when rotating.
5)Shut out a battery switch during the alternator stop.
6)Tightening torque of each terminal: 1.7-2.3 N•m (17-23 kgf•cm)
177
10. Alternator
10.1.4 Standard output characteristics

The standard output characteristics of this alternator are STANDAED CHAEACTERISTICS
13.5V CONSTANT
shown as the right figure. AMBIENT TEMP:25͠
60
Cold
50
Hot
OUTPUT CURRENT
40
30
20
(A)
10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ALTERNATOR SPEED (X103 min-1)
10.1.5 Inspection
(1) V belt inspection
Normal Defect
1)Inspect the matter whether there are not crack, stickiness
and wear on the belt visually.
Check that a belt doesn't touch the bottom part of the pul-
ley groove. If necessary, replace the V belt set.
2)V belt tension: Clearance
Push the center of the V belt and check the belt deflec-
tion. The V belt tension is normal if the deflection is within
the standard. If not, adjust the V belt tension by the alter- Inspection of V pulley
nator adjuster.
(Refer to 2.2.2 in Chapter 2.)
(2) Visual check of wiring and check of unusual sound

1)Confirm whether wiring is right or there is no looseness of the terminal part.
2)Confirm that there is no unusual sound from the alternator during the engine operation.
(3) Inspection of charge lamp circuit

1)Move a start switch to the position of on. Confirm lighting of the charge lamp.
2)Start an engine, and confirm the lights-out of the lamp. Repair a charge lamp circuit when a lamp doesn't
work.
178
Ground L-terminal of the
Turn key switch to ON. OFF Disconnect GN coupler driven machine side coupler OFF
Does the charge lamp (L, IG). Replace the charge lamp
(L, IG)
come ON? Does the charge lamp
come ON? The charge lamp is available from
the driven machine manufacturer.
ON ON Inspect the rotor coil and

brush IC-RG
Turn the key switch to START.
(The engine starts.)
Inspect or replace the fan belt,
At idling ON and inspect the alternator
Does the charge lamp The lamp flashes

goes OFF? Inspect the diode ( + side)
The lamp is lit

OFF dimly
Increase the engine speed to
1500 rpm and turn the light
switch to ON.
179
Excessive voltage drop between
VB - VL > 0.5V BAT and batt ( + side) terminal
Does the charge lamp The lamp is lit Measure VB and VL at
come ON? dimly BAT L-terminal during
idling
VB - VL < 0.5V L-terminal defective conduction
Inspect the diode ( - side)
OFF
Measure VB at BAT terminal

with the engine running at VB > 15.5 Replace IC-RG
1500 rpm
VB = 13㨪15 Turn the light switch Does the charge lamp ON Inspect the auxiliary diode
to ON during idling come ON?
OFF
̪ Remarks Explanation on abbreviations: Not abnormal
1) Use a fully charged battery GN : Alternator
2) DC voltmeter: 0 to 30 V, 0.5 class IC-RG : IC regulator
3) The check method is also applicable to VB : BAT terminal voltage
the bench test VL :L-terminal voltage
10. Alternator
11. Electric wiring
11. Electric wiring

11.1 Electric wiring diagram
180
11. ELECTRIC WIRING
11.2 Precaution on electric wiring

11.2.1 Alternator
In the cases listed below the warranty shall not be deemed to apply. Please be sure to read these conditions
carefully when planning to use it with other equipment. Also be certain to give appropriate guidance on usage
to the user.
(1) When the battery cable can be connected backwards

The alternator diode will be damaged and recharging made impossible if the plus and minus ends of the
battery cable are confused. The stator coil will also be burned as a result. To prevent this, supply the user with
a cable of such a length or structure that the plus and minus ends cannot be confused. Also warn the user not
to connect the cable backwards.
(2) When charging output voltage is used for control purposes

The engine speed at starting is not proportional to the output voltage of the alternator, so this output voltage
must not be used for any control systems. It is especially wrong to use it for the control signal of the safety
relay for cutting the starter motor because this will damage the starter motor and cause engine starting failure.
(3) When the L line is used for control purposes

Consult with Yanmar first before connecting any load other than the charge lamp to the L line. Damage to the
alternator and related equipment will not be warranted without such prior consultation.
(4) Non-use of the Yanmar wiring diagram

Use without prior consultation of any wiring diagram other than that provided by Yanmar removes any
breakdown of any electrical equipment from the warranty.
(5) Regarding lamp control

Once the charge lamp goes out after the start of charging, it does not come on again even if the engine speed
falls and charging is insufficient. The lamp will not light again if the charging circuit is normal. The lamp only
comes on during operation if the alternator itself is broken or the drive V-belt breaks. However, when an LED
is used for the charge lamp, the LED will shine faintly even during normal operation. This is due to the control
system for the alternator lamp and is not an abnormality.
(6) Use of a non-specified V-belt

Use of a non-specified V-belt will cause inadequate charging and shorten the life of the belt. Use a belt of the
specified type.
(7) Direct high pressure washing is prohibited

Water will enter the brush if the alternator is washed directly at high pressure, causing inadequate charging.
Warn users not to use direct, high-pressure washing.
(8) Use of agricultural or other chemicals (direct contact or airborne)

Adhesion of agricultural and other chemicals, especially those with high sulfur content, to the IC regulator
corrodes the conductor on the substrate, leading to over-charging (battery boiling) and charging malfunctions.
Consult with Yanmar prior to use in such an environment. Use without prior consultation removes any
breakdown from the warranty.
181
11. ELECTRIC WIRING
11.2.2 Starter
to the user.
(1) Starting performance in the case of using an untested battery

The starting performance of the engine is closely dependent on the battery capacity. This battery capacity is
itself affected by the climate and the type of equipment installation. The details regarding ambient temperature
and equipment installation vary depending on the OEM, so Yanmar cannot decide the battery capacity on its
own. Confer with Yanmar in advance after checking these conditions and fix the battery capacity on the basis
of confirmatory tests.
(2) When the resistance of the battery cable exceeds the specified value
The combined total resistance of the battery cable in both directions between the starting motor and battery
should be within the value indicated on the wiring diagram. The starting motor will malfunction or break down
if the resistance is higher than the specified value.
(3) When the resistance of the starter circuit exceeds the specified value
The combined total resistance of the wiring between the starting motor and key switch (or power relay or
safety relay, depending on the application) should be within the value indicated on the wiring diagram. Engine
starting will be difficult if the resistance is higher than the specified value. This can also cause welding of the
magnet switch at the point of contact and resultant burning of the armature coil.
(4) When there is no safety relay

Over-running (when the electric current flows for too long) is a major cause of starting failure. This burns the
armature coil and causes clutch failure. Excessive work and failure of the key switch to return properly are the
main causes of over-running. The user must be given sufficient warning about this.
Be sure to use the safety relay to prevent over-running. This safety relay is supplied as an option. Consult
Yanmar first when planning to install a safety relay at your own company. In the case of failure to consult with
Yanmar, our warranty will not be applied to all the electrical equipment.
(5) When there is too much rust due to the entry of water
The water-proofing of the starting motor is equivalent to R2 of JIS D 0203. This guarantees that there will be
no damage from the sort of exposure encountered in rain or when water is poured on from a bucket. You
should, however, avoid the use of high-pressure washing and steeping in water.
(6) Regarding the heat resistance of the starter motor

The starter motor has heat resistance for an ambient temperature of 80°C and surface temperature of 100°C.
Insulators must be installed to prevent overheating when used near high temperature parts such as the
exhaust system.
(7) Corrosion of magnet switch contact point by corrosive gas.

When using equipment with a dry clutch, ammonium gas generated by friction is liable to corrode the contact
of the magnet switch. Be sure to install a vent in the clutch case.
182
11. ELECTRIC WIRING
11.2.3 Current limiter

to the user.
(1) When an over-discharged battery is used

Use of booster starting with an over-discharged battery (when the voltage has dropped to 8 V or less) will
destroy other electrical equipment by generating an abnormally high voltage. A specialized battery charger
should be used to recharge such an over-discharged battery (when the voltage has dropped to 8 V or less).
(2) When checks for malfunctioning are not performed

When high voltage noise from other electrical equipment is impressed on the current limiter upon turning off
the key switch, the current limiter can be damaged and cause loss of control over the output voltage. Other
electrical equipment may also be damaged if this happens, so surge killers should be fitted to the electrical
equipment whenever necessary. Be sure to check prior to mass production whether electrical noise might
damage the current limiter by turning the key switch and other electrical equipment on and off while the
engine is running, using both the vehicle and the wire harness that will be used in mass production.
(3) Removal of the battery cable during operation

The current limiter may malfunction if the battery cable and/or battery are removed during operation,
depending on the kind of electrical equipment being used, causing loss of control over the output voltage. In
such cases, the current limiter and other electrical equipment will be damaged by the generation of a
continuous high voltage of 24-43 V (for 5,000 rpm dynamo). All electrical equipment falls outside the scope of
the warranty under these circumstances. Be sure to warn the user not to remove the battery cable and/or
battery during operation.
(4) If the battery cable can be attached in reverse

The current limiter’s SCR diode will be destroyed if the plus and minus ends of the battery cable are
connected the wrong way around. This causes charging malfunctioning and burns the harness. Give the user
a cable of such a length that it cannot be connected the wrong way and warn the user against connecting the
cable backwards.
(5) Non-use of the Yanmar wiring diagram

Use without prior consultation of any wiring diagram other than that provided by Yanmar removes any
breakdown of any electrical equipment from the warranty.
(6) Installation environment

Observe the following when installing the current limiter:
1)Do not install it on the engine.
2)Place it in a well-ventilated place with an ambient temperature of 65 °C or less.
3)Ensure that the cooling air flows in the right direction for the current limiter’s cooling fins.
4)Do not use the earth wire of the current limiter to earth any other electrical equipment.
183
11. ELECTRIC WIRING
11.2.4 Section area and resistance of electric wire

(1) Allowable maximum cable length （Terminal resistance is not included.）
Cable size Cable construction Resistance 2 mΩ Note1 20 mΩ Ref. 50 mΩ Note2

2 (Ω/m)
mm Element No. Cable dia. (m) (m) (m)
3 41 ø 0.32 0.005590 0.36 3.58 8.94
5 65 ø 0.32 0.003520 0.57 5.68 14.20
8 50 ø 0.45 0.002320 0.86 8.62 21.55
15 84 ø 0.45 0.001380 1.45 14.49 36.23
20 41 ø 0.80 0.000887 2.25 22.55 56.37
30 70 ø 0.80 0.000520 3.85 38.46 96.15
40 85 ø 0.80 0.000428 4.67 46.73 116.82
50 108 ø 0.80 0.000337 5.93 59.35 148.37
60 127 ø 0.80 0.000287 6.97 69.69 174.22
85 169 ø 0.80 0.000215 9.30 93.02 232.56
100 217 ø 0.80 0.000168 11.90 119.05 297.62
Note1) Allowable maximum resistance of Battery cable
Note2) Allowable maximum resistance of Starting motor circuit
(2) Terminal resistance

Generally, a terminal resistance is 15 mΩ per coupler and 0 Ω per screw setting. This resistance should be
included in allowable maximum resistance when the cable length is planned.
184
12. Service standards

12.1 Engine tuning
Reference
No. Inspection item Standard Limit
page
Gap at intake/exhaust valve heads TNV82 to A98 0.15 to 0.25 -
1 2.2.6.(4)
mm 4TNV106(T) 0.25 to 0.35 -
Between alternator Used part 10 to 14 -
and crank pulley New part 8 to 12 -
V-belt tension
Between alternator Used part 7 to 10
2 mm 2.2.2.(2)
and radiator fan New part 5 to 8
at 98N (10 kgf)
Between radiator fan Used part 9 to 13
and crank pulley New part 7 to 11
3TNV82A to TNV88(VM) 21.57 to 22.55
Fuel injection
4TNV94L to 106(T) (220 to 230)
3 pressure - 2.2.6.(3)
19.6 to 20.6
MPa (kgf/cm2) 3TNV82A to TNV88(CL)
(200 to 210)
Compression TNV82A 3.16 (31) ± 0.1 (1) 2.45(25) ± 0.1(1)
pressure TNV84 3.24 (33) ± 0.1 (1) 2.55(26) ± 0.1(1)
4 3.3
(at 250 min-1) 3/4TNV84T 2.94 (30) ± 0.1 (1) 2.45(25) ± 0.1(1)
MPa (kgf/cm2) TNV88-106 3.43 (35) ± 0.1 (1) 2.75(28) ± 0.1(1)
Coolant water 3TNV82A, 84 1.8 -
Capacity 3TNV84T, 88 2.0 -
5 (Only engine 4TNV84(T), 88 2.7 - 2.2.1.(4)
body) 4TNV94L•98(T) 4.2 -
(Liter) 4TNV106(T) 6.0 -
- Full Effective -
3TNV82A 5.5 1.9 -
Lubricating oil 3TNV84(T)/88 6.7 2.8 -
capacity
6 4TNV84(T)/88 7.4 3.4 - 2.2.1.(3)
(oil pan)
4TNV94L/98(T) 10.5 4.5 -
(Liter)
4TNV106(T)(CL class) 14.0 9.0 -
4TNV106(T)(VM class) 14.0 7.5 -
185-1
Reference
No. Inspection item Standard Limit
page
- Rated speed at rated speed at low idle speed -
0.392(+0.098/-0.049)
1500∼2700rpm
(4.0(+1.0/-0.5))
3TNV82A
0.441(+0.098/-0.049)
2800~3000rpm
(4.5(+1.0/-0.5))
0.392(+0.098/-0.049)
1500~1800rpm
(4.0(+1.0/0.5))
3TNV84
0.441(+0.098/-0.049)
2000~3000rpm
(4.5(+1.0/-0.5))
0.392(+0.098/-0.049)
1500~1800rpm
(4.0(+1.0/0.5))
3TNV88
0.441(+0.098/-0.049)
2000~3000rpm
(4.5(+1.0/-0.5))
0.343(+0.098/-0.049)
1500~1800rpm
Lubricating oil (3.5(+1.0/0.5))
pressure 0.392(+0.098/-0.049)
3TNV84T 2400~2700rpm
(4.0(+1.0/0.5))
MPa (kgf/cm2)
0.441(+0.098/-0.049)
2800~3000rpm
at lube oil (4.5(+1.0/-0.5))
0.392(+0.098/-0.049)
7 temperature 1500~1800rpm
(4.0(+1.0/0.5)) 0.06 (0.6)
80 deg.C 3TNV84 5.6
0.441(+0.098/-0.049) or above
for 3TNV82A- 2000~3000rpm
4TNV98(T) (4.5(+1.0/-0.5))
0.392(+0.098/-0.049)
1500~1800rpm
100 deg.C for 4TNV88 (4.0(+1.0/0.5))
4TNV106(T) 0.441(+0.098/-0.049)
2000~3000rpm
(4.5(+1.0/-0.5))
0.343(+0.098/-0.049)
1500~1800rpm
(3.5(+1.0/0.5))
4TNV84T
0.412(+0.098/-0.049)
2000~3000rpm
(4.2(+1.0/0.5))
4TNV94L 1500~2500rpm 0.34(+/0.05) (3.5(+/0.5))
4TNV98 1500~2500rpm 0.34(+/0.05) (3.5(+/0.5))
4TNV98T 1500~2500rpm 0.34(+/0.05) (3.5(+/0.5))
0.44(+0.05/0.10)
1500~1800rpm
4TNV106 (4.5(+0.5/-1.0))
2000~2500rpm 0.44(+/0.05) (4.5(+/0.5))
0.44(+0.05/-0.10)
1500~1800rpm
4TNV106T (4.5kgf/.cm2(+0.5/-1.0))
2000~2200rpm 0.44(+/0.05) (4.5(+/0.5))
Oil pressure switch operating pressure 0.05 ± 0.01
8 - -
MPa (kgf/cm2) (0.5 ± 0.1)
valve opening Full opening lift
temperature (mm)
deg. C (temperature)
9 Thermostat 8 or above 2.7
All models 69.5 to 72.5
(85 deg.C)
All models 10 or above
80 to 84
option (95 deg.C)
Thermo switch actuating temperature
10 107 to 113 - 2.4.2
(deg.C)
(R.1)
185-2
12. Service Standards
12.2 Engine body
12.2.1 Cylinder head
(1) Cylinder head

Inspection item Standard Limit Reference page
Combustion surface distortion mm 0.05 or less 0.15
3TNV82A Intake 0.35 to 0.55 0.8
TNV84 to 88 Intake 0.30 to 0.50 0.8
(2-valve head)
Valve sink 4TNV84T(4-valve) Exhaust 0.30 to 0.50 0.8 4.2.5.(1)
mm
4TNV94L•98(T) Intake 0.36 to 0.56 0.8
4TNV106(T) Intake 0.5 to 0.7 1.0
Intake 120 -
Valve seat Seat angle Deg.
Exhaust 90 - 4.2.6.
(2-valve, 4-valve)
Seat correction angle deg. 40, 150 -
186
(2) Intake/exhaust valve and guide

mm
Reference
Inspection item Standard Limit
page
Guide inside diameter 7.000 to 7.015 7.08
Intake Valve stem outside diameter 6.945 to 6.960 6.90
3TNV82A Clearance 0.040 to 0.070 0.18
(2-valve head) Guide inside diameter 7.000 to 7.015 7.08
Exhaust Valve stem outside diameter 6.940 to 6.955 6.90
Clearance 0.045 to 0.075 0.18
4TNV84
3/4TNV88 Guide inside diameter 8.015 to 8.030 8.10
(2-valve head)
Clearance 0.045 to 0.075 0.18
4TNV84T Clearance 0.025 to 0.055 0.15
4.2.5.(2)
Clearance 0.040 to 0.070 0.17
4TNV94L Clearance 0.040 to 0.070 0.17
4TNV98(T)
Clearance 0.045 to 0.075 0.17
Clearance 0.033 to 0.060 0.18
3TNV82A 11.7 to 12.0 -
4TNV84, 3TNV84(T), 4TNV88 14.71 to 5.0 -
Valve guide projection
4TNV84T 8.2 to 8.5 -
from cylinder head 4.2.7.
4TNV94L, 4TNV98(T) 9.7 to 10.0 -
4TNV106(T) 13.4 to 13.6 -
Valve guide driving-in method Cold-fitted -
187
(3) Valve spring

mm
Reference
page
3TNV82A(2-valve) 44.4 43.9
4TNV84,3TNV84(T), 4TNV88(2-valve) 42.0 41.5
Free length 4TNV84T(4-valve) 37.4 36.9
4TNV94L, 4TNV98(T),(4-valve) 39.7 39.2
4TNV106(T)(4-valve) 50.6 50.1
4.2.5.(4)
3TNV82A(2-valve) - 1.4
4TNV84, 3TNV84(T), 4TNV88(2-valve) - 1.4
Inclination 4TNV84T(4-valve) - 1.3
4TNV94L, 4TNV98(T), (4-valve) - 1.4
4TNV106(T)(4-valve) - 1.5
(4) Rocker arm and shaft

mm
Reference
page
Arm shaft hole diameter 16.000 to 16.020 16.07
TNV82A to 88 Shaft outside diameter 15.966 to 15.984 15.94
Clearance 0.016 to 0.054 0.13
4.2.5.(5)
Arm shaft hole diameter 18.500 to 18.520 18.57
4TNV94L/98(T)/106(T) Shaft outside diameter 18.470 to 18.490 18.44
Clearance 0.010 to 0.050 0.13
(5) Push rod

mm
Bend Less than 0.03 0.03 4.2.5.(7)
(R.1)
188
12.2.2 Gear train and camshaft
(1) Camshaft
mm
Reference
page
Side gap 0.05 to 0.20 0.30 4.3.4
Bending (1/2 the dial gage reading) 0 to 0.02 0.05
3TNV82A-TNV88 38.600 to 38.800 38.350
4.3.5.(1)
Cam height 4TNV94L•98 43.400 to 43.600 43.150
4TNV106(T) 50.900 to 51.100 50.650
Shaft outside diameter / Metal inside diameter
Gear side Camshaft outside diameter 44.925 to 44.950 44.890
Clearance 0.040 to 0.130 0.240
TNV82A to TNV88 Intermediate Camshaft outside diameter 44.910 to 44.935 44.875
Clearance 0.065 to 0.115 0.225
Wheel side Camshaft outside diameter 44.925 to 44.950 44.890
Clearance 0.050 to 0.100 0.210
Clearance 0.040 to 0.130 0.240
4TNV94L/98(T) Intermediate Camshaft outside diameter 49.910 to 49.935 49.875 4.3.5.(1)
Clearance 0.065 to 0.115 0.225
Clearance 0.05 to 0.100 0.210
Clearance 0.040 to 0.140 0.250
4TNV106(T) Intermediate Camshaft outside diameter 57.895 to 57.925 57.860
Clearance 0.075 to 0.135 0.245
Clearance 0.050 to 0.120 0.230
189
(2) Idle gear shaft and bushing

mm
Shaft outside diameter 45.950 to 45.975 45.900
Bushing inside diameter 46.000 to 46.025 46.075 4.3.5.(2)
Clearance 0.025 to 0.075 0.175
(3) Backlash of each gear

mm
Reference
page
3TNV82A
Crank gear, cam gear, idle gear,
3/4TNV84(T) 0.07 to 0.15 0.17
fuel injection pump gear and PTO gear
3/4TNV88
Crank gear, cam gear, idle gear,
0.08 to 0.14 0.16 4.3.4.
fuel injection pump gear and PTO gear
4TNV94L
4TNV98(T) Lubricating oil pump gear 0.09 to 0.15 0.17
4TNV106(T) Balancer drive gear
0.12 to 0.18 0.20
(only for 4TNV106(T))
12.2.3 Cylinder block
(1) Cylinder block

mm
Reference
page
3TNV82A 82.000 to 82.030 82.200
3/4TNV84(T) 84.000 to 84.030 84.200
3/4TNV88 88.000 to 88.030 88.200
Cylinder inside diameter
4TNV94L 94.000 to 94.030 94.130
4.4.5.(1)
4TNV98 98.000 to 98.030 98.130
4TNV106(T) 106.000 to 106.030 106.130
Roundness
Cylinder bore 0.01 or less 0.03
Inclination
190
(2) Crankshaft
mm
Reference
page
Bending (1/2 the dial gauge reading) - 0.02
Metal inside diameter 43.000 to 43.042 -
3TNV82A
Clearance 0.038 to 0.090 0.150
TNV84 to 88
Clearance 0.038 to 0.074 0.150
Crank pin
4TNV94L•98
Clearance 0.038 to 0.074 0.150
4TNV106(T)
Clearance 0.054 to 0.090 0.150 4.4.5.(2)
Journal outside diameter 46.952 to 46.962 46.902
3TNV82A
Clearance 0.038 to 0.080 0.150
TNV84 to 88 Metal inside diameter 54.000 to 54.020 -
Selective pairing Metal thickness 1.995 to 1.990 -

Clearance 0.038 to 0.068 0.150
Crank journal
4TNV94L•98 Metal inside diameter 65.000 to 65.020 -

Clearance 0.038 to 0.068 0.150
4TNV106(T) Metal inside diameter 76.014 to 76.034 -

Clearance 0.052 to 0.082 0.150
191
(3) Thrust bearing

mm
Crankshaft side gap All models 0.13 to 0.23 0.28 4.4.4
(4) Piston and ring

Piston
mm
Reference
page
3TNV82A 81.950 to 81.980 81.905
3,4TNV84(T) 83.940 to 83.970 83.895
Piston outside diameter 3,4TNV88 87.940 to 87.970 87.895
(Measure in the direction
vertical to the piston pin.) 4TNV94L 93.935 to 93.965 93.900
4TNV98(T) 97.930 to 97.960 97.895
4TNV106(T) 105.930 to 105.960 105.880
3TNV82A 16 -
3,4TNV84(T) 24 -
Piston diameter
measure position 3,4TNV88 24 -
(Upward from the bottom 4TNV94L 22 -
end of the piston)
4TNV98(T) 22 -
4TNV106(T) 30 -
4.4.5.(4)
Hole inside diameter 23.000 to 23.009 23.039
3TNV82A Pin outside diameter 22.995 to 23.000 22.965
Clearance 0.000 to 0.014 0.074
3,4TNV84(T)
3,4TNV88
Clearance 0.000 to 0.014 0.074
Piston pin
4TNV94L•98 Pin outside diameter 29.989 to 30.000 29.959
Clearance 0.000 to 0.020 0.080
4TNV106(T) Pin outside diameter 36.989 to 37.000 36.959
Clearance 0.000 to 0.022 0.080
192
Piston ring
mm
Reference
Model Inspection item Standard limit
page
Ring width 1.970 to 1.990 1.950
Top ring
3TNV82A Ring width 1.970 to 1.990 1.950
Second ring
TNV84 Side clearance 0.045 to 0.080 0.200
Ring width 3.970 to 3.990 3.950
Oil ring
Ring width 1.970 to 1.990 1.950
Top ring
Ring width 1.970 to 1.990 1.950
TNV88 Second ring
Ring width 3.970 to 3.990 3.950
Oil ring
4.4.5.(4)
Ring width 1.940 to 1.960 1.920
Top ring
Ring width 1.970 to 1.990 1.950
4TNV94L/98 Second ring
Ring width 2.970 to 2.990 2.950
Oil ring
Ring width 2.440 to 2.460 2.420
Top ring
Ring width 1.970 to 1.990 1.950
4TNV106(T) Second ring
Ring width 2.970 to 2.990 2.950
Oil ring
End clearance 0.300 to -0.500 0.600
(R.1)
193
(5) Connecting rod

mm
Thrust clearance 0.2 to 0.4 - 4.4.4
Rod small end mm

Reference
page
3TNV82A Pin outside diameter 22.995 to 23.000 22.967
Clearance 0.025 to 0.043 0.101
TNV84-88 Pin outside diameter 25.995 to 26.000 25.967
Clearance 0.025 to 0.043 0.101
4.4.5.(5)
4TNV94L/98 Pin outside diameter 29.987 to 30.000 29.959
Clearance 0.025 to 0.051 0.109
4TNV106(T) Pin outside diameter 36.989 to 37.000 36.961
Clearance 0.025 to 0.049 0.107
(6) Tappet
mm
Reference
page
Tappet hole (block) inside diameter 12.000 to 12.025 12.045
TNV82A-88 Tappet stem outside diameter 11.975 to 11.990 11.955
Clearance 0.010 to 0.050 0.090
4TNV94L•98 Tappet stem outside diameter 11.975 to 11.990 11.955 4.4.5.(6)
Clearance 0.010 to 0.043 0.083
4TNV106(T) Tappet stem outside diameter 13.966 to 13.984 13.946
Clearance 0.015 to 0.052 0.092
194
12.3 Lubricating oil system (Trochoid pump)

(1) Outside clearance of outer rotor
mm
Model Standard Limit Reference page
3TNV82A to 88 0.12 to 0.21 0.30
4TNV94L/98 0.100 to 0.155 0.25 5.5.1.(1)
4TNV106(T) 0.100 to 0.165 0.25
(2) Side clearance of outer rotor

mm
Model Standard Limit Reference page
3TNV82A to 88 0.02 to 0.07 0.12
4TNV94L/98 0.05 to 0.10 0.15 5.5.1.(1)
4TNV106(T) 0.03 to 0.12 0.17
(3) Tip clearance between outer rotor and inner rotor

Insert a gap gage between an outer rotor and an inner rotor, and measure the tip clearance.
Tip clearance mm
Standard Limit
- 0.16
(4) Inside clearance of inner rotor

mm
Reference
Item Parts Standard Standard Limit
page
Inside clearance Gear boss diameter 53.05 to 53.15
0.3 to 0.5 0.6
of inner rotor Rotor diameter 53.45 to 53.55
Width across flat of 5.5.1.(2)
49.45 to 49.75
Width across flat Gear boss
0.2 to 0.6 0.7
clearance of inner rotor Width across flat of
49.95 to 50.05
rotor
(5) Rotor shaft clearance

mm
Reference
page
4TNV94L/ 98 Rotor shaft O.D. 12.955 to 12.975 12.945
5.5.1.(3)
4TNV106(T) Rotor shaft O.D. 12.955 to 12.965 12.945
Rotor clearance 0.035 to -0.065 0.105
(R.1)
195
13. Tightening torque for bolts and nuts

13.1 Tightening torques for main bolts and nuts
Thread Lubricating oil
diameter Tightening torque application Reference
Part and engine model
× pitch (thread portion, page
mm N•m (kgf•m) and seat surface)
61.7 to 65.7
3TNV82A M9 × 1.25
(6.3 to 6.7)
85.3 to 91.1
TNV84 to 88 M10 × 1.25
Cylinder (8.7 to 9.3)
Applied 4.2.4
head bolt 103.1 to 112.9
4TNV94L•98 M11 × 1.25
(10.511.5)
188.0 to 197.8
4TNV106(T) M13 × 1.5
(19.0 to 20.0)
37.2 to 41.2
3TNV82A M8 × 1.0
(3.8 to 4.2)
44.1 to 49.0
TNV84 to 88 M9 × 1.0
Connecting (4.5 to 5.0)
Applied 4.4.4
rod bolt 53.9 to 58.8
4TNV94L•98 M10 × 1.0
(5.5 to 6.0)
78.5 to 83.4
4TNV106(T) M11 × 1.0
(8.0 to 8.5)
83.3 to 88.2
TNV82A to 88 M10 × 1.25
Flywheel (8.5 to 9.0)
Applied 4.3.4
set bolt 186.2 to 205.8
4TNV94L•98•106(T) M14 × 1.5
(19 to 21)
76.4 to 80.4
3TNV82A M10 × 1.25
(7.8 to 8.2)
93.2 to 98.1
TNV84 to 88 M12 × 1.5
Bearing cap (9.5 to 10.5)
Applied 4.4.4
set bolt 108.1 to 117.9
4TNV94L•98 M11 × 1.25
(11.0 to 12.0)
186.2 to 205.8
4TNV106(T) M14 × 1.5
(19 to 21)
112.7 to 122.7
TNV82A to 88 M14 × 1.5
Crankshaft (11.5 to 12.5)
Applied 4.3.4
pulley set bolt 107.9 to 127.5
4TNV94L•98•106(T) M14 × 1.5
(11.0 to 13.0)
24.4 to 28.4
TNV82A to 88 M8 × 1.25
Fuel nozzle (2.5 to 2.9)
Not applied -
set bolt 22.6 to 28.4
4TNV94L•98•106(T) M8 × 1.25
(2.3 to 2.9)
TNV82A to 88 M14 × 1.5 78 to 88 (8 to 9)
Fuel pump drive
113 to 123 Not applied 4.3.4
gear set nut 4TNV94L•98•106(T) M18 × 1.5
(11.5 to 12.5)
29.4 to 34.3
TNV82A to 88 M12 × 1.5
Fuel injection (3.0 to 3.5)
Not applied -
pipe set bolt 19.6 to 24.5
4TNV94L•98•106(T) M12 × 1.5
(2.0 to 2.5)
Fuel return 7.8 to 9.8
4TNV94L98106(T) M6 × 1.0 Not applied -
pipe joint bolt (0.8 to 1.0)
Rocker arm 16.7 to 22.5
4TNV106(T) M8 × 1.25 Not applied -
cover set bolt (1.7 to 2.3)
EPA flange 113 to 123
4TNV106(T) M18 × 1.5 Not applied -
set bolt (11.5 to 12.5)
(R.1)
196
13.2 Tightening torques for standard bolts and nuts
Nominal thread diameter Tightening torque

Item Remarks
× pitch N•m (kgf•m)
9.8 to 11.8 Use 80 % of the value at left
M6 × 1
(1.0 to 1.2) when the tightening part is
aluminum.
22.6 to 28.4
M8 × 1.25 Use 60 % of the value at left for
(2.3 to 2.9)
4T bolts and lock nuts.
44.1 to 53.9
M10 × 1.5
Hexagon bolt (7T) (4.5 to 5.5)
and nut 78.4 to 98.0
M12 × 1.75
(8.0 to 10)
127.5 to 147.1
M14 × 1.5
(13 to 15)
215.7 to 235.4
M16 × 1.5
(22 to 24)
9.8
1/8
(1.0)
19.6
1/4
(2.0)
PT plug -
29.4
3/8
(3.0)
58.8
1/2
(6.0)
12.7 to 16.7
M8
(1.3 to 1.7)
19.6 to 25.4
M10
(2.0 to 2.6)
24.5 to 34.3
Pipe joint bolt M12 -
(2.5 to 3.5)
39.2 to 49.0
M14
(4.0 to 5.0)
49.0 to 58.8
M16
(5.0 to 6.0)
Note) Lubricating oil is not applied to threaded portion and seat surface.
197
YANMAR AMERICA CORP.
951 CORPORATE GROVE DRIVE, BUFFALO GROVE, IL 60089-4508, U.S.A.
TEL : 1-847-541-1900
FAX : 1-847-541-2161
YANMAR EUROPR B.V.

P.O. BOX 30112,1303 AC ALMERE NL
BRUGPLEIN 11, 1332 BS ALMERE-DE VAART, THE NETHERLANDS
TEL : 31-36-5493200
FAX : 31-36-5493209
YANMAR ASIA (SINGAPORE) CORPORATION PTE LTD.

4 TUAS LANE, SINGAPORE 638613
TEL : 65-6861-3855
FAX : 65-6862-5195
YANMAR CO,. LTD.

SMALL ENGINES FACTORY
ENGINE PRODUCT OPERATIONS DIVISION
1009-2, KAWAMICHI, BIWA-CHO, HIGASHIAZAI-GUN, SHIGA 526-0111, JAPAN
TEL : 81-749-72-5195
FAX : 81-749-72-5214 / 5158
Printed in Japan
M9961-03E070
SERVICE MANUAL
FUEL INJECTION EQUIPMENT
MODEL YPD-MP2/YPD-MP4 SERIES
Introduction
This document describes the features, disassembly, reassembly and adjustment procedure of the fuel injection unit
(Model YPD-MP2,MP4) for Yanmar Diesel Engine Model TNV.
Fuel injection unit is an essential mechanism of diesel engines, and thus, has to be designed to allow fine adjustment to
the engine load.
Therefore, the components of the fuel injection pumps are required to be given high-precision. To meet this requirement,
we process and assemble them very accurately.
Accordingly, when performing disassembly and adjustment works in the market, keep the workbenches and their
environment clean to surely prevent dirt and dust from attaching to the components of the unit, and take special care that
the components are not rusted.
Please note that the specifications of the components are revised to improve the quality of the product, and thus, the
details of the changed specifications will be notified through the correction table every time the change occurs.
i
Contents
1. FOR SAFE SERVICING ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1
1.1. Warning Symbols ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1
1.2. Safety Precautions ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2
2. GENERAL INFORMATION ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 4
2.1. Outline of MP pump ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 4
2.2. Specifications ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5
2.3. Outline of fuel injection pump ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6
2.4. Construction of MP-Pump ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 7

2.4.1. Fuel Injection Part ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 7
2.4.2. Governor Part ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 8
2.4.3. Delivery Part ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 17
2.5. Function of Component ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 18

2.5.1. F.O. Feed Pump ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 18
2.6. Timer Mechanism ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 20

2.6.1. Structure and Functions ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 20
2.7. C.S.D.(Cold Start Device) ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 21

2.7.1. Cold Starting Advancer ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 21
3. DISASSEMBLY ,REASSEMBLY AND INSPECTION ････････････････････････････････････････ 22
3.1. Disassembly ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 22

3.1.1. Separating the pump body from the governor body･･･････････････････････････････････ 22
3.1.2. Separating the governor weight CMP･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 23
3.1.3. Disassembling the hydraulic head･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 23
3.1.4. Separating hydraulic head CMP ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 25
3.1.5. Separating the cam shaft ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 25
3.1.6. Disassembling the hydraulic head CMP ････････････････････････････････････････････ 27
3.2. Disassembling the Governor ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 28
3.3. Reassembly ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 29

3.3.1. Re-assembling the hydraulic head･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 29
ii
3.3.2. Re-assembling Cam Shaft ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 30
3.3.3. Install the hydraulic head CMP. ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 34
3.3.4. Assembling the Hydraulic Head ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 35
3.4. Re-assembling the Governor ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 39
3.5. Combining Governor and Pump Bodies ････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 40
4. ADJUSTMENT OF FUEL INJECTION PUMP AND GOVERNOR ･･････････････････････････････ 42
4.1. Preparations ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 42
4.2. Bottom clearance adjustment(Fuel Injection Timing) ････････････････････････････････････ 44

4.2.1. The bottom clearance adjusting value and the Cam classification ･････････････････････ 45
4.3. Adjustment of Governor ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 46

4.3.1. Adjustment of No Load Max. Engine Speed ･････････････････････････････････････････ 46
4.3.2. Adjustment of Fuel Limit Bolt ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 46
4.3.3. Adjustment of Torque-Rise Point ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 46
4.3.4. Adjustment of Reverse Angleich･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 47
4.3.5. Adjustment of Staring Injection Amount ････････････････････････････････････････････ 48

4.3.6. Checking the Injection Stop ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 48
5. FUEL INJECTION NOZZLE ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 49
5.1. Functioning of fuel injection nozzle ････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 49
5.2. Type/construction of fuel injection nozzle ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 49
5.3. Fuel injection nozzle disassembly ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 50
5.4. Fuel injection nozzle inspection ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 51

5.4.1. Washing ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 51
5.4.2. Nozzle inspection ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 52
5.5. Fuel injection nozzle reassembly ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 53
5.6. Adjusting fuel injection nozzle ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 53

5.6.1. Adjusting opening pressure････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 53
5.6.2. Injection test ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 54
6. TROUBLESHOOTING ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 55
6.1. Troubleshooting of fuel injection pump ･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 55
iii
6.2. Major faults and troubleshooting ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 55
7. TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR MAIN BOLTS AND NUTS ････････････････････････････････････ 58
7.1. Pump part ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 58
7.2. Mechanical governor part･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 59
8. TOOLS ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 60
iv
1. For Safe Servicing
Most accidents are caused by negligence of basic safety rules and precautions. For accident prevention,
it is important to avoid such causes before development to accidents.
Please read this manual carefully before starting repair or maintenance to fully understand safety
precautions and appropriate inspection and maintenance procedures.
Attempting at a repair or maintenance job without sufficient knowledge may cause an unexpected
accident.
It is impossible to cover every possible danger in repair or maintenance in the manual. Sufficient
consideration for safety is required in addition to the matters marked CAUTION. Especially for safety
precautions in a repair or maintenance job not described in this manual, receive instructions from a
knowledgeable leader.
1.1. Warning Symbols

Safety marks used in this manual and their meanings are as follows:
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation,

which if not avoided, WILL result in death or serious injury.
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation,

which if not avoided, COULD result in death or serious
injury.
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation,

which if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate
injury.
Any matter marked [NOTICE] in this manual is especially important in servicing.

If not observed, the product performance and quality may not be guaranteed.
1
1.2. Safety Precautions
Place allowing sufficient ventilation

Jobs such as engine running part welding and polishing the paint with
sandpaper should be done in a well-ventilated place．
Failure to Observe
Very dangerous for human body due to the possibility of inhaling poisonous
gas or dust．
Sufficient wide and flat place

The floor space of the service shop for inspection and maintenance should
be sufficiently wide and flat without any holes.
Failure to observe
An accident such as a violent fall may be caused.
Clean，orderly arranged place

No dust，mud，0il or parts should be left on the floor surface.
Failure to Observe
An unexpected accident may be caused．
Bright，safety illuminated place

The working place should be illuminated sufficiently and safety．For a job in
a dark place where it is difficult to see，use a portable safety lamp. The
bulb should be covered with a wire cage for protection.
Failure to observe
The bulb may be broken accidentally causing ignition of leaking oil.
Place equipped with a fire extinguisher

Keep a first aid kit and fire extinguisher c1ose at hand in preparation for fire
emergencies
2
Wears for safe operation
Wear a helmet，working clothes ，safety shoes and other safety protectors
suited to the job. It is especially important to wear well-fiting work clothes.
Failure to observe
A serious accident such as trapping by a machine may occur.
Use of appropriate tools

Use tools appropriate for the jobs to be done. Use a correctly sized tool for
loosening or tightening a machine part.
Failure to observe
A serious injury or engine damage may occur.
Always use genuine parts

Jobs such as engine running part welding and polishing the paint with
sandpaper should be done in a well-ventilated place．
Failure to Observe
Shortening of MP pump unit life or an unexpected accident may arise.
Always tighten to the specified torque if designated in the manual.
Failure to Observe
Loosening or falling may cause parts damage or injury.
Observe the following instructions with regard to waste disposal.
Negligence of each instruction will cause environmental pollution.

Waste fluids such as engine oil and cooling water shall be
discharged into a container without spillage onto the ground
Do not let waste fluids be discharged into the sewerage，a river
or the sea.
Harmful wastes such as oil, fuel, solvents, filter elements and
battery shall be treated according to the respective laws and
regulations. Ask a qualified collecting company for example.
3
2. General information
2.1. Outline of MP pump
MP pump is a fuel injection pump that has been newly developed to be installed on Yanmar direct injection system diesel
engines for the purpose of complying with the regulation for the exhaust gas emission that are becoming tighter in the
future.
The fuel injection pump is a fuel distribution type pump that supplies fuel to each cylinder of the engine through a
distribution shaft by using a single plunger unlike conventional rail system or distribution system pumps.
Pump name plate
Fuel InjectionFIE ASYAsy.

code ID codePump
for Exh.gas
No. regulation
Pump code
Injection
ID code for production Serial numbers
4
2.2. Specifications
Model YPD-3MP2 YPD-4MP2 YPD-4MP4
4TNV94
Applicable Engine 3TNV82A /84(T)/88 4TNV84(T) /88
/98(T)/106(T)
Plunger Diameter (mm) 9mm 10mm
Max. Cam Lift (mm) 8.1mm 10mm
Governor-System Mechanical All Speed Governor
Fuel Injection Timing Control

Built-in Hydraulic Control Timer
System
Fuel feed pump Forced Lubrication System With Trochoid Pump
Lubrication system Engine System Oil
Dry Weight (kg) 8.4 8.6 11.5
5
2.3. Outline of fuel injection pump
Yanmar distribution type fuel injection pump YPD-MP consists of a hydraulic head that is equipped with a single plunger, a
single distribution shaft, and delivery valves for each individual cylinders, a pump housing that includes camshafts, and a
governor, all of which are integrated into the main unit of the pump.
For the feed of the fuel, the plunger moves up / down and the distribution shaft rotates with the revolution of the camshaft
to distribute the fuel among the cylinders individually.
Specifically, one revolution of camshaft completes three cycles (for three cylinder engine) of a process, including switching
over to the high pressure flow path to each cylinder with the distribution shaft, opening delivery valve, high pressure pipe,
fuel injection valve, and engine cylinders in this order. This process is repeated by the revolution of the camshaft.
< The Flow of the Fuel >
orifice
Fuel injection pipe Injection pump

Timer piston
Fuel filter Plunger Thermo-element
Distributor Engine coolant
shaft
Nozzle Accumulator
Electric fuel
feed pump
12/48
Water separator joint

Overflow
Fuel return orifice
tappet
High pressure gallery
Fuel tank
Cam Engine crankcase
Oil seal Engine oil
Torochoid pump
Low pressure gallery
Pressure control valve
6
2.4. Construction of MP-Pump
2.4.1. Fuel Injection Part
Plug (C.W.)
Plug (barrel)
Joint (C.W.)
Holder (delivery) Plug (distribution shaft)
Thermo element.
Delivery valve CMP.
Holder (timer)
Sleeve (distribution shaft)

Piston (timer)
Distribution shaft
Hydrauric head
Joint (distribution shaft) Packing (timer)

Removal stop
Barrel (plunger)
(Transmission shaft)
Plunger
Transmission shaft
Sleeve (control)
Spring (plunger)
Tappet (roller)
Retainer (spring)
Roller
Camshaft
Flange
Drive gear A Drive gear B
Spring (accumulator) Accumulator Joint (FO inlet) Joint (overflow)
Plug(accumurator)
Strainer (A)
Strainer (B)
F. O. feed pump CMP Control rack Whirl-stop (tappet)
7
2.4.2. Governor Part
2.4.2.1. Construction of Governor
Usage condition of diesel engines are extremely varied，with a wide range of loads and speeds．The governor plays an
important role in the operation of the engine by quickly adjusting the position of the control rack to control the amount of
fuel injected, according to changes of engine speed.
It also automatically controls the engine to prevent engine speed from exceeding the maximum ,and keeps the engine
from stopping.
Mechanical governor
Shaft (Control lever)

Fuel limiter CMP. Control lever
Torque spring
Spring (governor)
Link
Regulator lever
Stop solenoid
Shaft (Governor lever)

Camshaft
Governor case cover
Governor weight
Angleich spring assembly Sleeve (governor)
Governor lever CMP
The governor weight mounted on the end of the fuel injection pump cam shaft rotates around the governor support pin,
driven by the cam shaft, and is forced outwards by the centrifugal force acting on the weight．
The thrust force acting on the cam shaft due to this centrifugal force acts on the lower part of the tension lever through the
sleeve A starting excess fuel spring is mounted on the bottom of the tension lever．
0ne end of the governor spring is hooked to the right upper end of the tension lever, and the other end to the spring lever
of the control lever shaft.
8
As the spring lever and control lever are mounted on the same shaft, when the control lever is turned towards full, the
governor spring is pulled and the load gradually increases.
Since the tension lever can move freely around the governor shaft on the player bearing, as speed increases and the
shifter is pushed to the left，the tension lever rotates clockwise, and when speed decreases，the tension lever rotates
counterclockwise.
The governor lever rotates smoothly on the second shaft installed on the tension leveb. The bottom part of this lever is in
contact with the sleeve through the shifter, which is in contact with the bottom of the tension lever through the excess fuel
spring. It therefore moves with the tension lever according to increases／decreases in engine speed.
The top of the governor lever is connected to the fuel pump control rack through the governor link. The movement of the
lever controls the volume of fuel injected by the pump. When speed increases the lever rotates clockwise to cause the
control rack to reduce fuel and when speed decreases the lever rotates counterclockwise to cause the control rack to
increase fuel, thus engine speed is controlled.
The top of the tension lever comes in contact with the stopper built into the top of the governor case to limit the maximum
fuel injection volume.
(1) Shape of control and stop levers

The control and stop levers that operate the governor have different shapes depending on engine design and
method of attachment, as seen in the pictures below.
The motion of the control lever is regulated by the maximum speed adjustment bolt and the idling adjustment bolt. This
maintains the necessary engine speed.
9
(2) Engine stop device
The magnetic solenoid is equipped to stop the engine.
Injection volume
Decrease
Link
Stop solenoid
(3)Torque rise equipment

As mentioned before，this governor has a structure that allows you to equip it with an anglich and/or torque spring as
torque rise equipment. In this way the requirements for different engines can full filled.
Torque spring CMP
Angleich spring CMP
10
2.4.2.2. Function of Governor
(1) Function of governor
Following is a representation of the movement characteristics of the control rack at respective speeds，when the speed
rise from 0,with the governor control lever at the maximum speed position:
A-B : Fuel volume condition during starting. Volume is controlled by excess fuel spring.
B-C : The rack moves towards decrease after engine starts and speed increase as the load of the excess fuel spring is
overcome by the centrifugal force of the governor weight.
C-D : High torque at low speed is developed by increasing fuel injection volume equivalent to the angleich stroke.
D-E : Condition when the thrust force exceeds that of the angleich spring force on the bottom of the tension lever and it
gradually pushes the rack to decrease fuel when engine speed increases.
E-F : Condition when both right and left ends of the shifter come in contact with the sleeve and the bottom of the tension
lever, and the control rack is kept at the normal position by the stopper.（max．injection volume position on models not
equipped with an angleich spring)
F : Point when governor starts to take effect.
This is the rated output of the engine．
F’ : Point when governor start to take effect on models with torque spring．
G : Continuous rating point（usually 85－90％ injection volume of F point).
H : No load max．speed
L : Low-idle position
11
(2) Starting control
Moving the control lever to the max．speed position pulls the governor spring, and moves the tension lever until it comes in
contact with the control stopper.
When this is done，the excess fuel spring provided in between the tension lever and governor lever holds the control rack
at the maximum starting injection volume position RA-B.
After the engine is started, the excess fuel spring is compressed when the centrifugal force of the governor weight
overcomes the set of the excess fuel spring as speed exceeds Nb, speed goes from B to C' (on models with angleich
spring ) or B to C(on models without angleich spring ). The rack reaches the position of Rc where the governor lever and
tension lever are interlocked.
（3） Idling
When the control lever is returned to the idling position after the engine is started. the governor spring tension decreases
and the tension lever descends clockwise, and the governor weight load keeps the governor spring and the excess fuel
spring load in equilibrium to maintain idling speed at (RL).
12
(4) Max speed
The angle of the control lever is set at determined
engine speed. The governor keeps engine speed
constant by adjusting sped when load changes.
For example, if the operator moves the control lever
with the link from the idling position to max. Output,
governor spring tension increases, the tension lever is
pulled until it comes in contact with the full load stopper,
the movement of the governor lever is transmitted
to the control rack via the link, maintaining the full load
rack position, and engine sped increase until the
governor weight thrust load and governor spring
tension come into equilibrium at full load max. Speed.
(5) Necessity and function of angleich

The governor must satisfy the required injection curves
represented in the diagram below in order to obtain
sufficient output at low speed, and not emit black
smoke at high speed. the angleich spring was devised
to provide for maximum torque at low sped by setting
injection volume at point A, and shifting injection
volume to point B' at high engine speed.
13
The angleich spring is mounted to the part of the
tension lever (however some engine are not equipped
with an angleich spring depending on usage and speed
range utilized).
When engine speed is low, the governor weight cannot
compress the angleich spring as the angleich spring
load is lager than the governor weight, thrust load, and
the control rack is held at a position (Rc) to increase
injection volume.
Furthermore, as engine speed rise, the angleich spring
is gradually compressed as governor weight thrust load
increases and exceeds angleich load, before high
speed control is effected. When the governor lever and
the bottom of the tension lever come into contact (end
of angleich stroke), injection volume is reduced by that
amount, and the rack reaches the rated position (RE).
14
(6) Necessity of torque spring and function
Engines used in construction machinery are subjected
to sudden loads which cause a decrease in speed and
sometimes results in stopping of the engine. A torque
spring is provided to move the control rack towards
injection volume increase when engine speed decrease，
to increase torque to withstand overloads, and in turn
prevent the engine from stopping.
The governor control lever is fixed at point G in the
diagram below, the continuous rated output position.
At this time，when engine is loaded, the tension lever
encompasses the torque spring, the control rack comes
away from full load stopper, and fluctuates between G
and H according to engine load.
When the load on the engine exceeds the continuous
rated output, speed decrease, governor spring tension
exceeds the governor weight thrust load and
overcomes the torque spring set load. The tension lever
then gradually causes the control rack to move towards
injection volume increase via the governor lever and
link, and the torque rise stroke ends when the control
rack reaches F'.
The torque spring thus provides for increasing of injection volume when speed decrease, to increase engine torque and in
turn prevent engine stopping due to sudden increases in load, and also provide for strong engine output characteristics.
15
(7) No load max. speed
When the load decreases from full load max. speed
and engine speed further increase, the increased thrust
load of the governor weight acting on the governor
spring through the tension lever exceeds the set load of
the spring, the tension lever and governor lever
descend clockwise, the control rack is pushed to the no
load injection volume position (RH), and the engine is
operated at no load max. Speed.
When the engine is being used at partial load, the
governor spring functions in the same way at a lower
speed (i, i'-j) as for full load max. Speed, as the
governor spring set load is smaller.
(8) Stopping engine

The engine stops when you turn the governor control lever all the way towards stop.
On engine equipped with a stop device, the engine can be stopped by moving the control rack to the stop position,
regardless of the control lever position.
16
2.4.3. Delivery Part
Delivery Ports and Cylinder Number
4MP2, 4MP4
Cylinder No. １２３４
Port No. B A C D
Injection Order 2 1 3 4
Flywheel side Driving side
1 2 3 4
3MP2
Cylinder No. 1 2 3
Port No. B A C
Injection Order 2 1 3
Flywheel side Driving side
1 2 3
17
2.5. Function of Component
2.5.1. F.O. Feed Pump
The FO feed pump feeds fuel oil from the fuel tank to the fuel injection pump via the water separator and fuel filter.
The trochoid FO feed pump, installed on the fuel injection pump side, is driven by the fuel camshaft via the bevel gear.
This feed pump can feed high pressure fuel oil into the FO injection pump, but while the fuel oil inside the piping is empty
due to shortage of gases, etc., the pump’s self-feeding performance is low. Accordingly, the manual priming pump with
FO filter or solenoid pre-feed pump is used together. The feed pump failure causes the delivery pressure and volume to
drop. This, in turn, shortens the service life of the fuel injection pump and causes the pump to become faulty.
Replace the feed pump assembly after 10,000 hours’ use as a standard.
FO feed pump
① Pump case
② Pump cover
③ Inner rotor
④ Outer rotor
⑤ Shaft
⑥ Molded ring
⑦ Oil seal
⑧ Bevel gear
⑩ Drive pin
⑪ Relief valve
⑫ Spring
⑬ Seal washer
⑭ Relief plug
⑮ Bolt
⑯ C-ring
⑰ Bush
⑱ Thrust washer
⑲ Washer
18
2.5.1.1. Specifications of F.O. Feed Pump
YPD-MP2 YPD-MP4
Suction Head
（ｋPａ） -10
Std. Delivery Pressure
（MPａ） 0.4-0.5 0.6-0.7
Std. Delivery Volume
（cm3/min） 500 600
Pressure & delivery volume figures at conditions below:

Conditions:
Outlet orifice dia. :φ0.7mm

F.O. grade : ISO 8217
Revolutions : 1000min－１
F.O. temp. : 40 degC (104 degF)
2.5.1.2. Inspection of F.O. Feed Pump

(1) Check for the abnormal flaws and chipping on the bevel gear face. If found to be abnormal, replace the whole feed pump
assembly.
(2) Check for the abnormal flaws or wear on the face contacting with the pump case, pump cover, inner rotor and outer rotor.
If wear exceeds 0.1mm, replace the whole feed pump assembly.
(3) Check for the abnormal wear of the shaft and oil seal moving area. If wear exceeds 0.05mm in depth, replace the whole
feed pump assembly.
(4) When no abnormality was found, just replace the molded ring and seal washer and re-assemble.
(5) After install the fuel injection pump, operate the fuel injection pump to check that no oil leaks from each part.
19
2.6. Timer Mechanism
When the engine is used in a wide range from low to high speeds, it is necessary to change the fuel injection timing
according to the engine speeds for always keeping the optimum firing timing. It is also necessary to optimize the
injection timing for reducing noise and exhaust gas emissions.
This pump has the timer mechanism for revolutions, load and cold starting.
2.6.1. Structure and Functions

The engine speed timer is the mechanical timer which uses the oil leakage from the small diameter sub spill port installed
slightly upper side of the main spill port of the jerk pump. When the engine speed is high, pressure rises before oil leaks
from the small diameter port and injection is started. But when the engine speed is low, pressure does not rise until the
port blocked by the plunger and the injection start is delays. Usually, the lower the engine speed, further the injection
timing advances. But this engine speed timer prevents the injection timing from advancing during the low engine speed
ranges and thus the noise and Nox. emissions can be controlled.
The fewer the injection amount, the earlier the load timer causes the main port to close by the plunger’s upper lead for
advancing the injection timing. This feature is instrumental in preventing misfire or emission of bluish white smoke during
low load operation.
The cold start timer causes the sub port to be blocked only under cold temperatures for accelerating injection timing and
facilitating in cold starting. The timer houses the thermo element and cooling water circulates around the temperature
sensing section. The thermo-element senses the coolant temperature for adjusting the control piston. The sub-port is
blocked when the temperature is lower than the set temperature and the pressure is raised earlier than in the normal
temperature for advancing the injection timing. When the temperature exceeds the set temperature, the sub-port is
opened and the regular injection characteristics are recovered.
Hydraulic control device of injection timing Timing Control

(Speed timer,Load timer,Cold start timer) Device
Coolant
Advance Required characteristics .
C : Thermo
Improving cold startability A :Sub Port -element
Injection Timing
B : Sub Lead
At cold start
Main Port
Main Lead Piston
At no load
At full load Rated

Reduction of noise & NOx Barrel
Reduction of white smoke Plunger
Retard Pump speed
20
2.7. C.S.D.(Cold Start Device)
2.7.1. Cold Starting Advancer
Purpose
In order to facilitate easy engine starting under cold temperatures, the advancer senses the cooling water temperature for
advancing the fuel injection timing.
2.7.1.1. Structure & Function
At normal operating Termo-elementt At cold starting

Engine coolant
Sub-port Sub-port
is opened is closed
Main port
Sub port Piston
Fuel IN Fuel IN
Plunger Spring
Plunger barrel Fuel gallery
When the coolant temperature is higher than specified When the coolant temperature is lower than specified
value, the thermo-element keeps expanding and the sub- value, the thermo-element keeps shrinking and the sub-
port is opened. port is closed by piston.
21
3. Disassembly ,Reassembly
and Inspection
3.1. Disassembly
Disassembled parts must be put aside in order.
Wash them before reassembly.
3.1.1. Separating the pump body from the

governor body
Rotating the link lifter will move the inside link

upward/downward, so the control rack may be
engaged/disengaged.
Install the pump body to the disassembly table.
Remove the bolt fixing the pump and governor bodies.
Remove the link lifter fix bolt.

Separate the governor from the pump body.
Link insertion window
Turn the link lifter plate counterclockwise.
The pump body separated from t he governor body
22
3.1.2. Separating the governor weight CMP Disassembling the delivery valve
Remove the holder, (delivery).

Providing whirl-stop to the camshaft
Remove the delivery valve and gasket.
Example of whirl-stop
Remove the nut, (governor support).

Delivery valve parts disassembled. (Take care not
3.1.3. Disassembling the hydraulic head to mix these with other parts on reassembly.
Disassembling the hydraulic head Reassemble these to the original port as a set.)
Remove the joint, (FO inlet pipe). Remove the delivery valve and gasket.
Remove gasket
23
Remove the distribution shaft. Remove the holder and gasket, (timer)
Removed parts must be stored in the cleaning oil sump.
Remove the plug, (accumulator).

Remove the plug and gasket, (barrel). Make sure that the seal washer remains on the plug.
Remove the plug, (C.W.) and the joint, (C.W.)
Parts disassembled.
Remove the thermo element.
24
3.1.4. Separating hydraulic head CMP 3.1.5. Separating the cam shaft
Remove the joint, (distribution shaft).
Remove the hydraulic head CMP fixing bolt.
A
Remove the feed pump.
Do not loosen two bolts (A)
.
Remove the hydraulic head CMP.
O-ring
Make sure that two O-rings are free from

damages.
Remove the packing.
Remove the removal stop, (transmission shaft) fastening bolt.
25
Lift the transmission shaft slightly by your hand.
Remove the whirl-stop, (tappet).
Align the camshaft’s key groove with the embossed mark on

Take out the tappet. the body.
Tappet disassembled and FIC adjust shim. Lift the transmission shaft a little and pull out the camshaft.
Remove the retainer, (bearing) fastening bolt.

Camshaft extracted
Remove the retainer, (bearing).

Remove the transmission shaft CMP.
26
Remove the transmission shaft CMP.
3.1.6. Disassembling the hydraulic head CMP
Remove the rack guide.
Remove the spring retainer.

Compress the plunger spring and remove the
spring retainer, (B).
While compressing the plunger spring using special service

tool, remove spring retainer B.
Spring retainer B.
Plunger SP seat extractor
Remove the control sleeve.
Hydraulic head
Cleaning oil sump
Remove the plunger.

Cleaning oil sump
Remove the rack return spring.
Parts removed from hydraulic head CMP

Disassembled parts must be separately stored in the cleaning
oil sump.
Remove the rack guide fastening bolt.

27
3.2. Disassembling the Governor
Removed governor lever shaft
Remove the lock nut, (Control lever).
Remove the regulator lever. Take out the governor lever CMP.
Remove the shim.
Remove the spring.
Remove the removal stop, (governor lever shaft) fixing bolt.
Remove the removal stop, (governor lever shaft).
Pull out the governor lever shaft.
28
3.3. Reassembly
3.3.1. Re-assembling the hydraulic head
Install the rack guide.
Rack guide
Control sleeve Rack auxiliary SP
Rack
Install the plunger.
Upper lead
L
Upper spring retainer
Sub-lead
Distribution shaft sleeve
Ball Identification marking
Attaching rack and rack guide

When installing rack guide, push it against the
Note that the positional relationship of the upper
distribution shaft sleeve and upper spring retainer so
lead and sub-lead of the plunger and the ball of
that the rack is in parallel with the direction of
the control sleeve is as shown below. (Plunger
camshaft. (T = 3 to 4 N•m)
identification marking (such as "W4") and the ball
Movable range of rack is to be equal to or larger
of the control sleeve are oriented in the same
than ±7 mm.
direction.)
Fix the rack at the position of L = 25, and measure
Be careful that the plunger is NOT inserted
the effective stroke and sub-step (overflow stroke) to
upside down.
check that they are within the standards (Refer to
attached drawing 1.)
The rack must not separate from the ball of the
control sleeve within the movable range.
Fix the plunger with a jig and measure the total
backlash. (To be equal to or less than 0.2 mm)
The load of rack auxiliary SP must be able to return
the rack from the maximum decreased position to
Install the control sleeve and spring retainer. the maximum increased position).
29
3.3.2. Re-assembling Cam Shaft
Install the rack guide fastening bolt.

Install the transmission shaft CMP.
Tightening Torque : 3.9-4.9 N-m
Spring retainer (B).
Spring.
Install the plunger spring and spring retainer (B).

Attaching transmission shaft CMP
Apply molybdenum disulfide to the shaft section.
Check that the transmission shaft rotates
Install the camshaft.
30
Install the camshaft.
Attaching camshaft
Tightening Torque : 8-10 N-m
Apply molybdenum disulfide to the bushing or the
bearing.
Insert the camshaft into the pump body with
transmission shaft CMP at the lowered position
(gear B touching the pump body).
Be careful that the cam and gear B do not interfere
with each other.
(Especially for 4 cylinder engine, note that the Checking backlash
phase in which the cam passes is limited.) Rotate camshaft to check that transmission shaft
The shaft can be inserted with the key of the rotates smoothly.
driving side press-fitted to the camshaft. Fix transmission shaft from upper surface of the
Be careful not to damage the camshaft bushing. housing, and turn the camshaft to check the backlash.
Backlash must be in the range from 0.2 to 1.5 degree.
Note: When measuring at the position of camshaft
driving side key (at the center of the key as shown below),
the displacement must be in the range from 0.03 to 0.25.
Rack plug
Tighten the rack plug. (If rack

plug has been removed.)
Position the transmission shoe of the

transmission shaft CMP as shown in the
illustration.
31
Position the camshaft key groove as shown in the
illustration.
Engagement of gears
・ With the phase of camshaft and collar of transmission shaft set in the direction as shown below, engage gears
A and B with each other. (Check that the match mark of gear B and the mark of gear A shown below are
aligned with each other by looking through the feed pump installation hole.)
・ When inserting the stopper pin, do not raise the transmission shaft excessively, or the gears will be
disengaged. (Check the engagement again after inserting the stopper pin.)
・ The positions of the collars of transmission shaft are not limited only if either one is at the top or bottom as
shown.
Install the removal stop, (transmission shaft).
Fasten the removal stop, (transmission shaft).

32
Whirl-stop groove
Fasten the nut, (governor support), (and provide the whirl-stop
to the cam shaft.)
Tightening Torque : 79 - 84 N-m

Install the tappet.
Direct the tappet’s whirl-stop groove as shown in the
illustration.
Assembling tappets
Insert tappet into the pump body with the slit
directed toward the lock side, and attach the
tappet lock. (T = 4 to 5 N•m)
Turn the camshaft to check that the tappet
Install the feed pump.
moves up and down smoothly.
Identification hole (φ3, depth 2 mm)

Install the whirl-stop, (tappet).
Tighten the tappet, while moving it upward and Identification of feed pump
downward. Spec. φ3 identification
hole
General Not provided
purpose
TK Provided
Note that the identification hole can be seen only when

looking from obliquely above because it is located on the
pump case side.
Install the governor weight CMP and nut, (governor support).
33
3.3.3. Install the hydraulic head CMP.
Install the hydraulic head CMP.

Insert the two positioning pins. Be sure not to confuse
packing front with rear surface. (Align them with holes
on the body.) Installing H head
Assemble shims with an appropriate thickness that
corresponds to the measurement of the bottom
clearance (refer to attached drawing 3).
Temporarily tighten the hexagon socket head bolts
evenly in the order as shown below until the surfaces of
H head and pump body contact with each other, and
Install the joint, (transmission shaft). subsequently tighten to the specified torque in the same
order.
After assembling H head, check the top clearance
again.
After assembling H head, push the rack from governor
side to check that the rack is returned with the force of
rack auxiliary SP.
When reassembling H head, be sure to replace the
Assemble the FIC adjust shim inside the tappet. head packing with new one.
Install the hydraulic head CMP. Install the hydraulic head CMP fastening bolt.
While hand pressing the hydraulic head, temporarily Important Tightening Torque : 18-22 N-m
tighten the tightening bolts. Then, tighten them
Tighten the bolts in diagonal order, while checking the
with specified torque. torque with torque meter.
34
Install the distribution shaft.
Inserting distribution shaft

・ Insert distribution shaft so that the directional
relationship between the shaft and camshaft is as
shown below (Do not assemble upside down).
Measure the plunger top position. ・ Use the following drawing simply as a reference
because the component can be inserted in either of
Bottle clearance adjustment should refer to Page 59. two orientations.
・ Insert the component securely into the distribution
3.3.4. Assembling the Hydraulic Head shaft joint until it is sunk below the end surface of
the distribution shaft sleeve.
Direction of fixed flange (camshaft keyway)

(As viewed from driving side)
Upper side
Install the accumulator. Camshaft keyway
Attaching accumulator
Anti-operating side
Be sure to install the piston in the correct
Operating side
direction.
Make sure that the piston can slide smoothly.
Flange cutout Lower side
Direction of distribution shaft longitudinal

groove
(As viewed from upper side
Distribution shaft longitudinal groove,

cut off surface
Governor side
Install the spring, (accumulator).
Anti-operating side
Operating side
Driving side
Install the plug with new seal washer, (accumulator).
35
Install the plug, (distribution shaft). Install the new packing, (delivery valve seat).
Fasten the plug, (distribution shaft). Install the delivery valve CMP.

Holder(delivery
Spring(delivery
Valve(delivery
Returnvalve （φ２）
Spring seat(return valve
Returnspring
Seat(delivery
Packing(delivery
Install the plug with new copper packing, (barrel).
Install the spring, (delivery).
Fasten the plug, (barrel).
Install the holder, (delivery).
36
Install the new packing, (timer). Fasten the holder, (timer).
Install the thermo-element with new O-ring.
Before installing the thermo-element, press

Install the holder with new O-ring, (timer).
down the piston with the timer holder being
C.W.plug installed to the head, (T=40-45N.m), and
Thermo-element check that the piston returns up through the
Seal washer spring load.
O-ring P14 The standard thermo-element release
temperature shall be 5-8 degC(41-46.4 degF).
Piston(thermo-e
lement)
(Thermo-element released at 15-18 degC (59-
64.4 degF) is available as option.
O-ring(JASO 1020)
Take care not to mistake the specifications:
Spring
Timer holder see diagram below.)
O-ring(JASO 1020)
O-ring P15
Timer piston
(Hardness 90 Identification groove
Damper ring
O-ring JASO 1011
Timer packing
* JASO : Japanese Automobile Standard
Thermo-element for 15～18 degC

Do not forget to assemble the timer packing,
(at holder bottom). Do not pull out the piston housed in the
Do not forget to assemble the damper ring. thermo-element manually. If it is extracted
Take care not to use O-rings with manually, discard it since the re-use of the
inappropriate sizes. piston is no longer possible.
Check that the timer piston moves smoothly in Do not tighten the thermo-element with
the timer holder hole (clearance: 4-8 micron m). excessive tightening torque, (T=30-35N.m).
Do not tighten t he cooling water plug with
excessive tightening torque, (T=22-25N.m).
Take care not to catch impurities in the seal
washer.
37
F.O. valbe
return pipe
F.O. outlet
Cooling water
Fasten the thermo-element. F.O. inlet
Install the joint, (C.W), and he plug, (C.W.) Install the joint, (FO inlet).
Assemble the seal washers, taking care not the washer

stride over steps. (One seal washer is required for
respective upper and lower portions.)
Installation position of Joints
Direction of pipe depends on respective specifications.
Fasten the plug, (C.W.)
Install the joint, (overflow) and the joint, (overflow).
38
3.4. Re-assembling the Governor
Install the shim to the shaft, (control lever).
Governor Body Parts
Install the regulator lever.
Governor Lever CMP End Float Adjust Shim
Pierce the spring, (control lever) through the lock nut, (control
lever) and fasten it to the thread of the shaft, (control lever).
Pierce the governor lever CMP and shim through the governor
lever shaft and assemble.
Measure the side clearance of the tension lever with

thickness gauge.
Standard: 0.3 to 0.6 mm (adjusting with shim)
Fasten the nut, (control lever).
Measure the side clearance with thickness gauge.

Fit the governor lever shaft with the removal stop, (governor
Standard: 0.3 to 0.6 mm (adjusting with shim)
lever shaft) and fasten the removal stop bolt.
39
3.5. Combining Governor and
Pump Bodies
Turn the link lifter plate counterclockwise. and install the

governor body to the pump bodies
Install the new packing.
Do not confuse front with rear surface. Assemble it,

while aligning bolt holes with those on the body.
Rack
Link
Link lifter
a) During assembly b) During operation
Attaching governor CMP

・ Be careful not to bend or damage the governor case packing (GRC). (It is not reusable. If it
sticks to the packing surface, remove it without giving damage to the surface of the packing.)
・ Direct the link lifter as shown in Fig. a) shown below, where the semicircular section is
positioned at the lower side, and bring governor CMP to the pump body until the link comes
into contact with the rack.
At this time, be careful that the link does not hit the pump body. (If the link hit the pump body
severely, check that the link is not bent or deformed.)
・ Direct the link lifter as shown in Fig. b) shown below, where the semicircular section is
positioned at the upper side, and engage the rack and the link with each other.
At this time, if it is difficult to engage the rack and the link with each other, assemble them while
pushing the governor lever to the decreasing side (when mechanical governor is used).
・ After putting the link lifter in the state shown in Fig. b), pull the governor CMP a little to check
that the link and rack are engaged with each other. (Be sure not to pull governor CMP
excessively).
(If the barrel plug is not installed yet, the following method can be used to check the plunger
rotation.
Mechanical governor: Push the governor lever to the decreasing side through the solenoid
attaching hole.
New ECO governor: Push the rack to the increasing side through the rack inspection port.)
・ Be sure to tighten the link lifter securing bolt. (T = 8 to 10 N - m)
40
Install the governor case cover to the case.
Insert the governor link into the link hole of the pump body.
This completes reassembly of the pump.

Fit the link lifter to the installation hole and fasten the bolt.
Pull the governor assembly slightly to check that the link is

engaging securely.
Combine Governor and Pump Bodies
Install the new O-ring to the stop solenoid and assemble them
to the governor case.
nstall a new packing, (governor case cover) to the case.
41
4. Adjustment of Fuel Injection Pump and Governor
Adjust the fuel injection pump after you have completed reassembly. The pump itself must be readjusted with a special
pump tester when you have replaced major parts such as the plunger assembly, roller guide assembly, fuel camshaft, etc.
Procure a pump tester like the one illustrated below.
4.1. Preparations
Prepare for adjustment of the fuel injection pump as follows:
(1) Adjusting nozzle assembly and inspection of injection starting pressure.
Mpa (kgf/cm2)
Adjusting nozzle type YDN-12SD12
Injection starting pressure 16.2 – 17.2(165 – 175)
(2) Adjusting injection pipe.

mm
Inner dia./outer dia. × length Ф2.0/Ф6.0 × 600
Minimum bending radius 25
(3) Mount the fuel injection pump on the pump tester platform.
42
(4) Remove the plug in the oil fill hole on the top of the governor case, and fill the pump with about 200cc of pump oil or engine
oil.
(5) Complete fuel oil piping and operate the pump tester to purge the line of air.
(6) Set the pressure of oil fed from pump tester to injection pump at 19.6-29.4kPa(0.2-0.3kgf/cm2 ) ,temp. at 40±2 degC(104±
3.6 degF)
43
4.2. Bottom clearance adjustment(Fuel Injection Timing)
1. The Fuel Injection Timing of MP-pump is made by means of
adjusting the bottom clearance of the Cam ie. adjustment of the
Bottom clearance gauge
Pre-stroke of the plunger , as follows.
2. The adjustment of the clearance shall be made at cam-top
position in order to get the reliable and easier method.
Therefore herein after we will mention that “The adjustment of
the bottoms clearance (of the Cam)”.
3. First of all , put the JIG of the bottom clearance measurement
on the standard gauge(W/”A”- measurement). Then set the
O-point of the dial gauge.
4. Next adjust the clearance by shims into the standard after
Dial gauge
measuring the bottom clearance A* with JIG (Dial gauge)(Refer
to the attached sheet)*Measurement between upper surface of
the Barrel and upper surface of the plunger at Cam bottom
A
position
Bottom clearance gaug

Barrel
A
Plunger
Shim
44
4.2.1. The bottom clearance adjusting value and the Cam classification
Cam shaft Plunger bottom Standard shim

Clearance (dimension: A) thickness (mm)
Cam speed 3 cylinder 4 cylinder
(mm)
1.1 m/s 158552-51020 158553-51020 25.5±0.05 1.3
MP2 1.3 m/s 158552-51030 158553-51030 25.9±0.05 0.9
1.7 m/s 158552-51040 158553-51040 26.3±0.05 0.8
1.8 m/s 123907-51040
MP4 2.1 m/s 129906-51040 25.55±0.05 1.05
2.3m/s 129907-51040
Shape of cam shaft end
Cam Speed
MP2 MP4
1.1m/s 2.3m/s
1.3m/s 2.1m/s
1.7m/s 1.8m/s
45
4.3. Adjustment of Governor
4.3.1. Adjustment of No Load Max. Engine Speed
Set the engine speed at the no load max. speed. Pull the regulator
lever and adjust the max. speed limit bolt to obtain the specified
injection amount. Fasten the nut after completing the adjustment.
4.3.2. Adjustment of Fuel Limit Bolt

① The MP2 pump has the lift adjustment FO limiter as a standard
equipment. Screw in the lift adjustment screw fully, then return
the screw by 0.5 turns and fasten the screw with the lock nut. (In
the specifications where no torque control spring is used, keep the
lift adjustment screw completely free.)
② Set the pump speed at the rated speed and move the regulator
lever until it contacts the maximum speed limit bolt.
③ Check that the amount being injected exceeds the rated injection
amount, screw in the fuel limit bolt and adjust the injection amount.
4.3.3. Adjustment of Torque-Rise Point
The Torque-Rise adjustment comprises the FO limiter (torque spring) and the torque control spring.
① Set the pump speed at the Torque-Rise speed and leave the
regulator lever at the position in 2 above.
② When both of the FO limiter and torque control spring are used:
Screw in the torque control assembly, adjust to obtain the
specified injection amount and fasten the lock nut.
Adjustable lift torque spring
③ Specifications of Only the FO Limiter
Screw in lift limit bolt of the FO limiter, adjust to obtain the
specified injection amount and fasten the lock nut.
46
4.3.4. Adjustment of Reverse Angleich
In the case of the governor with reverse angleich mechanism, use the reverse angleich spring
in the assembled state.
Adjustment of Reverse Angleich

Make adjustment of reverse angleich after completing the following processes:
● Adjustment of fuel volume limiter bolt
● Adjustment of no-load max, and min. revolutions limiter bolt
① Shift the control lever to the full load position, and maintain the fuel injection pump revolution to the
specified reverse angleich control revolution number (N6).
② In this condition, remove the governor rear cover, and screw the reverse angleich assembly into
the threaded portion of the tension lever until it hits the reverse angleich lever. If screwing it in
additionally, the reverse angleich lever will shift in the direction of fuel reduction. Screw and set it to
the position of the specified injection quantity (R6).
③ Tighten the lock nut with specified tightening torque, and attach the governor rear cover.
N-m (kgf-m)
Lock Nut Tightening Torque 24.5-29.4(2.5-3.0)
④ Again, increase the revolution of the fuel injection pump to the rated revolution speed (N1), check
that the control rack will change the position of the reverse angleich stroke smoothly, and confirm
that the rack position (R1) and injection volume are within the specified limits.
47
4.3.5. Adjustment of Staring Injection Amount
① Set the engine speed at the starting injection amount adjust
speed and leave the regulator lever at the position in 2
above.
② Screw in the starting injection amount adjust bolt and adjust
it to obtain the specified injection amount.
③ Set the pump speed at 50 min-1 and check that the amount
exceeding the specifications is being injected.
4.3.6. Checking the Injection Stop

Leave the regulator lever at the position as before.
① Checking the Injection Stop: Set the pump speed at the
speed 50min-1 higher than the no load max. speed, and
check that the injection amount reduces to zero.
② Checking the Stopping: Set the pump speed at the rated
speed, turn off the stop solenoid and check that the
injection amount reduces to zero.
48
5. Fuel injection Nozzle
When fuel 0il pumped by the fuel injection pump reaches the injection nozzle，it pushes up the nozzle valve（held down by
spring），and is injected into the combustion chamber at high pressure．
The fuel is atomized by the nozzle to mix uniformly with the air in the combustion chamber. How well the fuel is mixed with
high temperature air directly affects combustion efficiency，engine Performance and fuel economy．
Accordingly, the fuel injection nozzles must be kept in top condition to maintain performance and operating efficiency.
5.1. Functioning of fuel injection nozzle

Fuel from the fuel injection pump passes through the oil port in the nozzle holder and enters the nozzle body reservoir.
When oil reaches the specified pressure，it pushes up the nozzle valve（held by the nozzle spring），and is injected
through the small hole on the tip of the nozzle body．
The nozzle valve is automatically pushed down by the nozzle spring and closed after fuel is injected.
Oil that leaks from between the nozzle valve and nozzle body goes from the hole on top of the nozzle spring through the oil
leakage fitting and back into the fuel tank.
Adjustment of injection starting pressure is effected with the adjusting shims.
5.2. Type/construction of fuel injection nozzle

There are two types of fuel injection nozzles. Direct injection engines are equipped with the hole type, and indirect injection
engines with the pintle type.
The YPD-MP fuel injection pump is designed for use with both direct and indirect injection engines. The hole type/pintle
type of fuel injection nozzle are used according to the engine type.
Nozzle opening MPa +1.0 (+10)

Hole type fuel injection nozzle 21.6 (220)
pressure (kgf/cm2) 0 (0)
Nozzle angle deg. 162 159
No. of nozzles×dia. mm 5×0.16 5×0.17
Identification No.
162P165VAE1 159P175VAD1
(Nozzle type)
F.O. return pipe joint
Nozzle holder
Nozzle spring
Nozzle spring seat
49
Nozzle body identification number
The type of nozzle can be determined from the number
inscribed on the outside of the nozzle body.
1）Hole type fuel injection nozzles
5.3. Fuel injection nozzle disassembly

Note:
1. Disassemble fuel injection nozzle in a clean area as for fuel injection pump.
2. When disassembling more than one fuel injection nozzle, keep the parts for each injection nozzle separate for each
cylinder (i.e. the nozzle for cylinder 1 must be remounted in cylinder 1).
(1) When removing the injection nozzle from the cylinder head, remove the high pressure fuel pipe, fuel leakage pipe, etc.,
the injection nozzle retainer nut，and then the fuel injection nozzle.
(2) Put the nozzle in a vise

NOTE: Use the special nozzle holder for the hole type injection nozzle so that the high pressure mounting threads are
not damaged.
50
（3）Remove the nozzle nut
NOTE: Use a special box spanner for the hole type (the thickness of the two nozzle nuts is 15mm(0.5906in.)).
(4) Remove the inner parts
NOTE: Be careful not to loosen the spring seat, adjusting shims or other small parts.
5.4. Fuel injection nozzle inspection

5.4.1. Washing
（1）Make sure to use new diesel oil to wash the fuel injection nozzle parts.
（2）Wash the nozzle in clean diesel 0il with the nozzle cleaning kit.
(3) Clean off the carbon on the outside of the nozzle body with a brass brush.
(4) Clean the nozzle seat with cleaning spray.
(5)Clean off the carbon on the tip of nozzle with a piece of wood.
51
5.4.2. Nozzle inspection
（1）Inspect for scratches/wear
lnspect oil seals for abnormal scratches or wear and replace nozzle if the nozzle sliding surface or seat are scratched
or abnormally worn.
(2）Check nozzIe sliding
Wash the nozzle and nozzle body in clean diesel oil，and make sure that when the nozzle is pulled out about half
way from the body，it slides down by itself when released.
Rotate the nozzle a little；replace nozzle/nozzle body as a set if there are some places where it does not slide smoothly.
（3) Inspecting stop plate（inter-piece）

Check for scratches/wear in seals on both ends, check for abnormal wear on the surface where it comes in contact with the
nozzle；replace if stop plate is excessively worn.
（4）lnspecting nozzle spring

Replace the nozzle spring if it is extremely bent，or surface is scratched or rusted．
（5）Nozzle holder
Check oil seal surface for scratches/wear；replace if wear is excessive.
52
5.5. Fuel injection nozzle reassembly
The fuel injection nozzle is reassembled in the opposite order to disassembly.
(1) Insert the adjusting shims, nozzle spring and nozzle spring seat in the nozzIe holder，mount the stop plate with the pin
i nsert the nozzle body/nozzle set and tighten the nut.
(2) Use the special holder when tightening the nut for the hole type nozzle as in disassembly.
Nozzle nut tightening torque

N-m(kgf-m)
Hole type nozzle 39 – 44 ( 4 – 5 )
5.6. Adjusting fuel injection nozzle

5.6.1. Adjusting opening pressure
Mount the fuel injection nozzle on the nozzle tester and use the handle to measure injection starting pressure. If it is
not at specified pressure, use the adjusting shims to increase/decrease pressure（both hole and pintle types).
Ajusting by 0.1 mm results in a change in the injection starting pressure of about 2 Mpa ( 20 kgf / cm2 )
Injection starting pressure

MPa(kgf/cm2)
19.6 - 20.6 ( 200 – 210 )
Injection starting pressure
21.6 – 22.6 ( 220 – 230 )
Remark ) Injection starting pressure changes on enjine specifications.
53
5.6.2. Injection test
After adjusting the nozzIe to the specified starting pressure, check the fuel spray condition and seat oil tightness.
(1) Check seat oil tightness
After two or three injections, gradually increase the pressure up to1.96MPa (20kg/cm2）before reading the starting pressure
maintain the pressure for 5seconds, and make sure that no oil is dripping from the tip of the nozzle.
Test the injection with a nozzle tester；retighten and test again if there is excessive oil leakage from the overflow coupling.
Replace the nozzle as set if oil leakage is still excessive.
（2）injection spray condition
Operate the nozzle tester lever once to twice a second and check for abnormal injection.
5.6.2.1. Hole type nozzles

Replace hole type nozzles that do not satisfy the following conditions：
● Proper spray ang1e（θ）
● Correct injection angle （α）
● Complete atomization of fuel
● Prompt starting /stopping of injection
54
6. Troubleshooting
6.1. Troubleshooting of fuel injection pump
Complete repair means not only replacing defective parts, but finding and eliminating the cause of the trouble as
well. The cause of the trouble may not necessarily be in the pump itself, but may be in the engine or the fuel
system. If the pump is removed prematurely, the true cause of the trouble may never be known. Before removing
the pump from the engine, at least go through the basic check points given here.
Basic checkpoints
Check for breaks or oil leaks throughout the fuel system, from the fuel tank to the nozzle.
Check the injection timings for all cylinders. Are they correctly adjusted? Are they too fast or too slow?
Check the nozzle spray.
Check the fuel delivery. Is it in good condition? Loosen the fuel pipe connection at the injection pump
inlet and test operate the fuel feed pump.
6.2. Major faults and troubleshooting

Fault Cause Remedy
1. Engine Fuel not delivered (1) No fuel in the fuel tank. Resupply
won't start. to injection pump. (2) Fuel tank cock is closed. Open
(3) Fuel pipe system is clogged. Clean
(4) Fuel filter element is clogged. Disassemble and clean, or
replace element
(5) Air is sucked into the fuel due to defective Repair
connections in the piping from the fuel tank to the
fuel pump.
(6) Fuel feed pump is damaged. Replace
(7) Fuel freeze. Replace with a fuel for cold
weather.
Fuel delivered to (1) Defective connection of control lever and accel. rod Repair or adjust
injection pump. of injection pump.
(2) Plunger is worn out or stuck. Repair or replace
(3) Delivery valve is stuck. Repair or replace
(4) Control rack doesn't move. Repair or replace
(5) Injection pump coupling is damaged, or the key is Replace
broken.
(6) Air sucking. Bleed air.
(7) Plunger/Distribution shaft is seized. Replace pump.
(8) Tappet is seized. Replace pump.
(9) Stop solenoid is damaged. Replace
(10) Cold start device is damaged. Replace
(11) Low cranking speed. Replace battery.
(12) Governor is damaged. Replace
(13) Barrel crack Replace pump.
(14) Transmission shaft is seized. Gear slip. Replace
55
Nozzle doesn't (1) Nozzle valve doesn't open or close normally. Repair or replace
work. (2) Nozzle seat is defective. Repair or replace
(3) Case nut is loose. Inspect and tighten
(4) Injection nozzle starting pressure is too low. Adjust
(5) Nozzle spring is broken. Replace
(6) Fuel oil filter is clogged. Repair or replace
(7) Excessive oil leaks from the nozzle sliding area. Replace the nozzle assembly
(8) Deformation due to excessive tightening of nozzle Replace or adjust.
retaining bolt.
(9) Strainer is clogged. Replace or clean
Injection timing is (1) Injection timing is retarded due to failure of the Adjust
defective. coupling.
(2) Camshaft is excessively worn. Replace camshaft
(3) Roller tappet incorrectly adjusted or excessively Adjust or replace
worn.
(4) Plunger is excessively worn. Replace plunger assembly
(5) Bad installation of injection pump. Adjust.
(6) Air sucking. Bleed air.
(7) Delivery valve is defective. Replace.
2. Engine starts, (1) Fuel pipe is cogged. Clean
but immediately stops. (2) Fuel filter is clogged. Disassemble and clean, or
replace the element.
(3) Improper air-tightness of the fuel pipe connection, Replace packing; repair pipe
or pipe is broken and air is being sucked in.
(4) Insufficient fuel delivery from the feed pump. Repair or replace.
(5) Trochoid pump is defective. Replace.
(6) Air sucking. Bleed air or hose check.
(7) Electromagnetic feed pump is clogged. Replace.
(8) Out of fuel. Fill the fuel.
(9) Stop solenoid is defective. Replace.
(10) Accumulator is abnormal. Replace.
3.Engine's Defective (1) Knocking sounds caused by improper (too fast) Inspect and adjust
output is injection injection timing.
insufficient. timing, and other (2) Engine overheats or emits large amount of smoke Inspect and adjust
failures. due to improper (too slow) injection timing.
(3) Insufficient fuel delivery from feed pump. Repair or replace
(4) Torochoid pump is defective. Replace.
(5) Type of fuel is incorrect. Check and refill proper fuel.
(6) Fuel tempererture is high. Cool.
Nozzle (1) Case nut loose. Inspect and retighten
movements (2) Defective injection nozzle performance. Repair or replace nozzle
is defective (3) Nozzle spring is broken. Replace
(4) Excessive oil leaks from nozzle. Replace nozzle assembly
Injection pump is (1) Max. delivery limit bolt is screwed in too far. Adjust
defective. (2) Plunger is worn. Replace
(3) Injection amount is not uniform. Adjust
(4) Injection timings are not even. Adjust
(5) The 1st and 2nd levers of the governor and the control rack Repair
of the injection pump are improperly lined up.
(6) Delivery holderr is loose Inspect and retighten
(7) Delivery packing is defective. Replace packing
(8) Delivery valve seat is defective. Repair or replace
(9) Delivery spring is broken. Replace
(10) Carbon deposit is adhered. Clean
(11) Spray pattern is abnormal. Replace
(12) Nozzle crack. Replace
(13) Plunger barrel crack. Replace fuel injection pump.
56
4. Idling is rough. (1) Movement of central rack is defective.
1) Stiff plunger movement or sticking. Repair or replace
2) Rack and pinion fitting is defective. Repair
3) Movement of governor is improper. Repair
4) Delivery holder is too tight. Inspect and adjust
(2) Uneven injection volume. Adjust
(3) Injection timing adjustment failure. Adjust
(4) Plunger is worn and fuel injection adjustment is Replace
difficult.
(5) Governor spring is too weak. Replace
(6) Feed pump can't feed oil at low speeds. Repair or replace
(7) Fuel supply is insufficient at low speeds due to Disassemble and clean, or
clogging of fuel filter. replace element
(8) Weight abnormality. Replace
(9) Shifter is worn. Replace governor.
(10) Air sucking. Check piping.
(11) Torochid pump is defective. Replace
(12) Governor is worn. Replace or adjust.
5. Engine runs at high speeds, (1) The wire or rod of the accel is caught. Inspect and repair
but cuts out at low Speeds. (2) Control rack is caught and can't be moved. Inspect and repair
(3) Low idling stopper bolt is abnormal. Replace or adjust.

6. Engine doesn't reach max, (1) Governor spring is broken or excessively worn. Replace
rpm. (2) Injection performance of nozzle is poor. Repair or replace
(3) Trochiod pump is defective. Replace
(4) Accumulator is abnormal. Replace
(5) Filter and pipe are clogged. Check piping.
(6) Governor is abnormal. Replace
(1) Injection timing is too fast or too slow. Adjust
(2) Injection from nozzle is improper fuel drips after each Adjust
infection.
7. Loud knocking.
(3) Injection nozzle starting pressure is too high. Adjust
(4) Uneven injection. Adjust
(5) Engine overheats, or insufficient compression. Repair
8.Engine When exhaust (1) Injection timing is too fast. Adjust
exhausts too smoke is black: (2) Air volume intake is insufficient. Inspect and repair
much smoke. (3) The amount of injection is uneven. Adjust
(4) Injection from nozzle is improper. Repair or replace
When exhaust (1) Injection timing is too slow. Adjust
smoke is white: (2) Water is mixed in fuel. Inspect fuel system, and
clean
(3) Shortage of lube oil m the engine. Repair
(4) Engine is over-cooled. Inspect
57
7. Tightening torques for main bolts and nuts
7.1. Pump part
Tightening torque ( N-m ） Tightening torque ( N-m ）
No. Name of parts No. Name of parts
MP4 MP2 MP4 MP2
25 - 29 4-5
2 Pipe joint bolt, fuel inlet 18 Tappet guide
M12×1.25 M6×1（hexagon socket head）
25 - 29 50 - 55 30 - 35
4 Overflow joint, fuel outlet 19 Plug, barrel
M12×1.25 M18×1 M14×1
8 - 10 40 - 45
5 Bearing retaining screw 21 Delivery holder
M6×1（hexagon socket head） M14×1.25
40 - 45 28 - 32 18 - 22
9 Timer holder 22 Head bolt M10×1.5 M8×1.25
M22×1 （hexagon socket （hexagon socket
head） head）
30 - 35 15 - 20
10 Thermo element 23 Plug, distribution shaft
M16×1 M22×1
22 - 25 25 - 29
11 Plug, cooling water 24 plug, strainer
M14×1 M12×1.25
50 - 55 8 - 10
12 Accumulator 25 Bolt, rink lifter
M20×1 M6×1
8 - 10 113 - 123 78 - 88
14 Bolt, trochoid pump 31 Nut, FIC fixing flange
M6×1 M18×1.5 M14×1.5
8 - 10 79 - 84
15 Bolt, driving shaft 32 End nut
M6×1（hexagon socket head） M12×1.25
3-4 4-5
17 Retaining screw, rack guide 33 plug, rack
M4×0.7（hexagon socket head） M6×1
58
7.2. Mechanical governor part
Tightening torque ( N-m ） Tightening torque ( N-m ）

No. Name of parts No. Name of parts
MP4 MP2 MP4 MP2
6-8 8 - 10
1 Fixing bolt, tension lever hook 10 Bolt, solenoid
M6×1 M6×1
5-7 8 - 10
2 Fixing bolt, patch － 11 Bolt, governor lever shaft
M5×0.8 M6×1
25 - 29 8 - 10
3 Angleich complete 13 Bolt, governor assy
M14×1 M6×1
19.6 - 21.6 6-8 8 - 10
4 Nut, fuel limiter 14 Starting fuel limiter
M12×1.25 M5×0.8 M6×1
8 - 10 20 - 22
7 Setting bolt, min. idling speed 15 Cap nut
M6×1 M12×1.25
19.6 - 21.6 8 - 10
8 Nut, speed lever 16 Bolt, back cover
M8×1.25 M6×1
8 - 10
9 Setting nut, max. idling speed
M6×1
59
8. Tools
Name of tool Shape and size application
Nozzle plate
158090-51700
Bottom clearance gauge
158090-51800 : MP2
158090-51810 : MP4 Bottom clearance gauge
Plunger SP seat extractor
158090-51900
60
Literature No. M9961-03E070
Revision history list Page No 1
Document name SERVICE MANUAL FOR FUEL INJECTION EQUIPMENT
Product name YDP-MP2 / YDP-MP4
Revision date Reason for Revision Revision item
Revision No. Revised by
(A.D.) revision outline (page)

TB175 #Cl3e003

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TB175 #Cl3e003

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TB175 #Cl3e003

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

0-1 TB175

MACHINE FRONT AND REAR, LEFT AND RIGHT

MACHINE SERIAL NUMBER

6. Bleed the air from the cylinders.

Indicates the mass of a part or device.

Safety Precautions ................................................................................................................................................. 3

SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

Observe all safety rules

• Operation, inspection and maintenance of this ma-

• Wear a hard hat, safety shoes, safety glasses, filter

Use anti-explosive electrical fixtures and lights when

Attach a “DO NOT OPERATE” tag Do not allow unauthorized personnel in

Use the correct tools

Prepare the work area

• Select a firm, level work area. Make sure there is

Replace important safety parts

• Replace fuel hoses periodically. Fuel hoses be-

• Clean the machine before performing maintenance.

Stay clear of moving parts

Secure the engine hood or cover when

Be sure to secure the engine hood or cover when

• Stay clear of all rotating and moving parts. Wrap-

Fuel, oil or hydraulic fluid leaks can cause a fire.

Be careful with hot and pressurized

Use caution when fueling

Stop the engine and allow the machine to cool down

Have a Takeuchi service agent repair

Ask a Takeuchi service agent to repair any welding

• Keep all safety signs clean and legible.

4. Clean all disassembled parts and new parts, then

5. Be sure to replace all seals and cotter pins, etc.,

7. When installing bearings, bushings and oil seals,

LEAVE 1 OR 2 THREAD MARGIN

10. When fitting the snap rings, the bigger, rounder

2. Use 2 spanners, each on an opposite side, to DIRT

2. Be careful not to twist O-rings. If an O-ring is

3. During insertion, be careful not to damage the

4. Handling of Floating Seals

5. Apply grease to the lip of the oil seal.

Bite Type Pipe Fitting for Steel Pipe

Pipe Outer Diameter Torque

Joints for Piping (O-ring Seal Type)

1 107.9 ±9.8 79.5 ±7.2

Nominal Thread Torque

3. Points where thread-locking compound is used

Names of Components .......................................................................................................................................... 3

In regard to Standard Values and Allowable Values

1. Cab 12. Crawler Belt 23. Arm

Load hooking system

Load safety device

Over Rear Over Side

Equipped with Long Arm Unit: kg (lbs.)

Over Rear Over Side

Over Rear Over Side

Equipped with Telescopic Arm (Fully Retracted) Unit: kg (lbs.)

Over Rear Over Side

Over Rear Over Side

Machine Type Mono-Boom 2-Piece Boom